advertisement
MSC1000G
Management Switch Card
User’s Guide
Version 3.71
2/2007
Edition 1
www.zyxel.com
About This User's Guide
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for administrators who want to configure the IES-5000 using the web configurator or command line interface. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology.
Related Documentation
• IES-5000 Series User’s Guide
Refer to the IES-5000 Series User’s Guide for directions on installation, connections, maintenance, hardware trouble shooting and safety warnings.
• ALC1248G, ALC1272G, SLC1248G and VLC1224G Line Card User’s Guides
These user’s guides introduce the DSL line cards and give detailed information about the line card features and hardware.
• ZyXEL Web Site
Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications.
User Guide Feedback
Help us help you. Send all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address, or use e-mail instead. Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team,
ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II,
Science-Based Industrial Park,
Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan.
E-mail: [email protected]
MSC1000G User’s Guide
3
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
4
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
1
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
"
Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The MSC1000G Management Switch Card may be referred to as the “MSC1000G”, the
“MSC”, the “management switch card”, the “device”, the “switch” or the “system” in this
User’s Guide.
• "IES-5000" refers to the IES-5000 series system including the main and splitter chassis and their cards. The IES-5000 may be referred to as the “IES”.
• The ALC1248G-51 for ADSL over POTS (Annex A) Line Card may be referred to as the
“ALC1248G”, the “ALC” or the “line card” in this User’s Guide.
• The ALC1248G-53 for ADSL over ISDN (Annex B) Line Card may be referred to as the
“ALC1248G”, the “ALC” or the “line card” in this User’s Guide.
• The ALC1272G ADSL2/2+ Line Card may be referred to as the “ALC1272G”, the
“ALC” or the “line card” in this User’s Guide.
• The SLC1248G SHDSL Line Card may be referred to as the “SLC1248G”, the “SLC” or the “line card” in this User’s Guide.
• The VLC1224G VDSL Line Card may be referred to as the “VLC1224G”, the “VLC” or the “line card” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key.
“Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example,
Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The IES-5000 icon is not an exact representation of your device.
IES-5000 Computer Notebook computer
Server
Router
Telephone Switch
MSC1000G User’s Guide
5
6
Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings
1
For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions.
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED
BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
• Warning! To avoid risk of electric shock, remove only one card at a time and do not place fingers or objects inside the chassis. Cover empty slots with slot covers.
• Refer also to the IES-5000 Series User’s Guide and follow all safety warnings for installation, connections, maintenance and hardware trouble shooting.
This product is recyclable. Dispose of it properly.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
MSC1000G User’s Guide
7
Safety Warnings
8
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
MSC1000G User’s Guide
9
Contents Overview
10
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Part II: Web Configurator ...................................................................... 63
MSC1000G User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
5.1.2 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub-option Formats ........................... 81
12
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
14
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
16
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
17
Table of Contents
18
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
19
Table of Contents
20
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
21
Table of Contents
22
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
23
Table of Contents
24
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
25
Table of Contents
26
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
27
Table of Contents
28
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
MSC1000G User’s Guide
29
Table of Contents
Part IV: Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 591
30
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Part V: Appendices and Index ............................................................ 601
MSC1000G User’s Guide
31
Table of Contents
32
MSC1000G User’s Guide
List of Figures
List of Figures
MSC1000G User’s Guide
33
List of Figures
34
MSC1000G User’s Guide
List of Figures
MSC1000G User’s Guide
35
List of Figures
36
MSC1000G User’s Guide
List of Figures
MSC1000G User’s Guide
37
List of Figures
38
MSC1000G User’s Guide
List of Tables
List of Tables
MSC1000G User’s Guide
39
List of Tables
40
MSC1000G User’s Guide
List of Tables
MSC1000G User’s Guide
41
List of Tables
42
MSC1000G User’s Guide
List of Tables
MSC1000G User’s Guide
43
List of Tables
44
MSC1000G User’s Guide
P
ART
I
Introduction
Getting to Know Your MSC1000G (47)
45
46
C
H A P T E R
1
Getting to Know Your
MSC1000G
This chapter introduces the main applications of the MSC1000G. It also introduces the ways you can manage the MSC1000G.
1.1 Introduction
The IES-5000 series is perfect for ISPs or large building applications seeking to provide high bandwidth broadband services to subscribers while minimizing costs.
The MSC1000G (Management Switch Card Gigabit) centralizes the management of all of the
Integrated Ethernet Switch’s DSL line cards. You can configure and maintain the DSL line cards through the management switch card; thus eliminating the need to connect to each line card individually. It also provides Gigabit ports and slots for connecting to other Ethernet switches. See
for a complete list of features.
1.1.1 Applications
• The IES-5000 can provide Internet access and multimedia services for Multiple Tenant
Units (MTU).The following diagram depicts a typical application of the IES-5000 with
DSL modems, in a large residential building, that leverages existing phone line wiring to provide Internet access to all tenants. ADSL service can coexist with voice service on the same line.
47
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
Figure 1 MTU Application
• The IES-5000 provides DSL service over telephone wires to subscribers in a Central
Office (CO) application. The following figure shows the IES-5000 set up in a telephone company’s central office.
48
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 2 Central Office Application
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
• Other applications include telemedicine, surveillance systems, remote servers systems, cellular base stations and high-quality videoconferencing.
1.2 Ways to Manage the MSC1000G
Use any of the following methods to manage the MSC1000G.
• Web Configurator. This is GUI-based management using a (supported) web browser. See
• Command Line Interface. Use line commands through Telnet or the console port to
manage the MSC1000G. See Chapter 17 on page 309 .
• Editable plain text based configuration file
• FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore ( Chapter 33 on page 585 ).
• SNMP. The device can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See
and
• EMS (Element Management System) support. The device can be remotely managed using a Network Management System (NMS) such as Castlerock.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the MSC1000G
Do the following things regularly to make the MSC1000G more secure and to manage the
MSC1000G more effectively.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
49
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the MSC1000G to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the MSC1000G. You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.4 Features
This section introduces key IES-5000 series features.
Management Switch Card Redundancy
You can install two management switch cards in the IES-5000 to increase system reliability.
The two management switch cards must have the same types of uplink and subtending connections. One management switch card is active and the other acts as a standby.
The first management switch card installed is active. If both management switch cards are installed at the same time, the management switch card in the lower numbered slot is active.
Whenever the active management switch card cannot operate (whether it is removed, restarts or crashes), the standby management switch card becomes active.
Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The Gigabit Ethernet ports allow the switch to connect to another WAN switch or daisy-chain to other switches.
SFP Slots
Install SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) transceivers in these slots to connect to other
Ethernet switches at longer distances than the Ethernet port.
Console Port
Use the console port for local management.
DHCP Relay
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual computers to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the system as a DHCP relay agent to have another DHCP server provide TCP/IP configuration for the clients. In addition, you can set the system to forward client DHCP requests to specific
DHCP servers based on the VLAN ID. You can also specify up to two DHCP servers for each
VLAN to provide fail-over protection.
DHCP Relay Option82
The system supports DHCP relay agent82 (RFC 3046) that adds additional information to client DHCP requests that the MSC1000G relays to a DHCP server. It also supports adding the sub-option 2 (Remote ID) with additional information.
50
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
DHCP Snooping
DHCP snooping allows the system to identify packets with DHCP server assigned IP address(es) and block access of devices using unknown IP addresses on a subscriber port. You can also manually add static IP addresses to the DHCP snooping table.
Anti-IP Address Spoofing
With DHCP snooping, a line card records which IP address is assigned to each DHCP client
MAC address and the VLAN to which each IP and MAC address pair belongs. The line card drops packets from a device using an IP address that is assigned to a different MAC address.
Downstream Broadcast Blocking
The system can block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to specified VLANs on specified ports.
Cluster Management
Cluster management allows you to access the web configurators and CLIs of multiple
DSLAMs through one DSLAM, called the cluster manager. The IESs must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another.
Queuing
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion.
Two scheduling services are supported: Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) and Weighted Round
Robin (WRR) Queuing. This allows the MSC1000G to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
Trunking
The management switch card can trunk (aggregate port links into one logical link) Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces.
Isolation (per-VLAN)
Use isolation to block the DSL subscribers in a specific VLAN from sending traffic directly to each other. The DSL subscribers can only send and receive traffic to and from the ports that are set to uplink mode. The Integrated Ethernet Switch blocks access between the DSL ports.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
The MSC1000G supports the link aggregation IEEE 802.3ad protocol. Link aggregation
(trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
Your management switch card uses the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN (Virtual Local Area
Network), which allows your device to deliver tagged/untagged frames to and from its ports.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
51
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
Multicast VLAN
Multicast VLAN is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand (MoD)) using multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service provider network. Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network. This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber
VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
Transparent LAN Service (TLS)
Use TLS (also known as VLAN stacking) to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that enter the network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service provider can manage up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to
4,094 customer VLANs. This allows a service provider to provide different services based on specific VLANs, for many different customers.
PPPoA-to-PPPoE (PAE) PVC
This feature allows the system to translate PPPoA packets to PPPoE packets (and vice versa) to allow communication between CPE clients and an access concentrator (such as a BRAS) through the switch.
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Information
Similar to DHCP relay option82, you can set the system to insert line information into client
PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization (PADI) packets. This allows a PPPoE termination server to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client.
IEEE 802.1p Priority
The system uses IEEE 802.1p priority to assign priority levels to individual PVCs. The system can also handle multiple IEEE 802.1p priority queues on a single PVC.
Classifier and Policy
You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address, port number or protocol type, and so on.
IEEE 802.1x Port-based Authentication
Your MSC1000G supports the IEEE 802.1x standard for centralized user authentication through an optional network authentication (RADIUS) server.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)/ Rapid STP (RSTP)/ Multiple STP (MSTP)
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
MSTP is backward compatible with (R)STP and allows you to configure multiple spanning trees for one or more VLANs and still have a loop-free network topology.
52
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
MAC (Media Access Control) Filters
Use the MAC filter to filter incoming frames based on MAC (Media Access Control) address(es) or the OUI (Organizational Unit Identifier) that you specify. You may enable/ disable the MAC filter on specific ports. You may specify up to ten MAC addresses per port.
MAC (Media Access Control) Count Limit
You can limit the number of MAC addresses that may be dynamically learned on a port. You may enable/disable the MAC count limit on individual ports.
IGMP Count Limit
You can limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join. You may enable/ disable the IGMP count limit on individual ports.
Static Multicast
Use static multicast to allow incoming frames based on multicast MAC address(es) that you specify. This feature can be used in conjunction with IGMP snooping to allow multicast MAC address(es) that are not learned by IGMP snooping. You can use static multicast to pass routing protocols, such as RIP and OSPF.
IGMP Snooping
With IGMP snooping, group multicast traffic is only forwarded to ports that are members of that group. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your IES-5000.
IGMP Proxy
The IES-5000 can act as an IGMP proxy device to reduce multicast traffic. It issues IGMP host messages to a multicast router or server on behalf of the connected multicast hosts.
Broadcast Storm Control
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast packets the management switch card receives per second on its ports.
Secured Client
Configure up to four rules to allow up to four ranges of remote host IP addresses to access your management switch card.
Profile Server
The profile server feature allows you to manage profiles on multiple IES-5000s.
System Error Logging
The system error log will record error logs locally to the management switch card memory.
Configurable Alarms
The system allows you to customize the priority levels of individual alarms and the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port(s).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
53
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
Multiple Management Logins
The management switch card can support multiple concurrent management sessions.
Remote Firmware Upgrade
You can use FTP or SFTP to perform configuration backup/restore and firmware upgrade from a remote location.
Security
• Password protection for system management
• VLAN
• RADIUS client
• TACACS+ client
Alarm LED
An ALM (alarm) LED lights when the second power source is not connected, the IES-5000 is overheated, the voltage readings are outside the tolerance levels a fan fails or another alarm with a severity level of MAJOR or CRITICAL occurs.
Flow Control
The management switch card uses IEEE 802.3 flow control to manage the sending of traffic so the sending device does not transmit more than the receiving device can process. This helps prevent traffic from being dropped and having to be resent.
Quality of Service
The MSC1000G has eight priority queues so you can ensure mission-critical data gets delivered on time.
Multiple PVC and ATM QoS
The IES-5000 allows you to use different channels (also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or
PVCs) for different services or subscribers. Define channels on each DSL port for different services or levels of service and assign each channel a priority. ATM Quality of Service (QoS) allows you to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission. This helps eliminate congestion to allow the transmission of real time data (such as audio and video).
Priority-based PVCs
The system provides Priority-based PVCs (PPVCs) to give different priorities to PVCs that are members of the same VLAN. Use up to eight priority queues for the member PVCs. The system maps frames with certain IEEE 802.1p priorities to a PVC with a particular priority queue.
DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p Priority Mapping
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets with DiffServ Code Points
(DSCP) so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route. You can configure DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p mappings to allow the MSC1000G to prioritize all incoming traffic based on the DSCP value according to the mapping table.
54
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
System Monitoring
• System status (link status, rates, statistics counters)
• Temperatures, voltage reports and alarms.
Bandwidth Control
The MSC1000G supports rate limiting in 1 Mbps increments on the individual Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces allowing you to limit backbone bandwidth usage. You can also apply bandwidth control on multicast traffic.
IP-aware Bridging
The line cards can forward frames based on the destination IP address, instead of the destination MAC address, and replace the source MAC address with its own MAC address.
This provides better scalability and security for large-scale access networks, especially with
Ethernet.
Single End Loop Test (SELT)
This feature checks the distance to an ADSL subscriber’s location.
Dual End Loop Test (DELT)
This feature (also called a Loop Diagnostic Mode test or LDM test) provides details about the condition of an ADSL subscriber’s line.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
55
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your MSC1000G
56
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
2
Hardware Connections
This chapter introduces the MSC1000G’s hardware and how to connect it.
"
Refer to the Integrated Ethernet Switch’s User’s Guide for directions and safety warnings on installing the management switch card.
Use this chapter’s port and slot descriptions to connect the management switch card.
2.1 Front Panel
Figure 3 MSC1000G Front Panel
2.2 LEDs
Table 1 Management Switch Card LED Descriptions
LED
COLO
R
STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR Green On
ALM Red
Off
On
Off
The management switch card is installed and receiving power from the main chassis.
The management switch card is not receiving power from the main chassis.
An alarm has been detected on the MSC1000G, the Integrated Ethernet
Switch fan or the INPUT ALARM terminals. Examples of an alarm on the MSC1000G are when the MSC1000G’s voltage or temperature is outside of the normal range.
The MSC1000G has not detected an alarm on itself, the Integrated
Ethernet Switch fan or the INPUT ALARM terminals.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
57
58
Chapter 2 Hardware Connections
Table 1 Management Switch Card LED Descriptions
LED
COLO
R
STATUS DESCRIPTION
SYS
1000/
100
Green Blinking The system is initializing.
On The management switch card is on and functioning properly.
Off The management switch card is not receiving power, is not ready or has malfunctioned.
Yellow Blinking The port is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network.
On A 100 Mbps Ethernet link is up.
Off The Ethernet link is down.
Green Blinking The port is transmitting/receiving to/from a 1000 (1 Gbps) Mbps
Ethernet device.
On
Off
A 1000 Mbps (1 Gbps) Ethernet link is up.
The Ethernet link is down.
MGMT Yellow Blinking The port is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network.
On A 100 Mbps Ethernet link is up.
Off The Ethernet link is down.
Green Blinking The port is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10 Mbps Ethernet device.
On
Off
A 10 Mbps Ethernet link is up.
The Ethernet link is down.
The following LEDs apply to the SFP slots.
LNK
1~4
ACT
1~4
Green On
Off
A 1000 Mbps (1 Gbps) Ethernet link is up.
The Ethernet link is down.
Green Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving Ethernet traffic.
Off The system is not transmitting/receiving Ethernet traffic.
2.3 Ports and Connections
"
Install the MSC1000G before you make the hardware connections. Refer to the IES-5000 User’s Guide for installation instructions.
Table 2 Front Panel Descriptions
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ALARM
ACO
This DB15F connector is for connecting to alarm input and alarm output terminals on other pieces of equipment.
Press this Alarm Cut Off Button to cancel an alarm. This stops the sending of the alarm signal current. This is useful in stopping an alarm if you have the alarm output connector pins connected to a visible or audible alarm. The alarm entry remains in the system.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Hardware Connections
Table 2 Front Panel Descriptions (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
1000/100 The management switch card uses one or two uplink ports for connecting to an
Ethernet switch(es) that is part of a high-bandwidth backbone network.
This is an electrical Ethernet interface for use with the following copper Ethernet cables: a). 100Base-Tx 2 pair UTP Cat. 5, up to 100m b). 1000Base-T 4-pair UTP Cat. 5, up to 100m
Connector: RJ-45
For better performance and lower radiation noise, use shielded Ethernet cables.
SFP
MGMT
These are slots for SFP transceivers.
This is an RJ-45 Ethernet port for connecting to an Ethernet network for out-of-band management (a separate channel for management that is not part of the channels that are usually used for data transfer).
CONSOLE This DB-9 RS-232 port is for connecting to a computer for local management.
2.3.1 Alarm Connections
Figure 4 ALARM Connector Pin Layout
A closed circuit on the ALARM input pins indicates an alarm.
• Pins 1 and 9 are alarm input one.
• Pins 2 and 10 are alarm input two.
• Pins 3 and 11 are alarm input three.
The MSC1000G signals an alarm when it detects an alarm on the ALARM input pins, the
IES-5000 is overheated, the voltage readings are outside the tolerance levels a fan fails or another alarm occurs.
To signal a minor alarm, the MSC1000G opens the circuit for pins 4 and 12 and closes the circuit for pins 5 and 12.
To signal a major alarm, the MSC1000G opens the circuit for pins 13 and 6 and closes the circuit for pins 14 and 6.
To signal a critical alarm, the MSC1000G opens the circuit for pins 7 and 15 and closes the circuit for pins 8 and 15.
Examples of an alarm on the MSC1000G are when the MSC1000G’s voltage or temperature is outside of the normal range.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
59
60
Chapter 2 Hardware Connections
2.3.2 Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces
There are two Gigabit Ethernet SFP slots and two Gigabit Ethernet port/SFP slot pairs. The
SFP slots have priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a SFP transceiver and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time, the Gigabit port will be disabled.
The Ethernet ports are auto-negotiating and can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (100/1000 Mpbs) and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
The Ethernet ports are also auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X), they automatically work with a straight-through or crossover Ethernet cable.
2.3.2.1 Uplink and Subtending
SFP slots 1 and 2 are subtending ports. The Gigabit Ethernet port/SFP slot pairs labeled 3 and
4 are uplink ports.
The Gigabit Ethernet SFP slots and ports can function in either subtending or uplink mode.
Connect a port in uplink mode to an backbone Ethernet switch or router. The management switch card allows traffic between the ports in uplink mode and the DSL ports on the line cards.
Use the subtending mode to daisy-chain other Ethernet switches. With subtending mode, the management switch card allows traffic between the ports in subtending mode and the ports in uplink mode. The management switch card does not allow traffic between the ports in subtending mode and the DSL ports on the line cards.
See
to change the mode of a Gigabit Ethernet port.
2.3.3 SFP Slots
These are slots for SFP transceivers. A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver. The switch does not come with transceivers. You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement (MSA). See the SFF committee’s INF-
8074i specification Rev 1.0 for details.
SFP slots 1 and 2 are separate interfaces.
SFP slots 3 and 4 are combined with Gigabit Ethernet ports 3 and 4 respectively. The SFP ports have priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a SFP transceiver and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time, the Gigabit port will be disabled.
You can change transceivers while the MSC1000G is operating. You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic connectors.
• Type: SFP connection interface
• Connection speed: 1 Gigabit per second (Gbps)
1
To avoid possible eye injury, do not look into an operating fiber-optic module’s connectors.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Hardware Connections
2.3.3.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver (SFP module) in a slot.
"
The slot is at an angle. Do not attempt to straighten it.
1 Remove the dust cover from the transceiver.
2 For transceivers with a flip-up or flip-down latch, close the latch.
3 Insert the fiber-optic cables into the transceiver (you may need to remove cable dust covers).
4 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
5 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
Figure 5 Transceiver Installation
Figure 6 Installed Transceiver
2.3.3.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver (SFP module) from the slot.
1 Remove the fiber-optic cables from the transceiver.
2 Unlock the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
3 Pull the transceiver out of the slot.
4 Put the transceiver’s dust cover on the transceiver.
Figure 7 Opening the Transceiver Latch
61
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Hardware Connections
Figure 8 Removing the Transceiver
Console Port
Use the console port for local management of the MSC1000G.
62
MSC1000G User’s Guide
P
ART
II
Web Configurator
Access Control List Screens (81)
63
64
C
H A P T E R
3
The Web Configurator
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator.
3.1 Web Configurator Introduction
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy switch setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape
Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
3.2 System Login
1 Start your web browser.
2 Type “http://” and the IP address of the switch in the Location or Address field. Press
[ENTER]
. 192.168.1.1 is the default in-band management IP address and 192.168.0.1 is the default out-of-band (management port) IP address.
3 The login screen appears. The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234. The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen.
Figure 9 Web Configurator: Login
65
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen.
Figure 10 Web Configurator: First Screen
3.3 Navigation Panel
In the navigation panel (the column on the left), click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links. The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
ACL
DHCP Relay
DHCP Snoop
Downstream
Broadcast
This link takes you to a screen where you can block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to specified VLANs on specified ports.
MAC Count This link takes you to a screen where you can limit the number of MAC addresses that can connect to a subscriber port.
MAC Filter This link takes you to a screen where you can allow only traffic from specified source MAC addresses on the specified subscriber ports.
OUI Filter
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DHCP relay information and specify the DHCP server(s).
This link takes you to screens where you can activate DHCP snooping and configure static client IP addresses on a port.
Packet Filter
This link takes you to a screen where you can allow only traffic from MAC addresses with the specified OUI on the specified subscriber ports.
This link takes you to a screen where you can allow or drop specified packet types on the specified subscriber ports.
802.1X PNAC This link takes you to a screen where you can configure RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service) and IEEE 802.1x authentication settings.
Alarm
Current Alarm This link takes you to a screen where you can display current detailed alarms by severity or time period.
66
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
History Alarm This link takes you to a screen where you can display historical alarms by severity or time period.
Alarm Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set the severity level of alarms to record on specified ports.
Alarm Severity
Assignment
Alarm Clear
Cluster
This link takes you to a screen where you where you can configure the log facility, message type and severity of the alarm categories.
This link takes you to a screen where you can erase alarm entries.
Cluster Status
Cluster
Configuration
This link takes you to a screen where you can view clustering status
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management.
Diagnostic
LDM
Loopback
This link takes you to a screen where you can perform LDM (Loop Diagnostic
Mode) tests on a subscriber port.
This link takes you to a screen where you can perform an OAMF5 loopback test on a subscriber port or PVC.
This link takes you to a screen where you can ping a host.
IP Ping
IP Trace Route This link takes you to a screen where you can send a traceroute packet to an IP address and use the response to determine the path a packet takes to that IP address.
Maintenance
Config Backup This link takes you to a screen where you can back up your current system configuration.
Config Restore This link takes you to a screen where you can restore a previously saved configuration.
Config Reset This link takes you to a screen where you can reset the system back to the factory defaults.
This link takes you to a screen where you can upload a new firmware.
Firmware
Upgrade
Reboot
Multicast
This link takes you to a screen where you can restart the system.
IGMP This link takes you to screens where you can enable or disable IGMP proxy or
IGMP snooping and assign IGMP filter profiles to subscriber ports.
Static Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast group entries.
Port
ADSL
VDSL
SHDSL
PVC
PPVC
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the ADSL ports.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the VDSL ports.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the SHDSL ports.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure PVCs (Permanent Virtual
Circuits) on subscriber ports.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure Priority PVCs on subscriber ports.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
67
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
IP Bridge
Copy
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IP-aware bridging, where the MSC1000G forwards packets based on destination IP address instead of destination MAC address.
This link takes you to a screen where you can copy port settings from a source port to destination ports on the same type of line card.
Profile
ADSL
VDSL
SHDSL
ATM
Alarm ADSL
Alarm VDSL
Alarm SHDSL
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure ADSL profiles.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VDSL profiles.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure SHDSL profiles.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure ATM traffic profiles.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure ADSL alarm profiles.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VDSL alarm profiles.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure SHDSL alarm profiles.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IGMP filter profiles IGMP Filter
Statistics
ARP Table
DHCP
MAC Table
IGMP Status
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address to IP address resolution table.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view DHCP counters and DHCP snooping information.
This link takes you to a screen where you can see the MAC addresses that the system has dynamically learned.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view information collected by IGMP snooping and/or IGMP proxy.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view IP bridge information.
IP Bridge
Online Users
Port Statistics
Dot3ad
VLAN
MSTP
IP
This link takes you to a screen where you can view information about administrators that are logged into the system.
This link takes you to screens where you can view port statistics and status. You can also view RMON history information on the switch ports.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the link aggregation status.
This link takes you to screens where you can view the VLAN settings and status.
This link takes you to screens where you can view the MSTP status and statistics.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the port IP statistics.
Switch
Switch Setup
MSTP
This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global switch parameters such as GARP, link aggregation, priority queues and a port’s queuing method.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure spanning tree settings to prevent network loops.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Switch Port
Setup
Sys
Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can configure SNMP and remote management.
General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the switch and the time and date settings.
68
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
IP Setup
Unix SysLog
User Account
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the in-band and out-ofband management IP addresses and subnet masks.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the syslog settings.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure a user account and its level of access privileges and authentication settings.
VLAN
VLAN
Port Setting
Config Save
Config Save
This link takes you to screens where you can configure static VLANs.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure port VLAN settings.
This link takes you to a screen where you can save the device’s configuration into the nonvolatile memory (the system’s storage that remains even if the power is turned off).
The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub-links.
Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub-links Details
ACL
DHCP Relay
DHCP Snoop
DHCP Snoop Slot
Downstream Broadcast
Downstream Broadcast
Slot
MAC Count
MAC Count Slot
MAC Filter
MAC Filter Slot
OUI Filter
OUI Filter Slot
Packet Filter
Packet Filter Slot
802.1X PNAC
Port Setup
802.1X PNAC Slot
RADIUS
Alarm
Current Alarm
Critical
Major
Minor
All
History Alarm
Critical
Major
Minor
All
Alarm Port Setup
Alarm Port Setup Slot
Alarm Severity Assignment
DSL
Equipment
System
Ethernet
Alarm Clear
Cluster
Cluster Status
Cluster Status -
Member
Cluster Configuration
Diagnostic
LDM
Loopback
IP Ping
IP Trace Route
MSC1000G User’s Guide
69
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Statistics
ARP Table
DHCP
MAC Table
IGMP Status
Status
Port
IP Bridge
ARP Proxy
Interface
Route
Online Users
Port Statistics
Counter Slot
Packet Counter
Dot3ad
VLAN
VLAN Detail
MSTP
CIST
CIST Detail
MSTI
IP
Config Save
Config Save
Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub-links Details (continued)
Maintenance
Config Backup
Config Restore
Config Reset
Firmware Upgrade
Reboot
Multicast
IGMP
IGMP Setup
Filter Setup
IGMP Slot
Static Multicast
Port
ADSL
ADSL Port Setup
ADSL Port Setup Slot
ADSL Port Setup
Advanced
VDSL
VDSL Port Setup
VDSL Port Setup Slot
VDSL Port Setup
Advanced
SHDSL
SHDSL Port Setup
SHDSL Port Setup Slot
SHDSL Port Setup
Advanced
PVC
PVC Setup Slot
PVC Setup VLAN
PPVC
PPVC Setup Slot
PPVC Setup VLAN
IP Bridge
ARP Proxy
Domain
Edgerouter
Interface
IPBPVC
IPBPVC Slot
Route
Copy
Switch
Switch Setup
General
Dot3ad
QSchedule
Isolation
MSTP
Bridge
Port
Switch Port Setup
Port
802.1P/1Q
Bandwidth
Broadcast
Sys
Access Control
SNMP
Access Ctrl
Secured Client
General Setup
IP Setup
Unix SysLog
User Account
User Account
Authentication
Profile
ADSL
VDSL
SHDSL
ATM
Alarm ADSL
Alarm VDSL
Alarm SHDSL
IGMP Filter
VLAN
VLAN
Port Setting
VLAN Slot
VLAN Detail
70
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
3.4 Saving Your Configuration
Click Apply in a configuration screen when you are done modifying the settings in that screen to save your changes back to the run time memory and to make your changes take effect.
Click Config Save in the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory refers to the switch's storage that remains even if the switch's power is turned off.
"
Use Config Save when you are done with a configuration session.
If you log out of the web configurator without saving configuration changes, a screen displays as shown. Click Yes to save the changes or click No if you do not want to save the changes.
Unsaved changes are lost when the switch's power is turned off.
Figure 11 Web Configurator: Save Configuration on Logout
3.5 Logging Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password again after you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so as you don’t lock out other switch administrators.
Figure 12 Web Configurator: Logout Screen
3.6 System Info
The System Info screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
71
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Figure 13 Web Configurator: Home Screen (System Info)
72
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 5 System Info (Home)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Alarm
Critical Alarms
Major Alarms
Minor Alarms
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
Over Heat
Voltage Failure
Monitor Error
Linecard Down
Linecard Out
Click the links to view detailed alarm information (see
This field displays the number of critical alarms occurred. Click the link to display the Current Alarm: Critical Alarm screen.
This field displays the number of major alarms occurred. Click the link to display the Current Alarm: Major Alarm screen.
This field displays the number of minor alarms occurred. Click the link to display the Current Alarm: Minor Alarm screen.
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the System Info - Slot screen to view detailed status.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
This field indicates whether the temperate of the line card is too high.
This field indicates whether the voltage on the line card is out of the tolerance range.
This field indicates if no line card status information can be obtained.
This field indicates whether the line card has failed.
This field indicates whether the line card is removed from its slot.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
3.6.1 Card Status Details
To view detailed card status information, click an index number of an active card in the
System Info screen.
Figure 14 System Info: Slot
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 System Info: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Hardware Version This is the version of the physical device hardware.
Hardware Serial
Number
This is the individual identification number assigned to the device at the factory.
Firmware Version This field displays the version number of the device’s current firmware including the date created.
DSL Driver
Version
This field displays the version number of the DSL line card’s driver.
This field displays the version number of the DSL line card’s modem code. DSL Modem
Version
Current Voltage
Level
This field displays the current voltage readings.
Current
Temperature
Current Fan
Speed
This field displays the current temperature at the sensors
This field is not applicable for DSL line cards.
This field displays the current fan speeds.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
73
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
74
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
4
Initial Setup Example
This chapter describes initial configuration for the switch.
4.1 Initial Configuration
This chapter shows what you first need to do to provide service to DSL subscribers connected to a line card.
1 Click Sys > IP Setup.
Figure 15 Sys: IP Setup Menu
2 Use this screen to change the in-band and out-of-band management IP address and subnet mask settings. You also need to configure a default gateway IP address for the system. Apply the settings. If you change the IP address, you must use the new IP address if you want to access the web configurator again.
3 You can also change the in-band management VLAN (CPU). You can only manage the
MSC1000G through ports that are members of the management VLAN.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
75
76
Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example
"
By default, you can access the management VLAN from all of the IES-5000’s in-band ports since they are all in the management VLAN. If you need more security, please see
Section 24.2.9.1 on page 399 for an example of changing
the management VLAN.
Figure 16 IP Setup
4 If you will use DHCP with the subscribers, click ACL > DHCP Relay to display the screen shown next.
5 Create a new DHCP relay entry for the VLAN (3 in this example). Enable DHCP relay and specify any option 82 information that you want to include when relaying the DHCP requests.
6 Configure the primary/secondary DHCP server’s IP address and select which DHCP server to which the device sends DHCP request first.
7 Click Apply.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 17 DHCP Relay
Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example
8 Click VLAN > VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next.
Configure VLAN 3 and make ports Up1 and Up2 (the uplink ports) fixed members.
Click Apply.
Figure 18 VLAN Setup Example
9 Use the following steps to set the VPI and VCI and PVID (default VLAN ID) settings for all of an ALC or SLC line card’s DSL ports.
First you will delete the default PVC from all of the line card’s DSL ports. Then you will configure a new PVC for a port and copy it to the line card’s other DSL ports.
10 Under Port, click PVC.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
77
Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example
Figure 19 Port Setup Menu
11 Click an active line card’s slot number to display PVC settings for all DSL ports on the selected line card.
Figure 20 PVC Setup
78
12 Select the Select All check box and click Delete. Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example
Figure 21 Deleting PVCs
13 Select the line card and a DSL port. Enter the VPI and VCI that you need (or leave the defaults if your subscribers will use VPI 0 and VCI 33). Set the PVID to 3. Leave the other default settings and click Apply.
Figure 22 Adding a New Channel
14 Select the new channel's Select radio button and click Copy.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
79
Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example
Figure 23 Copying the PVC
15 Select the line card.
16 Click Select All to select every port on the selected line card.
17 Click Apply to paste the settings.
Figure 24 Select Ports
80
You can now (with the other settings set to the defaults) provide service to DSL subscribers connected to the line card. See the appendices for information on other default settings.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
5
Access Control List Screens
This chapter describes the ACL (Access Control List) screens.
5.1 DHCP Relay Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a DHCP server. You can configure the system to relay client TCP/IP configuration requests to a DHCP server and the server's responses back to the clients.
You can configure the system to forward client DHCP requests from different VLANs to specific DHCP servers.
5.1.1 DHCP Relay Agent Information
The system can add information to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server. This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests. You can also specify additional information for the system to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server.
Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details.
The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the headers in the DHCP request frames that the switch relays to a DHCP server. The following lists the DHCP relay agent option 82 information that the switch sends to the DHCP server:
• Slot ID (1 byte)
• Port ID (1 byte)
• VLAN ID (2 bytes)
• Information that you specify (up to 23 English keyboard characters)
5.1.2 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub-option Formats
The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of DHCP request frames that the MSC1000G relays to a DHCP server. The Agent Information field that the MSC1000G adds contains an “Agent Circuit-ID sub-option” that includes the port number, VLAN ID and optional information about the port where the DHCP request was received.
81
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
The following figure shows the format of the Agent Circuit ID sub-option. The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option. The length N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field. If the configuration request was received on a DSL port, a 2-byte Port No field specifies the ingress port number (the first byte is always 0, the second byte is in hexadecimal format). The next field is 2 bytes and displays the DHCP request packet’s VLAN ID. The last field (A) can range from 0 to 24 bytes and is optional information
(that you specify) about this relay agent.
Figure 25 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub-option Format
The Agent Information field that the MSC1000G adds also contains an “Agent Remote-ID sub-option” of information that you specify.
The following figure shows the format of the Agent Remote ID sub-option. The 2 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub-option. The length N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field. Then there is the number of the port (in plain text format) upon which the DHCP client request was received. The next field (B in the figure) is 0 to 23 bytes of optional information that you specify. This is followed by the name and telephone number configured for the ADSL port. The port number, optional information (B in the figure), ADSL name and ADSL telephone number fields are separated by forward slashes.
Figure 26 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub-option Format
5.2 DHCP Relay Screen
Click ACL > DHCP Relay to display the screen shown next.
82
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 27 DHCP Relay
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 DHCP Relay
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID
Enable DHCP
Relay
Sub-option1
(Circuit ID) Info
Sub-option2
Enable
Sub-option2
(Remote ID) Info
Primary/
Secondary Server
IP
Enter a VLAN ID (between 1 and 4094) to be served with DHCP relay.
Select disable to deactivate the DHCP relay service in this VLAN.
Select mode 1 to activate DHCP relay service and have the MSC1000G add the originating port numbers, VLAN ID and additional information (if configured) to the client DHCP requests for this VLAN.
Select mode 2 to disable DHCP relay service but have the MSC1000G add the originating port numbers, VLAN ID and additional information (if configured) to the client DHCP requests. Before broadcasting, the MSC1000G adds the originating port numbers, VLAN ID and additional information (if configured) to DHCP requests.
Use this field to specify up to 23 English keyboard characters of additional information for the MSC1000G to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a
DHCP server.
Examples of information you could add would be the name of the MSC1000G or the ISP.
Select this option to have the MSC1000G add the sub-option 2 (Remote ID) to the client DHCP requests for this VLAN.
Use this field to specify up to 23 English keyboard characters of additional information for the MSC1000G to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a
DHCP server.
This field is configurable only when you select Sub-option2 Enable.
Enter the IP addresses of the remote DHCP servers to which the switch should relay DHCP requests.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
83
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 7 DHCP Relay (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Relay Mode
Active Server
Apply
New
Cancel
Index
VID
Mode
Circuit ID Info
Sub-option2
Server IP
Relay
Select
Select Auto to have the system send DHCP requests to the active DHCP server first. If the active DHCP server does not respond, the system sends the DHCP request to the other DHCP server which then becomes the active DHCP server.
Select Both to have the switch send DHCP requests to both the primary and secondary DHCP servers.
Specify to which DHCP server (Primary or Secondary) the system is to forward this VLAN’s DHCP request first.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click New to create a new DHCP relay entry.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
This is the index number of an entry.
This is the ID number of the VLAN group.
This field displays whether the DHCP relay setting is activated or not.
This field displays the sub-option 1 information to add to the DHCP request packets.
This field displays whether information (configured in the Sub-option 2 Info field) will be included in the client DHCP requests for this VLAN or not (V for enabled, - for disabled).
This is the IP address of the primary/secondary DHCP server.
An asterisk in parentheses (*) indicates which DHCP server is active for each
VLAN.
This field displays the DHCP relay mode.
Select an entry’s Select check box and click Delete to remove the entry or click
Modify to edit the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entries.
5.2.1 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
The following example displays two VLANs (VIDs10 and 12) for the campus network. Two
DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN. The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms (VLAN 10) to the DHCP server with an IP address of
192.168.1.100. Requests from the academic buildings (VLAN 12) are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172.168.10.100.
84
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 28 DHCP Relay Network Example
Dorm (VID 10)
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
DHCP: 192.168.1.100
Internet
Academic (VID 12)
DHCP: 192.168.10.100
For the example network, configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown.
Figure 29 DHCP Relay: Configuration Example
5.3 DHCP Snooping
With DHCP snooping, the system obtains a client’s MAC-IP address information (in the reply messages from a DHCP server) and stores it in the DHCP snooping table. Frames with known source IP addresses are allowed to go through the subscriber ports. Frames from unknown IP addresses are dropped. This feature prevents subscribers from assigning their own static IP addresses that may conflict with a DHCP-assigned IP address.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
85
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
You can also specify static IP addresses (for a subscriber given a static IP address) on a subscriber port. This is useful when service providers assign static WAN IP addresses to some subscribers. This static binding allows the switch to forward frames with the specified IP addresses.
In the following network example, the DHCP snooping table on the switch contains two source IP addresses: 192.168.1.100 (DHCP-assigned) and 192.168.1.200 (static). Traffic from computers A and B is allowed to go through the DSL ports. While traffic from computer C is blocked since its IP address is unknown to the switch (not in the DHCP snooping table).
Figure 30 DHCP Snooping Network Example
A: 192.168.1.100
DHCP Snooping
192.168.1.100
192.168.1.200
B: 192.168.1.200
Internet
C: 192.168.1.10
DHCP
5.3.1 Anti-IP Address Spoofing
While performing DHCP snooping, a line card records which IP address is assigned to each
DHCP client MAC address. and which VLAN the client uses. The line card drops packets from a device using an IP address that is assigned to a different MAC address.
5.4 DHCP Snooping Configuration
Click ACL > DHCP Snoop to display the screen shown next.
86
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 31 DHCP Snooping
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 DHCP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Use the drop-down list boxes to select a DSL port on a line card for which you want to configure DHCP snooping.
Slot
Port
Load
Enable
Static IP1 .. 3
Click Load to display the port’s current settings.
Select the check box to activate DHCP snooping on the specified DSL port.
Specify the static IP addresses of frames you want the switch to allow passage on the port.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. For example, 192.168.1.100.
Apply
Cancel
Note: Make sure the specified static IP addresses are not in the
DHCP client pool on the DHCP server.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
87
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 8 DHCP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Copy Do the following to copy the settings you configure above to another port or ports.
1. Click Copy.
2. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
3. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
4. Click Apply to paste the settings.
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the DHCP Snoop Slot screen where you can view and copy settings from one port to another port or ports on the selected line card.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
5.4.1 DHCP Snooping Slot Screen
Click the slot number of an active line card in the DHCP Snoop screen to display the screen shown next.
88
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 32 DHCP Snooping: Slot
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 DHCP Snooping: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
Port
Enable
Static IP
Select
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
This field displays whether DHCP snooping is activated on the specified DSL port or not (V for enabled, - for disabled).
This field displays the static IP addresses in the DHCP snooping table for a port.
Select the radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings.
5.4.2 Example: DHCP Snooping
The following figures show the DHCP snooping configuration for computers A and B in the
example network shown in Figure 30 on page 86 . In this example, the line card in slot 3 has
computer A connected to DSL port 1 and computer B connected to DSL port 10.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
89
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Figure 33 DHCP Snooping: Computer A Example
Figure 34 DHCP Snooping: Computer B Example
5.5 Downstream Broadcast Screen
Downstream broadcast allows you to block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to specified VLANs on specified ports.
Click ACL > Downstream Broadcast to display the screen shown next.
90
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 35 Downstream Broadcast
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Downstream Broadcast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Use the drop-down list boxes to select an DSL port on an active line card for which you want to configure downstream broadcast blocking.
Slot
Port
Load
Add disabled
VLAN
Apply
Index
VLAN ID
Delete
Apply
Cancel
Click Load to display the port’s current settings.
Specify the number of a VLAN (on this port) to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic. The VLAN must already be configured in the system.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
This is the number of the downstream broadcast blocking entry.
This field displays the number of a VLAN to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic (through the specified port).
Select one or more entries’ check boxes and then use the Apply button to remove it (or them). Use the Select All check box to select all of the entries for the specified line card’s port.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
91
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 10 Downstream Broadcast (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Copy Do the following to copy the settings you configure above to another port or ports.
1. Click Copy.
2. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
3. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
4. Click Apply to paste the settings.
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the Bandwidth Broadcast Slot screen where you can view and copy settings from one port to another port or ports on the selected line card.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
5.5.1 Downstream Broadcast Slot Screen
Click the slot number of an active line card in the Downstream Broadcast screen to display the screen shown next.
92
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 36 Downstream Broadcast: Slot
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Downstream Broadcast: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
Port
VLAN ID
Select
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
This field displays the number of a VLAN to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic (through the specified port).
Select the radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings.
5.6 MAC Count Screen
This screen allows you to limit how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned on a
DSL port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
93
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
"
You cannot enable both MAC count and MAC filtering on the same port at the same time.
Click ACL > MAC Count to display the screen shown next.
Figure 37 MAC Count
94
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 MAC Count
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Enable
Use the drop-down list boxes to select an DSL port on a line card for which you want to configure the MAC count limit.
Limited Number of Learned MAC
Address
Apply
Cancel
Click Load to display the port’s current settings.
Select the check box to activate the MAC count limit on the specified DSL port.
You can only enable the MAC count filter on DSL ports that do not have the MAC filter enabled.
Specify how many MAC addresses the system can dynamically learn on this port.
The range is 1~128.
For example, if you are configuring port 2 and you set this field to "5", then only five devices with dynamically learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 12 MAC Count (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Copy Do the following to copy the settings you configure above to another port or ports.
6. Click Copy.
7. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
8. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
9. Click Apply to paste the settings.
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the MAC Count Slot screen where you can view and copy settings from one port to another port or ports on the selected line card.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
5.6.1 MAC Count Slot Screen
Click the slot number of an active line card in the MAC Count screen to display the screen shown next.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
95
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Figure 38 MAC Count: Slot
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 MAC Count: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
Port
Enable
Limited Number of Learned MAC
Address
Select
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
This field displays whether the MAC count limit is activated on the specified DSL port or not (V for enabled, - for disabled).
This fields displays how many MAC addresses a port may dynamically learn.
Select the radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings.
5.7 MAC Filter Screen
Use MAC filter to allow or block frames from MAC (Media Access Control) address(es) that you specify to come in through a port. You may specify up to ten MAC addresses per port.
96
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
"
You cannot enable both MAC filtering and MAC count on the same port at the same time.
Click ACL > MAC Filter to display the screen shown next.
Figure 39 MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 MAC Filter
LABEL
Slot
Port
DESCRIPTION
Use the drop-down list boxes to select an DSL port on a line card for which you wish to configure MAC filtering.
Load Click Load to display the port’s current settings.
Enable Select the check box to turn on the MAC filtering feature on a line card’s specified
DSL port.
MAC1~10 block frames from other MAC addresses.
Select deny to block frames from MAC addresses that you specify and allow frames from other MAC addresses.
Type a device’s MAC address in hexadecimal notation (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx, where x is a number from 0 to 9 or a letter from a to f) in this field. The MAC address must be a valid MAC address.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
97
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 14 MAC Filter (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Cancel
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the MAC Filter Slot screen where you can view MAC filtering settings on the specified line card.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
5.7.1 MAC Filter Slot Screen
Click the slot number of an active line card in the MAC Filter screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 40 MAC Filter: Slot
98
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 MAC Filter: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Port
Mode
Enable
MAC
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
This field displays the filter action.
This field displays whether MAC filtering is activated on the specified DSL port or not (V for enabled, - for disabled).
This fields displays the MAC address(es) you set for the port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
5.8 OUI Filter
Configure an OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) filter to block or forward packets from devices with the specified OUI in the MAC address.
The OUI field is the first three octets in a MAC address. An OUI uniquely identifies the manufacturer of a network device and allows you to identify from which device brands the switch will accept traffic or send traffic to. The OUI value is assigned by the IANA.
Click ACL > OUI Filter to display the configuration screen.
Figure 41 OUI Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 OUI Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Enable
Use the drop-down list boxes to select an DSL port on a line card for which you wish to configure packet type filtering.
Mode
Click Load to display the port’s current settings.
Select Enable to activate this filter.
Clear this check box to disable the filter without deleting it.
Specify the action on matched frames.
Select accept to allow frames with a matched OUI field in the MAC addresses. The switch blocks frames with other OUIs not specified.
Select deny to block frames with a matched OUI field in the MAC addresses. The switch allows frames with other OUIs not specified.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
99
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 16 OUI Filter (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
OUI1.. 10
Apply
Cancel
Copy
Enter the first three octets of a MAC address in the format xx:xx:xx. For example,
00:0F:FE.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Do the following to copy the settings you configure above to another port or ports.
1. Click Copy.
2. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
3. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
4. Click Apply to paste the settings.
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the OUI Filter Slot screen where you can view and copy settings from one port to another port or ports on the selected line card.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
5.8.1 OUI Filter Slot Screen
Click the slot number of an active line card in the OUI Filter screen to display the screen shown next.
100
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Figure 42 OUI Filter: Slot
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 DHCP Snooping: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
Port
Mode
Enable
OUI
Select
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
This field displays the filter mode (deny or accept).
This field displays whether OUI filtering is activated on the specified DSL port or not (V for enabled, - for disabled).
This field displays the OUI address to filter on a port.
Select the radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings.
5.9 Packet Filter Screen
Use this screen to set which types of packets the switch accepts on individual DSL ports. Click
ACL > Packet Filter to display the screen shown next.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
101
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Figure 43 Packet Filter
102
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Packet Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Use the drop-down list boxes to select an DSL port on a line card for which you wish to configure packet type filtering.
Load Click Load to display the port’s current settings.
Select the radio buttons of the types of packets to accept on the ADSL port.
Accept All
PPPoE Only
Custom
PPPoE Filter
Out
Select Accept All to allow any traffic.
Select PPPoE Only to allow only PPPoE traffic. This will gray out the check boxes for other packet types and the switch will drop any non-PPPoE packets.
Select Custom and specify which types of packets listed below will be blocked.
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet relies on PPP and Ethernet. It is a specification for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless device or cable modem.
IP Filter Out Internet Protocol. The underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP/IP-based networks.
ARP Filter Out Address Resolution Protocol is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address
(IP address) to a physical computer address that is recognized in the local network.
NetBIOS Filter
Out
NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to find other computers.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 18 Packet Filter (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DHCP Filter
Out
EAPOL Filter
Out
IGMP Filter
Out
Apply
Cancel
Copy
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log on. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment to other systems.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) over LAN. EAP is used with
IEEE 802.1x to allow additional authentication methods (besides RADIUS) to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Do the following to copy the settings you configure above to another port or ports.
1. Click Copy.
2. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
3. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
4. Click Apply to paste the settings.
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the Packet Filter Slot screen where you can view and copy settings from one port to another port or ports on the selected line card.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
103
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
5.10 Packet Filter Slot Screen
Click the slot number of an active line card in the Packet Filter screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 44 Packet Filter: Slot
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Packet Filter: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
104
Slot
Accept All,
PPPoE Only,
PPPoE, IP, ARP,
NetBIOS, DHCP,
EAPOL, IGMP
Select
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
These are the packet filter settings for each port.
Accept All and PPPoE Only: “V” displays for the packet types that the system is to accept on the port. “-” displays for packet types that the system is to reject on the port.
PPPoE, IP, ARP, NetBIOS, DHCP, EAPOL and IGMP: “V” displays for the packet types that the system is to reject on the port. “-” displays for packet types that the system is to accept on the port.
Select the radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
5.11 IEEE 802.1x
This section describes the IEEE 802.1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup.
IEEE 802.1x is an extended authentication protocol
1
that allows support of RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile management on a network RADIUS server.
5.11.1 RADIUS
RADIUS authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device. In essence, RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location. In the following graphic, the RADIUS server (A) authenticates users 1, 2 and 3.
Figure 45 RADIUS Server
A
1 2
3
5.12 802.1X PNAC Port Setup Screen
Click ACL > 802.1X PNAC to display the screen shown next. PNAC stands for Port-based
Network Access Control. Use this screen to configure IEEE 802.1x settings.
1.
Not all Windows operating systems support IEEE 802.1x (see the Microsoft web site for details). For other operating systems, see its documentation. If your operating system does not support IEEE 802.1x, then you may need to install IEEE 802.1x client software.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
105
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Figure 46 802.1X PNAC: Port Setup
106
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 802.1X PNAC: Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Enable
Control
Use the drop-down list boxes to select an DSL port on a line card for which you wish to configure IEEE 802.1x authentication.
Click Load to display the port’s current settings.
Select this check box to turn on IEEE 802.1x authentication on the system.
Select AUTO to authenticate all subscribers before they can access the network through this port.
Select FORCE AUTHORIZED to allow all connected users to access the network through this port without authentication.
Select FORCE UNAUTHORIZED to deny all subscribers access to the network through this port.
Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port.
Reauthentication
Period(s)
Apply
Specify how often a client has to re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config
Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Table 20 802.1X PNAC: Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Copy Do the following to copy the settings you configure above to another port or ports.
1. Click Copy.
2. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
3. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
4. Click Apply to paste the settings.
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the 802.1X PNAC Slot screen where you can view and copy settings from one port to another port or ports on the selected line card.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
5.12.1 802.1X PNAC Slot Screen
Click the slot number of an active line card in the Port Setup screen to display the screen shown next.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
107
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
Figure 47 802.1X PNAC: Port Setup: Slot
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 802.1X PNAC: Port Setup: Slot label description
UP
Copy
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
108
Port
Enable
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
This field displays whether IEEE 802.1x is turned on or not (V for enabled, - for disabled).
This field displays the IEEE 802.1x port authentication option for a subscriber port.
Control
Reauthentication This field displays whether the IEEE 802.1x re-authentication option is turned on or not (V for enabled, - for disabled).
Reauthentication
Period (Sec)
This field displays the IEEE 802.1x re-authentication period.
Select Select the radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
5.13 RADIUS Screen
Click ACL > 802.1X PNAC > RADIUS to display the screen shown next.
Figure 48 802.1X PNAC: RADIUS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 802.1X PNAC: RADIUS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select this check box to have the switch use an external RADIUS server to authenticate users.
Radius Server
1/2
IP address
UDP Port
Shared Secret
Apply
Cancel
Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Specify a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the system. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config
Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
109
Chapter 5 Access Control List Screens
110
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
6
Alarm Screens
This chapter describes alarm management.
6.1 Current Alarm Screen
Click Alarm > Current Alarm to display the screen where you can view all current alarms.
You can also click a tab to view the alarms only specific to one severity level.
Figure 49 Current Alarm: All
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Current Alarm: All
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Show All
Show Alarm
From To (YYYY/
MM/DD)
Apply
No
Alarm
Condition
Severity
Timestamp
Source
Previous 10
Click UP to go to the System Info screen.
Select the radio button to display all alarms.
Select the radio button and specify a range of time in the year/month/day format to display the alarms occur during this period only.
Click Apply to display the alarms (either all or from the time range you selected).
This is the index number of the alarm.
This is the alarm category.
This is the alarm condition.
This is the severity level of alarms.
This is the time when the alarm occurred.
This is the location where the alarm occurred.
Click Previous 10 to show the preceding 10 pages of information.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
111
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Table 23 Current Alarm: All (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Previous
Next
Next 10
Click Previous or Next to show the preceding/following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
Click Next 10 to show the following 10 pages of alarms.
6.2 History Alarm Screen
Click Alarm > History Alarm to display the screen where you can view all historic alarms.
You can also click a tab to view the alarms only specific to one severity level.
112
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 50 History Alarm: All
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 History Alarm: All
LABEL
UP
DESCRIPTION
Click UP to go to the System Info screen.
Show All Select the radio button to display all alarms.
Show Alarm
From To (YYYY/
MM/DD)
Apply
No
Select the radio button and specify a range of time in the year/month/day format to display the alarms occur during this period only.
Click Apply to display the alarms (either all or from the time range you selected).
This is the index number of the alarm.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
113
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Table 24 History Alarm: All (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Alarm
Condition
Severity
TimeStamp
Source
Previous 10
Previous
Next
Next 10
This is the alarm category.
This is the alarm condition.
This is the severity level of alarms.
This is the time when the alarm occurred.
This is the location where the alarm occurred.
Click Previous 10 to show the preceding 10 alarms.
Click Previous or Next to show the preceding/following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
Click Next 10 to show the following 10 alarms.
6.3 Alarm Port Setup Screen
Use this screen to set the severity level of alarms to record on specified ports. Click Alarm >
Alarm Port Setup to display the screen shown next.
Figure 51 Alarm Port Setup
114
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Alarm Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select the severity level from info, minor, major and critical for the alarms to record on the specified port of the MSC.
sub1 sub2 up1 up2
Management
Apply
Slot
Port
Load
Severity
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config
Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Use the drop-down list boxes to select an DSL port on a line card for which you wish to configure the severity level.
Apply
Cancel
Copy
Click Load to refresh the whole screen.
Select the minimum severity level of alarms (info, minor, major or critical) that the system records on the port.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config
Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
ID This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display the Alarm Port Setup Slot screen where you can view and copy settings from one port to another port or ports on the selected line card.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
115
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Table 25 Alarm Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
6.3.1 Alarm Port Setup Slot Screen
Click the slot number of a line card in the Alarm Port Setup screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 52 Alarm Port Setup: Slot
116
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Alarm Port Setup: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports.
1. Select the Select radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings
2. Click Copy.
3. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
4. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use Select
All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
5. Click Apply to paste the settings.
Port
Severity
Select
This field displays the number of the DSL port.
This field displays the minimum severity level of alarms that the system records on the port.
Select the radio button of the port from which you want to copy settings.
6.4 Alarm Severity Assignment Screen
Click Alarm > Alarm Severity Assignment to configure the severity levels of individual alarms and where the system is to send them. Click a tab to view the alarms specific to an alarm category.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
117
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Figure 53 Alarm Severity Assignment: DSL
118
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Alarm Severity Assignment: DSL
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition
Facility
SNMP
Syslog
Severity
Clearable
Select All
Apply
Cancel
This identifies an individual alarm. See
for more information.
Select the log facility (local1~local7) to have the device log the syslog messages to a specific file in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details.
Select the check box to have the switch send SNMP traps of the specified alarm condition.
Select the check box to have the switch send syslog messages of the specified alarm condition.
Select the severity level from minor, major and critical for the specified alarm condition. You cannot change the severity level of the info severity level alarms.
Select the check box to allow an administrator to manually remove records of the specified alarm.
Select an option from the Select All drop-down list box to automatically select that option for all entries. Alternatively, you may configure individual entries.
Select a Select All check box to automatically select that option for all entries. Clear it to clear that option for all entries. Alternatively, you may select or clear the check boxes for individual entries.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config
Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
6.5 Alarm Descriptions
This table describes the alarms on the MSC1000G.
• “ALC” is the ADSL Line Card.
• “SLC” is the SHDSL Line Card.
• “VLC” is the VDSL Line Card.
• “TCA” Stands for Threshold Crossed Alarm and indicates that an alarm profile threshold was exceeded.
• An “X” means that the alarm applies to the specific card.
• Atu-c refers to the IES-5000 or the downstream channel (for traffic going from the IES-
5000 to the subscriber).
• Atu-r refers to subscriber or the upstream channel (for traffic coming from the subscriber to the IES-5000).
Table 28 Alarm Descriptions
ALARM SEVERITY MSC ALC SLC VLC DESCRIPTION
DSL
LINE_UP
LINE_DOWN
LINE_LDM_START
LINE_LDM_END
INFO
MINOR
INFO
INFO
X
X
X
X
X
X
LINE_PM_L2
LINE_PM_L0
LINE_FAIL
ADSL_TCA_LOL
ADSL_TCA_LOF
ADSL_TCA_LOS
ADSL_TCA_LPR
ADSL_TCA_ES
ADSL_RATE_CHANGE
ADSL_TCA_SES
ADSL_TCA_UAS
INFO
INFO
MAJOR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
The line is up.
The line is down.
The line entered loop diagnosis mode.
The loop diagnostics were OK and the line left loop diagnosis mode.
The line went into power down L2 mode.
The line went into power down L0 mode.
The line failed.
The Loss Of Link seconds (<value>) within
15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Loss Of Frame seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Loss Of Signal seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Loss of Power (<value>) of 15-minute interval of the atu(c or r) reaches threshold
(<value>)
The Error Seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The transmission rate of the atu(c or r) changed from <value> to <value>.
The Severely Errored Seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The UnAvailable Seconds (<value>) within
15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
119
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Table 28 Alarm Descriptions (continued)
ALARM SEVERITY MSC ALC SLC VLC DESCRIPTION
SHDSL_TCA_ATTEN INFO X
SHDSL_TCA_SNRM
SHDSL_TCA_ES
SHDSL_TCA_SES
SHDSL_TCA_CRC
SHDSL_TCA_LOSW
SHDSL_TCA_UAS
VDSL_TCA_LOL
VDSL_TCA_LOF
VDSL_TCA_LOS
VDSL_TCA_LPR
VDSL_TCA_ES
VDSL_TCA_SES
VDSL_TCA_UAS
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
The loop attenuation (<value>) of the endpoint (unit address <value>-<side>-wire pair <value>) reached or exceeded the threshold (<value>).
The SNR margin (<value>) of the endpoint
(unit address <value>-<side>-wire pair
<value>) reached or dropped below the threshold (<value>).
The error seconds (<value>) of the endpoint (unit address <value>-<side>-wire pair <value>) reached or exceeded the threshold (<value>).
The severely errored seconds (<value>) of the endpoint (unit address <value>-<side>wire pair <value>) reached or exceeded the threshold (<value>).
The CRC anomalies (<value>) of the endpoint (unit address <value>-<side>-wire pair <value>) reached or exceeded the threshold (<value>).
The Loss Of Sync Word seconds (<value>) of the endpoint (unit address <value>-
<side>-wire pair <value>) reached or exceeded the threshold (<value>).
The UnAvailable Seconds (<value>) of the endpoint (unit address <value>-<side>-wire pair <value>) reached or exceeded the threshold (<value>)
The Loss Of Link seconds (<value>) within
15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Loss Of Frame seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Loss Of Signal seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Loss of Power (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Error Seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The Severely Errored Seconds (<value>) within 15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
The UnAvailable Seconds (<value>) within
15 minutes for the atu(c or r) has reached the threshold (<value>).
Equipment
DC_POWER_FAIL CRITICAL X The -48VDC power -<index> failed.
120
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Table 28 Alarm Descriptions (continued)
ALARM SEVERITY MSC ALC SLC VLC DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE_ERROR CRITICAL X X X
TEMPERATURE_ERROR CRITICAL X
FAN_ERROR
FAN_STOP_LOW_TEMP
CRITICAL X
MINOR X
X X
The voltage <index> at input <value> is too low <value>, or high <value>.
The temperature <index> at input <value> is too low <value> or high <value>.
The fan <index> speed <value> is too low
<value> or high <value>
The fan stopped due to low temperature.
HW_MONITOR_FAIL
COLD_START
WARM_START
MGMT_ETHER_UP
MGMT_ETHER_DOWN
CRITICAL
INFO
INFO
INFO
MINOR
X
X
X
X
ALARM_IN CRITICAL X
SPT_TOPOLOGY_CHANG MINOR X
NT_FW_UPLOAD_OK
NT_FW_UPLOAD_FAIL
LT_PLUG_IN
LT_PULL_OUT
LT_DSL_DEVICE_FAIL
LT_DSL_DEVICE_RELOA
D
LT_ACTIVE
LT_INACTIVE
LT_FW_UPLOAD_OK
INFO
MAJOR
INFO
MAJOR
CRITICAL
INFO
X
X
X
X
INFO
MAJOR
INFO
X
X
X
LT_FW_UPLOAD_FAIL
LT_ENABLE
LT_DISABLE
LT_RESET
NT_SWITCH_OVER
CPU_UTIL_HIGH
System
REBOOT
CONFIG_CHANGE
CONFIG_UPLOAD_OK
CONFIG_UPLOAD_FAIL
MAJOR
INFO
INFO
INFO
MAJOR
MAJOR
INFO
INFO
INFO
MAJOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A hardware monitor diagnosis test failed.
System cold-start.
System warm-start.
The management Ethernet interface is up.
The management Ethernet interface is down.
External alarm on input <index>.
A spanning tree topology change was detected.
Firmware upload was successful.
Firmware upload failed.
A line card was inserted into a slot.
A line card was removed from a slot.
A DSL chipset on an ALC failed.
A DSL chipset on an ALC re-downloaded firmware <index>.
A line card became active.
A line card became inactive.
Firmware was successfully uploaded to a card.
Firmware upload to a card failed.
Line card enabled.
Line card disabled.
Line card reset.
The MSC1000G in standby mode becomes active.
The MSC1000G is overloading.
The system restarted.
The system configuration has changed.
Uploading of the system configuration was successful.
Uploading of the system configuration failed.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
121
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Table 28 Alarm Descriptions (continued)
ALARM SEVERITY MSC ALC SLC VLC DESCRIPTION
TIME_SYNC_FAIL MINOR X
ALARM_CUT_OFF
ALARM_CLEAR
LOGIN_FAIL
LOGIN_OK
ACCOUNT_ADD
ACCOUNT_DELETE
ACCOUNT_MODIFY
SVR_SYNC_PROF_OK
SVR_SYNC_PROF_FAIL
CLI_SYNC_PROF_OK
CLI_SYNC_PROF_FAIL
ANTI_SPOOFING
CLUSTER_MBR_INACTIV
E
CLUSTER_MBR_ADD
INFO
INFO
MINOR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
Minor
CLUSTER_MBR_ACTIVE INFO
INFO
INFO
CLUSTER_MBR_DELETE INFO
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Synchronizing the time with a timeserver failed.
An administrator cutoff (canceled) an alarm.
An administrator cleared the alarms.
A user failed to login.
A user logged in successfully.
A user account was added.
A user account was deleted.
A user’s account was modified.
Server-initiated profile synchronization is successful.
Server-initiated profile synchronization failed.
Client-initiated profile synchronization is successful.
Client-initiated profile synchronization failed.
A system connected to the MSC1000G detected a MAC address connected to more than one port.
The cluster manager has established a connection with a particular cluster member.
The cluster manager has established a connection with a particular cluster member.
The cluster manager added a member to a cluster.
The cluster manager removed a member from cluster.
Ethernet
ENET_UP INFO X
ENET_DOWN MINOR X
One of the MSC1000G’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces is up.
One of the MSC1000G’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces is down.
6.6 Alarm Clear Screen
Click Alarm > Alarm Clear to open this screen where you can erase alarm entries.
122
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
Figure 54 Alarm Clear
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Alarm Clear
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Alarm
History Alarm
Alarm output
Cutoff
Click Clear to manually remove the records of all the current alarms that are clearable.
Click Clear to manually remove the records of all the historical (past) alarms that are clearable. Use the drop-down list box to select the severity level of alarms that you want to remove.
Click Cutoff to cancel an alarm. This stops the sending of the alarm signal current.
This is useful in stopping an alarm if you have the alarm output connector pins connected to a visible or audible alarm. The alarm entry remains in the system.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
123
Chapter 6 Alarm Screens
124
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
7
Cluster Screens
This chapter covers how to configure cluster management.
7.1 Cluster Management Status Overview
Cluster management allows you to manage multiple DSLAMs through one DSLAM, called the cluster manager. The DSLAMs must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another.
Table 30 ZyXEL Cluster Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster members
8
Must be DSLAMs compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation.
Cluster Member
Models
Cluster Manager
Cluster Members
The DSLAM through which you can access the web configurators of the cluster member DSLAMs.
The DSLAMs (up to seven) being accessed through the cluster manager
DSLAM.
In the following example, DSLAM A in the central office is the cluster manager and the other
DSLAMs are cluster members.
Figure 55 Clustering Application Example
125
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Cluster Screens
7.2 Cluster Management Status
Click Cluster in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
"
A cluster can only have one manager.
Figure 56 Cluster: Status
126
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Cluster: Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Number of
Members in
Cluster
ID
This is how many DSLAMs are in the management cluster (including the cluster manager).
State
Hostname
Uptime
Model
MacAddr
You can manage cluster member DSLAMs via the cluster manager DSLAM. The number for each cluster member is a hyperlink leading to the DSLAM’s web
configurator (see Figure 58 on page 129 ). ID 1 is the cluster manager.
This field displays the status of this DSLAM within the cluster.
active: the manager can communicate with the member.
inactive: the manager can not communicate with the member.
waiting: the manager has sent a command to add the member and is waiting for a response.
error: the member reported that the password was wrong.
If a member DSLAM’s management password changes, then it cannot be managed from the cluster manager and its State displays as error. You need to delete the member from the Cluster > Configuration screen’s Membership Configuration list and re-add it from the Cluster Candidate list.
This is the cluster DSLAM’s System Name.
This field displays how long the DSLAM has been turned on and in the cluster.
This field displays the model name of the DSLAM.
This is the DSLAM’s hardware MAC address.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Cluster Screens
7.3 Cluster Management Configuration
Use this screen to configure cluster management settings. Click Cluster > Configuration to display the next screen.
Figure 57 Cluster: Configuration
MSC1000G User’s Guide
127
Chapter 7 Cluster Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Cluster: Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Cluster Manager
Activity
Cluster Name
Password
Vid
Apply
Cancel
Membership
Configuration
ID
Hostname
Model
MAC Address
Select
Cancel
Cluster Candidate
ID
Hostname
Model
MAC Address
Select Disabled to have this DSLAM not function as part of the cluster.
Select Manager to have this DSLAM become the cluster manager DSLAM. A cluster can only have one manager. Other cluster managers do not display in the Cluster Candidate list.
Select Member to have this DSLAM become a cluster member so it can be managed through the cluster manager.
If a DSLAM that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager, then its Status is displayed as Error in the old cluster manager’s Cluster > Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the
Cluster > Configuration screen’s Membership Configuration list. You need to change the cluster configuration of the old cluster member.
Type a name to identify the cluster. You may use up to 32 printable characters.
Spaces are not allowed.
Each cluster member’s password is its management password. When you set a
DSLAM to be a cluster member, enter its management password.
This is the cluster management VLAN ID. The cluster’s DSLAMs must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group. The cluster management VID must be different from the management VID.
Click Apply to save the changes in this section of the screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
The following table lists the DSLAMs that the cluster manager has added to the cluster.
This is the index number of a cluster member.
This is the cluster DSLAM’s System Name.
This field displays the device’s model name.
This is the DSLAM’s hardware MAC address.
Select this check box (or use Select All to select every check box) and then click the Delete button to remove a cluster member from the cluster.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
The MSC1000G finds potential cluster member DSLAMs by auto-discovery and lists them here. The DSLAMs must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group. You must have also logged into that device and configured it as a cluster member.
A device can only be part of one cluster at a time. If a device is already in another cluster, it does not display here. Devices that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible.
This is the index number of a cluster member candidate.
This is the cluster DSLAM’s System Name.
This field displays the device’s model name.
This is the DSLAM’s hardware MAC address.
128
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Cluster Screens
Table 32 Cluster: Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select
Password
Member ID
Apply
Cancel
Refresh
Select this check box and then configure the Password and the Member ID fields and click the Apply button to add a cluster member candidate to the cluster.
Each cluster member’s password is its management password. When you select a DSLAM to be a cluster member, enter its management password.
If a member DSLAM’s management password changes, then it cannot be managed from the cluster manager. Its State displays as Error in the Cluster >
Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the Cluster > Configuration screen’s Membership Configuration list. You need to delete the member from the Membership Configuration list and re-add it from the Cluster Candidate list.
This is the index number of a cluster member.
Click Apply to add a cluster member candidate to the cluster. The MSC1000G checks the password with the device. The changes in this section of the screen are saved to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Click Refresh to update the list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery.
7.3.1 Cluster Member Management
Click Cluster > Status screen of the cluster manager and then click an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member's web configurator. The top of the cluster member's web configurator screen displays cluster information.
Figure 58 Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
MSC1000G User’s Guide
129
Chapter 7 Cluster Screens
The following table describes the labels at the top of the screen.
Table 33 Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Cluster Name
Cluster ID
Hostname
Manager DSLAM
This is the name of the cluster.
This is the VLAN ID that the cluster uses and is only applicable if the manager
DSLAM is set to use IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. All DSLAMs must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster. This field is ignored if the clustering manager is using port-based VLAN.
This is the cluster member DSLAM’s System Name.
This is the cluster manager DSLAM’s System Name.
130
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
8
Diagnostic Screens
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screens.
8.1 LDM Test Screen (DELT)
Click Diagnostic > LDM in the navigation panel to display this screen. Use this screen to perform loop diagnostics (LDM stands for Loop Diagnostic Mode) on an ADSL port. This is a
Dual End Loop Test (DELT). A DELT provides details about the line condition. The subscriber device must also support DELT in order to perform this. This feature is applicable for ALC line cards only.
Figure 59 LDM Test
MSC1000G User’s Guide
131
Chapter 8 Diagnostic Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 LDM Test
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LDM Test Select slot and port numbers from the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes and click Set LDM Port to perform loop diagnostics on the specified port. Only slots with an active ADSL line card display in the Slot drop-down list box. The ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2+ ADSL operational mode and have a connection. It takes about one minute for the loop diagnostics to finish. The screen displays a message confirming upon which ADSL port loop diagnostics will be performed.
Click Get LDM Data to display the loop diagnostics results after using the Set
LDM Port button on an ADSL port. Use the loop diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical ADSL line.
Note: Wait at least one minute after using Set LDM Port before using Get LDM Data.
8.1.1 Loop Diagnostics Test Parameters
The following table lists the loop diagnostics test parameters that display, see the ITU-T’s
G.992.3 for more information.
Table 35 Loop Diagnostics Test Parameters
LABEL DESCRIPTION
near end far end
This column of diagnostics results is for the upstream traffic (coming from the subscriber to the IES-5000).
This column of diagnostics results is for the downstream traffic (going from the
IES-5000 to the subscriber).
This is the upstream and downstream attainable net data rate in Kilobits/s.
attainable bit rate
(kbps) loop attenuation
(dB) signal attenuation
(dB) snr margin (dB) actual tx power fe
(dBm)
This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels
(dB).
Loop attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power received at the far-end. Loop attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge, quality, condition and length of the physical line).
This is the upstream and downstream signal attenuation (reductions in amplitude of the DSL signal). It is measured in decibels (dB).
Signal attenuation is affected by factors such as noise, heat, crosstalk and loop attenuation.
This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A
DMT sub-carrier’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets.
This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm)
132
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Diagnostic Screens
8.2 F5 Loopback Screen
Click Diagnostic > F5 Loopback in the navigation panel to display this screen. Use this screen to perform loopback tests.
Figure 60 F5 Loopback
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 F5 Loopback
LABEL DESCRIPTION
F5 Loopback Select slot and port numbers from the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes and enter a
VPI/VCI to specify a PVC. Click test to perform an OAMF5 loopback test on the specified DSL port. An Operational, Administration and Maintenance Function 5 test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices. First, the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit. Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device (both DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test).
The results (“Passed” or “Failed”) display in the multi-line text box.
8.3 IP Ping Screen
Click Diagnostic > IP Ping in the navigation panel to display this screen. Use this screen to ping IP addresses.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
133
Chapter 8 Diagnostic Screens
Figure 61 IP Ping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 IP Ping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection.
In the field to the right specify the number of times that you want to ping the IP address.
Click Ping to ping the IP address that you specified.
8.4 Trace Route Screen
Click Diagnostic > Trace Route in the navigation panel to display this screen. Use this screen to show the path that packets take from the system to a specific IP address.
Figure 62 Trace Route
134
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Diagnostic Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Trace Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trace Route Type the IP address of a device.
Click Start to perform a trace route in order to check the path that packets take to get to the IP address that you specified.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
135
Chapter 8 Diagnostic Screens
136
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
9
Maintenance Screens
This chapter explains how to use the maintenance screens.
9.1 Configuration Backup Screen
Click Maintenance > Config Backup in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Use this screen to back up your system configuration. This allows you to create various “snap shots” of your device from which you may restore at a later date.
Figure 63 Configuration Backup
1 Click Backup to save your device’s configuration to your computer.
2 In the Save As screen, choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save
in drop-down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click
Save to save the configuration file to your computer.
"
You can change the “.dat” file to a “.txt” file and still upload it to the system.
See the chapters on commands to edit the configuration text file.
9.2 Configuration Restore Screen
Click Maintenance > Config Restore in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Use this screen to load a configuration file from your computer to the system.
137
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Maintenance Screens
Figure 64 Configuration Restore
Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display a Choose File screen from which you can locate it. After you have specified the file, click Restore. "conf-0" is the name of the configuration file on the system, so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen.
9.3 Configuration Reset Screen
Click Maintenance > Config Reset in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to clear all system configuration information that you have configured and return to the factory defaults.
Figure 65 Configuration Reset
138
Click Reset to return the system to the factory default settings.
Figure 66 Confirm Restore Factory Default Settings
Click OK to begin resetting all system configurations to the factory defaults and then wait for the system to restart. This takes up to two minutes. If you want to access the web configurator again, you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default system IP address (192.168.1.1 for in-band, 192.168.0.1 for out-of-band).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 67 Restart After Load Factory Defaults
Chapter 9 Maintenance Screens
9.4 Firmware Upgrade Screen
Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to view your current firmware version number and upload firmware to cards in the system. Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the card.
1
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage a card.
Figure 68 FW Upgrade
Select the check boxes beside the card or cards to which you want to upload firmware. You can simultaneously upload firmware to cards of the same type. You can only upload firmware to cards that are active.
Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it. After you have specified the file, click Upgrade.
After the firmware upgrade process is complete, use this screen to verify your current firmware version number.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
139
Chapter 9 Maintenance Screens
9.5 Reboot Screen
Click Maintenance > Reboot in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to restart the system without physically turning the power off.
Figure 69 Reboot
Use the Config Save screen first if you want to save the system’s current configuration.
Otherwise, using the Reboot button will return the system to the configuration that was last saved to nonvolatile memory.
Click the Reboot button to display the following screen.
Figure 70 Confirm Restart
Click OK.
Figure 71 Rebooting
Click OK again and wait for the system to restart. This takes up to two minutes.
140
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
10
Multicast Screens
This chapter describes the Multicast screens.
10.1 IGMP Introduction
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFCs 1112, 2236 and 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
10.1.1 IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts
(multicast group) in a different sub-network. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by
IANA for special purposes (see the IANA web site for more information).
10.1.2 IGMP Snooping
A layer-2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP versions 2 and 3) packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the system to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
The system forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from
IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. The system discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your device.
10.1.3 IGMP Proxy
To allow better network performance, you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
141
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
In IGMP proxy, an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source (or the root of the multicast tree) and is able to receive multicast traffic. There should only be one upstream interface (also known as the query port) on the system to limit bandwidth use. A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host (such as a computer). A query VLAN determines which ports are downstream interfaces.
The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1, 2 and 3 are the receivers. In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1, 2 and 3 are connected to the downstream interface.
Figure 72 IGMP Proxy Network Example
A
142
3
1 2
The system will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface. The system only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface. The system sends
IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN.
The system only sends an IGMP leave messages via the upstream interface when the last host leaves a multicast group.
One of the Ethernet ports acts as the upstream interface. By default, the DSL ports are set as the downstream interfaces.
"
The switch does not allow a subscriber port to send multicast traffic (except static multicast traffic) to an uplink port. Only the uplink port can forward multicast traffic to the subscriber port(s).
10.1.4 IGMP Snooping and Proxy Note
The IES-5000 acts as an IGMPv3 client host for an edge IGMPv3 multicast router and as a
IGMPv2/v3 router for IGMPv2/v3 client hosts (subscribers). The IES-5000 can recognize
IGMPv3 protocol messages and forward them towards the IGMP multicast router. It does not support full-featured IGMPv3 functions like source IP address control specified in RFC 3376.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
10.2 IGMP Setup Screen
Click Multicast > IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next. Use this screen to configure your IGMP settings.
Figure 73 IGMP Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 IGMP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Mode
IGMP Version Select which version of IGMP you want the system to support. Select IGMPv2 (V2) or
IGMPv3 (V3). If you select IGMPv2, the system discards IGMPv3 packets. This provides better security if none of the devices in the network use IGMPv3. If you select IGMPv3, the system recognizes both IGMPv2 and IGMPv3.
Add Static
Query VID
Type the number for an IGMP proxy VLAN and click Apply to add a static VLAN on which the system sends IGMP query messages. This should be the number of a subscriber VLAN. The VLAN will appear in the Static Query VID Table. You must configure the system’s VLAN settings before you can set static query VIDs.
Static Query
VID Table
Select Enable_IGMP_Snooping to have the system passively learn multicast groups.
Select Enable_IGMP_Proxy to have the system proxy multicast traffic.
Select Disable to have the system not use either IGMP proxy or snooping.
Dynamic
Query VID
Table
This table lists the manually added VLANs on which the system sends IGMP query messages. These are multicast service subscriber VLANs.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry.
This table lists the IGMP query VLANs that the system has dynamically learned via
IGMP snooping or IGMP proxy. These are VLANs on which the system sends IGMP query messages. They are multicast service subscriber VLANs.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
143
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
10.3 IGMP Filtering
With the IGMP filtering feature, you can set which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join. This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services (such as content information distribution) based on service plans and types of subscription.
You can set the device to filter the multicast group join reports on a per-port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port.
10.4 IGMP Filter Setup Screen
You can use the IGMP filter profiles to control access to a service that uses a specific multicast group (like a SIP server for example). Configure an IGMP filter profile that allows access to that multicast group. Then assign the IGMP filter profile to ADSL ports that are allowed to use the service.
Click Multicast > IGMP > Filter Setup to open the following screen.
The DEFVAL IGMP filter profile is assigned to all of the DSL ports by default. It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses (224.0.0.0~239.255.255.255). If you want to allow an DSL subscriber access to only specific IGMP multicast groups, use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure a different profile and then use the IGMP Filter Setup screen to assign it to the subscriber’s DSL port.
Use the top of the screen to set the IGMP filter profile that an individual DSL port (or entire slot) uses. Click an ID number in the bottom part of the screen to go to a screen where you can copy a DSL port’s IGMP filter profile setting to another DSL port.
Figure 74 IGMP Filter Setup
144
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 IGMP Filter Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Profile
Apply
Cancel
Copy
Select the number of a line card’s slot.
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
Click Load to retrieve the port’s IGMP filter profile setting and display it in the Profile drop-down list box.
Select an IGMP filtering profile.
Click Apply to have the specified DSL port use the selected IGMP filter profile.
Click Cancel to set the fields back to the settings that you last retrieved.
Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes and the Load button to select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy IGMP filter profile settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 75 Copy
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the IGMP filter profile setting. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the IGMP filter settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
This column lists the slot numbers of the line cards. Click the ID number of an active line card to go to a screen where you can copy a DSL port’s IGMP filter profile setting to another DSL port.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
145
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
10.4.1 IGMP Filter Setup Slot Screen
Click Multicast > IGMP > Filter Setup and then the slot number of an active line card to open the following screen.
Figure 76 IGMP Filter Setup: Slot
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 IGMP Filter Setup: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Port
Profile
Copy
Click this to return to the IGMP Filter Setup screen.
These are the numbers of the DSL ports on the line card.
This is the IGMP filtering profile that a DSL port is currently set to use.
Do the following to copy IGMP filter settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Select the radio button of the DSL port from which you want to copy IGMP filter profile settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 77 IGMP Filter Copy
146
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the IGMP filter profile setting. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the IGMP filter settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
10.5 Static Multicast
Use static multicast to allow incoming frames based on multicast MAC address(es) that you specify. This feature can be used in conjunction with IGMP snooping to allow multicast MAC address(es) that are not learned by IGMP snooping or IGMP proxy. Use static multicast to pass routing protocols, such as RIP and OSPF.
10.6 Static Multicast Screen
Click Multicast > Static Multicast in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next.
Figure 78 Static Multicast
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 42 Static Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID
Group IP
Type the number of the VLAN that this static multicast group is to use.
This is the static multicast IP address.
Type a VID and a group IP and click Apply to display entries in the first table.
Index This column lists the slot numbers of the line cards. Click the number of an active line card to go to a screen where you can set the membership of each of the card’s ports for this static multicast group.
Cardname This field displays the type of card installed in a slot.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
147
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
Table 42 Static Multicast (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Apply
New
Cancel
Modify
Delete
VID
Group IP
Port
Slot
Select
This section lists the VLAN membership setting of each port on each line card. An “F” indicates that the port is a permanent member of the static multicast group. An “X” indicates that the port is forbidden (blocked) from joining the static multicast group.
An “-” indicates that the port is a normal member and can join the group dynamically.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
After you click Apply, entries display in the first table so you can edit them. Click New if you want to configure a different static multicast group.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Select a static multicast group’s radio button and click Modify to display the static multicast group in the table above so you can edit it.
Select a static multicast group’s radio button and click Delete to remove the static multicast group.
This is the number of the VLAN that this static multicast group uses.
This is the static multicast IP address.
This section lists the VLAN membership setting of the ports on the management switch card. An “F” indicates that the port is a permanent member of the static multicast group. An “X” indicates that the port is forbidden (blocked) from joining the static multicast group. An “-” indicates that the port is a normal member and can join the VLAN dynamically.
This section displays the numbers of any slots that are fixed members of the static multicast group. All other slots are represented by a “-”.
Select a static multicast group’s radio button and then click Modify to be able to edit it or click Delete to remove it.
10.6.1 Static Multicast Slot Screen
Click Multicast > Static Multicast in the navigation panel to display the Static Multicast screen. Type a VID and a group IP and click Apply to display entries in the first table. Click the slot number of an active line card to open the following screen.
148
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 79 Static Multicast Slot
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 43 Static Multicast Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
1~X
Apply
Cancel
The numbers represent the individual ports on the card.
Use the F, -, and X radio buttons to set each port’s membership in the static multicast group.
Select F to make the port a permanent member of the static multicast group.
Select - to make the port a normal member and allow it to join the VLAN dynamically.
Select X to set the port to “forbidden” meaning it is always blocked from joining the static multicast group.
Use the All Fix, All Normal or All Forbidden button if you want to set all of the card’s ports to the same membership status for this static multicast group.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to close the screen without saving your changes.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
149
Chapter 10 Multicast Screens
150
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
11
DSL Port Setup Screens
This chapter explains how to configure settings for individual DSL ports. It also covers how to configure permanent virtual circuits.
11.1 ADSL Standards Overview
These are the ADSL standards and rates that the ADSL line card supports at the time of writing. The actual transfer rates will vary depending on what the subscriber’s device supports, the line conditions and the connection distance.
Table 44 ADSL Standards Maximum Transfer Rates
STANDARD MAXIMUM DOWNSTREAM MAXIMUM UPSTREAM
ANSI T1.413 issue 2
G.lite
ADSL2
ADSL2 Annex M
ADSL2+
ADSL2+ Annex M
8160 Kbps
1536 Kbps
12000 Kbps
12000 Kbps
25000 Kbps
25000 Kbps
1024 Kbps
512 Kbps
1200 Kbps
2400 Kbps
1200 Kbps
2400 Kbps
11.2 VDSL Parameters
The following sections introduce some VDSL parameters.
11.2.1 Frequency Band Plan
Each VDSL mode operates in a different frequency band allocation, resulting in different upstream and downstream speeds.
Band plan 997 is optimized for symmetric connections and is used mostly in Europe.
2
Band plan 998 is suitable for asymmetric connections and is widely used in North America.
2.
Band plan 997 is not supported at the time of writing.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
151
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.2.2 Upstream Power Back Off
PSD (Power Spectral Density) defines the distribution of a VDSL line’s power in the frequency domain.
In a network with varying telephone wiring lengths, the PSD on each line is different. This causes crosstalk between the lines. Enable Upstream Power Back Off (UPBO) to allow the system to adjust the transmit PSD of all lines based on a reference line length so that the PSD at the receiving end is the same.
11.2.3 RFI (Radio Frequency Interference)
RFI is induced noise on the lines by surrounding radio frequency electromagnetic radiation from sources such as AM and HAM radio stations. Since VDSL uses a much larger frequency range that overlaps with other radio frequency systems, signals from VDSL lines and other radio systems interfere with each other. To avoid performance degradation due to RFI, set the switch to not transmit VDSL signals in the RFI band defined by the regulatory bodies (ETSI and ANSI). You can also configure your own RFI bands on the system.
11.3 Downstream and Upstream
Downstream refers to traffic going out from the line card to the subscriber's DSL modem or router. Upstream refers to traffic coming into the line card from the subscriber's DSL modem or router.
11.4 DSL Profiles
A DSL profile is a table that contains a list of pre-configured DSL settings. Each DSL port has one (and only one) profile assigned to it at any given time. You can configure multiple profiles, including profiles for troubleshooting. Profiles allow you to configure DSL ports efficiently. You can configure many DSL ports with the same profile, thus removing the need to configure the settings of each DSL port one-by-one. You can also change an individual DSL port’s settings by assigning it a different profile.
For example, you could set up different profiles for different kinds of accounts (for example, economy, standard and premium). Assign the appropriate profile to an DSL port and it takes care of a large part of the port’s configuration. You still get to individually enable or disable each port and configure port specific settings. See the chapter on profiles for how to configure
DSL profiles.
11.5 Alarm Profiles
Alarm profiles define DSL port alarm thresholds. The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded. See the chapter on profiles for how to configure alarm profiles.
152
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.6 Default Settings
The default profiles always exists and all of the DSL ports use the default profile settings when the line card is shipped. The default profiles are named DEFVAL. Refer to the chapter on initial configuration for the settings of the default profile and DSL port default settings.
11.7 ADSL Port Setup
Click Port > ADSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure settings for individual ADSL ports.
Figure 80 ADSL Port Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 45 ADSL Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Enable
Mode
Select the number of a line card’s slot.
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
Click Load to display the port’s settings in the fields below.
Select this check box to turn on this port.
Select the port’s ADSL operational mode. Select the mode that the subscriber’s device uses or auto to have the system automatically determine the mode to use.
See
Table 44 on page 151 for information on the individual ADSL modes.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
153
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 45 ADSL Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ADSL Profile
Alarm Profile
Customer
Information
Telephone No.
Advanced
Feature
Apply
Cancel
Copy
Select a profile of ADSL settings (such as the transfer rate, interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings) to assign to this port. Use the ADSL Profile screen to configure ADSL port profiles.
Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded.
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this ADSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this ADSL port. You can use up to 15 English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Click the Setup button to open a screen where you can configure the ADSL port’s detailed settings.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Do the following to copy DSL settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes and the Load button to select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 81 Copy
154
ID
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
This column lists the slot numbers of the line cards. Click the ID number of an active ADSL line card to go to a screen where you can copy an ADSL port’s settings to another ADSL port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 45 ADSL Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
11.7.1 ADSL Port Setup Line Card Screen
Click Port > ADSL in the navigation panel to open the ADSL Port Setup screen. Click the slot number of an active ADSL line card to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure settings for individual ADSL ports and copy settings between ports.
Figure 82 ADSL Port Setup: Line Card
MSC1000G User’s Guide
155
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 46 ADSL Port Setup: Line Card
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Select column to choose a DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 83 Copy
156
Apply
Cancel
Port
Enable
Customer
Information
ADSL Profile
Mode
Select
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
These are the numbers of the DSL ports on the line card.
To configure advanced port settings, click a port number to display the ADSL Port
Setup screen.
Select a check box in this column to turn on a port. Select the check box at the top of the column to turn on all of the line card’s ports.
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this ADSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Select a profile of ADSL settings (such as the transfer rate, interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings) to assign to this port. Use the ADSL Profile screen to configure ADSL port profiles.
Select the port’s ADSL operational mode. Select the mode that the subscriber’s device uses or auto to have the system automatically determine the mode to use.
See
Table 44 on page 151 for information on the individual ADSL modes.
Use the Select column to choose a DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.7.2 ADSL Port Setup Advanced
Click Port > ADSL in the navigation panel to open the ADSL Port Setup screen. Click the slot number of an active ADSL line card and click a port number to display the configuration screen. Use this screen to configure an ADSL port’s detailed settings.
Figure 84 ADSL Port Setup: Advanced
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 47 ADSL Port Setup: Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Apply
Cancel
Enable
Customer Info
Telephone No.
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Select this check box to turn on this port.
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this ADSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this ADSL port. You can use up to 15 English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
157
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 47 ADSL Port Setup: Advanced (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ADSL Profile
Mode
Alarm Profile
ADSL2/2+
Feature
Annex I/J
Select a profile of ADSL settings (such as the transfer rate, interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings) to assign to this port. Use the ADSL Profile screen to configure ADSL port profiles.
Select an ADSL mode from the drop-down list box the card is to use.
Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded.
These are features available with ADSL2/2+. The subscriber’s ADSL device must also support the individual features in order to use them.
Enable Annex I /J to use all digital mode. With Annex I/J, the ADSL connection uses the full spectrum of the physical line and the user can not use POTS or ISDN service. This increases the upstream data rate.
Note: The subscriber cannot use POTS or ISDN services when you enable Annex I/J.
Annex L
Annex M
Option Mask
Enable Annex L to use reach extended ADSL2. This allows increased connection distances.
Select enable (narrow) to enable extended ADSL2 in narrow Power Spectral
Density (PSD) mode. Narrow mode supports longer loop lengths but has lower transmission speeds.
Select enable (wide) to enable extended ADSL2 in wide PSD mode. Narrow mode supports higher transmission speeds but requires shorter loop lengths.
Select disable to disable extended ADSL2.
Enable Annex M to use double upstream mode. This has the upstream connection use tones 6 to 63.
This field displays the bit mask that represents the features that have been disabled for this connection. Click the bit mask number to open the Option Mask screen where you can disable attributes for the port. This is for advanced troubleshooting.
Power
Management
Mode
Power Mode
Enable power management to reduce the amount of power used overall and reduce the instances of the connection going down. This increases or decreases the transmission power based on line conditions. It also decreases the number of service interruptions.
Select L2 to have the ADSL connection use power saving mode and reduce the rate when there is no traffic. The rate comes back up when there is traffic.
Select L3 to use both power management modes L2 and L3. L3 puts the ADSL connection to sleep mode when there is no traffic.
The power mode controls the connection’s power adaptivity.
Select fix to set the maximum downstream transmit power to the number you specify in the Max DS TxPower field.
Select priority to power to give the saving of transmission power priority over the transmission rate. The line card attempts to reduce its transmit power as much as possible while still maintaining the configured minimum rate. This only applies to the downstream connection and the ADSL operational mode must be G.dmt, ANSI
T1.413 or G.lite.
Select priority to rate to give the transmission rate priority over the saving of transmission power. The line card attempts to achieve the maximum configured transmission rate before reducing the transmit power.
Max US TxPower Set the maximum upstream transmit power, -130~200 in 0.1 dBm.
Max DS TxPower Set the maximum downstream transmit power, -50~200 in 0.1 dBm.
Max RxPower Set the maximum aggregate receive power at the line card’s port, -255~255 in 0.1 dBm. This only applies to the ADSL2/2+ ADSL operational modes.
158
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 47 ADSL Port Setup: Advanced (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Minimum Impulse
Noise Protection
Carrier Setup
US Carrier
DS Carrier
(32~255)
DS Carrier
(256~511)
Apply
Cancel
Sudden spikes in the line’s noise level (impulse noise) can cause errors and result in lost packets. Set the impulse noise protection minimum to have a buffer to protect the ADSL physical layer connection against impulse noise. This buffering causes a delay that reduces transfer speeds. It is recommended that you use a non-zero setting for real time traffic that has no error correction (like videoconferencing).
Select a number of DMT symbols to use for the minimum upstream impulse noise protection (Us_Inp) setting.
Select a number of DMT symbols to use for the minimum downstream impulse noise protection (Ds_Inp) setting.
Use this part of the screen to mask carrier tones. Masking a carrier tone disables the use of that tone on the ADSL port. Do this to have the system not use an
ADSL line’s tones that are known to have a high noise level.
The “0x” at the beginning of the mask fields indicates hexadecimal digits (0~ffffffff) are to be used. Each mask can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits. Each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones. The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a '1' masks (disables) the corresponding tone.
Use these fields to disable upstream carrier tones (from 0~63).
Mask0 = tones 0~31
Mask1 = tones 32~63
For example,”0x00000080” in the Mask0 field and “0x00000000” in the Mask1 field disables upstream carrier tone 8.
Use these fields to disable downstream carrier tones (from 32~255).
Mask1 = tones 32~63
Mask2 = tones 64~95
Mask3 = tones 96~127
Mask4 = tones 128~159
Mask5 = tones 160~191
Mask6 = tones 192~223
Mask7 = tones 224~255
For example, “0x01000000” in the Mask2 field and all of the other mask fields set to the default disables downstream carrier tone 89.
“0x03000000” in the Mask2 field and all of the other mask fields set to the default disables downstream carrier tones 89 and 90.
Use these fields to disable downstream carrier tones (from 256~511).
Mask0 = tones 256~287
Mask1 = tones 288~319
Mask2 = tones 320~351
Mask3 = tones 352~383
Mask4 = tones 384~415
Mask5 = tones 416~447
Mask6 = tones 448~479
Mask7 = tones 480~511
For example, “0x00001000” in the Mask1 field and all of the other mask fields set to the default disables downstream carrier tone 301.
For another example, “0x0000f000”in the Mask1 field and all of the other mask fields set to the default disables downstream carrier tones 301 to 304.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
159
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.7.3 Option Mask Screen
Click the Option Mask link in the advanced ADSL Port Setup screen to display a pop-up screen as shown. Use this screen to disable features on a port for advanced troubleshooting.
Figure 85 ADSL Port Setup: Advanced: Option Mask
160
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 48 ADSL Port Setup: Advanced: Option Mask
LABEL DESCRIPTION
All
Disable Trellis
Use the check boxes to disable individual features. Use the All check box to select every feature check box.
Trellis encoding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
Reed-Solomon performs transmission error correction. Disable Reed
Solomon
Disable
Upstream/
Downstream
Bitswap
Disable 1-bit
Constellation
Bit swapping allows the system to respond to noise on a tone by sending it’s data on another tone. The subscriber (ATU-R) equipment must also support this in order for it to work.
1-bit constellation allows the system to send individual bits over DMT tones that can only support one bit. This allows the connection to use as many of the tones as possible.
Transmit windowing is only available with ADSL2+.
Disable Transmit
Windowing
Disable S=0.5
Support(ADSL1
Only)
Disable G.lite
Rate Limit
(ADSL1 Only)
Current Option mask is:
Apply
Cancel
0.5 support maps two Reed-Solomon code words into one data frame (instead of one) to increase the maximum G.dmt transmission rate.
Disabling the G.lite rate limit allows the G.lite upstream transmission rate to be greater than 512 Kbps.
Selecting or clearing feature check boxes adjusts the current option mask displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to close the screen without saving your changes.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.8 VDSL Port Setup
Click Port > VDSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure settings for individual VDSL ports.
Figure 86 VDSL Port Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 49 VDSL Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Enable
VDSL Profile
Frequency
Bandplan
Alarm Profile
Select the number of a line card’s slot.
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
Click Load to display the port’s settings in the fields below.
Select this check box to turn on this port.
Select a VDSL line profile to assign to this port. Use the VDSL Profile screen to configure VDSL port profiles.
Select a profile defined by the VDSL standard from the drop-down list box. Refer to
for profile information.
Specify a band plan in this field.
Select 997 for symmetric connections.
A
Select 998 for asymmetric connections.
Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
161
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 49 VDSL Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Customer
Information
Telephone No.
Advanced
Features
VLAN
Apply
Cancel
Copy
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this DSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this DSL port. You can use up to 15 English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Click the Setup button to open a screen where you can configure the VDSL port’s detailed settings.
Click the Setup button to open a screen where you can configure the VLAN settings for the VDSL port.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Do the following to copy DSL settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes and the Load button to select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 87 Copy
162
ID
State
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
This column lists the slot numbers of the line cards. Click the ID number of an active DSL line card to go to a screen where you can copy an DSL port’s settings to another DSL port.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive state.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 49 VDSL Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
A.
Band plan 997 is not supported at the time of writing.
11.8.1 VDSL Port Setup Line Card Screen
Click Port > VDSL in the navigation panel to open the VDSL Port Setup screen. Click the slot number of an active VDSL line card to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure settings for individual VDSL ports and copy settings between ports.
Figure 88 VDSL Port Setup: Line Card
MSC1000G User’s Guide
163
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 50 VDSL Port Setup: Line Card
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Select column to choose a DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
2. Click Copy to display the following screen.
Figure 89 Copy
Apply
Cancel
Port
Enable
Customer
Information
VDSL Profile
Select
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
These are the numbers of the DSL ports on the line card.
To configure advanced port settings, click a port number to display the VDSL Port
Setup screen.
Select a check box in this column to turn on a port. Select the check box at the top of the column to turn on all of the line card’s ports.
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this VDSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Select a profile of VDSL settings (such as the transfer rate, interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings) to assign to this port. Use the VDSL Profile screen to configure VDSL port profiles.
Use the Select column to choose a DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
11.8.2 VDSL Port Setup Advanced
Click Port > VDSL in the navigation panel to open the VDSL Port Setup screen. Click the slot number of an active VDSL line card and click a port number to display the configuration screen. Use this screen to configure an VDSL port’s detailed settings.
164
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 90 VDSL Port Setup: Advanced
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 51 VDSL Port Setup: Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Customer Info
Telephone No.
VDSL Profile
Frequency
Bandplan
Alarm Profile
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this VDSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this VDSL port. You can use up to 15 English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Select a VDSL line profile to assign to this port. Use the VDSL Profile screen to configure VDSL port profiles.
Select a profile defined by the VDSL standard from the drop-down list box. Refer to
for profile information.
Specify a band plan in this field.
Select 997 for symmetric connections.
A
Select 998 for asymmetric connections.
Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
165
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 51 VDSL Port Setup: Advanced (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enter the port VID and the VLAN priority. PVID/Priority
VDSL Feature
Upstream
Power Backoff
RFI Band
RFI Custom
Index
Enable
Start
End
Apply
Cancel
UPBO (Upstream Power Back Off) allows the switch to provide better service in a network environment with telephone wiring of varying lengths.
Select On to activate this feature.
Select Off to deactivate this feature.
RFI is induced noise on the lines by surrounding radio sources such as AM and
HAM radio stations. To avoid performance degradation due to RFI, set the switch to not transmit VDSL signals in the RFI band plans defined by the regulatory bodies. You can also configure your own RFI band plans on the system.
Select ansi to use the RFI band plan settings defined by ANSI.
Select etsi to use the RFI band plan settings defined by ETSI.
Select Disable to deactivate this function.
Select Custom to configure RFI settings in the fields below.
Settings in these fields apply to all VDSL ports. This means if you change the custom RFI settings on one VDSL port, the same changes apply to all other VDSL ports.
This field displays the index number.
Select Enable to activate the RFI band.
Enter the start of the frequency range in kilo Herz (kHz).
Enter the end of the frequency range in kHz.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again.
A.
Band plan 997 is not supported at the time of writing.
The following table lists the supported VDSL profiles defined by the VDSL standard.
Table 52 Supported VDSL Profiles
PROFILE 8A 8B 8C 8D 12A
Bandwidth (MHz)
Tone
Tone Spacing (kHz)
Line Power (dBm)
8.832
8.832
8.5
2048 2048 1972
8.832
12
2048 2783
4.3125
4.3125
4.3125
4.3125
4.3125
+17.5
+20.5
+11.4
+14.5
+14.5
11.8.3 Transparent LAN Service (TLS)
Transparent LAN Service (also known as VLAN stacking or Q-in-Q) allows a service provider to distinguish multiple customers VLANs, even those with the same (customer-assigned)
VLAN ID, within its network.
166
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Use TLS to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that enter the network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service provider can manage up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4,094 customer VLANs.
This allows a service provider to provide different services, based on specific VLANs, for many different customers.
A service provider’s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications. A service provider’s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags to traffic.
The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer. Therefore, there is no
VLAN tag overlap among customers, so traffic from different customers is kept separate.
Before the switch sends the frames from the customers, the VLAN ID is added to the frames.
When packets intended for specific customers are received on the MSC1000G, the outer
VLAN tag is removed before the traffic is sent.
11.8.4 TLS Network Example
In the following example figure, both A and B are Service Provider’s Network (SPN) customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively. Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group. The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network.
Figure 91 VLAN Stacking Example
11.8.4.1 VLAN Tag Format
A VLAN tag (service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802.1Q) consists of the following three fields.
Table 53 VLAN Tag Format
Type Priority VID
Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. SP TPID (Service Provider Tag Protocol
Identifier) is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type. The system use 0x8100.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
167
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) is the customer IEEE 802.1Q tag.
Priority refers to the IEEE 802.1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service (CoS) the customer has paid for.
• On the switch, configure the priority level of the inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port Setup screen.
• "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VID is the VLAN ID. SP VID is the VID for the second (service provider’s) VLAN tag.
11.8.4.2 Frame Format
The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame, a single-tagged 802.1Q frame (customer) and a “double-tagged” 802.1Q frame (service provider) is shown next.
Configure the fields as circled in the switch VLAN Stacking screen.
Table 54 Single and Double Tagged 802.1Q Frame Format
DA SA Len/
Etype
Data FCS Untagged
Ethernet frame
DA SA SPTPI
D
DA SA
TPID Priorit y
Priority VID TPID Priorit y
VID Len/
Etype
VID
Len/
Etype
Data FCS IEEE 802.1Q
customer tagged frame
Data FCS Double-
tagged frame
Table 55 802.1Q Frame
DA
SA
Destination Address
Source Address
Priority
Len/
Etype
(SP)TPID (Service Provider) Tag Protocol IDentifier Data
VID VLAN ID FCS
802.1p Priority
Length and type of Ethernet frame
Frame data
Frame Check Sequence
11.8.5 VDSL VLAN Setup
Click Port > VDSL in the navigation panel to open the VDSL Port Setup screen. Select a
VDSL line card ID, a port index number and click Setup next to VLAN to open the following screen. Use this screen to add the VDSL port to VLANs (or remove it from VLANs) and configure the TLS (Transparent LAN Service) settings.
168
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 92 VDSL VLAN Setup
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 56 VDSL Port Setup: VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
PVID/Priority
TLS Enable
SPVID/Priority
Apply
Cancel
VID
Registration
Tag
Click this to return to the previous screen.
PVID refers to the customer’s VLAN ID. In the first field, enter the customer VLAN
ID (from 1 to 4094) for frames received on this port.
In the second field, enter the priority level for the customer VLAN ID. "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
Transparent LAN Service (also known as VLAN stacking or Q-in-Q) allows a service provider to distinguish multiple customers VLANs, even those with the same (customer-assigned) VLAN ID, within its network.
Select this option to enable TLS (Transparent LAN Service). Clear this check box
to disable this feature. Refer to Section 27.22 on page 461
for more information.
SPVID refers to the service provider’s VLAN ID (the outer VLAN tag). In the first field, enter the service provider ID (from 1 to 4094) for frames received on this port.
In the second field, enter the priority level for the service provider’s VLAN ID. "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Type a VID (VLAN ID) to add this port as a member.
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The port that you are configuring must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
Select join to have the port be a member of the specified VLAN.
Select leave to remove the port from the specified VLAN.
Select the check box to tag all frames transmitted on this port with the port’s VID.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
169
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 56 VDSL Port Setup: VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
The table in the bottom half of the screen lists the VLANs that the port is a member of.
Modify Click Modify to display the selected VLAN membership entry’s settings in the fields above so you can edit them.
Delete
Index
VID
Registration
Click Delete to remove the selected VLAN membership entry.
This is the number of the VLAN membership entry.
This field displays the number of a VLAN (VLAN ID) of which this port is a member.
This field displays “fixed” to indicate that the port is a member of the specified
VLAN.
Tag
Select
This field displays “V” if the line card is to tag all frames that are transmitted out on this port with this VLAN group ID. It displays “-” if the line card does not tag all frames that are transmitted out on this port with this VLAN group ID.
Select the radio button of a VLAN membership entry and then use the Modify button or the Delete button.
11.9 SHDSL Port Setup
Click Port > SHDSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure settings for individual SHDSL ports.
170
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 93 SHDSL Port Setup
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 57 SHDSL Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Enable
SHDSL Profile
Select the number of a line card’s slot.
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
Click Load to display the port’s settings in the fields below.
Select this check box to turn on this port.
Span Alarm
Profile
Select a profile of SHDSL settings (such as the transfer rate, wire pair and signal to noise ratio settings) to assign to this port. Use the SHDSL Profile screen to configure SHDSL port profiles.
Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded. This alarm profile is for the whole span. This is the entire connection including any SHDSL regenerators that might be located between the
STU-C (SHDSL Termination Unit - Central) and STU-R (SHDSL Termination Unit -
Remote) end points. An SHDSL regenerator amplifies the SHDSL signal in order to increase the connection distance.
Stuc Alarm Profile Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded. This alarm profile is for the STU-C (SHDSL Termination Unit -
Central) end point.
Stur Alarm Profile Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded. This alarm profile is for the STU-R (SHDSL Termination Unit -
Remote) end point.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
171
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 57 SHDSL Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Customer
Information
Telephone No.
Advanced
Features
Apply
Cancel
Copy
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this DSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this DSL port. You can use up to 15 English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Click the Setup button to open a screen where you can configure the SHDSL port’s detailed settings.
Click Apply to have the specified DSL port use the selected IGMP filter profile.
Click Cancel to set the fields back to the settings that you last retrieved.
Do the following to copy DSL settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes and the Load button to select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 94 Copy
172
ID
State
Card Type
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
This column lists the slot numbers of the line cards. Click the ID number of an active SHDSL line card to go to a screen where you can copy an SHDSL port’s settings to another SHDSL port.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 57 SHDSL Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Up Time
Firmware
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
11.9.1 SHDSL Port Setup Line Card Screen
Click Port > SHDSL in the navigation panel to open the SHDSL Port Setup screen. Click the slot number of an active SHDSL line card to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure settings for individual SHDSL ports and copy settings between ports.
Figure 95 SHDSL Port Setup: Line Card
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 58 SHDSL Port Setup: Line Card
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Copy
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Select column to choose a DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 96 Copy
MSC1000G User’s Guide
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
173
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 58 SHDSL Port Setup: Line Card (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Cancel
Port
Enable
Customer
Information
SHDSL Profile
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
These are the numbers of the DSL ports on the line card.
Select a check box in this column to turn on a port. Select the check box at the top of the column to turn on all of the line card’s ports.
Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this DSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Select a profile of SHDSL settings (such as the transfer rate, wire pair and signal to noise ratio settings) to assign to this port. Use the SHDSL Profile screen to configure SHDSL port profiles.
Select
Note: You must apply the same profile on the two SHDSL ports connecting to the same subscriber device.
Use the Select column to choose a DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
11.9.2 SHDSL Port Setup Advanced
Click Port > SHDSL in the navigation panel to open the SHDSL Port Setup screen. Click the
Setup button to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure an SHDSL port’s detailed settings.
Figure 97 SHDSL Port Setup: Advanced
174
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 59 SHDSL Port Setup: Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Apply
Cancel
Enable
SHDSL Profile
Span Alarm
Profile
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Select this check box to turn on this port.
Select a profile of SHDSL settings (such as the transfer rate, wire pair and signal to noise ratio settings) to assign to this port. Use the SHDSL Profile screen to configure SHDSL port profiles.
Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded. This alarm profile is for the whole span. This is the entire connection including any SHDSL regenerators that might be located between the
STU-C (SHDSL Termination Unit - Central) and STU-R (SHDSL Termination Unit -
Remote) end points. An SHDSL regenerator amplifies the SHDSL signal in order to increase the connection distance.
Stuc Alarm Profile Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded. This alarm profile is for the STU-C (SHDSL Termination Unit -
Central) end point.
Stur Alarm Profile Select an alarm profile to define the thresholds that trigger an alarm on the port when exceeded. This alarm profile is for the STU-R (SHDSL Termination Unit -
Remote) end point.
Customer Info Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this ADSL port. You can use up to 31 printable English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
Telephone No.
Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this ADSL port. You can use up to 15 English keyboard characters (including spaces and hyphens).
SHDSL Feature
Power Backoff This command sets the power backoff feature setting on the SHDSL port. Power backoff calculates how much power is needed for the connection. This allows the
STU-C and STU-R to use only enough power for the port’s maximum transmission rate (configured in the SHDSL profile). You can normally just leave the default setting (NORMAL_EPL), you only need to use this command if the STU-R does not support EPL or you need to configure the port to use a specific power backoff setting.
Select NORMAL_EPL to use power backoff with EPL (Estimated Power Loss).
Each end calculates an EPL and uses it in determining a power backoff value for the other end to use.
Select FORCED_EPL to use forced power backoff with EPL. The STU-C calculates an EPL and uses it in determining the power backoff values for both ends. This can be used when the STU-R device does not support EPL.
Select FORCED_NO_EPL to use forced power backoff without EPL. The STU-C uses the value you specify in determining the power backoff values for both ends.
This can be used when you have prior knowledge about the physical line (loop).
Set the power backoff value (0~31 in dBm).
When using NORMAL_EPL or FORCED_EPL, this sets the maximum power backoff value.
When using FORCED_NO_EPL, this sets the power backoff value.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
175
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 59 SHDSL Port Setup: Advanced (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The Negotiated
Noise Margin
Mode
Apply
Cancel
Specify how the target noise margin value is acquired.
Select normal to have each end of the connection determine the target noise margin to be used by the other end.
Select forced to set the upstream and downstream parameters according to the target noise margin value set in the SHDSL profile.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again.
11.10 Permanent Virtual Circuits
A Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) is a logical point-to-point circuit between sites. PVCs are low-delay circuits because routing decisions do not need to be made along the way. Permanent means that the circuit is pre-programmed by the carrier as a path through the network. It does not need to be set up or torn down for each session. PVCs are also called virtual channels.
The system can handle multiple IEEE 802.1p priority queues on a single PVC. You can also define up to eight PVCs on a DSL port and use them for different services or levels of service.
You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel. You also set an IEEE 802.1p priority for each of the PVIDs. In this way you can assign different priorities to different channels (and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them).
For example, you want to give high priority to voice service on one of the ADSL ports. First configure a static VLAN on the system for voice on the port. Then do the following:
• Configure a channel on the port for voice service.
• Set the channel to use the PVID of the static VLAN you configured.
• Assign the channel a high priority.
11.10.1 LLC
LLC is a type of encapsulation where one VC (Virtual Circuit) carries multiple protocols with each packet header containing protocol identifying information. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
11.10.2 VC Mux
VC Mux is a type of encapsulation where, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit, for example, VC1 carries IP, VC2 carries IPX, and so on.
VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
176
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.10.3 ATM Profiles
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS
(Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM profiles allow you to configure the virtual channels efficiently. You can configure all of the virtual channels with the same profile, thus removing the need to configure the virtual channels one-by-one. You can also change an individual virtual channel by assigning it a different profile. See the chapter on profiles for information on how to configure ATM profiles.
11.11 PVC Setup Screen
Click Port > PVC in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to view and configure permanent virtual circuit settings for individual ports.
Figure 98 PVC Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 60 PVC Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PVC Table
Slot
Port
This table displays the PVCs that are configured for the selected port.
Select the number of a line card’s slot.
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
177
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 60 PVC Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Load
Index
VPI / VC
Profile
MUX
Type
PVID
Priority
Select
Modify
Copy
Click Load to display the port’s PVC settings in the PVC Table.
This is the number of the PVC on this port. Click a number to open a screen where you can add the PVC to more VLANs (or remove it from VLANs).
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier (VCI). The
VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
This field displays the ATM profile that this channel uses.
This field displays the encapsulation type (llc or vc) for this channel.
This field displays whether the channel is a PVC or a PPVC.
This field displays the PVID (Port VLAN ID) to assign to untagged frames received on this channel.
This field displays the priority value (0 to 7) that the line card adds to frames that come in on this PVC without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Select a PVC’s radio button and then use the Modify, Copy or Delete button.
Click Modify to display the selected PVC’s settings in the fields above so you can edit them.
Do the following to copy VLAN and PVC settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Select column to choose a PVC which you want to copy to another port.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 99 Copy
178
Delete
VPI / VCI
PVID
Profile
MUX
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click Select
None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
Click Delete to remove the selected PVC.
Type the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port.
Type a PVID (Port VLAN ID) to assign to untagged frames received on this channel.
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The port that you are configuring must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
Use the drop-down list box to select an ATM profile to assign to this channel.
Select the encapsulation type (llc or vc) for this channel.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 60 PVC Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Priority
Apply
Cancel
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
Type the priority value (0 to 7) to add to incoming frames without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
This column lists the slot numbers of the line cards. Click the ID number of an active
DSL line card to go to a screen where you can view and delete PVCs from the line card’s DSL ports.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be
due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See Section
34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
11.11.1 PVC Setup Slot Screen
Click Port > PVC in the navigation panel to open the PVC Setup screen. Click an active
ADSL or SHDSL line card’s ID number to open the following screen. Use this screen to view and delete PVCs from the line card’s DSL ports.
Figure 100 PVC Setup: Slot
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 61 PVC Setup: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Delete
Index
Port
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Click Delete to remove the selected PVC(s).
This is the number of the PVC. Click a number to open a screen where you can add the PVC to more VLANs (or remove it from VLANs).
This is the number of a DSL port on the line card.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
179
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 61 PVC Setup: Slot (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VPI / VC
Profile
MUX
Type
PVID
Priority
Select
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
This field displays the ATM profile that this channel uses.
This field displays the encapsulation type (llc or vc) for this channel.
This field displays whether the channel is a PVC or a PPVC.
This field displays the PVID (Port VLAN ID) to assign to untagged frames received on this channel.
This field displays the priority value (0 to 7) that the line card adds to frames that come in on this PVC without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Select one or more PVCs’ check boxes and then use the Delete button to remove it (or them). Use the Select All check box to select all of the PVCs for all of the line card’s ports.
11.11.2 PVC Setup VLAN Screen
Click Port > PVC in the navigation panel to open the PVC Setup screen. Click an active
ADSL or SHDSL card ID and a PVC’s index number to open the following screen. Use this screen to add the PVC to more VLANs (or remove it from VLANs). You can also get to this screen by clicking a PVC’s index number in the PVC Setup Slot screen.
Figure 101 PVC Setup: VLAN
180
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 62 PVC Setup: VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
VPI / VCI
VID
Click this to return to the previous screen.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify the channel.
Type a VID (VLAN ID) to add this channel as a member.
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The port that you are configuring must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 62 PVC Setup: VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Registration
Tag
Apply
Tag
Select
Select join to have the port be a member of the specified VLAN.
Select leave to remove the port from the specified VLAN.
Select the check box to tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PVC with this VLAN group ID.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
The table in the bottom half of the screen lists the VLANs that the PVC is a member of.
Modify Click Modify to display the selected VLAN membership entry’s settings in the fields above so you can edit them.
Delete
Index
VPI / VCI
VID
Click Delete to remove the selected VLAN membership entry.
This is the number of the VLAN membership entry.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify the channel.
This field displays the number of a VLAN (VLAN ID) of which this channel is a member.
Registration This field displays “fixed” to indicate that the port is a member of the specified
VLAN.
This field displays “V” if the line card is to tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PVC with this VLAN group ID. It displays “-” if the line card does not tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PVC with this VLAN group ID.
Select the radio button of a VLAN membership entry and then use the Modify button or the Delete button.
11.12 Priority-based PVCs
A PPVC (Priority-based PVC) allows you to give different priorities to PVCs that are members of the same VLAN. The system maps frames with IEEE 802.1p priorities to PVCs with the matching priority.
11.13 PPVC Setup Screen
Click Port > PPVC in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to view and configure PPVCs.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
181
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Figure 102 PPVC Setup
182
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 63 PPVC Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PVC Table
Slot
Port
Load
Index
VPI / VC
MUX
Type
PVID
Priority
Select
Modify
This table displays the PVC’s that are configured for the selected port.
Select the number of an ADSL or SHDSL line card’s slot.
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
Click Load to display the port’s PVC settings in the PVC Table.
This is the number of the PVC on this port. Click a number to open a screen where you can add the channel to more VLANs (or remove it from VLANs).
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
This field displays the encapsulation type (llc or vc) for this channel.
This field displays whether the channel is a PVC or a PPVC.
This field displays the PVID (Port VLAN ID) to assign to untagged frames received on this channel.
This field displays the priority value (0 to 7) that the line card adds to frames that come in on this PVC without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Select a PVC’s radio button and then use the Modify, Copy or Delete button.
Click Modify to display the selected PVC’s settings in the fields above so you can edit them.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 63 PPVC Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Copy Do the following to copy VLAN and PVC settings from one DSL port to another
DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Select column to choose a PVC which you want to copy to another port.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 103 Copy
Delete
VPI / VCI
PVID
MUX
Priority
Modify
Apply
Cancel
ID
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
Click Delete to remove the selected PVC.
Type the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Circuit Identifier for a PPVC on this port.
Type a PVID (Port VLAN ID) to assign to untagged frames received on this PPVC.
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The port that you are configuring must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
Select the encapsulation type (llc or vc) for this PPVC.
Type the priority value (0 to 7) to add to incoming frames without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Click Modify to display the selected PVC’s settings in the fields above so you can edit them.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
This column lists the slot numbers of the line cards. Click the ID number of an active DSL line card to go to a screen where you can view and delete PVCs from the line card’s DSL ports.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
183
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 63 PPVC Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
11.13.1 PPVC Setup Slot Screen
Click Port > PPVC in the navigation panel to open the PPVC Setup screen. Click an active
ADSL or SHDSL line card’s ID number to open the following screen. Use this screen to view and delete PPVCs from the line card’s DSL ports.
Figure 104 PPVC Setup: Slot
184
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 64 PPVC Setup: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Delete
Index
Port
VPI / VC
Profile
MUX
Type
PVID
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Click Delete to remove the selected PVC(s).
This is the number of the PVC. Click a number to open a screen where you can add the PVC to more VLANs (or remove it from VLANs).
This is the number of a DSL port on the line card.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
This field displays the ATM profile that this channel uses.
This field displays the encapsulation type (llc or vc) for this channel.
This field displays whether the channel is a PVC or a PPVC.
This field display the PVID (Port VLAN ID) to assign to untagged frames received on this channel.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 64 PPVC Setup: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Priority
Select
This field displays the priority value (0 to 7) that the line card adds to frames that come in on this PVC without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Select one or more PVCs’ check boxes and then use the Delete button to remove it (or them). Use the Select All check box to select all of the PVCs for all of the line card’s ports.
11.13.2 PPVC Setup VLAN Screen
Click Port > PPVC in the navigation panel to open the PPVC Setup screen. Click an index number of a card and a PPVC’s index number to open the following screen. Use this screen to add the PPVC to more VLANs (or remove it from VLANs). You can also get to this screen by clicking a PPVC’s index number in the PPVC Setup Slot screen.
Figure 105 PPVC Setup: VLAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 65 PPVC Setup: VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
VPI / VC
VID
Registration
Click this to return to the previous screen.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify the channel.
Type a VID (VLAN ID) to add this channel as a member.
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The port that you are configuring must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
Select join to have the port be a member of the specified VLAN.
Select leave to remove the port from the specified VLAN.
Tag
Apply
Select the check box to tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PPVC with this VLAN group ID.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
The table in the bottom half of the screen lists the VLANs that the PVC is a member of.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
185
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 65 PPVC Setup: VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Modify
Delete
Index
VPI / VC
VID
Registration
Tag
Select
Click Modify to display the selected VLAN membership entry’s settings in the fields above so you can edit them.
Click Delete to remove the selected VLAN membership entry.
This is the number of the VLAN membership entry.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify the channel.
This field displays the number of a VLAN (VLAN ID) of which this channel is a member.
This field displays “fixed” to indicate that the port is a member of the specified
VLAN.
This field displays “V” if the line card is to tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PPVC with this VLAN group ID. It displays “-” if the line card does not tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PPVC with this VLAN group ID.
Select the radio button of a VLAN membership entry and then use the Modify button or the Delete button.
11.14 IP Bridge Overview
The IP bridge function is designed for large-scale, flat, access networks, and it is ideal when the network is based on Ethernet. When the IP bridge is enabled, the MSC1000G forwards frames based on the destination IP address, instead of the destination MAC address, and it replaces the source MAC address with its own MAC address.
186
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Figure 106 IP Bridge: Traditional vs. IP-aware DSLAM
Traditional
Forward by destination MAC
IP Aware
Forward by destination IP
The IP-aware MSC1000G does not modify the IP packet header, but it uses the destination IP address to modify the layer-2 header, in particular the source MAC address, destination MAC address, and VLAN tag. As a result, the MSC1000G prevents the MAC addresses and VLAN
ID downstream of the MSC1000G (in other words, the subscribers’ MAC addresses and
VLAN ID) from propagating into the network upstream of the MSC1000G, and vice versa.
In the end, the IP-aware MSC1000G makes the network more secure and more scalable, as explained below.
• User-to-user security. The MSC1000G does not forward subscribers’ MAC addresses upstream of the MSC1000G, so there is no way for subscribers to know each other’s MAC addresses. This prevents the spoofing of MAC addresses and IP addresses upstream of the
MSC1000G.
• Scalability. The scale of access networks is typically limited by the number of MAC addresses in the network. Since the MSC1000G does not forward subscribers’ MAC addresses or VLAN ID upstream, the upstream network is more scalable, and it is simpler to use the same VLAN ID upstream of several MSC1000G. In addition, the MSC1000G drastically reduces the scale of ARP traffic storms.
The MSC1000G itself is transparent in the network.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
187
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.14.1 Upstream and Downstream Traffic
When the MSC1000G forwards upstream traffic, it makes the following changes in the layer-2 header.
Table 66 IP Bridge: Layer-2 Header for Upstream Traffic
ORIGINAL UPDATED
Source MAC address
Destination MAC address
VLAN ID
Subscriber’s MAC address
MSC1000G’s MAC address
Subscriber’s VLAN ID
MSC1000G’s MAC address
Destination IP’s MAC address
Destination IP’s VLAN ID
The original frame has the MSC1000G’s MAC address as the destination MAC address because the MSC1000G, not the device that really has the destination IP, responded to the
ARP request for the destination IP. (This is part of the ARP proxy feature for IP bridges.) Once the MSC1000G receives the frame, it updates the MAC addresses and VLAN ID and forwards it to the device that really has the destination IP.
This is illustrated in the following example.
Figure 107 IP Bridge: Upstream Traffic Example
188
MAC x
MAC a
IP: 192.168.1.1
VLAN: 100
Source IP: 192.168.1.1
Source MAC: a
Destination IP: 192.168.10.5
Destination MAC: x
VLAN: 100
MAC g
IP 192.168.10.5
VLAN: 200
Source IP: 192.168.1.1
Source MAC:
x
Destination IP: 192.168.10.5
Destination MAC:
g
VLAN:
200
Notice that the MSC1000G does not change the IP packet header.
The process is reversed but otherwise similar for downstream traffic. The MSC1000G learns how to forward frames to the appropriate subscriber from one of the following sources.
• DHCP snooping. The IP-aware MSC1000G snoops DHCP packets, so it knows what IP addresses have been assigned to subscribers.
• ARP. The MSC1000G uses ARP to find out which subscriber has a particular IP address.
• Static information. You should provide forwarding information manually for subscribers that have static IP addresses and do not respond to ARP queries.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.14.2 IP Bridge Settings
The IP bridge function consists of the following settings.
• Domains and VLANs
• Edge routers
• Downlink interfaces
• Routing tables
• PVCs
• ARP proxy settings
Each set of settings is discussed in more detail in the following sections.
11.14.2.1 Domains and VLAN
A domain represents an ISP. Each domain is defined by (and dominates) the VLAN that are in it and has its own routing table and ARP table. As a result, two or more VLANs in different domains can use the same IP subnet, and one network can support multiple ISPs.
VLANs in IP bridges are exclusive. They can be in at most one domain. In addition, VLANs in
IP bridges share the same VLAN space as regular VLANs, so VLANs in IP bridges must have different VLAN IDs than regular VLANs.
11.14.2.1.1 Configuring VLANs for Domains
To add a VLAN to a domain,
1 Add (Join) a new (undefined) VLAN ID to the domain.
2 Create the VLAN in the system using the regular screens or commands for VLANs.
To remove a VLAN from a domain,
1 Delete the VLAN from the system using the regular screens or commands for VLANs.
2 Remove (Leave) the VLAN ID from the domain.
11.14.2.2 Edge Routers
Edge routers are usually the gateways that are provided to the subscribers. They can also be gateways that are specified in static routing table entries. Each edge router, in addition to its IP address, has an associated VLAN ID. When the MSC1000G forwards a frame to an edge router, it uses this VLAN ID to replace whatever VLAN ID the subscriber specified. The
MSC1000G also uses the VLAN ID to identify the domain the edge router is in.
If two edge routers are in different domains, it is possible for them to have the same IP address.
11.14.2.3 Downlink Interfaces
Downlink interfaces provide forwarding information for downstream traffic. The MSC1000G learns some of this information by snooping DHCP packets. For static IP addresses, you should provide this information manually. In this case, specify the VLAN ID and, optionally, the PVC for a range of IP addresses. The MSC1000G uses the VLAN ID to identify the domain the downlink interface is in. Downlink interfaces in the same domain cannot have overlapping IP addresses.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
189
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.14.2.4 Routing Tables
Each domain has its own routing table. Each routing table contains entries that, based on the destination IP address, control where the MSC1000G forwards packets (for upstream and downstream traffic). The MSC1000G automatically creates routing table entries for each downlink interface and for each edge router in the domain. You can create additional entries by specifying the edge router to which the MSC1000G should forward traffic for a particular destination IP address or IP subnet.
11.14.2.5 PVCs
IP bridge PVCs are similar to regular PVCs and are endpoints of the IP bridge. In addition, IP bridge PVCs are one of two types, IP over Ethernet or IP over ATM, depending on the underlying network.
The PVID is used to identify the domain the PVC is in, so the PVID must be in a domain.
11.14.2.6 ARP Proxy Settings
The MSC1000G is an ARP proxy for edge routers and subscribers in an IP bridge. You can configure basic settings for this, and you can look at (and flush, in some cases) the (PVC,
MAC, IP, VID) information the MSC1000G has learned using DHCP snooping and ARP.
11.14.3 IP Bridge Configuration
Follow these steps to set up a simple IP bridge.
1 Create a domain. (Each domain is an ISP.)
2 Create one or more VLANs in the domain. (For example, one VLAN is for high-speed
Internet, and another VLAN is for VoIP.)
3 Create the VLAN in the system using the regular screens or commands for VLANs.
4 Specify one or more edge routers for the domain.
5 Create routing table entries, so the MSC1000G forwards frames to the appropriate edge router.
6 Create downlink interfaces, so the MSC1000G forwards frames to the appropriate subscribers.
7 Create PVCs for the subscribers.
11.15 IPB ARP Proxy Screen
Use this screen to configure how long the MSC1000G keeps entries in the ARP table. You can also flush the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table for each domain.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge.
See
Section 13.7 on page 233 for how to display the ARP table for each domain.
190
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 108 IPB ARP Proxy
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 IPB ARP Proxy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Aging Time Enter a number of seconds (10~10000) to set how long the MSC1000G keeps
ARP table entries for IP bridge domains.
Cancel
Type
Domain
IP/Mask
Flush
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again.
Select whether you want to clear edge router, interface (or all) ARP table entries.
Select the domain whose ARP table you want to clear.
Select the IP address and subnet mask bit number whose ARP table you want to clear.
Click Flush to remove entries from the ARP table.
11.16 IPB Domain Screen
Use this screen to set up and maintain domains in an IP bridge. A domain represents an ISP.
Each domain is defined by (and dominates) the VLAN that are in it and has its own routing table and ARP table.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge > Domain.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
191
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Figure 109 IPB Domain
192
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 IPB Domain
LABEL
Name
DHCP VLAN
DESCRIPTION
Enter the name of the domain you want to create. You can use 1-31 printable
English keyboard characters, except for right angle brackets (>). Spaces are not allowed.
Select the VLAN where the domain’s DHCP server is located. If you select a specific VLAN, the MSC1000G forwards subscribers’ DHCP packets to the selected VLAN and changes the source MAC address to the MSC1000G’s MAC address. Select Disabled if there is no DHCP server for the domain, in which case the MSC1000G does not change the source MAC address in DHCP packets.
This setting has no effect on DHCP packets that come from VLANs where the
MSC1000G’s DHCP relay settings are active. See
DHCP relay settings take precedence over the IP bridge DHCP VLAN setting.
The MSC1000G also still adds whatever Option 82 information is specified for the VLAN in the DHCP relay settings.
Apply
New
Cancel
Click Apply to create the domain. It is then displayed in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Clicking Apply saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory. The
MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click New to set the screen to configure a new entry.
Click Cancel to start configuring this section of the screen again.
Add VLAN Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to add to the domain.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 68 IPB Domain (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Index
VLAN
Select
Click Apply to add the VLAN to the domain. It then appears in the table below.
Clicking Add saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory. The
MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
This field displays the index number of the VLAN in the domain.
This field displays the ID of each VLAN in the domain.
Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to remove the entry.
Select All
Cancel
Index
Name
DHCP VLAN
Select
Modify
Delete
Note: You have to delete every IP bridge setting (including DHCP
VLAN) that uses the selected VLAN before you can remove it from the domain.
Click this to select all entries in the table.
Click Cancel to start configuring this section of the screen again.
This field displays the number of the domain.
This field displays the name of each domain.
This field displays the VLAN where the domain’s DHCP server is located (or
disabled if there is no DHCP server for the domain).
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry. Click Modify to edit the entry or Delete to remove it.
11.17 IPB Edgerouter Screen
Use this screen to set up and maintain edge routers in an IP bridge. Edge routers are usually the gateways that are provided to the subscribers. They can also be the gateways that are specified in static routing table entries. If two edge routers are in different domains, it is possible for them to have the same IP address.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge > Edgerouter.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
193
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Figure 110 IPB Edgerouter
194
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 IPB Edgerouter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Edgerouter IP
NetMask
VID
Apply
New
Cancel
Index
Domain
Edgerouter IP
NetMask
VID
Select
Modify
Delete
Page X of X
Enter the IP address of the edge router.
Enter the number of bits in the subnet mask of the edge router.
Enter the ID of the VLAN of which the edge router is a member. The MSC1000G uses this VLAN ID when it forwards frames to the edge router. It also uses the
VLAN ID to identify the domain the edge router is in. You have to add the VLAN
ID to an IP bridge domain before you can enter it here.
Click Apply to create the edge router setting. It is then displayed in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Clicking Apply saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory. The
MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click New to set the screen to configure a new entry.
Click Cancel to start configuring this section of the screen again.
This field displays the number of the edge router.
This field displays the name of the domain to which the edge router belongs.
This field displays the IP address of the edge router.
This field displays the number of bits in the subnet mask of the edge router.
This field displays the VLAN ID of the edge router.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Modify to be able to edit the entry or Delete to remove it.
Previous/Next
This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Click one of these buttons to show the preceding/following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
11.18 IPB Interface Screen
Use this screen to set up and maintain forwarding information for downstream traffic. The
MSC1000G learns some of this information by snooping DHCP packets. For static IP addresses, you should provide this information manually. Downlink interfaces in the same domain cannot have overlapping IP addresses.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge > Interface.
See
Section 13.8 on page 234 for how to display all the forwarding information for
downstream traffic, whether learned by snooping DHCP packets or provided manually.
Figure 111 IPB Interface
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 IPB Interface
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface IP
NetMask
VID
PVC, Slot, Port
Use the top section to create downlink interfaces manually.
Enter the IP address and the number of bits in the subnet mask that define the range of IP addresses to which this downlink interface applies. If the destination
IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G tries to forward the frame to a subscriber in the specified VLAN or PVC. Downlink interfaces in the same domain cannot have overlapping IP addresses.
Enter the VLAN ID the subscriber is in. The MSC1000G uses this VLAN ID when it forwards frames to the subscriber. It also uses the VLAN ID to identify the domain the downlink interface is in. You have to add the VLAN ID to an IP bridge domain before you can enter it here.
Select the PVC check box if you want the MSC1000G to forward frames to a specific channel in the specified VLAN. Use the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes to select the line card and port for the channel.
VPI/VCI
Note: Make sure you specify a valid IP bridge PVC. Do not specify PVCs that are not defined in the IPBPVC screen in
These fields apply if you select the PVC check box. Type the Virtual Path
Identifier and Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
195
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 70 IPB Interface (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
New
Cancel
Index
Domain
Interface IP
NetMask
VID
Slot
Port
VPI/VCI
Select
Modify
Delete
Page X of X
Previous/Next
Click Apply to create the downlink interface. It is then displayed in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Clicking Apply saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory. The
MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click New to set the screen to configure a new entry.
Click Cancel to start configuring this section of the screen again.
The bottom section displays downlink interfaces created manually. It does not show forwarding information learned by snooping DHCP packets.
This field displays the index number of the downlink interface.
This field displays the name of the domain to which the edge router belongs.
This field displays the IP address and the number of bits in the subnet mask that define the range of IP addresses to which this downlink interface applies. If the destination IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G tries to forward the frame to a subscriber in the specified VLAN and PVC, if any.
This field displays the VLAN ID the subscriber is in.
This field displays the number of the slot where the line card is located. It displays “-” if the MSC1000G looks for the subscriber in the whole VLAN and not a specific PVC.
This field displays the number of the ADSL port on the line card to which the
MSC1000G forwards frames. It displays “-” if the MSC1000G looks for the subscriber in the whole VLAN and not a specific PVC.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI), if any. The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Modify to be able to edit the entry or Delete to remove it.
This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Click one of these buttons to show the preceding/following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
11.19 IPBPVC Screen
Use this screen to set up and maintain PVCs for subscribers in an IP bridge.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge > IPBPVC.
196
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 112 IPBPVC
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 IPBPVC
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Index
VPI/VCI
Profile
Type
IPBPVC
PVID
Priority
Use this drop-down list box to select the slot that contains a line card with a port for which you wish to set up an IP bridge PVC.
Use this drop-down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up an IP bridge PVC.
Click Load to display the port’s IPB PVC settings in the fields below.
This field displays the index number of a channel on this port. Click the index number to go to a screen where you can configure the IPB PVC’s VLAN settings
(see
).
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
This shows which ATM profile this channel uses.
This field displays IPB to indicate that this is an IPB PVC.
llc and vc are for a PVC running on Ethernet (IPoE), llc_r and vc_r are for a
PVC running on ATM (IPoA).
This is the VLAN ID assigned to frames received on this channel.
This is the priority value (0 to 7) added to incoming frames without a (IEEE
802.1p) priority tag.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
197
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 71 IPBPVC (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select
Modify
Copy
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Modify to be able to edit the entry, Copy to duplicate the entry’s settings on another port, or
Delete to remove the entry.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Modify to be able to edit the entry.
Do the following to copy the settings you configure above to another port or ports.
1. Click Copy.
2. Select to which line card you want to copy the settings.
3. Select to which ports on the line card you want to copy the settings. Use
Select All to select every port. Use Select None to clear all of the check boxes.
4. Click Apply to paste the settings.
198
Delete
VPI/VCI
PVID
Profile
IPBPVC Type
Priority
Apply
Cancel
ID
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to remove the entry.
Type the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port.
Type the VLAN ID to assign to frames received on this channel. This VLAN ID must be in an IP bridge domain.
Use the drop-down list box to select an ATM profile to use for this channel’s traffic shaping.
Use the drop-down list box to specify the encapsulation type for the PVC.
llc and vc are for a PVC running on Ethernet (IPoE), llc_r and vc_r are for a
PVC running on ATM (IPoA).
Use the drop-down list box to select the priority value (0 to 7) to add to incoming frames without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Click Apply to add or save channel settings on the selected port.
Clicking Apply saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory. The
MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again.
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card that supports PVC to display a list of the IPB PVCs on the selected line
card (see Section 11.19.2 on page 200
).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 71 IPBPVC (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a
malfunction. See Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays
stuck in the inactive state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
11.19.1 IPBPVC VLAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure a IPB PVC’s VLAN settings.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge > IPBPVC and then the index number of an IPB
PVC .
Figure 113 IPBPVC: VLAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 IPBPVC: VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
VPI/VCI
VID
Registration
Tag
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify a IPB PVC (a channel).
Type the VLAN ID to which this channel belongs. This VLAN ID must be in an IP bridge domain.
Select join to have the port be a member of the specified VLAN.
Select leave to remove the port from the specified VLAN.
Select the check box to tag all frames transmitted on this PVC with the port’s
VID.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
199
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 72 IPBPVC: VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Cancel
Index
VPI/VCI
VID
Registration
Tag
Select
Modify
Delete
Click Apply to save changes on the selected IPB PVC.
Clicking Apply saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory. The
MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again.
This field displays the index number of a IPB PVC on this port.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify a IPB PVC (a channel).
This is the VLAN ID to which this channel belongs.
This field displays fixed to indicate that the port is a member of the specified
VLAN.
This field displays V if the line card is to tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PVC with this VLAN group ID. It displays - if the line card does not tag all frames that are transmitted out on this PVC with this VLAN group ID.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Modify to be able to edit the entry, or Delete to remove the entry.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Modify to be able to edit the entry.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to remove the entry.
11.19.2 IPBPVC by Slot Screen
This screen displays all of the IPB PVCs on a particular line card.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge > IPBPVC and then the index number of an active line card that supports PVC .
Figure 114 IPBPVC: Slot
200
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 IPBPVC: Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP
Delete, Select
Index
Click UP to go back to the previous screen.
Select an entry’s Select check box and click Delete to remove the entry.
This field displays the index number of a IPB PVC on this slot. Click the index number to go to a screen where you can configure the IPB PVC’s VLAN settings
(see
).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 73 IPBPVC: Slot (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
VPI/VCI
Profile
Type
IPBPVC
PVID
Priority
Select
This field displays the port number of a port on this line card that has an IPB
PVC.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI). The VPI and VCI identify a IPB PVC (a channel).
This shows which ATM profile this channel uses.
This field displays IPB to indicate that this is an IPB PVC.
llc and vc are for a PVC running on Ethernet (IPoE), llc_r and vc_r are for a
PVC running on ATM (IPoA).
This is the VLAN ID assigned to frames received on this channel.
This is the priority value (0 to 7) added to incoming frames without a (IEEE
802.1p) priority tag.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to remove the entry.
11.20 IPB Route Screen
Use this screen to set up and maintain the routing table for each domain. Each routing table contains entries that, based on the destination IP address, control where the MSC1000G forwards packets. The MSC1000G automatically creates routing table entries for each downlink interface and for each edge router in the domain that the associated VLAN is in. You can create additional entries by specifying the edge router to which the MSC1000G should forward traffic for a particular destination IP address or IP subnet.
To open this screen, click Port > IP Bridge > Route.
Figure 115 IPB Route
MSC1000G User’s Guide
201
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 IPB Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Domain
Route IP
NetMask
Nexthop
Metric
Change Pbit
Apply
New
Cancel
Domain
Index
Route IP
NetMask
Nexthop
Metric
Use the top section to create routing table entries manually.
Select the domain to whose routing table you want to add this entry.
Enter the IP address and the number of bits in the subnet mask that define the range of IP addresses to which this entry applies. If the destination IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G forwards the frame to the specified edge router.
Enter the IP address to which the MSC1000G forwards frames if the destination
IP address of a packet is in the specified range.
If this IP address corresponds to an edge router in the edge router screen (see
Section 11.17 on page 193 ), the MSC1000G uses the associated VLAN ID. In
addition,
• If the edge router is in the same domain as the entry, the entry is used for upstream traffic.
• If the edge router is in a different domain than the entry, the entry is used for downstream traffic.
If the specified edge router is not set up in the edge router screen, the
MSC1000G uses the entry for downstream traffic and does not change the
VLAN ID.
The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directlyconnected networks. Select the number that approximates the cost for this link
The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
If two entries have the same metric, the MSC1000G uses the one with the lower
IP address.
If you want to set the IEEE 802.1p priority value of incoming frames, select the check box and use the drop-down list box to select the priority value (0 to 7) to use.
Click Apply to create the routing table entry. It is then displayed in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Clicking Apply saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory. The
MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click New to set the screen to configure a new entry.
Click Cancel to start configuring this section of the screen again.
The bottom section displays routing table entries created manually. It does not
show entries added automatically by the MSC1000G. See Section 13.9 on page
235 to look at the full routing table(s) for selected domain(s).
Select a domain for which you wish to view information and click Load to display it.
This field displays the number of the entry.
These fields display the IP address and the number of bits in the subnet mask that define the range of IP addresses to which this entry applies. If the destination IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G forwards the frame to the specified edge router.
This field displays the IP address to which the MSC1000G forwards frames if the destination IP address of a packet is in the specified range.
This field displays the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes.
202
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 74 IPB Route (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Change Pbit
Select
Modify
Delete
If you set the MSC1000G to change the IEEE 802.1p priority value of incoming frames, this field displays the priority value (0 to 7) to which the MSC1000G sets them. “-” displays if you do not set the MSC1000G to change the IEEE 802.1p priority value of incoming frames.
Select the radio button in the Select column for an entry and click Modify to be able to edit the entry or Delete to remove it.
11.21 Port Copy Screen
Click Port > Copy in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to copy DSL, VLAN and PVC settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
Figure 116 Port Copy
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 75 Port Copy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot Select the number of a line card’s slot.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
203
Chapter 11 DSL Port Setup Screens
Table 75 Port Copy (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Copy
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports.
1. Use the Slot and Port drop-down list boxes to select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy settings.
2. Click Copy to open the following screen.
Figure 117 Copy
3. Select a line card to which you want to copy settings.
4. Select the check boxes of the DSL ports on the line card to which you want to copy the settings. Click Select All to mark all of the port check boxes or click
Select None to clear all of the port check boxes.
5. Click Apply to copy the settings to all of the ports that you have selected in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.
204
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
12
Profile Screens
This chapter describes how to configure profiles to use in assigning settings to the DSL ports.
12.1 Profiles Overview
A profile is a list of settings that you define. Then you can use them to configure one or more individual ports or PVCs. You cannot delete or modify the DEFVAL profiles.
• Use ADSL profiles to configure ADSL port settings.
• Use SHDSL profiles to configure SHDSL port settings.
• Use VDSL profiles to configure VDSL port settings.
• Use ATM profiles to configure ATM traffic shaping settings to be used in configuring
PVCs.
• Use alarm ADSL profiles to configure alarm settings for ADSL ports.
• Use alarm SHDSL profiles to configure alarm settings for SHDSL ports.
• Use IGMP filter profiles to configure IGMP filter settings for DSL ports.
12.2 Interleave Delay
Interleave delay is the wait (in milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed.
Reed-Solomon codes are block-based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications.
The Reed-Solomon encoder takes a block of digital data and adds extra "redundant" bits. The
Reed-Solomon decoder processes each block and attempts to correct errors and recover the original data.
12.2.1 Fast Mode
Fast mode means no interleaving takes place and transmission is faster (a "fast channel"). This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary.
205
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
12.3 Configured Versus Actual ADSL Rates
You configure the maximum rate of an individual ADSL port by modifying its profile (see the set profile command) or assigning the port to a different profile (see the set port command).
However, due to noise and other factors on the line, the actual rate may not reach the maximum that you specify.
Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers in the set profile command, the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps for the G.dmt, ANSI T1.413 and G.lite ADSL standards or a multiple of 4 Kbps for the ADSL2 and ADSL2+ standards.
With the G.dmt, ANSI T1.413 and G.lite ADSL standards, if you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps, the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32 Kbps. For instance, if you specify 60 Kbps for a port, the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps, and if you specify 66 Kbps, the actual rate will not be over 64 Kbps.
With the ADSL2 and ADSL2+ standards, if you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 4 Kbps, the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 4 Kbps. For instance, if you specify 67 Kbps for a port, the actual rate for that port will not exceed 64 Kbps, and if you specify 69 Kbps, the actual rate will not be over 68 Kbps.
Note that when you configure an ADSL port, the upstream rate must be less than or equal to the downstream rate. Note also that the list port command displays the configured parameters of the ADSL port, while the show port command displays the actual rates.
12.4 ADSL Profile Screen
Click Profile > ADSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure ADSL profiles. Later you can use the ADSL profiles to configure ADSL ports in the
ADSL Port Setup screens.
206
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 118 ADSL Profile
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 76 ADSL Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The top part of the screen is for profile configuration.
Name When editing a profile, this is the name of this profile. When adding a profile, type a name (up to 31 characters) for the profile.
Latency Mode This field sets the ADSL latency mode for the ports that belong to this profile.
Select fast mode to use no interleaving and have faster transmission (a “fast channel”). This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary.
Select interleave mode to use interleave delay when transmission error correction
(Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line.
See
Section 12.2 on page 205 for more on interleave delay.
Upstream
Max Rate
(kbps)
Min Rate
(kbps)
Interleave
Delay (ms)
Max SNR (0.1 dB)
Min SNR (0.1 dB)
The following parameters relate to upstream transmissions.
Type a maximum upstream transfer rate for this profile. Configure the maximum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate.
Type the minimum upstream transfer rate for this port. Configure the minimum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum upstream transfer rate.
Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to Interleave. Type the number of milliseconds of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers. It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream.
Type the maximum upstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
Type the minimum upstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel). Configure the minimum upstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
207
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 76 ADSL Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Target SNR
(0.1 dB)
SRA Mode
Up-shift Noise
Margin (0.1 dB)
Down-shift
Noise Margin
(0.1 dB)
Downstream
Max Rate
(kbps)
Min Rate
(Kbps)
Interleave
Delay (ms)
Max SNR (0.1 dB)
Min SNR (0.1 dB)
Target SNR
(0.1 dB)
SRA Mode
Up-shift Noise
Margin (0.1 dB)
Down-shift
Noise Margin
(0.1 dB)
Type the target upstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
Configure the target upstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin.
Select the upstream rate adaptation setting.
Select fix to not use any rate adaptation.
Select startup to use rate adaptation at initialization.
Select runtime to use rate adaptation at any time while the connection is up.
The upstream up shift signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
When the channel’s signal to noise margin goes above this number, the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate. Configure the upstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin.
The upstream down shift signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
When the channel’s signal to noise margin goes below this number, the device shifts to a lower transfer rate. Configure the upstream down shift signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin.
The following parameters relate to downstream transmissions.
Type a maximum downstream transfer rate for this port. Configure the maximum downstream transfer rate to be greater than the maximum upstream transfer rate.
Type the minimum downstream transfer rate for this port. Configure the minimum downstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate.
Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to interleave. Type the number of milliseconds of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers. It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream.
Type the maximum downstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
Type the minimum downstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel). Configure the minimum downstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin.
Type the target downstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel). Configure the target downstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin.
Select the downstream rate adaptation setting.
Select fix to not use any rate adaptation.
Select startup to use rate adaptation at initialization.
Select runtime to use rate adaptation at any time while the connection is up.
The downstream up shift signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
When the channel’s signal to noise margin goes above this number, the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate. Configure the downstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin.
The downstream down shift signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel). When the channel’s signal to noise margin goes below this number, the device shifts to a lower transfer rate. Configure the downstream down shift signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin.
208
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 76 ADSL Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
New
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
The bottom part of the screen lists the configured profiles.
Index This is the port profile index number.
Name
Latency Mode
These are the names of individual profiles. The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL ports have it assigned to them by default.
This is the ADSL latency mode (fast or interleave) for the ports that belong to this profile.
Down/Up SRA
Mode
Down/Up Max
Rate (kbps)
Modify
Delete
These are the downstream and upstream rate adaptation settings for the ports that belong to this profile.
These are the maximum downstream and upstream transfer rates for the ports that belong to this profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile.
12.5 VDSL Profile Setup
Click Profile > VDSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure VDSL profiles. Later you can use the VDSL profiles to configure VDSL ports in the
VDSL Port Setup screens.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
209
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Figure 119 VDSL Profile
210
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 77 VDSL Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The top part of the screen is for profile configuration.
Name When editing a profile, this is the name of this profile. When adding a profile, type a name (up to 31 characters) for the profile.
Latency Mode This field sets the VDSL latency mode for the ports that belong to this profile.
Select fast mode to use no interleaving and have faster transmission (a “fast channel”). This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary.
Select interleave mode to use interleave delay when transmission error correction
(Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line.
See
Section 12.2 on page 205 for more on interleave delay.
Upstream
Max Rate
(kbps)
Min Rate
(kbps)
Interleave
Delay (ms)
Max SNR (0.1 dB)
Min SNR (0.1 dB)
The following parameters relate to upstream transmissions.
Type a maximum upstream transfer rate for this profile. Configure the maximum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate.
Type the minimum upstream transfer rate for this port. Configure the minimum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum upstream transfer rate.
Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to Interleave. Type the number of milliseconds of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers. It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream.
Type the maximum upstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
Type the minimum upstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel). Configure the minimum upstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 77 VDSL Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Target SNR
(0.1 dB)
Downstream
Max Rate
(kbps)
Min Rate
(Kbps)
Interleave
Delay (ms)
Max SNR (0.1 dB)
Min SNR (0.1 dB)
Target SNR
(0.1 dB)
Apply
New
Type the target upstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
Configure the target upstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin.
The following parameters relate to downstream transmissions.
Type a maximum downstream transfer rate for this port. Configure the maximum downstream transfer rate to be greater than the maximum upstream transfer rate.
Type the minimum downstream transfer rate for this port. Configure the minimum downstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate.
Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to interleave. Type the number of milliseconds of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers. It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream.
Type the maximum downstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel).
Type the minimum downstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel). Configure the minimum downstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin.
Type the target downstream signal to noise margin (measured in tenths of a decibel). Configure the target downstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
The bottom part of the screen lists the configured profiles.
Index This is the port profile index number.
Name
Latency Mode
These are the names of individual profiles. The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL ports have it assigned to them by default.
This is the VDSL latency mode (fast or interleave) for the ports that belong to this profile.
Down/Up Max
Rate (kbps)
Modify
Delete
These are the maximum downstream and upstream transfer rates for the ports that belong to this profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile.
12.6 Configured Versus Actual SHDSL Rates
You configure the maximum and minimum rates of individual SHDSL ports using the set profile command. However, due to noise and other factors on the line, the actual rate may not reach the maximum that you specify.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
211
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers in the set profile command, the actual rate is always a multiple of 64 Kbps. If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 64 Kbps, the actual value will be the next lower multiple of 64Kbps. For instance, if you specify 2100 Kbps for a port, the actual value will be 2048 Kbps, and if you specify 2120 Kbps, the actual value will be
2112 Kbps.
Note that when you configure a SHDSL profile, the upstream and downstream speeds are the same. The minimum rate must be less than or equal to the maximum rate.
12.7 N-wire Mode
The n-wire mode allows you to physically bundle two SHDSL ports into a single 4-wire connection. The 4-wire mode is described in ITU-T G.991.2. You can use it to connect to
SHDSL modems or routers that also support 4-wire mode. N-wire mode also allows you to physically bundle four SHDSL ports into a single 8-wire connection. The 8-wire group is called mpair4.
N-wire mode can increase the reach of a particular data rate without having to regenerate the signal. It can also give increased bandwidth for LAN-to-LAN applications.
You can n-wire bundle multiple groups of ports on a single SHDSL line card.
12.8 SHDSL Profile Screen
Click Profile > SHDSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure SHDSL profiles. Later you can apply the SHDSL profiles to configure SHDSL ports in the SHDSL Port Setup screens.
Figure 120 SHDSL Profile
212
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 78 SHDSL Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The top part of the screen is for profile configuration.
Name When editing a profile, this is the name of this profile. When adding a profile, type a name (up to 31 characters) for the profile.
Type a maximum transfer rate for this profile.
Max Rate
[192~4096] kbps
Min Rate
[192~4096] kbps
Annex Mode
Type the minimum upstream transfer rate for this profile.
Wire Pair
Select the region setting.
Select ANNEX_A to use DSL over POTS.
Select ANNEX_B to use DSL over ISDN.
Select a wire pair number.
Select 2wire for a normal connection using a single SHDSL port’s two wires, this is the default.
Select 4wire for a 4-wire n-wire group (two SHDSL ports grouped together).
Select mpair4 for an 8-wire n-wire group (four SHDSL ports grouped together).
Line Probing
Enable Mode
Current Condition
SNR Margin [-
10~21]
Worst Case SNR
Margin [-10~21]
The SHDSL line card and subscriber modem use line probes to determine the best possible transmission rate. This is used in rate adaptation.
Disable the line probe to have the system skip the rate adaptation phase to shorten connection set up time.
Select enable (current_condition_ target_SNR) to enable line probing using the current target Signal to Noise Ratio margin.
Select enable (worst_case_target_SNR) to enable line probing using the worst case target Signal to Noise Ratio margin.
Type the current condition target Signal to Noise Ratio margin, -10 ~ 21 in dB. You only configure this if you enable line probing using the current target Signal to
Noise Ratio margin.
Type the worst case Signal to Noise Ratio margin, -10 ~ 21 in dB. You only configure this if you enable line probing using the worst case target Signal to
Noise Ratio margin.
Apply
New
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
The bottom part of the screen lists the configured profiles.
Index This is the port profile index number.
Name These are the names of individual profiles. The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL ports have it assigned to them by default.
Max Rate (kbps) This is the maximum transfer rate (in Kbps) for this profile.
Min Rate (kbps) This is the minimum upstream transfer rate (in Kbps) for this profile.
Modify
Delete
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
213
214
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
12.9 ATM QoS
ATM Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms provide the best service on a per-flow guarantee.
ATM network infrastructure was designed to provide QoS. It uses fixed cell sizes and built-in traffic management (see the following section on traffic shaping). This allows you to fine-tune the levels of services on the priority of the traffic flow.
12.10 Traffic Shaping
Traffic shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections.
"
Traffic shaping controls outgoing (downstream) traffic, not incoming
(upstream).
12.10.1 ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
12.10.1.1 Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) is an ATM traffic class that provides fixed bandwidth. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice.
12.10.1.2 Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (rt-VBR) or non-real time (nrt-VBR) connections.
The rt-VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. An example of an rt-VBR connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The nrt-VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. An example of an nrt-VBR connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
12.10.1.3 Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is similar to the ABR traffic class for bursty data transfers. However, while ABR gives subscribers a set amount of bandwidth, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth.
12.10.2 Traffic Parameters
These are the parameters that control the flow of ATM traffic.
12.10.2.1 Peak Cell Rate (PCR)
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed.
12.10.2.2 Sustained Cell Rate (SCR)
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR.
12.10.2.3 Maximum Burst Size (MBS)
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR.
After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
"
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 121 PCR, SCR and MBS in Traffic Shaping
215
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
12.10.2.4 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT)
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell's transfer delay and the expected transfer delay. CDVT controls the time scale over which the PCR is enforced. CDVT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to PCR.
12.10.2.5 Burst Tolerance (BT)
Burst Tolerance (BT) is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards. BT controls the time scale over which the SCR is enforced. BT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to SCR. Use this formula to calculate BT: (MBS
- 1) x (1 / SCR - 1 / PCR) = BT.
12.10.2.6 Theoretical Arrival Time (TAT)
The Theoretical Arrival Time (TAT) is when the next cell (in an ATM connection's stream of cells) is expected to arrive. TAT is calculated based on the PCR or SCR.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between TAT, CDVT and BT. If a cell arrives at time A, then according to PCR or SCR, the next cell is expected to arrive at time B. If the next cell arrives earlier than time C, it is discarded or tagged for not complying with the TAT.
Time C is calculated based on the CDVT or BT.
Figure 122 TAT, CDVT and BT in Traffic Shaping
12.11 ATM Profile Screen
Click Profile > ATM in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure ATM profiles. Later you can use the ATM profiles to configure PVCs in the PVC
Setup screens.
216
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 123 ATM Profile
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 79 ATM Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The top part of the screen is for profile configuration.
Name When editing a profile, this is the name of this profile. When adding a profile, type a name for the profile. You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Traffic Class Select CBR (constant bit rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic.
Select UBR (unspecified bit rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail.
Select VBR (real time variable bit rate) or NRT (non real time variable bit rate) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications.
Peak Cell Rate
[150~300000]
Cell Delay
Variation
Tolerance
[0~255]
Sustained Cell
Rate
[150~300000]
The Peak Cell Rate is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Peak
Cell Rate applies with all of the ATM traffic classes. You can type a number of (ATM) cells per second in the first field or type a number of kilobytes per second in the second field to have the system automatically compute the number of ATM cells per second.
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell’s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay. Cell Delay Variation Tolerance applies with all of the ATM traffic classes. Type the Cell Delay Variation Tolerance here.
The Sustained Cell Rate sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the Sustained Cell Rate, which must be less than the Peak Cell
Rate. Sustained Cell Rate applies with the variable bit rate traffic classes. You can type a number of (ATM) cells per second in the first field or type a number of kilobytes per second in the second field to have the system automatically compute the number of ATM cells per second.
Burst Tolerance
[0~255]
Apply
Burst Tolerance sets a maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards. Type the Burst Tolerance here. Burst Tolerance applies with the variable bit rate traffic classes.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
217
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 79 ATM Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
New While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
The bottom part of the screen lists the configured profiles.
Index This is the number of the ATM profile.
Name
Traffic Class
Modify
This name identifies the ATM profile.
This field displays the type of ATM traffic class: cbr (constant bit rate), vbr (real-time variable bit rate), nrt (non-real time variable bit rate) or ubr (unspecified bit rate).
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
12.12 Alarm ADSL Profile Screen
Click Profile> Alarm ADSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure alarm profiles for the ADSL ports. Later you can apply the alarm ADSL profiles to ADSL ports in the ADSL Port Setup screens.
Alarm ADSL profiles define ADSL port alarm thresholds. The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded.
218
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 124 Alarm ADSL Profile
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 80 Alarm ADSL Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The top part of the screen is for profile configuration.
Name Type a name to identify the alarm profile (you cannot change the name of the
DEFVAL profile). You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Threshold Specify limits for the individual performance counters. The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when one of these thresholds is exceeded. A value of 0 disables the alarm threshold.
ATU-C
ATU-R
15 Min LOF
[0~900]
15 Min LOS
[0~900]
These fields are for traffic coming from the subscriber’s device to the system.
These fields are for traffic going from the system to the subscriber’s device.
This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Frame seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Signal seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
15 Min LOL
[0~900]
15 Min LPR
[0~900]
15 Min ES
[0~900]
This field sets limit for the number of Loss Of Link seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of Loss of Power (on the ATUR) seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
219
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 80 Alarm ADSL Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
15 Min SESL
[0~900]
15 Min UASL
[0~900]
This field sets the limit for the number of Severely Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of UnAvailable Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
15 Min Failed
Fast [0~900]
This field sets the limit for the number of failed fast retrain seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Init Failure Trap Select Enable to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap.
Fast Rate Up
[0~2147483]
(kbps)
Fast Rate Down
[0~2147483]
(kbps)
Interleave Rate
Up [0~2147483]
(kbps)
Interleave Rate
Down
[0~2147483]
(kbps)
Apply
Specify a rate in kilobits per second (kbps). If a fast mode connection’s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
Specify a rate in kilobits per second (kbps). If a fast mode connection’s downstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
Specify a rate in kilobits per second (kbps). If an interleave mode connection’s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
Specify a rate in kilobits per second (kbps). If an interleave mode connection’s upstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
New
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
The bottom part of the screen lists the configured profiles.
Index This is the index number of the alarm profile.
Name
Modify
Delete
This is the name of the alarm profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile.
12.13 Alarm VDSL Profile Screen
Click Profile> Alarm VDSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure alarm profiles for the VDSL ports. Later you can apply the alarm VDSL profiles to VDSL ports in the VDSL Port Setup screens.
Alarm VDSL profiles define VDSL port alarm thresholds. The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded.
220
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 125 Alarm VDSL Profile
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 81 Alarm VDSL Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The top part of the screen is for profile configuration.
Name Type a name to identify the alarm profile (you cannot change the name of the
DEFVAL profile). You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Threshold Specify limits for the individual performance counters. The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when one of these thresholds is exceeded. A value of 0 disables the alarm threshold.
15 Min LOF
[0~900]
15 Min LOS
[0~900]
15 Min LOL
[0~900]
15 Min LPR
[0~900]
This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Frame seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Signal seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets limit for the number of Loss Of Link seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of Loss of Power (on the ATUR) seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
15 Min ES
[0~900]
15 Min SESL
[0~900]
This field sets the limit for the number of Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of Severely Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
15 Min UASL
[0~900]
15 Min Failed
Fast [0~900]
This field sets the limit for the number of UnAvailable Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field sets the limit for the number of failed fast retrain seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Init Failure Trap Select Enable to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
221
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 81 Alarm VDSL Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
New
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
The bottom part of the screen lists the configured profiles.
Index This is the index number of the alarm profile.
Name
Modify
Delete
This is the name of the alarm profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile.
12.14 Alarm SHDSL Profile Screen
Click Profile> Alarm SHDSL in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure alarm profiles for the SHDSL ports. Later you can apply the alarm SHDSL profiles to SHDSL ports in the SHDSL Port Setup screens.
Alarm SHDSL profiles define SHDSL port alarm thresholds. The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded.
Figure 126 Alarm SHDSL Profile
222
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 82 Alarm SHDSL Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The top part of the screen is for profile configuration.
Name Type a name to identify the alarm profile (you cannot change the name of the
DEFVAL profile). You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Threshold Specify limits for the individual performance counters. The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when one of these thresholds is exceeded. A value of 0 disables the alarm threshold.
The permitted attenuation (reduction of signal amplitude) of a port’s connection.
LoopAttenuation
[0~127] (dB)
SNRMargin
[0~15] (dB)
The permitted signal to noise ratio margin.
ES [0~900] (sec) The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
SES [0~900] (sec) The number of Severely Errored Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
CRCanomalies
[0~2147483647]
LOWS [0~900]
(sec)
UAS [0~900]
The number of Cyclic Redundancy Checking anomalies that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
The number of Loss Of Sync Word Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Apply
New
The number of UnAvailable Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
The bottom part of the screen lists the configured profiles.
Index This is the index number of the alarm profile.
Name
Modify
Delete
This is the name of the alarm profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile.
12.15 IGMP Filter Profile Screen
You can use the IGMP filter profiles to control access to a service that uses a specific multicast group (like a SIP server for example). Configure an IGMP filter profile that allows access to that multicast group. Then assign the IGMP filter profile to ADSL ports that are allowed to use the service.
Click Profile > IGMP Filter in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure IGMP filter profiles. Later you can apply the IGMP filter profiles to ADSL ports in the ADSL Port Setup screens.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
223
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
The DEFVAL IGMP filter profile is assigned to all ADSL ports by default. It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses (224.0.0.0~239.255.255.255). If you want to allow an ADSL subscriber access to only specific IGMP multicast groups, use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure a different profile and then assign it to the subscriber's ADSL port in the ADSL
Port Setting screens.
Use the top part of the screen to add or edit IGMP filter profiles. The bottom of the screen lists the configured IGMP filter profiles.
Figure 127 IGMP Filter Profile
224
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 83 IGMP Filter Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name
Start IP
End IP
Apply
New
Type a name to identify the IGMP filter profile (you cannot change the name of the
DEFVAL profile). You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Enter the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access.
Enter the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access.If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start IP and End IP fields.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
While you are modifying a profile, you can click New to start configuring a fresh profile without saving your changes.
Index
Name
This is the index number of the IGMP profile.
This is the name of the IGMP profile.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
Table 83 IGMP Filter Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Modify
Delete
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile.
Select a profile’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
225
Chapter 12 Profile Screens
226
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
13
Statistics Screens
This chapter describes the run-time statistics.
13.1 ARP Table
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
13.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the switch, the switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the
LAN. The switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the switch puts all ones in the target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
13.2 ARP Table Screen
Click Statistics > ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen. This screen lists the IP addresses that the system has mapped to MAC addresses.
227
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Figure 128 ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 84 ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Total X ARP
Entries
Flush
Index
IP Address
Time
This displays the number of entries in the ARP table.
Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the ARP table.
This is the ARP table entry number.
This is the learned IP address of a device connected to one of the system’s ports.
This is the remaining number of seconds that the entry will remain in the table before it is deleted (unless it is resolved again before the time period expires). An entry can remain in the ARP table for up to 300 seconds after it is created. This is the number of seconds that the entry has been in the table.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.
Interface This identifies to which interface (inband or outband) the device is connected.
Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Previous/Next Click one of these buttons to show the preceding/following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
13.3 DHCP
To view DHCP packet counters on a port, click Statistics > DHCP.
Figure 129 DHCP Statistics
228
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 85 DHCP Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
Load
Flush
Discover
Offer
Request
Ack
Overflow
Select the number of a line card’s slot.
Select the number of a DSL port on the line card.
Click Load to retrieve the port’s IGMP filter profile setting and display it in the Profile drop-down list box.
Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the table below.
This field displays the number of DHCP Discover packets on this port.
This field displays the number of DHCP Offer packets on this port.
This field displays the number of DHCP Request packets on this port.
Flush
Snooping
Table
Overflow
This field displays the number of DHCP Acknowledge packets on this port.
This field displays the number of IP addressees not added to the DHCP snooping table when it is full.
Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the table below.
This field displays whether the DHCP snooping table is full or not.
Index
IP
This field displays the index number.
This field displays the IP address assigned to a client n this port.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the client computer belongs.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the client computer.
13.4 MAC Table
The MAC table lists device MAC addresses that are dynamically learned by the system. The table shows the following for each MAC address: the port upon which Ethernet frames were received from the device, to which VLAN groups the device belongs (if any) and to which channel it is connected (for devices connected to DSL ports).
The switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1 The switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came.
2 The switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table.
• If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to that port.
• If the switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to all ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion.
• If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
229
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Figure 130 MAC Table Filtering Flowchart
13.5 MAC Table Screen
Click Statistics > MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen. This screen lists device MAC addresses that the system dynamically learned.
Figure 131 MAC Table
230
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 86 MAC Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Date
Time
Flush
This displays the date that the displayed MAC address information was last updated.
The date is in year, month and day format.
This displays the time that the displayed MAC address information was last updated.
The time is in (24-hour) hour, minute and second format.
Click Flush to remove all of the dynamically learned MAC address entries from the
MAC table.
Select All to display the MAC address table of the port/slot belonging to all VLANs. All
Vid
Slot/Port
Refresh
Index
Select this open and enter a VLAN ID to display the MAC address table of the port/ slot belonging to this VLAN.
Select an individual management switch card port or line card for which to show information.
Click Refresh to update the list of dynamically learned MAC addresses.
This is the number of the MAC table entry.
Vid This is the VLAN group to which the device belongs.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device that the system has learned is connected to the port.
Slot
Port
This is the number of the slot to which the MAC address is associated.
This is the port to which the MAC address is associated.
Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Previous/Next Click one of these buttons to show the previous/next screen if all of the information cannot be seen in one screen.
13.6 IGMP Status Screen
Click Statistics > IGMP Status in the navigation panel to display the following screen. Use this screen to view information collected by IGMP snooping and/or IGMP proxy.
Figure 132 IGMP Status
MSC1000G User’s Guide
231
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 87 IGMP Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Flush
Query
Report
Leave
Click Flush to reset the counters.
This is the total number of Query packets received.
This is the total number of Report packets received.
This is the total number of Leave packets received.
Number Of
IGMP Groups
This is the number of IGMP groups that the system has identified on the local network.
The first table displays the names of the fields. The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups.
Index
VID
Multicast
Group
This is the IGMP group index number.
The VID is the number that identifies the VLAN that the IP multicast group is on.
This is the static multicast IP address of an IP multicast group.
Port
Slot
Timestamp
Page X of X
This column displays which ports are members of the IGMP group.
This column displays which slots are members of the IGMP group.
This is the time when the IGMP information was recorded.
This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Previous/Next Click one of these buttons to show the previous/next screen if all of the information cannot be seen in one screen.
13.6.1 IGMP Port Statistics
Click Statistics > IGMP Status > Port to display the following screen. Use this screen to view information collected by IGMP snooping and/or IGMP proxy on a selected port.
Figure 133 IGMP Status: Port
232
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 88 IGMP Status: Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot/Port Select a line card and line card port and click Load to show information.
Group Count This is the number of IGMP groups that the port is a member of.
Query Count This is the total number of Query packets received.
Join Count This is the total number of Join packets received.
Leave Count This is the total number of Leave packets received.
The first table displays the names of the fields. The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups.
Port
Slot
VID
Multicast IP
Client IP
This field displays the selected port number.
This field displays the selected slot number.
The VID is the number that identifies the VLAN that the IP multicast group is on.
This is the static multicast IP address of an IP multicast group.
This column displays which ports are members of the IGMP group.
13.7 IP Bridge ARP Proxy Screen
Use this screen to look at the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table for each IP bridge domain.
To open this screen, click Statistics > IP Bridge > ARP Proxy.
Figure 134 IP Bridge ARP Proxy
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 89 IP Bridge ARP Proxy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Domain, Load
Index
VID
IP
MAC
Select the domain at whose ARP table you want to look. You can also look at the ARP table entries for a specific type of interface or a specific interface in the domain. Click Load to display the requested entries below.
This field displays the number of the IP address entry.
This field displays the ID of the VLAN to which the device belongs.
This field displays the IP address assigned to the specific device.
This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of the device.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
233
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 89 IP Bridge ARP Proxy (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
Port
VPI
VCI
Interface
Previous 10
Previous
Page X of X
Next
Next 10
This field displays the number of the slot that contains the line card with the port number to which the device is connected.
This field displays the line card’s port number to which the device is connected.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) the device is using. The VPI and VCI identify a channel on a port.
This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier (VCI) the device is using. The VPI and VCI identify a channel on a port.
This field displays the name of the interface the device is using.
Click Previous 10 to show the preceding 10 pages of information.
Click Previous to show the preceding screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Click Next to show the following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
Click Next 10 to show the following 10 pages of alarms.
13.8 IP Bridge Interfaces Screen
Use this screen to look at all the forwarding information for downstream traffic, whether learned by snooping DHCP packets or provided manually.
To open this screen, click Statistics > IP Bridge > Interface.
Figure 135 IP Bridge Interfaces
234
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 90 IP Bridge Interfaces
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index
Domain
Interface IP,
NetMask
VID
Slot
This field displays the index number of the downlink interface.
This field displays the name of the domain to which this entry applies.
These fields display the IP address and the number of bits in the subnet mask that define the range of IP addresses to which this downlink interface applies. If the destination IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G tries to forward the frame to a subscriber in the specified VLAN and PVC, if any.
This field displays the VLAN ID the subscriber is in.
This field displays the number of the slot that contains the line card with the port number to which the MSC1000G forwards frames.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 90 IP Bridge Interfaces (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
VPI/VCI
Type
This field displays the line card’s port number to which the device is connected.
It displays “-” if the MSC1000G looks for the subscriber in the whole VLAN and not a specific PVC.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI), if any. The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
This field specifies whether the downlink interface is running on Ethernet (ipoe) or on ATM (ipoa).
13.9 IP Bridge Routes Screen
Use this screen to look at the routing table for a domain. This table includes all the entries, whether added automatically by the MSC1000G or provided manually.
To open this screen, click Statistics > IP Bridge > Route.
Figure 136 IP Bridge Routes
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 91 IP Bridge Routes
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Domain
Index
Domain Name
Interface IP
NetMask
Nexthop
Metric
Select a domain for which you wish to view information and click Load to display it.
This field displays the number of the entry.
This field displays the name of the domain to which this entry applies.
These fields display the IP address and the number of bits in the subnet mask that define the range of IP addresses to which this entry applies. If the destination IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G forwards the frame to the specified edge router.
This field displays the IP address to which the MSC1000G forwards frames if the destination IP address of a packet is in the specified range. It displays “-” if the field does not apply to the entry (for example, in entries created automatically by the MSC1000G).
This field displays the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. It displays “-” if the field does not apply to the entry (for example, in entries created automatically by the MSC1000G).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
235
236
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 91 IP Bridge Routes (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Priority
Type
This field displays the priority value (0 to 7) to add to incoming frames without a
(IEEE 802.1p) priority tag. It displays “-” if the field does not apply to the entry
(for example, in entries created automatically by the MSC1000G).
This field indicates whether this entry is used for upstream traffic (U) or downstream traffic (D). By default, all entries are for downstream traffic, unless the edge router is configured in the edge router screen (see
).
13.10 Online Users Screen
Click Statistics > Online Users in the navigation panel to display the following screen. Use this screen to view information about administrators that are logged into the system.
Figure 137 Online Users
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 92 Online Users
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Session
User
Remote IP
Login Time
This is the type of connection that the administrator is using (web, console, or telnet).
This is the user name that the administrator is using.
This is the IP address of the administrator’s computer.
This displays the time and date that the administrator logged into the system. The time is in (24-hour) hour, minute and second format. The date is in year, month and day format.
13.11 Port Statistics
Click Statistics > Port Statistics in the navigation panel to display the following screen. Use this screen to view port information (such as packet counts, uptime etc.).
"
You can only view port information on an active card.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Figure 138 Port Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 93 Port Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ID
State
Card Type
Uptime
Firmware
This column lists the slot numbers of the cards. Click the ID number of an active card to go to a screen where you can view port status and statistics.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a card.
This field displays how long the card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the card.
13.11.1 Ethernet Port Statistics
Click the ID for an MSC1000G card in the Port Statistics screen to view Ethernet port status and statistics.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
237
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Figure 139 Port Statistics: ENET
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 94 Port Statistics: ENET
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Flush
Slot/Port
Select a port or slot and click Flush to reset its counters.
This field displays the port name or slot number. “sub” and “up” refer to the subtending and uplink Ethernet ports on the front panel of the MSC1000G card.
“Slot” refers to a back panel Ethernet connection to one of the other cards. Click one of these links to see detailed Ethernet port statistics.
Status
Uptime
This field displays whether the port is connected (up) or not (down).
This field displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was started.
RxPkts/ TxPkts This field displays the number of packets received/transmitted on this port
(including multicast, unicast, broadcast and bad packets).
Rx Kbps/ Tx Kbps This field displays the number of octets of Ethernet frames received/transmitted per second counting the ones in bad packets, not counting framing bits but counting FCS (Frame Check Sequence) octets. An octet is an 8-bit binary digit
(byte).
Errors
Rate
Poll Interval(s)
Stop
This field displays the number of error packets occurred on this port.
This field displays the transmission speed of the port.
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
13.11.2 Detailed Ethernet Port Statistics
To view detailed port statistics on a selected Ethernet port, click the port index number in the
ENET screen.
238
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 140 Port Statistics: ENET Details
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes labels in this example.
Table 95 Port Statistics: ENET Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status
Rate
Uptime
This shows whether or not the port has an active connection.
This shows the connection speed for an active connection.
This shows how long the connection has been active.
Refresh
Bytes
Pkts kbytes/s
UcastPkts
NUcastPkts
MCastPkts
Click Refresh to update this screen.
This is the number of octets of Ethernet frames received/transmitted that are from
0 to 1518 octets in size, counting the ones in bad packets, not counting framing bits but counting FCS (Frame Check Sequence) octets. An octet is an 8-bit binary digit (byte).
This is the number of packets received/transmitted on this port (including multicast, unicast, broadcast and bad packets).
This is the number of octets of Ethernet frames received/transmitted per second.
This is the number of good unicast frames received/transmitted.
This is the number of good non-unicast frames received/transmitted.
This is the number of good multicast frames received/transmitted of 64 to 1518 octets in length (for non VLAN) or 1522 octets (for VLAN), not including Broadcast frames. Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
239
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 95 Port Statistics: ENET Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
BCastPkts
Pause
Pkt64
Pkt65~127
Pkt128~255
Pkt256~511
Pkt512~1023
Pkt1024~1518
Oversize
Undersize
FCSError
AlignError
Jabber
Fragment
Dropped
Underrun
Collision
This is the number of good broadcast frames received/transmitted of 64 to 1518 octets in length (for non VLAN) or 1522 octets (for VLAN), not including multicast frames. Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account.
This is the number of valid IEEE 802.3x Pause frames received/transmitted on this port.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 64 octets or less in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 65 to 127 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received and transmitted (including bad frames) that were 128 to 255 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 256 to 511 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 512 to 1023 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were bigger than 1518 (non
VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) octets and contained a valid FCS.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted with an integral length of 64 to
1518 octets and containing a Frame Check Sequence error.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were 64 to 1518 (non
VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) octets long but contained an invalid FCS and a nonintegral number of octets.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets (non VLAN) or 1522 octets (VLAN) and contained an invalid FCS, including alignment errors.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were less than 64 octets long, and contained an invalid FCS, including non-integral and integral lengths.
This is the number of received/transmitted frames that were received by the
MSC1000G, but later dropped because of a lack of system resources.
This is the number of outgoing frames that were less than 64 octets long.
This is the number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions. Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset.
13.11.3 RMON Statistics
To view RMON statistics on a switch port, click on the ID for the MSC1000G card in the Port
Statistics screen and click the RMON tab.
240
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 141 Port Statistics: ENET: RMON
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 96 Port Statistics: ENET: RMON
LABEL DESCRIPTION
sub1~up2
DropEvent
Octets
Pkts
BcastPkts This field displays the total number of broadcast packets received/transmitted on this port.
McastPkts This field displays the total number of multicast packets received/transmitted on this port.
CRCAlignErrors This field displays the total number of CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) alignment errors on this port.
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
This field displays the total number of packets that were too small received/ transmitted on this port.
This field displays the total number of packets that were too big received/ transmitted on this port.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were less than 64 octets long, and contained an invalid FCS, including non-integral and integral lengths.
Jabbers
These are the Ethernet ports on the front panel of the MSC1000G card. Click one to view RMON history information for that port.
This field displays the total number of packets that were dropped on this port.
This field displays the total number of octets received/transmitted on this port.
This field displays the total number of good packets received/transmitted on this port.
Collisions
64Octets
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets (non VLAN) or 1522 octets (VLAN) and contained an invalid FCS, including alignment errors.
This is the number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions. Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 64 octets or less in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
241
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 96 Port Statistics: ENET: RMON (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
65to127Octets
128to255Octets
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 65 to 127 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received and transmitted (including bad frames) that were 128 to 255 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
256to511Octets This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 256 to 511 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
512to1023Octets This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 512 to 1023 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
1024to1518Octets This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Stop Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
13.11.3.1 RMON History Statistics
To view RMON history information, click a switch port link in the RMON screen. This
RMON History screen displays general information (such as sample time) on history samples.
Figure 142 Port Statistics: ENET: RMON History
242
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 97 Port Statistics: ENET: RMON History
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh
SampleIndex
Interval Start
Pkts
BroadcastPkts
MulticastPkts
Click Refresh to update this screen.
This field display the index number. Click this link to view detailed RMON history information.
This field displays the data sampling time.
This field displays the number of packets received/transmitted since the last sample time.
This field displays the number of broadcast packets received/transmitted since the last sample time.
This field displays the number of multicast packets received/transmitted since the last sample time.
This field displays the port utilization status. Utilization
13.11.3.2 RMON History Details
To view detail RMON history information, click on a sample index in the RMON History screen. An RMON History Detail screen displays. Refer to
Table 97 on page 243 for more field descriptions.
Figure 143 Port Statistics: ENET: RMON History: Detail
13.11.4 Line Card Statistics
Click the ID for a line card in the Port Statistics screen to view port status and statistics on the line card. Statistics screens for the line cards are similar. Example screens for the ALC-1248G-
53 are shown.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
243
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Figure 144 Port Statistics: Line Card
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 98 Port Statistics: Line Card
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Link
Config Rate
Payload Rate
Error
Rx kbps
Tx kbps
Uptime
Poll Interval(s)
Stop
This field displays the port number.
This field displays the port link status.
On an SHDSL port, this field displays the wire pair setting when the port is up.
This field displays the configured upstream and downstream rates.
This field displays the actual upstream and downstream rates.
This field displays the number of errors occurred on the port.
This field displays the receiving rate in kilo bits per second (kbps).
This field displays the transmission rate in kilo bits per second (kbps).
This field displays how long the connection is up.
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
13.11.4.1 Packet Counter
To display the packet counters of a port on a line card, click the port number in the line card’s statistics screen (see
).
244
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 145 Port Statistics: Line Card: Packet Counter
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 99 Port Statistics: Line Card: Packet Counter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Payload Rate
Error
Rx kbps
Tx kbps
Uptime
This field displays the port link status.
This field displays the configured and actual upstream and downstream rates.
This field displays the number of errors occurred on the port.
This field displays the receiving rate in kilo bits per second (kbps).
This field displays the transmission rate in kilo bits per second (kbps).
This field displays how long the port has been running since the last time it was started.
Packet Counter
IfOctets
IfUCastPkts
IfBCastPkts
IfMCastPkts
This field displays the number of octets received/transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of unicast packets received/transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of broadcast packets received/transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of multicast packets received/transmitted on this port.
IfDiscard
IfErrors
This field displays the number of received/transmitted packets that were discarded on this port.
This field displays the number of packets received/transmitted with errors on this port.
IfUnknownProtos This field displays the number of packets received/transmitted with unknown protocol number on this port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
245
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 99 Port Statistics: Line Card: Packet Counter (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Poll Interval(s)
Stop
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
13.11.4.2 Cell Counters
To display detailed ATM cell count information, click the port number in the line card’s statistics screen (see
) and click the Cell Counter tab.
"
The Cell Counter screen is NOT available for the VLC.
Figure 146 Port Statistics: Line Card: Cell Counter
246
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 100 Port Statistics: Line Card: Cell Counter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ATM
Rx cells
Tx Cells
This field displays the number of cells received.
This field displays the number of cells transmitted.
Rx rate (byte/sec) This field displays the number of cells bytes received per second.
Tx rate (byte/sec) This field displays the number of cells bytes transmitted per second.
CRC errors This field displays the number of CRC errors.
Poll Interval(s)
Stop
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
13.11.4.3 Line Detail
To display detailed line information, click the port number in the line card’s statistics screen
(see Figure 144 on page 244 ) and click the Line Detail tab.
Figure 147 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Detail
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 101 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Line Information
Link
Service Type
This displays the connection status of the DSL link.
This is the DSL standard that the port is using.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
247
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 101 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Detail (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Coding Mode Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
“RS” coding stands for Reed-Solomon error correction.
This is the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for upstream transmissions.
Us Interleave
Delay
Ds Interleave
Delay
Us inp DMT symbol(s)
Ds inp DMT symbol(s)
Us Output Power
(dBm)
Ds Output Power
(dBm)
Country Code
This is the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream transmissions.
This is the number of impulse noise protection DMT symbols for upstream transmissions.
This is the number of impulse noise protection DMT symbols for downstream transmissions.
This is the power output of the subscriber’s DSL modem or router. The total output power of the transceiver varies with the line length and quality.
This is the DSP port’s output power. The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality. The farther away the subscriber’s ADSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line, the higher the power will be.
This is the country code acquired from the subscriber’s ADSL device during negotiation/provisioning message interchanges. The country code is from the
Vendor ID (see ITU-T G.994.1).
Provider Code This is the provider code acquired from the subscriber’s ADSL device during negotiation/provisioning message interchanges. The provider code includes the
Vendor ID and Version Number obtained from the Vendor ID.
Min Rate (kbps) This is the minimum upstream and downstream rates on the SHDSL port.
Config Rate (kbps) This field displays the configured upstream and downstream rates on the SHDSL port.
Actual Rate (kbps) This field displays the actual upstream and downstream rates on the SHDSL port.
Noise Margin (dB) These are the SHDSL line’s noise margins. Measured in decibels (dB).
Attenuation (dB) These are the reductions in amplitude of the SHDSL signals. Measured in decibels (dB).
Linkup Count
VTUC Vendor
VTUC Version
VTUC Serial
This is the number of Linkup attempts on the VDSL port.
This field displays the name of the CO VDSL device vendor.
This field displays the name of the CO VDSL device hardware version.
This field displays the name of the CO VDSL device serial number.
VTUR Vendor
VTUR Version
VTUR Serial
Line Performance
FeCrc
NeCrc
FeFec
NeFec
Es (seconds)
This field displays the name of the CPE VDSL device vendor.
This field displays the name of the CPE VDSL device hardware version.
This field displays the name of the CPE VDSL device serial number.
This is the number of far end cyclic redundancy checks.
This is the number of near end cyclic redundancy checks.
This is the number of far end corrected blocks.
The is the number of near end corrected blocks.
This is the number of Errored Seconds. This is how many seconds contained at least one errored block or at least one defect.
248
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 101 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Detail (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ses (seconds)
Uas (seconds)
Lofs (seconds)
Loss (seconds)
Lprs (seconds)
CRC
Losws
This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds. This is how many seconds contained 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of
Es.
This is the number of Unavailable seconds (Uas).
This is the number of Loss Of Frame (Lof) seconds.
This is the number of Loss Of Signal (Los) seconds.
This is the number of times a Loss of PoweR (on the ATUR) has occurred.
This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) error seconds.
This is the number of Lost Sync Word (LOSW) seconds.
Segment Anomaly This is the number of segment anomaly seconds.
Segment Defect This is the number of segment defect seconds.
Payload Rate
(Kbps)
These are the data (the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic) transfer rates (in Kbps) at which the port is receiving and sending data.
Actual Rate (Kbps) These are the data transfer rates (in Kbps) at which the port is receiving and sending data.
Attainable Rate
(Kbps)
Noise Margin (dB) These are the DSL line’s noise margins. Measured in decibels (dB).
Attenuation (dB) These are the reductions in amplitude of the DSL signals. Measured in decibels
(dB).
Poll Interval(s)
These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates (in Kbps) at which the port could receive and send data.
Stop
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
13.11.4.4 Current Line Performance
To display current line performance counters, click the port number in the line card’s statistics screen (see
Figure 144 on page 244 ) and click the Current tab.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
249
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Figure 148 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: Current
250
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 102 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: Current
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PhysEntry
CurrSnrMgn (dB)
CurrAtn (dB)
These are the DSL line’s current downstream and upstream signal to noise margins in decibels.
These are the DSL line’s current downstream and upstream line attenuation in decibels.
CurrOutputPwr (dBm) These are the DSL line’s current downstream and upstream output powers in decibels.
CurrAttainableRate These are the DSL line’s current downstream and upstream attainable rates in decibels.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 102 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: Current (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ChanEntry
ChanInterleaveDelay
(ms)
SlowBurstProtect
(kbps)
ChanCurrTxRate
(kbps)
ChanPrevTxRate
(kbps)
PerfDataEntry
Lofs (seconds)
These are the numbers of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream and upstream transmissions.
This field displays the level of impulse noise (burst) protection for a slow interleaved channel.
These are the DSL line’s current downstream and upstream transmission rates in decibels.
These are the DSL line’s previous downstream and upstream transmission rates in decibels.
Loss (seconds)
Lols (seconds)
Lprs (seconds)
ESs (seconds)
SESs (seconds)
UASs (seconds)
Inits (seconds)
StatSesL (seconds)
StatUasL (seconds)
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of frame
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of signal
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of link
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of power Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Errored
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds. This is how many seconds contained 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of Es.
This is the number of Unavailable seconds (Uas).
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of initialization failure traps that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Severely errored seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of UnAvailable
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
ChanPerfDataEntry
ChanCorrectedBlks
ChanUnCorrectedBlk s
EndpointCurrEntry
CurrSnrMgn (dB)
These are the numbers of corrected blocks for downstream and upstream transmissions.
These are the numbers of uncorrected blocks for downstream and upstream transmissions.
CurrAtn (dB)
CRC (seconds)
ESs (seconds)
SESs (seconds)
These are the DSL line’s current downstream and upstream signal to noise margins in decibels.
These are the DSL line’s current downstream and upstream line attenuation in decibels.
This field displays the number of CRC anomalies since the system was last restarted
This is the number of Errored Seconds. This is how many seconds contained at least one errored block or at least one defect.
This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds. This is how many seconds contained 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of Es.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
251
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 102 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: Current (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LOSWs (seconds)
UASs (seconds)
Poll Interval(s)
Stop
This is the number of Lost Sync Word (LOSW) seconds.
This is the number of Unavailable seconds (Uas).
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
13.11.4.5 15Min Line Performance
To display line performance counters for the past 15 minutes, click the port number in the line card’s statistics screen (see
Figure 144 on page 244 ) and click the 15Min tab.
Figure 149 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: 15Min
252
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 103 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: 15Min
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Flush Current
Refresh
TimeElapsed
Lofs (seconds)
Loss (seconds)
Lols (seconds)
Lol
Click Flush Current to clear the counters.
Click Refresh to update this screen.
This field displays the time since the last 15-minute data collection.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of frame
Seconds that have occurred for the past 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of signal
Seconds that have occurred for the past 15 minute period.
This is the DSL line’s downstream number of Loss of link Seconds that have occurred for the past 15 minute period.
This is the number of times the DSL line’s downstream connection has experienced a Loss of link during the past 15 minute period.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 103 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: 15Min (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Lprs (seconds)
Lpr
ESs (seconds)
SESs (seconds)
UASs
Inits
CorrectedBlks
UnCorrectedBlks
Poll Interval(s)
Stop
This is the DSL line’s upstream number of Loss of power Seconds that have occurred for the past 15 minute period.
This is the number of times the DSL line’s upstream connection has experienced a Loss of power during the past 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Errored
Seconds that have occurred for the past 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Severely
Errored Seconds that have occurred for the past 15 minute period. This is how many seconds contained 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect.
This is a subset of Es.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of UnAvailable
Seconds that have occurred for the past 15 minute period.
These are the DSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of initialization failure traps that have occurred for the past 15 minute period.
These are the numbers of corrected blocks for downstream and upstream transmissions.
These are the numbers of uncorrected blocks for downstream and upstream transmissions.
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
13.11.4.6 1day Line Performance
To display line performance counters for the past one day, click the port number in the line card’s statistics screen (see
Figure 144 on page 244 ) and click the 1day tab.
TimeElapsed shows how long the port’s downstream and upstream connections have been up during the current day.
MoniSecs (seconds) shows how long the port’s downstream and upstream connections have been up during a previous day.
Refer to Table 103 on page 252
for descriptions of the rest of the fields in this screen.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
253
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Figure 150 Port Statistics: Line Card: Line Performance: 1day
13.12 Dot3ad
Click Statistics > Dot3ad in the navigation panel to display the following screen. Use this screen to view IEEE 802.3ad link aggregation settings.
Figure 151 Dot3ad
254
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 104 Dot3ad
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trunk
State
Members
Links
Syncs
Sub refers to the subtending ports while up refers to the uplink ports.
This field displays whether link aggregation is activated on the ports.
This field displays the name of the link aggregation group.
These are the ports you have configured to be in the trunk group.
These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group.
13.13 VLAN Statistics
Click Statistics > VLAN in the navigation panel to display the following screen. Use this screen to view current VLAN settings.
Figure 152 VLAN Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 105 VLAN Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID
ENET ports 1~8
Slot
Page X of X
Previous/Next
This field displays the VLAN ID.
This column displays the VLAN’s settings for the MSC1000G’s Ethernet ports.
ENET port 1 and 2 are subtending ports 1 and 2.
ENET port 3 and 4 are uplink ports 1 and 2.
ENET ports 5~8 do not apply.
A tagged port is marked as T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as X.
This column displays the VLAN’s settings for the line cards (identified by slot). A number displays for each line card that is a member of the VLAN. An “X” displays for each line card that is not a member of the VLAN.
This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Click one of these buttons to show the previous/next screen if all of the information cannot be seen in one screen.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
255
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
13.13.1 VLAN Port Statistics
To view VLAN port status, click a VID in the VLAN screen.
Figure 153 VLAN: Port Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 106 VLAN: Port Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID X
Index
Card Name
Port Status
This field displays the VLAN ID.
This field displays the index number.
This field displays the name of the line card in this VLAN.
This field displays the port status in this VLAN. A tagged port is marked as T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as
X.
13.14 MSTP Statistics
Use the MSTP statistics screen to displays the status and statistics for the device’s MSTP CIST
(Common and Internal Spanning Tree) and MSTI ((Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) settings.
Refer to Section 14.9 on page 270 for more background information.
13.14.1 MSTP CIST Statistics
Click Statistics > MSTP in the navigation panel to display the MSTP CIST statistics screen.
256
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 154 MSTP Statistics: CIST
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 107 MSTP Statistics: CIST
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable
BridgeID
This field displays whether MSTP is activated on the device.
This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus
MAC address. This ID is the same in ExtRootID if this device is the root switch.
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
TimeSinceTopoChang e
TopoChangeCount
TopoIsChanging
ExtRootPortID
ExtRootID
ExtRootPathCost
ExtRootMaxAge
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
The spanning tree is currently reconfiguring if “True” displays.
This is the unique identifier for the port that connects to the external root bridge.
This is the unique identifier for the external root bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This is the path cost of the link to the root bridge.
This is the maximum time (in seconds) the spanning tree can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure on the root port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
257
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 107 MSTP Statistics: CIST (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ExtRootHelloTime This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root transmits a configuration message through the root port. The root bridge determines the
Hello Time, Max Age and Forward Delay.
ExtRootForwardDelay This is the time (in seconds) the root bridge will wait before changing states
(that is, listening to learning or learning to forwarding) on the root port. Each change in states requires the forward delay time before the change.
BridegMaxAge This is the maximum time (in seconds) the root bridge can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.
BridegHelloTime
BridegForwardDelay This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states
(that is, listening to learning to forwarding).
ForceVersion This is the version of spanning tree protocol the device is using (MSTP or
RSTP). The system will send BPDUs of the specified spanning tree version.
TransmitHoldCount
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration message. The root bridge determines the Hello Time, Max Age and Forward Delay.
IntRootID
IntRootPathCost
Port Info. sub1~up2
This is the number of BPDUs that are allowed to be sent before pausing for 1 second.
This field displays the ID of the root switch in a region.
This field displays path cost to the internal root bridge.
Enable
Uptime
State
PortID
These are the MSC1000G’s subtending and uplink Ethernet ports. Click a link to see detailed MSTP CIST statistics for that port.
This field displays whether a port is active or not.
This field displays the time the port is running.
This field displays the STP status on this port.
This field displays port ID.
MACOperational
RecvInternal
This field displays true when the link is up or false if the link is not up.
This field displays whether the BPDU received was transmitted by a bridge in the same region.
13.14.2 MSTP CIST Statistics: Port Details
Click a port’s link in the Statistics > MSTP screen to see detailed MSTP CIST statistics for that port.
258
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 155 MSTP Statistics: CIST: Port Details
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 108 MSTP Statistics: CIST: Port Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable
Uptime
State
PortID
DsgBridgeID
DsgPortID
ExtPortPathCost
ExtRootID
ExtRootPathCost
AdminEdgePort
OperEdgePort
MACOperational
AdminP2PLink
OperP2PLink
PortHelloTime
RecvInternal
RxStpCfgBPDU
RxStpTcnBPDU
This field displays whether MSTP is activated on the device.
This field displays the time the port is running.
This field displays the STP status on this port.
This field displays port ID.
This is the unique identifier for the bridge in the LAN segment to which this bridge belongs that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This is the port on the designated bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge, consisting of bridge priority.
This field displays the path cost of this port to an external bridge (a bridge in a different MST region).
This is the unique identifier for the external root bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This is the path cost of the link to the root bridge.
An edge port connects to a non-STP device (such as a computer or a hub).
This field displays whether or not an administrator has set this port as an edge port.
This field displays whether or not the spanning tree network has determined this port to be an edge port.
This field displays true when the link is up or false if the link is not up.
This field displays whether or not an administrator has set this port as a pointto-point link to the neighbor switch.
This field displays whether or not the spanning tree network has determined this port to be a point-to-point link to the neighbor switch.
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the port transmits a configuration message.
This field displays whether the BPDU received was transmitted by a bridge in the same region.
This is the number of legacy STP configuration BPDUs that have been received on this port.
This is the total number of legacy STP topology change notification BPDUs that have been received on this port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
259
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 108 MSTP Statistics: CIST: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RxRstpBPDU
RxMstpBPDU
IntPortPathCost
IntRootID
This is the number of RSTP BPDUs that have been received on this port.
This is the number of MSTP BPDUs that have been received on this port.
This is the path cost to the internal root bridge.
This is the ID of the internal root bridge.
13.14.3 MSTP MSTI Statistics
Click Statistics > MSTP > MSTI to display the MSTP MSTI statistics screen. Use this screen to view the port status of a selected spanning tree instance.
Figure 156 MSTP Statistics: MSTI
260
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 109 MSTP Statistics: MSTI
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MSTID
BridgeID
Select an MSTI number and click Apply to display the port status for that spanning tree instance.
This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
TimeSinceTopoCh ange
TopoChangeCount This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
TopoIsChanging The spanning tree is currently reconfiguring if “True” displays.
IntRootPathCost This field displays path cost to the internal root bridge.
IntRootID This field displays the ID of the root switch in a region.
IntPortPathCost
Port Info.
This is the path cost to the internal root bridge. sub1~up2
Enable
These are the MSC1000G’s subtending and uplink Ethernet ports.
This field displays whether a port is active or not.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 109 MSTP Statistics: MSTI (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Uptime
State
PortID
DsgBridgeID
DsgPortID
This field displays the time the port is running.
This field displays the STP status on this port.
This field displays port ID.
This is the unique identifier for the bridge in the LAN segment to which this bridge belongs that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This is the port on the designated bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge, consisting of bridge priority.
IntRootPathCost This field displays path cost to the internal root bridge.
IntRootID This field displays the ID of the root switch in a region.
13.15 IP Statistics
To view management IP settings and statistics, click Statistics > IP in the navigation panel.
Figure 157 IP Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 110 IP Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Flush
Refresh
Inet
Netmask
Broadcast
Click Flush to reset the counters for the selected port.
Click Refresh to update this screen.
This field displays the management IP address.
This field displays the subnet mask for the IP address above.
This field displays the broadcast address.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
261
Chapter 13 Statistics Screens
Table 110 IP Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mtu
In Octet
In Unicast
In Multicast
In Discard
In Error
In Unknown
Out Octet
Out Unicast
Out Multicast
Out Discard
Out Error
Out Unknown
This field displays the size of the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU).
This field displays the number of octets received on this port.
This field displays the number of unicast packets received on this port.
This field displays the number of multicast packets received on this port.
This field displays the number of discarded packets received on this port.
This field displays the number of errored packets received on this port.
This field displays the number of packets with an unknown source received on this port.
This field displays the number of octets transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of unicast packets transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of multicast packets transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of discarded packets transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of errored packets transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of packets with an unknown source transmitted on this port.
262
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
14
Switch Screens
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure Ethernet ports, multicast VLAN and global switch parameters such as GARP, link aggregation, priority queues and queuing method.
14.1 Ethernet Port Trunking
Ethernet port trunking lets you aggregate the Ethernet ports into one logical link. The switch uses MAC-based load balancing which analyzes a packet’s source and destination MAC addresses to distribute the load between the two Ethernet ports when uplinking to the remote switch.
"
The remote switch must also support Ethernet port trunking. The loadbalancing method, however, does not have to be the same as on this switch.
"
The two uplink ports or two subtending ports must be connected to a single remote switch when port trunking is enabled.
14.2 Dynamic Link Aggregation
The MSC1000G adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
The MSC1000G supports the link aggregation IEEE 802.3ad standard. This standard describes the Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP), which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port redundancy, that is, if an operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become operational without user intervention. Please note that:
263
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode and flow control settings.
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops.
14.3 Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information
3
:
Table 111 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
Table 112 Link Aggregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY
0000 00-00-00-00-00 0000
PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
00 0000
14.4 Queuing Overview
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion.
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
Q3
Q2
Q1
Q0
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q4
The switch has eight physical queues, Q0 to Q7. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 has the lowest.
Table 113 Physical Queue Priority
QUEUE PRIORITY
6
5
8 (Highest)
7
4
3
2
1 (Lowest)
264
3.
Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.4.1 Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ)
Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the switch, traffic on the highest priority queue, Q7 is transmitted first. When that queue empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue, Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties, and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on. If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent. SPQ does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements.
14.4.2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port. This queue then moves to the back of the list. The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth, and then moves to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the number of queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling, but services queues based on their priority and queue weight (the number you configure in the queue weight fields) rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth. WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied.
14.5 Switch Setup General Screen
Click Switch > Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 158 Switch Setup General
MSC1000G User’s Guide
265
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 114 Switch Setup General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GARP Timer:
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using
GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
Refer to Chapter 16 on page 299 for more background information.
Join Timer
Leave Timer
Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds; the default is 200 milliseconds. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information.
Leave Timer sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is 600 milliseconds.
Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer; the default is 1000 milliseconds.
Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port. Use the drop-down list boxes to configure the priority level-to-physical queue mapping.
The system has 8 physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels. On the switch, traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Priority Levels (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates IEEE 802.1p).
Priority 7
Priority 6
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).
Priority 5
Priority 4
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Priority 3
Priority 2
Priority 1
Priority 0
Apply
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Cancel
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
14.6 Switch Setup Dot3ad Screen
Click Switch > Switch Setup > Dot3ad to display the screen as shown.
266
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 159 Switch Setup Dot3ad
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 115 Switch Setup Dot3ad
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LACP Priority
LACP Timeout
Group ID
Active
Dynamic(LCAP)
Port
Group
Apply
Cancel
Type a number between 1 and 65,535 for the LACP system priority. The switch with the lowest system priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the LACP “server”. The LACP “server” controls the operation of
LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link
Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP). The smaller the number, the higher the priority level.
LACP timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three tries, then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short timeout (one second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible. Select either short (1 second) or long (30 seconds).
This column displays the names of the trunk groups for the management switch card’s Ethernet ports. tsub is for the management switch card’s subtending ports and tup is for the management switch card’s uplink ports.
Select this check box to turn on a trunk group.
Select this check box to use Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP), to dynamically create and manage the trunk group.
This column lists the management switch card’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
This column displays to which trunk group an MSC1000G Gigabit Ethernet interface belongs.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
267
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.7 Switch Setup QSchedule Screen
Click Switch > Switch Setup > QSchedule to display the screen as shown.
Figure 160 Switch Setup QSchedule
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 116 Switch Setup QSchedule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Algo_Type
Queue 0~7
Apply
Cancel
This column lists the management switch card’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Use this field to set a Gigabit Ethernet interface’s queuing algorithm. If trunking is enabled, you set this for one interface and it applies to the whole trunk group.
Select spq to use Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ). SPQ services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue empties, traffic on the next highestpriority queue begins.
Select wrr to use Weighted Round Robin (WRR) Scheduling. WRR services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight (the number you configure in the queue weight fields). Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights.
These fields apply when you select the wrr queuing algorithm in the Algo_Type field.
Use these fields to set the priority weight (0~15) of each queue on a Gigabit
Ethernet interface (or trunk group if trunking is enabled). The higher a queue’s weight, the more service it gets.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
14.8 Switch Setup Isolation Screen
Click Switch > Switch Setup > Isolation to display the screen as shown.
268
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 161 Switch Setup Isolation
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 117 Switch Setup Isolation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Isolation
Apply
Cancel
Add Isolation
VLAN
VID
Turn on port isolation to block communications between subscriber ports. When you enable port isolation you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
The isolation VLAN fields display if you disable Port Isolation.
Use isolation VLANs to block communications between subscribers in different
VLANs if you do not block communications between subscriber ports.
For example, you might want to isolate some VLAN (for example, high-speed
Internet) and not isolate other VLAN (for example, VoIP).
Specify the number of a VLAN for which you want to block communications with other VLANs.
Index
VLAN ID
Select
Select All
The MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
This field displays the index number of the isolated VLAN.
This field displays the number of a VLAN for which communications with other
VLAN are blocked.
Select an entry’s Select check box and click Delete to remove the entry.
Clicking Delete saves your changes to the MSC1000G’s volatile memory.
The MSC1000G loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Select this check box to select all of the column’s check boxes. Clear this check box to clear all of the column’s check boxes.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
269
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.9 Spanning Tree Protocols
The switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) as defined in the following standards.
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
14.9.1 STP and RSTP
RSTP adds rapid reconfiguration capability to STP. The switch supports RSTP and the earlier
STP. RSTP and STP detect and break network loops and provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. They allow a device to interact with other RSTP or STP-aware devices in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network. The switch uses RSTP by default but can still interoperate with STP switches
(although without RSTP's benefits).
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree; it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value
(MAC address). Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the higher the cost - see the following tables.
Table 118 STP Path Costs
LINK
SPEED
RECOMMENDED VALUE RECOMMENDED RANGE
ALLOWED
RANGE
4Mbps
10Mbps
16Mbps
100Mbps
1Gbps
10Gbps
4
2
250
100
62
19
100 to 1000
50 to 600
40 to 400
10 to 60
3 to 10
1 to 5
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
Table 119 MSTP/RSTP Path Costs
Link Speed Recommended value
<= 100 Kbps 200 000 000
1 Mbps 20 000 000
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
2 000 000
200 000
1 Gbps
10 Gbps
20 000
2000
100 Gbps 200
1000 Gbps 20
10 000 Gbps 2
Recommended range
200 000 000 to 200 000 000
2 000 000 to 200 000 000
200 000 to 20 000 000
20 000 to 2 000 000
2000 to 200 000
200 to 20 000
20 to 2000
2 to 200
1 to 20
Allowed Range
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
1 to 200 000 000
270
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
On each bridge, the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root.
It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN.
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with RSTP, it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for the connected LANs, and disables all other ports that participate in RSTP. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
Figure 162 STP Root Ports and Designated Ports
RSTP-aware devices exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the bridged LAN topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
In RSTP, the devices send BPDUs every Hello Time. If an RSTP-aware device does not get a
Hello BPDU after three Hello Times pass (or the Max Age), the device assumes that the link to the neighboring bridge is down. This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to re-establish a valid network topology.
In STP, once a stable network topology has been established, all devices listen for Hello
BPDUs transmitted from the root bridge. If an STP-aware device does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Max Age), the device assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to re-establish a valid network topology.
RSTP assigns three port states to eliminate packet looping while STP assigns five (see following table). A device port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
Table 120 RSTP and STP Port States
RSTP PORT
STATE
STP PORT
STATE
DESCRIPTION
Discarding
Discarding
Discarding
Disabled
Blocking
Listening
STP is disabled (default).
Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed.
All BPDUs are received and processed.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
271
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
Table 120 RSTP and STP Port States
RSTP PORT
STATE
STP PORT
STATE
DESCRIPTION
Learning Learning
Forwarding Forwarding
All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded.
All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and forwarded.
14.9.2 Multiple STP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s) is backward compatible with STP/RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols (STP and RSTP) in networks to include the following features:
• One Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) that represents the entire network’s connectivity.
• Grouping of multiple bridges (or switching devices) into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network.
• Multiple Spanning Tree Instances (Mists) that allow multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree.
• Load-balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region.
14.9.2.1 MSTP Network Example
The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches. If the switches are using STP or RSTP, the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link.
Figure 163 STP/RSTP Network Example
272
With MSTP, VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network. Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths. The following figure shows the network example using MSTP.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 164 MSTP Network Example
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.9.2.2 MST Region
An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network. Each MSTP-enabled device can only belong to one MST region. When BPDUs enter an MST region, external path cost (of paths outside this region) is increased by one. Internal path cost (of paths within this region) is increased by one when
BPDUs traverse the region.
Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings. These include the following parameters:
• Name of the MST region
• Revision level as the unique number for the MST region
• VLAN-to-MST mapping
14.9.2.3 MST Instance
An MST Instance (MSTI) is a set of VLANs that use the same spanning tree. Each created
MSTI is identified by a unique number (known as an MST ID) known internally to a region.
Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions.
The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions. Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
273
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
Figure 165 MSTIs in Different Regions
14.9.2.4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP/RSTP. The CIST is the default MST instance (MSTID 0). Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST. In an MSTP-enabled network, there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices. A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP.
Figure 166 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example
14.10 MSTP Setup
Use the MSTP screens to enable MSTP on the switch and configure MSTP bridge and port settings.
14.10.1 MSTP Bridge Settings
Click Switch > MSTP in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next. Use this screen to configure MSTP and RSTP settings.
274
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 167 MSTP: Bridge
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 121 MSTP: Bridge
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Config Name
Revision Level
Enable
Priority
Enter a descriptive name (up to 31 characters) of an MST region.
Enter a number to identify a region’s configuration. Devices must have the same revision level to belong to the same region.
Select this option to activate MSTP on the system.
Priority is used in determining the root switch. The switch with the highest priority
(lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch. Enter a number between 0 and 65535. The system will automatically round the number to the nearest multiple of 4096.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this switch.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time,
Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
275
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
Table 121 MSTP: Bridge (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Hello Time
MaxAge
This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to
10 seconds.
This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a
BPDU before attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states.
This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds. As a general rule:
2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Force Version Specify a spanning tree protocol (MSTP or RSTP) the switch is to use.
Select MSTP to configure multiple spanning trees that allows a loop-free network for one or more VLANs. Only MSTP BPDUs will be sent.
Select RSTP to send RSTP BPDUs and ignore any MSTP-specific information.
MaxHops
MSTI
Enter the number of hops (between 1 and 255) in an MSTP region before the
BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged.
This field displays the MST instance number. The switch can identifies up to 16 spanning trees in a region.
Priority Set the priority of the switch for the specific spanning tree instance. The lower the number, the more likely the switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance.
Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 (thus valid values are 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344 and 61440).
Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
MSTID
Start VID
End VID
Apply
MSTID
VID
Config Digest
Enter the ID number (0 ~ 16) of a spanning tress to which you want to map the
VLAN ID settings below.
Enter the start of the VLAN ID range to map to the MST instance.
Enter the end of the VLAN ID range to map to the MST instance. To map only one
VLAN, enter the same VID as the start VID.
Click Apply to add the VLAN-to-MST instance mapping. The new settings automatically displays in the tables below.
This field displays the ID of an MST instance.
This field displays the VID (or VID ranges) to which the MST instance is mapped.
A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN-MSTI mapping information.
This field displays the 16-octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU. This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system.
276
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.10.2 MSTP Port Settings
Click Switch > MSTP > Port to display the configuration screen as shown. Use this screen to set the MST settings on the switch ports.
Figure 168 MSTP: Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 122 MSTP: Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MSTID
Port
Enable
Priority
Path Cost
Edge
P2P
Select an MST region ID from the drop-down list box and click Apply to set the port settings.
This column lists the management switch card’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Select this option to set the port to be a member of the selected MST region.
When a loop occurs and two ports have the same path cost, the port with a higher priority (lower numerical value) becomes the root port and the other port becomes an alternate port.
Specify the port priority in the spanning tree. Enter a number (between 1 and 255).
Enter a smaller number to have the switch select this port first. If two ports have the same priority, the switch will select the one with the smallest port ID (which consists of the port priority and port number).
When a loop occurs, MSTP selects the port with the lowest path cost to the root bridge.
Specify the path cost (between 0 and 200000000) for the port. Enter a smaller number to have the switch select this port first. Enter 0 to have to system automatically determines the path cost based on the link speed. If two ports have the same path cost, the switch will select the one with the highest priority.
An edge port connects to a non-STP device.
Select this option to set the port as an edge port. The switch immediately sets this port to the forwarding state when a link failure is detected. This allows for fast recovery.
Set a point-to-point link between ports to increase the speed of convergence by allowing the network to determine the designated port faster. The port must be connected directly to another switch port.
Select Enable to activate this feature on a full-duplex port that is connected directly to another switch port.
Select Disable to deactivate this feature on the port that is in half-duplex mode.
Select Auto to have the system automatically determine if the port is full-duplex or half-duplex.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
277
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
Table 122 MSTP: Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
14.10.3 MSTP Configuration Example
This section shows you how to configure MSTP settings for the network example shown. In this network example, there are two VLANs on two spanning tree instances.
Figure 169 MSTP Network Example 2
278
1 Log into the web configurator and access the MSTP-Bridge screen.
2 Specify a descriptive name in the Config Name field for the MSTP region.
3 Enter a number in the Revision Level field.
4 To create VLAN-to-MSTI mapping, set the MSTID, Start VID and End VID fields and click Apply. For this example, map VLAN 1 to MSTID 1 and VLAN 2 to MSTID 2.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 170 MSTP Configuration Example: Bridge
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
5 To configure port MSTP settings, click the Port tab.
6 Select the instance ID number in the MSTID field and click Apply.
7 Select Enable to set the port to belong to this spanning tree and click Apply.
For this network example, enable uplink ports 1 and 2 in the two spanning tree instances
(MSTID 1 and 2).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
279
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
Figure 171 MSTP Configuration Example: Port
280
8 For switch B, configure the same general MSTP settings and VLAN-to-MST mappings as switch A for the subtending ports.
9 Set the subtending port priorities on switch B to allow MSTP to forward traffic to the corresponding link.
In MSTID1, set the subtending port 1 priority to 0 and subtending port 2 priority to 240.
In MSTID2, set the subtending port 1 priority to 240 and subtending port 2 priority to 0.
"
Devices belonging to the same MST region must have the same settings in the
Config Name and Revision Level fields and VLAN-MST instance mapping(s).
14.11 Switch Port
This section describes the switch port features and parameters.
14.11.1 Uplink and Subtending Modes
The Gigabit Ethernet SFP slots and ports can function in either subtending or uplink mode.
Connect a port in uplink mode to an backbone Ethernet switch or router. The management switch card allows traffic between the ports in uplink mode and the DSL ports on the line cards.
Use the subtending mode to daisy-chain other Ethernet switches. With subtending mode, the management switch card allows traffic between the ports in subtending mode and the ports in uplink mode. The management switch card does not allow traffic between the ports in subtending mode and the DSL ports on the line cards.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.11.2 Flow Control
A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The MSC1000G uses IEEE 802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and back pressure flow control in half duplex mode.
IEEE 802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill.
Back pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later.
14.11.3 Port VLAN Trunking
VLAN Trunking allows frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through a port.
This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
Refer to the following figure. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 (V1 and V2) on devices A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C, D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags. However, with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking port(s).
Figure 172 Port VLAN Trunking
14.11.4 Bandwidth Control
Use bandwidth control to define a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or outgoing traffic flows on individual Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. This may be useful for limiting backbone bandwidth usage and preventing viruses from using up all of the system’s resources.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
281
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.11.5 Broadcast Storm Control
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your network. You can specify limits for each packet type on each port. DLF packets are also known as unknown unicast packets.
14.12 Switch Port Setup Port Screen
Click Switch > Switch Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next.
Use this screen to configure basic settings for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Figure 173 Switch Port Setup
282
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 123 Switch Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Enable
Name
Mode
Speed/Duplex
Flow Control
This is the label of a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
Select this check box to turn on an interface. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur.
Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port. You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Set a port as subtending to daisy-chain other Ethernet switches. Use uplink mode to connect to a backbone Ethernet switch or router.
Select the type of Ethernet connection for this port. When you don’t use autonegotiation, you must make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect.
Select Auto (auto-negotiation) to have the system automatically determine the type of connection that the Ethernet port has. When the peer Ethernet device has auto-negotiation turned on, the system negotiates with the peer to determine the connection speed. If the peer Ethernet port does not have auto-negotiation turned on, the system determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using full duplex.
Select 1000/Full if the Ethernet port has a 1000 MB connection.
Select 100/Full if the Ethernet port has a 100 MB full-duplex electrical connection.
Select 100/Half if the Ethernet port has a 100 MB half-duplex electrical connection.
Select this check box to turn on flow control on a port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
Table 123 Switch Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
14.13 Switch Port Setup 802.1P/1Q Screen
Click Switch > Switch Port Setup > 802.1P/1Q in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next. Use this screen to configure IEEE 802.1p priority and IEEE 802.1Q VLAN settings for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Figure 174 Switch Port Setup: 802.1P/1Q
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 124 Switch Port Setup: 802.1P/1Q
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Default Priority
Default VLAN ID
[1-4094]
GVRP
Frame Type
VLAN Trunk
This is the label of a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
Select a default priority to use for frames that come into the interface without a
IEEE 802.1p priority tag.
Select a default VLAN ID to use for frames that come into the interface without a
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID.
Select this check box to turn on GARP VLAN Registration Protocol to have the interface propagate VLAN information to other devices.
Clear the check box to not have the interface propagate VLAN information to other devices.
Select all to have the interface accept all Ethernet frames. Select tag to have the interface only accept frames with an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag.
Select this check box to have the interface use VLAN trunking in order to accept frames with any VID.
Clear the check box to have the interface only accept frames with registered VIDs.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
283
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
Table 124 Switch Port Setup: 802.1P/1Q (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
14.14 Switch Port Setup Bandwidth Screen
Click Switch > Switch Port Setup > Bandwidth in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next. Use this screen to configure bandwidth control settings for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Figure 175 Switch Port Setup: Bandwidth
284
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 125 Switch Port Setup: Bandwidth
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Enable
Ingress Rate
Egress Rate
Apply
Cancel
This is the label of a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
Select this check box to turn on bandwidth control for an interface.
Type a maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port
(measured in megabits per second). Use a number from 0 to 1000.
Type a maximum bandwidth allowed for the out-going traffic flow on a port
(measured in megabits per second). Use a number from 0 to 1000.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
14.15 Switch Port Setup Broadcast Screen
Click Switch > Switch Port Setup > Broadcast in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next. Use this screen to configure broadcast storm control settings for the Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces.
Figure 176 Switch Port Setup: Broadcast
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 126 Switch Port Setup: Broadcast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Broadcast
This is the label of a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
Select Enable to limit the number of broadcast packets the interface will accept per second.
Type how many broadcast packets the interface should accept per second
(0~262143).
Multicast
Unknown Unicast Select Enable to limit the number of unknown unicast packets the interface will accept per second. Unknown unicast packets are also known as destination lookup failure (DLF) packets.
Type how many unknown unicast packets the interface should accept per second
(0~262143).
Apply
Select Enable to limit the number of multicast packets the interface will accept per second.
Type how many multicast packets the interface should accept per second
(0~262143).
Cancel
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
285
Chapter 14 Switch Screens
286
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
15
Sys Screens
This chapter describes the Sys screens you use to configure general system, access control, syslog, administrator login accounts and management IP settings.
15.1 SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network switches. SNMP is a member of TCP/IP protocol suite. A manager station can manage and monitor the MSC1000G through the network via SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and/or SNMP version 2c. The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured.
Figure 177 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch (the
MSC1000G). An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
287
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
Table 127 SNMP Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Get
GetNext
Set
Trap
Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
15.1.1 Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance. The MSC1000G supports the following MIBs:
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• BRIDGE MIB (RFC 1573) dot1dStp (RSTP), dot1dGarp (GARP)
• BRIDGE Extension MIB (RFC 2674)
• Dot3 MIB (RFC 2665)
• ADSL Line MIB (RFC 2662)
• ADSL Extension Line MIB (RFC 3440)
• RMON MIB (RFC 1757)
• ifXTable MIB (RFC 2863)
• RFC 3635
• RFC 3636
The MSC1000G can also respond with specific data from the ZyXEL private ies5000 MIB.
15.2 SNMP Screen
Click Sys > Access Control from the navigation panel to open the following screen.
288
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 178 Access Control: SNMP
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 128 Access Control: SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get Community
Set Community
Enter the get community, which is the password for the incoming Get- and
GetNext- requests from the management station. You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Enter the set community, which is the password for incoming Set- requests from the management station. You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Trap Community Enter the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Version Specify the SNMP version and access mode.
Select v2c to allow SNMPv2 read/write access.
Select v3 to allow SNMPv3 read/write access with additional user authentication and data encryption options.
Select v3v2c to allow SNMPv3 read/write and SNMPv2 read-only access.
Trap Destination Enter the IP address of a station to send your SNMP traps to.
Version Specify the format of the SNMP trap PDU (Protocol Data Unit) to be sent. The default is v2c.
IP
Port
Username
Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the trap server.
Enter the port number upon which the station listens for SNMP traps.
This field is applicable when you select v3 in the Version field.
Enter the username to be included in the trap PDUs.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
289
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
Table 128 Access Control: SNMP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Information Configure the administrative login accounts for SNMP management.
Use the User Account screen to create administrative login accounts. See
Index
Enable
This field displays the index number.
This field displays whether the administrative login account is activated or note.
Name
Level
Hash
Encrypt
Apply
Cancel
This field displays the administrative login account user name.
Select noauth to disable SNMPv3 user authentication and encryption for SNMP communication.
Select auth to enable SNMPv3 user authentication.
Select privacy to enable SNMPv3 user authentication and encryption for SNMP communication using a private key generated from the password.
Specify an authentication method.
Select md5 (Message Digest 5) to produce a 128-bit digest for minimal authentication security.
Select sha (Secure Hash Algorithm) to produces a 160-bit digest for maximum authentication security.
Specify an encryption method. Select des or aes.
Data Encryption Standard (DES) is a widely used method of data encryption using a secret key. DES applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data.
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is a newer method of data encryption that also uses a secret key. AES is more secure than DES.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
15.3 Service Access Control Screen
Click Sys > Access Control > Access Ctrl to open the following screen. Use this screen to set which services may be used to access the system.
Figure 179 Access Control: Service Access Control
290
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 129 Access Control: Service Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Services
Enable
Service Port
Apply
Cancel
These are services you may use to access the system are listed here.
Select the Enable check boxes for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the system.
For Telnet, SSH, SNMP, FTP or web services, you can use this field to change the service port number. If you change the port number then you will have to let people
(who wish to use the service) know the new port number for that service.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
15.3.1 Secured Client Screen
Click Sys > Access Control from the navigation panel and then the Secured Client tab to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure IP address ranges of trusted computers that may manage the system.
Figure 180 Access Control: Secured Client
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 130 Access Control: Secured Client
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index
Enable
Start Address
End Address
Telnet/SSH/
SNMP/FTP/Web/
ICMP
This is the client set index number. A “client set” is a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the system.
Select this check box to activate this secured client set. Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it.
Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage the system.
The system checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here. The system immediately disconnects the session if it does not match.
Select services that may be used for managing the system from the specified trusted computers.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
291
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
Table 130 Access Control: Secured Client (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
15.4 General Setup
Click Sys > General Setup from the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 181 General Setup
292
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 131 General Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name
Location
Contact Person's
Name
Frame Number
Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Enter the geographic location of your system. You can use up to 31 English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Enter the name of the person in charge of this system. You can use up to 31
English keyboard characters; spaces are not allowed.
Enter the number (an integer from 1 to 65535) of the frame (rack) where the system is installed.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
Table 131 General Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chassis Number Enter a chassis number (an integer from 1 to 64). The chassis number helps to keep track of this individual unit in a multiple unit application.
Product Model This field displays your device type.
System Up Time This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started.
Database Version This field displays the time and date that the system’s configuration was last saved to the non-volatile memory. The time is in (24-hour) hour, minute and second format. The date is in year, month and day format.
Use Time Server
When Bootup
Enter the time service protocol that a timeserver uses. Not all timeservers support all protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works.
The main differences between them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the system displays the day, month, year and time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC 868).
None is the default value. Enter the time manually. Each time you turn on the system, the time and date will be reset to 2000-1-1 0:0.
Time Server IP
Address
Current Time
New Time
(hh:min:ss)
Current Date
New Date (yyyymm-dd)
Time Zone
Enter the IP address (or URL if you configure a domain name server in the IP
Setup screen) of your timeserver. The system searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.
This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).
Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply.
This field displays the date you open this menu.
Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply.
Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly known as GMT, Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone from the drop-down list box.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
15.5 IP Setup
Click Sys > IP Setup from the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the system and management IP addresses and subnet masks.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
293
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
Figure 182 IP Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 132 IP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inband
IP Address
IP Mask
VID
Outband
IP Address
IP Mask
These fields configure in-band management settings. In-band management refers to accessing the management interface through a network port (not the management port).
Enter the in-band management IP address for the system in dotted decimal notation (for example 1.2.3.4).
Enter the in-band management IP subnet mask for the system in dotted decimal notation for example 255.255.255.0.
Enter the VLAN ID (Identifier) of the management (CPU) VLAN. You must connect to the system through a port that is a member of the management (CPU) VLAN in order to perform in-band management.
These fields configure out-of-band management settings. Out-of-band management refers to accessing the management interface through a management port.
Enter the out-of-band management IP address for the management port in dotted decimal notation (for example 1.2.3.4).
Enter the out-of-band management IP subnet mask for the management port in dotted decimal notation for example 255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
15.6 Syslog Screen
Click Sys > Unix SysLog from the navigation panel to open the following screen. The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server.
294
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
Figure 183 Unix Syslog
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 133 Unix Syslog
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Unix
Syslog
Facility1~7
Select this check box to activate syslog (system logging) and then configure the syslog parameters described in the following fields.
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Please refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
SysLog Server IP Enter the IP address of the syslog server for the corresponding log facility.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
15.7 User Account Screen
Click Sys > User Account from the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use this screen to manage administrator accounts.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
295
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
Figure 184 User Account
296
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 134 User Account
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable
Name
Password
Retype Password to confirm
Privilege
Select this check box to activate the administrator account.
Type a user name for the account
Type a password for the account.
Type the password again to make sure you have entered it properly.
Apply
Cancel
Index
Enable
Name
Privilege
Delete
Select the administrator account’s level of access privileges.
Select high to allow the administrator to perform all types of system configuration, including the management of administrator accounts.
Select middle to allow the administrator to configure the system through the web configurator but not manage administrator accounts.
Select low to allow the administrator read-only access to the web configurator screens.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
This column numbers the administrator account entries.
This column displays a “V” if the administrator account is turned on or a “-” if the account is turned off.
This column displays the user names of the accounts.
This column displays the level of access privileges of the accounts.
Select one or more account entries’ check boxes and then use the Delete button to remove it (or them).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
15.8 RADIUS Service Types
When you set the system to authenticate users using an external RADIUS server, the system assigns a privilege level to the login account based on the service type information received from the RADIUS server after the authentication is successful.
The following table shows the service type and privilege level mappings.
Table 135 Service Type to Privilege Level Mapping
SERVICE TYPE PRIVILEGE LEVEL
login nas-prompt admin low medium high
15.9 TACACS+
TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System) is a security protocol similar to RADIUS. Like RADIUS, TACACS uses a centralized TACACS server that responds to client requests.
TACACS+ is the latest version of TACACS and supports authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA). Earlier versions only supported authentication or authentication and accounting. TACACS+ connections are more reliable than those earlier TACACS versions due to the use of TCP as the transport protocol for packets. TACACS+ also encrypts the body of traffic traveling between the TACACS+ server and client (although the header is unencrypted).
15.10 User Account Authentication Screen
Click Sys > User Account from the navigation panel and then the Authentication tab to open the following screen. Use this screen to set up how the system authenticate administrators when they log in.
Figure 185 User Account Authentication
MSC1000G User’s Guide
297
Chapter 15 Sys Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 136 User Account Authentication
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Mode
IP
Port
Secret
Default Privilege
Level
Use this field to set which database the system uses to authenticate a user.
Select local to have the system use the internal user account database.
Select radius to have the system use an external RADIUS server.
Select local first and then radius to have the system check the internal user account database first, and then the external RADIUS server if there is no match.
Select tacas+ to have the system use an external TACACS+ server.
Select local first and then tacas+ to have the system check the internal user account database first, and then the external TACACS+ server if there is no match.
Type the IP address of the RADIUS server.
Type the RADIUS server’s listening port number. The MSC1000G uses the default of 1812 if you do not specify a port.
Type the password for the RADIUS server.
Specify the default login account privilege level if no service type information is received from the RADIUS server.
Select a default privilege level (low, medium or high). Refer to
Section 17.5 on page 311 for more information.
Select deny to block management access to the system.
Apply
Cancel
Note: You will be blocked access to the system for remote management if you enter deny and the system uses only
RADIUS authentication without receiving system type information. In this case, you can only access and manage the device through the console port.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory.
The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
298
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
16
VLAN Screens
16.1 VLAN Introduction
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. If you have enabled port isolation in the Switch Setup screen, you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
16.2 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
The IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN uses both explicit and implicit tagging.
1 Explicit Tagging
A VLAN identifier is added to the frame header that identifies the source VLAN.
2 Implicit Tagging
The MAC (Media Access Control) number, the port or other information is used to identify the source of a VLAN frame.
Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The
VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier, residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information, starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID
MSC1000G User’s Guide
299
Chapter 16 VLAN Screens are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 bits
The MSC1000G handles up to 4094 VLANs (VIDs 1-4094). The switch accepts incoming frames with VIDs 1-4094.
16.2.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the switch first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default
VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.
The egress (outgoing) port(s) of a frame is determined on the combination of the destination
MAC address and the VID of the frame. For a unicast frame, the egress port based by the destination address must be a member of the VID, also; otherwise, the frame is blocked. A broadcast frame (or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system) is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID (except the ingress port itself), thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain.
Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on an individual
VLAN and port basis (remember that a port can belong to multiple VLANs). If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame, then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame; otherwise, it is transmitted as an untagged frame.
16.3 Automatic VLAN Registration
GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches.
16.3.1 GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) allows network switches to register and deregister attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN. GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application, for example, GVRP.
16.3.1.1 GARP Timers
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
300
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 16 VLAN Screens
16.3.2 GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch.
Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802.1Q VLAN terminology.
Table 137 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology
VLAN PARAMETER
Term Description
VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually.
VLAN Administrative
Control
Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration/ deregistration process.
Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members.
VLAN Tag Control
VLAN Port
Registration
Forbidden
Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP.
Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
Untagged
Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN.
Port VID
Ports belonging to the specified don't tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received.
Acceptable Frame
Type
Ingress Filtering
You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port.
If set, the switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member
16.4 Tagged Frames Forwarding Example
1 First the MSC1000G checks the VLAN ID (VID) of tagged frames or assigns temporary
VIDs to untagged frames.
2 The MSC1000G then checks the VID in a frame’s tag against the SVLAN table.
3 The MSC1000G notes what the SVLAN table says (that is, the SVLAN tells the
MSC1000G whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have a tag).
4 Then the MSC1000G applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision. This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them. Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE (customer premises equipment) DSL device that does not accept tagged frames.
16.5 Untagged Frames Forwarding Example
1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN.
2 The MSC1000G checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
301
Chapter 16 VLAN Screens
3 The MSC1000G ignores the port from which the frame came, because the MSC1000G does not send a frame to the port from which it came. The MSC1000G also does not forward frames to “forbidden” ports.
4 If after looking at the SVLAN, the MSC1000G does not have any ports to which it will send the frame, it won’t check the port filter.
16.6 VLAN Setup Screen
Click VLAN > VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next. You can assign the management switch card’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces to be members of a VLAN group or prohibit an interface from joining a VLAN group in this screen. This is an IEEE
802.1Q VLAN.
Figure 186 VLAN Setup
302
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 138 VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable
Name
VID
Port
Select this check box to turn on the VLAN group. You cannot disable a VLAN if any
PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU (management) VLAN.
Enter a descriptive name for this VLAN group for identification purposes.
Enter the VLAN ID (VLAN Identifier) for this static VLAN entry; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
This is the label of a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 16 VLAN Screens
Table 138 VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Registration
Tag
Apply
New
Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP.
Select Fix for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
You cannot change a port from the fixed state to another state if the port’s PVID is set to this VLAN. The VLAN must have at least one port set to the fixed status if the
VLAN is the CPU (management) VLAN.
Select this check box if you want to tag all frames transmitted though a port with this
VLAN group ID.
Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system’s volatile memory. The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click New to start configuring the screen again.
Show VID From Type a range of VLAN IDs that you want to view and click Apply to display them in the table below.
Index
Name
VID
This field displays the number of the VLAN entry in this list.
This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
Enable
ENET Ports
This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the
VLAN settings.
This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled (V) or disabled (-).
This column displays the VLAN tagging settings of the MSC1000G’ Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
ENET port 1 and 2 are subtending ports 1 and 2.
ENET port 3 and 4 are uplink ports 1 and 2.
ENET ports 5~8 do not apply (and nothing displays).
T displays if the system is to tag all frames transmitted though the port with this
VLAN group ID.
U displays if the system is not to tag all frames transmitted though the port with this
VLAN group ID.
An X indicates that the port is forbidden (blocked) from joining the static multicast group.
An - indicates that the port is a normal member and can join the VLAN dynamically.
Page X of X
Previous/Next
Page
Modify
Delete
This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information.
Click one of these buttons to show the preceding/following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen.
Select a VLAN’s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the VLAN.
Select a VLAN’s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the VLAN.You cannot delete the CPU (management) VLAN.
16.7 VLAN Port Setting Screen
Click VLAN > Port Setting in the navigation panel to display the screen shown next. You can select a DSL line card to view the VLAN settings on its ports.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
303
Chapter 16 VLAN Screens
Figure 187 VLAN Port Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 139 VLAN Port Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ID
State
Card Type
Up Time
Firmware
This is the slot number of a line card. Click the index number of an active line card to display which of the line card’s ports belong to which VLANs.
This field displays the line card’s current operational status.
active means the line card is operating normally.
init means the MSC1000G is initializing the line card.
disable means a manager has disabled the line card.
inactive means the line card is starting up or is not operating normally. This could be due to the card starting, a firmware upgrade in progress or a malfunction. See
Section 34.6 on page 598 for what to do if the line card stays stuck in the inactive
state.
This field displays the type of a line card.
This field displays how long the line card has been running since the last time it was started.
This field displays the current firmware version installed on the line card.
16.8 VLAN Port Setting Slot Screen
Click VLAN > Port Setting and then click the ID of an active DSL line card. Use this screen to view the VLAN settings on the DSL line card’s ports.
304
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Figure 188 VLAN Port Setting Slot
Chapter 16 VLAN Screens
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 140 VLAN Port Setting Slot
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Joined VLAN
This is the label of a DSL port. Click a port’s index number to open a details screen about that port.
These are the VLAN IDs of all the VLANs to which the DSL port belongs.
16.9 VLAN Port Setting Slot Detail Screen
Click VLAN > Port Setting and then click the ID of an active DSL line card. Click the Use this screen to view the VLAN settings on the DSL line card’s ports.
Figure 189 VLAN Port Setting Slot Detail
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 141 VLAN Port Setting Slot Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID
PVC
This column lists the VLAN IDs of all the VLANs to which the DSL port belongs.
This column list the VPI and VCI that the DSL port uses with each VLAN.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
305
Chapter 16 VLAN Screens
306
MSC1000G User’s Guide
P
ART
III
Commands
Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance (585)
307
308
C
H A P T E R
17
Commands
This chapter introduces the Command Line Interface (CLI) and lists the available commands.
"
See the web configurator chapters of this User’s Guide for background information on features configurable by web configurator.
17.1 Commands Introduction
You can use commands to configure the IES-5000.
Telnet to the IES-5000 or connect a computer to the console port on the MSC1000G and use terminal emulation software configured to VT100 terminal emulation, 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no flow control.
The default user name is “admin” and the default password is “1234”.
User name: admin
Password: ****
Copyright (c) 1994 - 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp.
ras>
17.2 Command Conventions
The rules of the commands are listed next.
1 The command keywords are in courier new
font.
2 A command can be abbreviated to the smallest unique string that differentiates it from other commands. For example the sys date show
command could be abbreviated to sy d sh
.
3 The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets [], for instance, config
[save]
means that the save field is optional.
4 “Command” refers to a command used in the command line interface.
5 The | symbol means “or”.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
309
310
Chapter 17 Commands
1
Using commands not documented in the user’s guide can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable.
17.3 Getting Help
The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the commands:
• List of available commands under a command group.
• Detailed descriptions of the commands.
17.3.1 List of Available Commands
Enter “ help
” or “
?
” to display a list of commands you can use. ras> help acl alarm clear cluster config diagnostic exit ip lcman multicast port profile show switch sys vlan ras> switch ?
bandwidth bcastctrl dot3ad garptimer isolation mac mstp port qschedule queuemap
17.3.2 Detailed Command Information
Enter a command followed by “ help
” or “
?
” to display detailed sub commands and parameters. ras> switch port speed ?
usage: speed <giga-port> <speed>
<giga-port> : sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all if trunking is disabled
tsub|tup|all if trunking is enabled
<speed> : auto|1000F|100F|100H
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
17.4 Common Command Notation
The following table describes commonly used command parameter notation.
Table 142 Common Command Notation
NOTATION DESCRIPTION
[…]
The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets [], for instance, ip ping <ip> [<count>] means that the count field is optional.
The | symbol means “or”.
| sub1 sub2 up1 up2
This represents subtending port 1. On the MSC’s front panel this is SFP slot 1.
This represents subtending port 2. On the MSC’s front panel this is SFP slot 2.
This represents uplink port 1. On the MSC’s front panel this is Gigabit interface 3 (a
Gigabit Ethernet port/SFP slot pair).
This represents uplink port 2. On the MSC’s front panel this is Gigabit interface 4 (a
Gigabit Ethernet port/SFP slot pair).
<giga-port>
This represents the Gigabit Ethernet uplink port(s) or subtending port(s) or both.
<index>
This is an integer that sets the index number of a table entry. The range starts at 1.
The end of the range varies by command.
<ip>
<mac>
</netmask>
This represents a valid IP version four address in dotted decimal notation.
192.168.1.1 is an example.
This represents a MAC address in "a0:c5:12:34:56:78" format.
This represents the bit number of the subnet mask of an IP address. The range is 0 to 32.
To find the bit number, convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1’s together. Take “255.255.255.0” for example. 255 converts to eight 1’s in binary.
There are three 255’s, so add three eights together and you get the bit number (24).
<port>
<slot>
This represents the UDP or TCP port number of a service.
This represents the number of an individual chassis slot where a DSL line card is located.
<slot-port>
This represents the number of an individual chassis slot where a DSL line card is located and the number of a DSL port(s). You can specify a single port <1>, all ports
<*> or a list of ports <1,3,4>. You can also include a range of ports
<1,5,6~10,11,12>.
<vid>
<vpi/vci>
This represents a VLAN identifier (VLAN ID). The range is [1.. 4094].
The VPI (Virtual Path Indicator) and VCI (Virtual Channel Indicator) of an individual
PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit). The VPI setting can be 0 to 255. The VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 if the VPI is 0 or 1 to 65535 if the VPI is not 0.
17.5 Command Privilege Levels
There is a high, medium or low privilege level for each command.
High privilege commands are only available to administrators with high privilege access. High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts, restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults. Administrators with high privilege access can use all commands including the lower privilege commands.
Administrators with middle privilege access can use middle or low privilege commands.
Middle privilege commands include things like general feature configuration.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
311
312
Chapter 17 Commands
Administrators with the low privilege level are restricted to using only low privilege commands. Low privilege commands are read only and consist of displaying feature settings or configuration.
17.6 Saving Your Configuration
Use the following command to save your configuration when you are done with a configuration session.
ras> config save
1
Do not turn off your MSC1000G while saving your configuration.
This command saves all system configurations to nonvolatile memory. You must use this command to save any configuration changes that you make, otherwise the MSC1000G returns to its last saved settings when it is restarted. Save your changes after each configuration session.
Nonvolatile memory refers to the MSC1000G’s storage that remains even if the MSC1000G’s power is turned off. Configuration changes saved in the volatile (run time) memory are lost when the MSC1000G is turned off.
17.7 Commands Summary
The following tables list the commands that you can use with the MSC1000G. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high,
M for middle or L for low).
17.7.1 acl Commands
These are the Access Control List management commands.
Table 143 acl Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
acl dhcprelay82 clearinfo delete disable
<vid>
<vid>
<vid>
Removes option 82 information for the specified VLAN.
Deletes the option 82 information entry for the specified VLAN.
Deactivates option 82 for the specified VLAN.
P
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 143 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
dhcpsnoop enable server set show suboption2
<vid> <mode> relaymode <vid>
[auto|both]
DESCRIPTION
Enables option 82 information for the specified VLAN.
<mode> = 1 or 2
1 : Enable DHCP relay and option82.
2 : Disable DHCP relay but enable option82.
Sets information for the option 82
Circuit ID field.
Sets which DHCP relay mode the system uses for the specified
VLAN. auto = send the requests to the active DHCP server first. If the active DHCP server does not respond, the switch sends the
DHCP request to the backup
DHCP server. both = send the requests to both the active and backup DHCP servers.
M
M active <vid>
<1|2> set <vid>
<serverip1>
[serverip2]
Sets the active DHCP server to which the DHCP requests are sent first.
<vid> = a VLAN ID to be served with DHCP relay.
1 = Sets the first DHCP server as the active server.
2 = Sets the second DHCP server as the active server.
The default is 1 .
Sets an entry for forwarding
DHCP requests to the DHCP servers at the specified IP addresses.
<vid>
= a VLAN ID to be served with DHCP relay.
M
M delete <vid>
[serverip]
<vid>
Removes an entry for forwarding
DHCP requests to the DHCP server at the specified IP address.
Creates an option 82 entry for the
VLAN.
Displays DHCP relay and option
82 settings.
M
M
L enable <vid>
Turns on option 82 sub-option 2.
M disable <vid>
Turns off option 82 sub-option 2.
set <vid> <info>
Adds the specified information for sub-option 2.
M
M
DHCP snooping allows the system to identify and block packets from devices using unknown/static IP addresses.
P
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
313
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 143 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
disable enable flush dot1x show disable enable port radius show
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
<slot-port> port> <ip> set <slot-port>
<ip>
<slot>|<slotport> control <slotport> auto|auth|unauth disable <slotport> enable <slotport> period <slotport> <secs> reauth <slotport> on|off show <slot> ip <index> <ip> port <index>
<port> secret <index>
<secret_key>
DESCRIPTION
Deactivates DHCP snooping on the specified subscriber port(s).
Activates DHCP snooping on the specified subscriber port(s).
Clears the DHCP snooping table on the specified port(s).
Removes the static IP address from the DHCP snooping table.
Adds a static IP address to the
DHCP snooping table. You can add up to 3 static IP addresses per port.
Displays the DHCP snooping table on the specified port.
IEEE 802.1x authentication.
Turns off IEEE 802.1x.
Turns on IEEE 802.1x.
Sets the IEEE 802.1x port authentication option for specific subscriber ports.
auto = authentication required auth = forced authentication unauth = forced no authentication
Turns off IEEE 802.1x for specific subscriber ports.
Turns on IEEE 802.1x for specific subscriber ports.
Sets the IEEE 802.1x reauthentication period (60~65535) for specific subscriber ports.
Sets the IEEE 802.1x reauthentication option for specific subscriber ports.
Displays IEEE 802.1x settings.
Sets the IP address of the specified external RADIUS server
(1 or 2).
Sets the external RADIUS server port number of the specified
RADIUS server.
Sets the authentication and encryption key of the specified
RADIUS server.
Displays the external RADIUS server settings.
P
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
L
314
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 143 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
dsbcast maccount macfilter ouifilter enable disable show
<slot-port>
<vid>
<slot-port>
<vid>
<slot>|<slotport>
DESCRIPTION
Turns on the blocking of downstream broadcast packets from going to the specified VLAN on the specified port.
Turns off the blocking of downstream broadcast packets to go to the specified VLAN on the specified port.
Displays the settings for blocking downstream broadcast packets for the specified slot or port.
disable enable show <slot> delete disable
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
MAC count limits the number of
MAC addresses that can connect to a subscriber port.
Turns off MAC count limiting on the specified subscriber ports.
Turns on MAC count limiting on the specified subscriber ports.
<count>
Sets the MAC count limit number
(1-128) on the specified subscriber ports.
<slot-port>
<mac>
<slot-port>
Displays MAC count limiting settings.
MAC filter allows only traffic from specified source MAC addresses on the specified subscriber ports.
Removes a MAC filter MAC address entry.
enable <slot-port> mode
Turns off the MAC filter on the specified subscriber ports.
Turns on the MAC filter on the specified subscriber ports.
Sets the MAC filter actions. set show
<slot-port>
<accept|deny>
<slot-port>
<mac>
<slot>|<slotport>
Adds a MAC filter MAC address entry.
Displays MAC filter settings.
MAC OUI (Organization Unit
Identifier) filter allows or drops packets with MAC addresses from specific vendors. disable enable
<mac>
Removes the static MAC OUI filter.
<mac> = first three octets of the
MAC address.
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
Deactivates MAC OUI filtering on this port.
Activates MAC OUI filtering on this port.
P
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
315
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 143 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
pktfilter mode set delete set show
<slot-port>
<accept|deny>
<slot-port>
<mac>
<slot>|<slotport> show pppoeagent clearinfo
<slot>
<vid> enable <vid> rule show set <slot-port>
<type> delete <vid> disable <vid> info <vid>
<description>
<vid> set show
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the filter action.
Creates a MAC OUI filter.
<mac> = first three octets of the
MAC address.
Displays MAC OUI filter settings for the specified port or slot.
Packet type filter allows or drops specified packet types on the specified subscriber ports.
Sets the packet type filter for the specified subscriber ports.
<type> = accept-all, pppoe-only, or any combination of ip, arp, dhcp, eapol, pppoe, netbios, igmp separated by a space.
Displays packet type filter settings.
Resets PPPoE line description for the VLAN.
Enables PPPoE line information for the VLAN. The switch adds the line information to PPPoE packets for identification and security.
Deletes PPPoE line information settings.
Deactivate PPPoE line information insertion.
Sets PPPoE line information.
Enter a description (up to 24 characters).
Creates a PPPoE agent entry for the VLAN.
Displays PPPoE line information settings.
Upstream access control rules allows you to apply profiles on the subscriber line PVC.
Removes the ACL profile.
M
L
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
Applies the ACL profile. You can apply up to 8 profiles to a PVC.
Displays ACL profile settings for a
PVC.
M
L
P
M
316
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
17.7.2 alarm Commands
These are the alarm management commands.
Table 144 alarm Commands
COMMAND
alarm clear cutoff edit xedit history port
<alarm>|all
<fac>
<target>[,<targ et>]
<alarm> <cond>
<severity>
<fac>
<target>[,<targ et>]
<clearable>
DESCRIPTION
Alarm command general parameters:
<alarm> = alarm category (eqpt, dsl, enet, sys or all)
<severity> = alarm severity level
(critical, major, minor, info or all)
<condition> = Specify an alarm condition.
Erases historic alarm entries.
Cancels an alarm. This stops the sending of the alarm signal current.
Edits an alarm report entry.
<fac> = local1~local7
<target> = snmp|syslog
|all|none ‘none’ disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
Sets the severity level of an alarm(s) and where the system is to send the alarm(s).
<cond> = <condition>|<code>|all
<target> = snmp|syslog
|all|none ‘none’ disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
<clearable> = clearable|unclearable
Removes historic alarm entries by alarm category and alarm condition or by severity.
clear <alarm>|all
<condition>|all clear <severity> show [<severity>|all]
[<alarm>|all]
[<condition>|all
] [<sdate>|all]
[<edate>|all]
[for|rev]
[detail] show <slot> set <all|sub1|sub2|u p1|up2|mgmt
|slot-port>
<severity>
Displays historic alarms by severity, alarm category and alarm condition.
You can also display detailed alarms.
Displays port alarm severity level thresholds.
Sets the severity of alarms to record for individual ports.
P
M
M
M
M
M
L
L
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
317
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 144 alarm Commands (continued)
COMMAND
show [<severity>|all
] [<alarm>|all]
[<condition>|al l]
[<sdate>|all]
[<edate>|all]
[for|rev]
[detail] tablelist [<alarm>|all]
[<severity>|all
] [<fac>|all]
[<target>[,<tar get>]]
[<condition>|al l]
DESCRIPTION
Displays current alarms by severity, alarm category or alarm condition. You can also display detailed alarms.
P
L
Displays the supported alarm list and report settings.
<fac> = local1~local7
<target> = snmp|syslog|all
L
17.7.3 clear Commands
These are the commands to reset the counters.
Table 145 clear Commands
COMMAND
clear atm dhcp enet igmp
<slotport>|<slotport-vpi/vci> counter <slotport>
<gigaport>|<slot> info
DESCRIPTION
Resets ATM counters on the specified port or PVC.
Resets DHCP counters.
Resets counters on the Ethernet port.
P
M
M
M port info <slotport>
Resets IGMP counters and the number of learned IGMP groups.
Resets the counter of IGMP packets received and the number of learned groups on a port.
Resets management counters.
M
M
M ip lineperf inband|outband|b oth
<slot-port> packet <slotport>|<slotport-vpi/vci> paepvc counter performance <slot-port> curr|15min|1day
Resets subscriber line performance counters.
Resets the packet transmission counters on a subscriber port or PVC.
<slotport>|<s lotportvpi/vci>
Resets the PAE PVC counters.
Resets subscriber line performance counters.
M
M
M
M
318
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
17.7.4 cluster Commands
These are the commands to configure cluster management.
Table 146 cluster Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
cluster disable enable login member manager <name> member
<password>
<id> candidate delete set show flush
<id>
<id>
<mac>
<passwor d>
Disable clustering, default is disabled
Enable device as cluster manager
Enable device as cluster member
Login into a client
List all available candidates
Flush current candidates
Removes a member from a cluster.
Adds a member to the cluster.
show vlan show
<vid>
Displays cluster member settings.
Displays the cluster member status.
Sets the cluster VLAN ID.
17.7.5 config Commands
These are the configuration file management commands.
Table 147 config Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
config default save show sys|ip|switch|po rt|profile|acl|v lan|multicast|al l [nopause]
Resets factory default configuration.
Saves current configuration to nonvolatile memory.
Displays the current configuration.
L
L
M
P
H
M
L
P
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
319
Chapter 17 Commands
17.7.6 diagnostic Commands
These commands allow you to execute a specified diagnostic or test function to an interface port or a subscriber port.
Table 148 diagnostic Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
diagnostic ldm show test
<slot-port> result|hlin|hlog|q ln|snr
<slot-port>
A Loop Diagnostic Mode test provides details about the condition of an ADSL line. This feature is applicable for ALC line cards only.
Displays the most recent loop diagnostic mode test results for the specified subscriber port.
M
M loopback f5 <slot-port-vpi/ vci> selt test <slot-port>
Sets the specified subscriber port to loop diagnostic mode and displays the results.
Performs an OAMF5 loopback test on the specified subscriber port or PVC.
M
M This feature is applicable for ALC line cards only.
Single End Loop Test (SELT) checks the distance to the subscriber’s location.
Note: The port must have an open loop. There cannot be a
DSL device, phone, fax machine or other device connected to the subscriber’s end of the telephone line.
show <slot-port>
Starts SELT on the port.
Displays the SELT result (such as line type and loop length).
M
17.7.7 ip Commands
The ip
commands configure management interface IP settings.
Table 149 ip Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
ip arp flush show gateway <ip> ping <ip>
[<count>]
Clears the device’s IP Address
Resolution Protocol table.
Displays the device’s IP Address
Resolution Protocol table.
Sets the default gateway IP address.
Pings a host (default 3 times)
<count> = number of pings.
P
M
L
M
L
320
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 149 ip Commands (continued)
COMMAND
route delete show set show set inband|outb and <ip>[/
<netmask>]
[<inbandvid>] tracert <ip>
<dst-ip>[/
<netmask>]
<gateway>
<dst-ip>[/
<netmask>]
<gateway-ip>
[<metric>]
[<name>]
DESCRIPTION
Removes a routing table entry.
Adds or modifies a route entry.
<gateway-ip> = a gateway IP address of ‘0.0.0.0/0’ means a default gateway.
M
Displays the routing table.
Displays the IP addresses of the inband and out-of-band management interfaces and the default gateway, as well as the in-band management VLAN
ID.
Sets the management IP address, subnet mask and in-band management
VLAN ID.
<ip> = ‘0.0.0.0’ disables a management interface.
L
L
M
Sends a traceroute packet to the IP address (in the field to the left) and uses the response to determine the path a packet takes to that IP address.
L
17.7.8 lcman Commands
These are the line card management commands.
Table 150 lcman Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
lcman disable enable reset show
<slot>
<slot>
<slot>
[<slot>]
P
Turns off the specified line card.
Turns on the specified line card.
Performs a hardware reset on the specified line card. H
Displays information about the installed cards. L
H
H
17.7.9 multicast Commands
The multicast
commands allow you to perform static and dynamic multicast group management.
Table 151 multicast Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
multicast bandwidth default <bandwidth>
Sets the default bandwidth (between
1 and 100 000 kbps) allowed for multicast channel(s) for which you have not set the bandwidth settings.
P
M
P
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
321
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 151 multicast Commands (continued)
COMMAND
igmp igmpcount igmpfilter delete port set
<index> disable <slotport> enable <slotport> set <slot-port>
<bandwidth> show
<slot>|<slotport>
<index> <startmcast-ip> <endmcast-ip>
<bandwidth>
DESCRIPTION
Removes the specified multicast bandwidth configuration.
Deactivates multicast bandwidth setting on a port.
Activates multicast bandwidth setting on a port.
Sets the maximum multicast bandwidth allowed on a port.
Displays multicast bandwidth settings on the specified line card or port.
Sets bandwidth allowed for the specified multicast channel(s).
M
M
M
L
M show disable enable qryvid show disable enable proxy|snooping
[v2|v3] delete set <vid> show
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
Displays multicast bandwidth settings on the device.
Turns off IGMP proxy or snooping.
Turns on IGMP proxy or snooping using the specified version.
L
Removes an IGMP query VLAN ID.
Adds an IGMP query VLAN ID.
Displays the IGMP query VLAN IDs.
L
Displays the IGMP mode (proxy, snooping or disabled) and version (v2 or v3).
M
M
M
M Turns off the IGMP count limit for a
DSL port(s).
Turns on the IGMP count limit for a
DSL port(s).
M set <slot-port>
<count>
<slot>
Sets the IGMP count limit for a DSL port(s).
show
Displays the IGMP count limit setting status for the specified slot.
<igmpfilter>
Sets a DSL port(s) to use an IGMP filter profile.
show <slot>
Displays multicast group configuration and dynamic group member status.
M
M
M
L
M
L
P
M mvlan delete disable enable group
<vid>
<vid>
<vid> delete <vid>
<index>
Removes a multicast VLAN.
Deactivates a multicast VLAN.
Activates a multicast VLAN.
Removes a multicast VLAN group.
M
M
M
M
322
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 151 multicast Commands (continued)
COMMAND
smcast name set show delete set show set <vid>
<index> <startmcast-ip> <endmcast-ip>
<name>
DESCRIPTION
Sets a multicast VLAN group.
Sets the name of the multicast VLAN setting.
Sets the port multicast group membership settings.
M
M
<vid> <slotport> fix|forbid
<vid>
<vid> <groupip>
<vid> <groupip> all|sub<#>|up<#
>|tsub|tup|<slo t-port> fix|forbid|norm al
Displays multicast VLAN settings.
Removes a static multicast group entry.
Configures a static multicast group entry.
L
M
P
M
M
Displays the static multicast group configuration.
L
17.7.10 port Commands
The port commands allow you to configure the subscriber DSL ports.
Table 152 port Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
port adsl alarmprof annexl annexm annexi
<slot-port>
<alarmprofile> disable <slotport>
ADSL port specific commands
Applies an ADSL alarm profile to the subscriber port.
Turns off the Annex L reach extended feature.
enable <slot-port>
[narrow]
Turns on the Annex L reach extended feature. If the ‘narrow’ is not entered then
Annex L mode will be enabled as ‘wide’
PSD mode.
Turns off the Annex M double upstream feature.
disable <slotport> enable <slot-port> Turns on the Annex M double upstream feature (upstream tones from 6 to 63).
disable <slotport>
Turns off the Annex I all digital mode feature.
enable <slot-port> Turns on the Annex I all digital mode feature.
P
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
323
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 152 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
dscarrier0 dscarrier1 inpmin optionmask pmm
<slot-port> <m1>
<m2> <m3> <m4> <m5>
<m6> <m7>
<slot-port> <m1>
<m2> <m3> <m4> <m5>
<m6> <m7>
<slot-port>
<us_inp> <ds_inp>
<slot-port>
<option_mask> disable <slotport> enable <slot-port>
[L2|L3]
DESCRIPTION
Disables downstream carrier tones from 33 to 255.
<m1>~<m7> = carrier tones, 0~ffffffff,
'1' disables the corresponding tone.
Disables downstream carrier tones from
256 to 511.
<m1>~<m7> = carrier tones, 0~ffffffff,
'1' disables the corresponding tone.
Sets the upstream (us) and downstream
(ds) Impulse Noise Protection minimum setting (0~6).
Sets the following attributes.
0x0001 = disable Trellis
0x0002 = disable Reed-Solomon
0x0004 = disable upstream bitswap
0x0008 = disable downstream bitswap
0x0010 = disable 1-bit constellation
0x0020 = disable transmit windowing
(ADSL2+ only)
0x0040 = disable s=0.5 support (G.dmt only)
0x0080 = disable G.lite rate limit (G.lite only)
Turns off power management mode.
P
M
M
M
M
M param <slot-port>
[l0time <l0time>]
[l2time <l2time>]
[l2pcb <l2atpr>
<l2atprt>] [l2rate
<l2minrate>
<l2maxrate>
<l2threshold>]
Turns on power management mode.
L2 = power management mode L2
L3 = power management mode L2 and L3
Sets the L0 (full power) and L2 (low power) power mode transition settings.
<l0time> = Time (10 ~ 65535 seconds) to stay in L0 mode.
<l2time> = Time (10 ~ 65535 seconds) to wait before performing another power trims in L2 mode.
<l2atpr> = Maximum aggregated power reduction (APTR) per trim in dB (0 ~ l2atprt ).
<l2atprt> = Maximum total aggregate power reduction in dB (0-15).
<l2minrate> = Minimum rate in L2 (32
~ 4096).
<l2maxrate> = Maximum rate in L2
(minimum L2 rate ~ maximum upstream rate in kbps).
<l2threshold> = Line rate threshold to stay in L2 mode. When the rate is not within the threshold, the port switches to L0 mode immediately.
M
M
324
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 152 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
copy power psd set uscarrier
<source>
<destination>
<slot-port> fix|power|rate
<max_us_tx>
<max_ds_tx>
<max_rx> maximum [<slotport> <us-psd> <dspsd>]
<slot-port>
<profile> <mode>
<slot-port> <m0>
<m1>
DESCRIPTION
Specifies the maximum allowed transmit power and maximum aggregate received power. fix|power|rate = PSD and power adaptivity fix = fixed mode power = priority to power rate = priority to rate
<max_us_tx> = maximum upstream transmit power, -130~200 in 0.1 dBm.
<max_ds_tx> = maximum downstream transmit power, -50~200 in 0.1 dBm.
<max_rx> = maximum aggregate receive power at atu-c, -255~255 in 0.1 dBm.
Sets/displays maximum upstream/ downstream nominal PSD values. This is for testing purposes.
<us-psd> = Upstream PSD (-400 ~ 40 in
0.1dBm/Hz).
<ds-psd> = Downstream PSD (-400 ~ 40 in
0.1dBm/Hz).
Sets ADSL port(s) to use a profile created by the profile adsl set command.
<mode> = for Annex A, gdmt, t1413, glite, auto, adsl2, adsl2+; for Annex B, gdmt, etsi, auto, adsl2, adsl2+
Disables upstream carrier tones from 0 to
63.
<m0>, <m1> = carrier tones, 0~ffffffff,
'1' disables the corresponding tone.
Copies port settings from a source port to destination ports on the same type of line card.
Turns off a subscriber port.
P
M
M
M
M
M
M disabl e
<slot-port> enable <slot-port> ipbpvc arpproxy
Turns on a subscriber port.
Manually flush the learned MAC addresses from the ARP table.
M
M
|edgerouter [<ip>
<vid>] |interface
[<ip/mask> <vid>] age set <sec> delete domain show
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> delete <domainname>
Sets the valid time interval for learned MAC addresses in the ARP table. 10..10000 seconds
Displays the number of seconds a learned
MAC address remains valid in the ARP table.
Remove the specified IP aware Bridge
PVC.
Removes the specified domain. First delete all VLANs belonging to this domain.
M
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
325
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 152 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
dhcpvlan disable
<domain name> dhcpvlan enable
<domain name> <vid> set <domain name> edgerouter
DESCRIPTION
Disable DHCP VLAN in a domain
Enable DHCP VLAN in a domain M
Create domain, maximum 8 domains in the system.
Display domain setting
M
L show[<domain name>] vlan <domain name>
<vid>
<registration> delete <ip> <vid> set <ip>/<mask>
<vid> show [<vid>]
Set vlan to join or leave specified domain, maximum 8 VLANs in one domain.
Delete specified edge router setting
Sets the edge router
Displays the edge router setting.
M
M
M
L
M
P
M
<vid> set <ip>/<mask>
<vid> [<slot-portvpi/vci>] show all|<ip/ mask>|<vid>|<ip/ mask> <vid>
Sets the interface.
Displays the interface setting by optional
<ip>/<mask> and vlan id parameter
M
L
Deletes route entry from specified domain M set show vlan name> <ip/mask>
<nexthop> set <domain-name>
<ip/mask>
<nexthop> <metric>
[<priority>] show [<domain name>
| <ip/mask> |
<domain> <ip/ mask>]
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<vid> <priority>
<type>
<slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <vid>
<registration>
<tag>
Sets a new route to specified edge router for a given domain. Maximum 16 routes in a domain.
Displays current routing table for specific domain.
Sets IP aware Bridge PVC.
Displays IP aware Bridge PVC settings.
Sets VLAN attributes of a PVC.
M
L
M
L
M name <slot-port>
<name>
Sets a name for a subscriber port.
M
326
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 152 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
paepvc delete <slot-port-vpi/ vci> set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<mux> <pvid>
<priority> [acname
<acname>]
[srvcname
<srvcname>]
[hellotime
<hellotime>]
DESCRIPTION
Commands for configuring and displaying
PPPoA-to-PPPoE (PAE) PVC settings.
Removes a PAE PVC.
Configures a PVC for PAE translation.
<mux> = Encapsulation type ( llc or vcmux ).
<acname> = Host name of the access concentrator.
<srvcname> = Descriptive name for the service that uses this PVC.
<hellotime> = Timeout (0-600 seconds) for PPPoE session.
P
M
M ppvc pvc show delete member
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> delete <slot-portvpi/vci> <vpi/vci> set <slot-portvpi/vci> <vpi/vci>
<atmprofile>
<level> set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <mux> <pvid>
<priority> show
Priority PVC channel commands.
Removes a priority-based PVC.
Removes a PVC channel from a PVC group.
Adds a priority-PVC into the group.
Creates a priority-based PVC.
<mux> = encapsulation: llc , vcmux
<pvid> = default VLAN ID, 1~4094
<priority> = default priority, 0~7
Displays runtime configured virtual channels. vlan
<slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci> [detail]
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <vid>
<registration>
<tag>
Adds a PVC channel to a VLAN.
<registration> = join or leave
<tag> = TX tagging, tag or untag delete mvlan
<slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> disable <slotport-vpi/vci> enable <slot-portvpi/vci>
Note: Make sure the VID is not already used for MVLAN or
TLS PVC.
Displays the PAE PVC settings for the specified port and/or slot.
Permanent Virtual Circuit channel specific commands.
Removes a PVC setting.
L
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
Deactivates multicast VLAN on the PVC. M
Activates the multicast VLAN in the PVC. M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
327
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 152 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
shdsl show tel tlspvc set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<mux> <pvid>
<priority>
DESCRIPTION
Creates or modifies a PVC setting.
<profile> = ATM profile
<mux> = encapsulation: llc , vcmux
<pvid> = default VLAN ID, 1~4094
<priority> = default priority, 0~7
Displays runtime configured virtual channels. show <slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci> [detail] enable <pvc> usratelimit disable <pvc> set <pvc> <rate>
Activates upstream rate limiting on the
PVC.
Deactivates upstream rate limiting on the
PVC.
Sets the maximum upstream rate (in Kbps) the PVC is allowed to use.
Displays upstream rate limiting settings. vlan show <pvc>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <vid>
<registration>
<tag>
Adds a PVC channel to a VLAN.
<registration> = join or leave
<tag> = TX tagging, tag or untag
SHDSL specific commands.
alarmprof pbo
<slot-port> span|stuc|stur|*
<alarmprofile>
<slot-port> normal_epl|forced_ epl|forced_no_epl
<value>
Sets SHDSL ports or end point(s) to use an alarm profile.
span = set alarm profile for the whole span stuc = set alarm profile at stuc end point stur = set alarm profile at stur end point
* = set alarm profile at both stuc and stur
Sets power backoff for SHDSL port(s).
normal_epl = Power backoff with EPL
(Estimated Power Loss).
forced_epl = Forced power backoff with EPL. forced_no_epl = Forced power backoff without EPL.
<value> = 0~31 in dB
<mode>
Sets the negotiated noise margin mode of the SHDSL port(s).
<mode> = negotiated noise margin mode, normal|forced set <slot-port>
<profile_name>
Sets SHDSL port(s) to use a profile created by the profile shdsl set command.
Displays port settings.
<slot>|<slotport>
<slot-port>
<telephoneno>
Records a DSL port(s) subscriber’s telephone number.
Commands to configure Transparent LAN
Service (TLS) or VLAN stacking on the
PVCs.
P
M
L
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
328
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 152 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
delete <slot-port-vpi/ vci> set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile> llc|vcmux <vid>
<priority> show <slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci> vdsl alarmprof <slot-port>
<profile> frametype <slot-port>
<all|tag> frequencyplan <slot-port>
<997|998> priority <slot-port>
<priority>
DESCRIPTION
Removes a TLS PVC.
Sets/changes TLS PVC settings.
Displays the settings for a TLS PVC.
Sets the VDSL port(s) to use the specified alarm profile.
Sets the acceptable frame type on the
VDSL port(s).
P
M
M
L
M
M
Sets the band plan the VDSL port(s) uses. M
Sets the VDSL port(s) VLAN priority (0 - 7). M rfiband <slot-port>
<disable|ansi|etsi
|custom> rficustom tls disable <index> enable <index> set <index>
<start_freq>
<stop_freq> show
Selects an RFI band or disables this feature.
M
M
Uses these commands to set custom RFI settings. The settings are applied to all
VDSL ports.
Displays the settings of a custom RFI entry. M
Activates the specified custom RFI entry. M
M Sets a custom RFI entry. index = 1 - 8 start_freq = start of the frequency range in kHz. bigger than start_freq stop_freq .
cannot be stop_freq = end of the frequency range in kHz.
Displays custom RFI settings. L
M
<profile>
<vdsl_profile> disable <slotport> profile = custom line profile. vdsl_profile =
8a|8b|8c|8d|12a|
Disables Transparent LAN Service (TLS).
The system does not insert additional
VLAN tags to packets. enable <slot-port>
Disables Transparent LAN Service (TLS) to insert additional VLAN tags to packets. set <slot-port>
<svid> <spriority>
Sets/changes TLS settings on the VDSL port(s).
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
329
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 152 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
<on|off>
Enables/disable Upstream Power Back Off
(UPBO).
P
M
<registration>
<tag>
17.7.11 profile Commands
Use the profile
commands to configure DSL, alarm and traffic profiles.
Table 153 profile Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
profile adsl alarmadsl delete map set show delete map
<profile>
<profile>
ADSL profiles allow efficient configuration of ADSL port settings.
Removes an unreferenced ADSL port settings profile.
Displays which ADSL ports reference this profile.
<profile> <usmax-rate> <dsmax-rate>
[fast|delay <usdelay> <dsdelay>][minrate
<us-min-rate>
<ds-min-rate>]
[usmgn <us-maxmgn> <us-min-mgn>
<us-tgtmgn>][dsmgn <dsmax-mgn> <ds-minmgn> <ds-tgtmgn>] [usra fixed|startup|ru ntime <us-us-mgn>
<us-dsmgn>][dsra fixed|startup|ru ntime <ds-us-mgn>
<ds-ds-mgn>]
Creates a profile of ADSL port settings.
“us” is UpStream, “ds” is DownStream us maximum rate = 64~4096 in Kbps ds maximum rate = 64~32000 in Kbps us/ds delay = 1~255 in ms us minimum rate = 32~4096 in Kbps ds minimum rat e= 32~32000 in Kbps max noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB min. noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB target noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB fixed = no rate adaptation startup = rate adaptation at initialization runtime = rate adaptation any time up shift noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB us/ds down shift noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB
[<profile>]
Lists the ADSL configuration profiles or a specific profile’s detailed settings.
<profile>
<profile>
ADSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of ADSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced ADSL alarm profile.
Displays which ADSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
M
L
M
L
M
L
330
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 153 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set
DESCRIPTION
<profile> atuc
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lols <lols>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [ffr
<ffr>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>]
[fru <fru>] [iru
<iru>] [frd
<frd>] [ird
<ird>] [ift
<ift>] or
<profile> atur
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>] [fru
<fru>][iru
<iru>][frd <frd>]
[ird <ird>]
Creates a profile of ADSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters atuc = near end atur = far end
<lofs> = number of loss of framing seconds, 0~900
<loss> = number of loss of signal seconds, 0~900
<lols> = number of loss of link seconds, 0~900
<lprs> = number of loss of power seconds, 0~900
<ess> = number of error seconds,
0~900
<ffr> = number of failed fast retrains seconds, 0~900
<sesl> = number of severely errored seconds-line, 0~900
<uasl> = number of unavailable seconds-line, 0~900
<fru> = fast rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<iru> = interleave rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<frd> = fast rate down in Kbps,
0~2147483
<ird> = interleave rate down in
Kbps, 0~2147483
<ift> = init failure trap enable, 1enable, 0-disable alarmshdsl show delete map
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the ADSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
SHDSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of SHDSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced SHDSL alarm profile.
Displays which SHDSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
L
M
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
331
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 153 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set
DESCRIPTION
<profile> [atten
<atten>] [snrmgn
<snrmgn>] [es
<es>] [ses
<ses>][crc <crc>]
[losws <losws>]
[uas <uas>]
Creates a profile of SHDSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters
<atten> = loop attenuation threshold, 0~127
<snrmgn> = snr margin threshold,
0~15
<es> = number of errored seconds,
0~900
<ses> = severely errored seconds,
0~900
<crc> = the number of CRC anomalies, >=0
<losws> = number of loss of sync word seconds, 0~900
<uas> = number of unavailable seconds, 0~900 alarmadsl show delete map
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the SHDSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
ADSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of ADSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced ADSL alarm profile.
Displays which ADSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
L
M
L
332
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 153 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set
DESCRIPTION
<profile> atuc
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lols <lols>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [ffr
<ffr>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>]
[fru <fru>] [iru
<iru>] [frd
<frd>] [ird
<ird>] [ift
<ift>] or
<profile> atur
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>] [fru
<fru>][iru
<iru>][frd <frd>]
[ird <ird>]
Creates a profile of ADSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters atuc = near end atur = far end
<lofs> = number of loss of framing seconds, 0~900
<loss> = number of loss of signal seconds, 0~900
<lols> = number of loss of link seconds, 0~900
<lprs> = number of loss of power seconds, 0~900
<ess> = number of error seconds,
0~900
<ffr> = number of failed fast retrains seconds, 0~900
<sesl> = number of severely errored seconds-line, 0~900
<uasl> = number of unavailable seconds-line, 0~900
<fru> = fast rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<iru> = interleave rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<frd> = fast rate down in Kbps,
0~2147483
<ird> = interleave rate down in
Kbps, 0~2147483
<ift> = init failure trap enable, 1enable, 0-disable alarmvdsl show delete map
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the ADSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
VDSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of VDSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced VDSL alarm profile.
Displays which VDSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
L
M
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
333
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 153 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
atm igmpfilter set show delete map set show delete
<profile> [lofs
<lofs>] [loss
<loss>] [lols
<lols>] [lprs
<lprs>]
[ess <ess>]
[sesl <sesl>]
[uasl <uasl>]
[ift <ift>]
[<profile>]
<igmpfilter>
DESCRIPTION
Creates a profile of VDSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters
<lofs> = number of loss of framing seconds, 0~900
<loss> = number of loss of signal seconds, 0~900
<lols> = number of loss of link seconds, 0~900
<lprs> = number of loss of power seconds, 0~900
<ess> = number of error seconds,
0~900
<sesl> = number of severely errored seconds-line, 0~900
<uasl> = number of unavailable seconds-line, 0~900
<ift> = init failure trap enable, 1enable, 0-disable
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the VDSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
ATM traffic profiles allow efficient configuration of ATM traffic settings.
Removes an unreferenced ATM traffic profile.
Displays which ports reference this
ATM profile.
<atmprofile> cbr|ubr <pcr>
<cdvt> or
<atmprofile> rtvbr|nrt-vbr <pcr>
<cdvt> <scr> <bt>
Creates a profile of ATM traffic settings.
cbr = constant cell rate ubr = unspecified cell rate rt-vbr = realtime variable bit rate nrt-vbr = non-realtime variable bit rate
<pcr> = peak cell rate, 150~300000
<scr> = sustainable cell rate,
150~300000
<cdvt> = cell delay variation tolerance, 0~255
<bt> = burst tolerance, 0~255
Note: <pcr>, <cdvt>, <scr> and <bt> can be inputted '*' as default value
Note: use “*” to set <pcr>, <cdvt>,
<scr> or <bt> to the default value.
Lists the ATM traffic profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups.
Removes an unreferenced IGMP filter profile.
P
M
L
M
L
M
L
M
334
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 153 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
map set show
<igmpfilter>
DESCRIPTION
Displays which ports reference this
IGMP filter profile.
<igmpfilter>
<index> <startip>
<endip>
[igmpprofile]
Creates an IGMP filter profile of ATM traffic settings.
<igmpfilter> = profile name
<index> = index of address, 1~16
<startip> = start of address range
<endip> = end of address range
Lists the IGMP filter profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
profsvr shdsl show mode clientlist serverset sync delete map set show client|server set <ip> <type> delete <ip> show
<ip>
<profile>
<profile>
<profile> <minrate> <max-rate>
[annexa|annexb
2wire|4wire|mpai r4
[lp_off | lp_on_cur
[curr_margin] | lp_on_wc
[worst_margin]]]
[<profile>]
M
L
Displays the current profile server setting.
L
Sets the profile server operation mode. M
Adds an entry to the profile server client list.
M
M Removes an entry from the profile server client list.
Displays the profile server client list.
L
M Sets the target profile server IP address for synchronization.
Synchronize with the profile server.
M
SHDSL profiles allow efficient configuration of SHDSL port settings.
Removes an unreferenced SHDSL port settings profile.
Displays which SHDSL ports reference this profile.
M
L
M Creates a profile of SHDSL port settings.
<min-rate> = minimum rate,
192~4096 in Kbps
<max-rate> = maximum rate,
192~4096 in Kbps annexa|annexb = regional setting,
'annexb' by default
<wire-pair> = the number of wire pairs to be used, '2wire' by default lp_off = disable line probe, default line probe mode lp_on_cur = enable line probe with current target snr margin lp_on_wc = enable line probe with worst case target snr margin
<curr-margin> = current condition target snr margin, -10~21 in dB
<worst-margin> = worse case noise margin, -10~21 in dB
Lists the SHDSL port setting profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
L
P
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
335
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 153 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
vdsl
DESCRIPTION
VDSL profiles allow efficient configuration of VDSL port settings.
P
delete <profile> map <profile>
Removes a VDSL port settings profile.
M
Displays which VDSL ports reference this profile.
L max-rate> <ds-
Creates a VDSL line profile. “us” is
UpStream, “ds” is DownStream max-rate>
[fast|delay <usdelay> <dsdelay>] us maximum rate = 64~45440 in Kbps ds maximum rate = 64~100032 in
Kbps us/ds delay = 1~255 in ms
[minrate <us-minrate> <ds-minus minimum rate = 64~4096 in Kbps ds minimum rat e= 64~32000 in Kbps rate>]
[usmgn <us-maxmax noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB min. noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB mgn> <us-min-mgn>
<us-tgt-mgn>] target noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB
[dsmgn <ds-maxmgn> <ds-min-mgn>
<ds-tgt-mgn>] show [<profile>]
Lists the VDSL port setting profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
M
L
17.7.12 show Commands
The show
commands display runtime status information.
Table 154 show Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
show adsl linedata linegain linehlog lineqln
<slot-port>
Displays an ADSL port’s line bit allocation.
<slot-port>
Displays ADSL line channel characteristics. The format provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale.
Displays the Quiet Line Noise for a
DMT tone is the rms (root mean square) level of the noise present on the line, when no ADSL signals are present. It is measured in dBm/Hz.
The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk.
linetssi arp
Displays the ARP table.
P
L
L
L
L
L
L
336
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 154 show Commands (continued)
COMMAND
atm <slotport>|<slotport-vpi/vci>
[reset] dhcp counter
DESCRIPTION
Displays ATM traffic counters.
dot3ad snoop
<slot>|<slo t-port>
Displays port DHCP statistics.
<slot-port>
Displays port DHCP snooping information.
Displays the (IEEE 802.3ad) link aggregation settings.
Displays Ethernet packet counters.
L
L
L enet igmp ip lineinfo lineperf linerate linestat mac
<gigaport>|<slot> info group port ipbpvc arpproxy interface route
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
[<gigaport>|<mac>|<slo t>|<slotport>|vid
<vid1>[-<vid2>]]
L
[<vid>
<group_ip>] info <slotport>
Displays IGMP related statistics.
Displays the learned IGMP group settings and status.
Displays IGMP related information on the port. group
<slot-port>
Displays joint IGMP group information on the port.
Displays management IP settings.
[<domain>]|
Display whole ARP table.
Display learnt ARP table for a domain. edgerouter
[<ip>
Display learnt ARP table for all/an edge router.
<vid>]|inte rface [<ip/ mask>
<vid>]
Display learnt ARP table for all/an interface.
Age time information is included.
Display runtime interfaces.
[<ip/ mask>|<vid|
<ip/mask>
<vid>]
Display runtime routing table.
[<domain>]|
[<ip/ mask>]|[<do main> <ip/ mask>]]
Displays DSL line information.
Displays DSL line performance statistics.
Displays DSL line rate values.
Displays DSL link status.
Displays a port’s IEEE 802.1d MAC address forwarding table.
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
P
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
337
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 154 show Commands (continued)
COMMAND
monitor <slot> mstp packet paepvc
<mstid>
[<end_mstid>]
<slot-port> counter <slotport>|<slot
-port-vpi/ vci> session <slotport>|<slot
-port-vpi/ vci> performance <slot-port> curr|15min|1day sys rmon user vlan stats|history
<giga-port>
[<vid>]|[
<start-vid>
<end-vid>]
DESCRIPTION
Displays a card’s hardware monitor statistics.
Displays MSTP information for the
Ethernet ports.
L
Displays a port’s packet counter.
L
Displays PAE PVC counter statistics. L
Displays PAE PVC session information.
Displays a DSL port’s performance counters.
Displays the CPU utilization and memory usage status.
Displays Gigabit Ethernet interface link
RMON information.
Displays information on logged in users. * denotes your session.
Displays current VLANs.
P
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
17.7.13 switch Commands
The switch
commands configure switching functions and manage the Ethernet interfaces.
Table 155 switch Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
switch bandwidth disable enable set
<giga-port>
<giga-port>
<giga-port>
<ingress-rate>
<egress-rate>
Turns off bandwidth control on the specified port(s).
Turns on bandwidth control on the specified port(s).
Sets the incoming or outgoing bandwidth control for the specified port(s). 0~1000
(Mbps).
M
M
M show bcastctrl show
Displays the bandwidth control settings.
Displays broadcast and multicast storm control settings.
L
L
338
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 155 switch Commands (continued)
COMMAND
threshold <giga-port> <bclimit> <mc-limit>
<uu-limit>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the limitations of broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets, in packets per second for each trunk port (0~262143,
-1 means no limit).
<bc-limit> = broadcast packet limit
<mc-limit> = multicast packet limit
<uu-limit> = unknown unicast packet limit
Creates a link aggregation trunk groups.
dot3ad aggport <portlist> t1|t2|t3|t4|none
[t1|t2|t3|t4]
M disable enable [t1|t2|t3|t4]
[lacp]
Turns off link aggregation on the specified trunk group.
Turns on link aggregation on the specified trunk group. protocol.
lacp turns on LACP
M
M garptimer lacp show join leave leaveall set priority
<priority>
Sets the LACP system priority (0~65535).
show
Displays LACP settings. timeout short|long
Sets the time interval between exchanging
LACP packets.
M
L
M
<join-msec>
Displays the link aggregation state.
Sets the GARP timer’s Join Timer in milliseconds, 100~32766.
L
M
<leave-msec>
<leaveall-msec>
<join-msec>
<leave-msec>
<leaveall-msec>
Sets the GARP timer’s Leave Timer in milliseconds, 201~65534.
Sets the GARP timer’s Leave All Timer in milliseconds, 202~65535.
Sets GARP timers.
M
M
M isolation mac show disable enable vlan show flush mstp cfgname delete <vid> set <vid> enet|all
Displays the GARP timer settings.
Turns off the subscriber isolation feature.
Turns on the subscriber isolation feature.
M
Deletes the specified isolation VLAN.
M
L
M
Creates the specified isolation VLAN.
Displays the subscriber isolation feature’s current setting.
Clears the MAC table on the Ethernet ports or all ports (Ethernet and subscriber ports).
Sets a descriptive name for the MSTP configuration.
M
L
M
M disable enable fwdelay <fwdelay-sec>
Deactivates MSTP on the system.
Activates MSTP on the system.
Sets the maximum time (between 4 and 30 seconds) a switch will wait before changing states
M
M
M
P
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
339
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 155 switch Commands (continued)
COMMAND
hellotime <hellotime-sec> maxage maxhops
<maxage-sec>
<max-hops>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the time interval (between 1 and 10 seconds) between BPDU (Bridge Protocol
Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch.
Sets the maximum time (between 6 and 40 seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure.
Sets the number of hops (between 1 and
255) in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged. priority <mstid> <priority>
Sets the priority of the switch for the instance ranges. The lower the number, the more likely the switch will be chosen as the root bridge.
Enter 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480,
24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960,
45056, 49152, 53248, 57344 or 61440 in this field. port revision <revision level>
Sets the configuration version number (0 -
65535).
Displays MSTP settings. show version rstp|mstp disable dscp
Sets the spanning tree protocol version the switch uses.
Sets the VLAN-MSTID mapping.
[<end_vid>]
<giga-port>
Turns off data transmission on a port.
disable <gigaport>
Deactivates DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port. enable <giga-port>
Activates DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port. set <giga-port>
<srccp> <mapcp>
<mappri>
Sets DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port.
<srccp> : source code point, 0~63, example: 1,3~5,10~15
<mapcp> : code point, 0~63
<mappri> : priority, 0~7 show [<giga-port>]
Displays DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port. enable <giga-port>
Turns on data transmission on a port.
flowctrl disable <gigaport>
Turns off flow control on a port.
enable <giga-port>
Turns on flow control on a port.
frametype <giga-port> all|tag
Sets the port(s) to accept VLAN tagged and untagged Ethernet frames or only tagged. gvrp disable <gigaport>
Turns on GVRP for a port(s).
P
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
340
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 155 switch Commands (continued)
COMMAND
mode
DESCRIPTION
enable <giga-port>
Turns off GVRP for a port(s).
<giga-port> uplink|subtend
Sets a port to operate as uplink or subtending.
port> <mstid>
Deactivates MSTP on the port in the spanning tree instance. enable <giga-port>
<mstid>
Activates MSTP on the port in the spanning tree instance. pathcost <gigaport> <mstid>
<pathcost>
Sets the path cost (between 0 and
200000000). Enter 0 to have the system automatically set the path cost based on the link speed. p2plink <gigaport> auto|enable|disabl e
Enables point-to-point connection. port> <mstid>
<priority>
Specify the priority (0 - 255) of the Ethernet port in the MST region. The system automatically rounds the number to the nearest multiple of 16. pvid show <mstid>
[<end_mstid>]
<giga-port> <vid>
Displays MSTP settings. name priority
<giga-port> <name>
Sets the name of a port.
<giga-port>
<priority>
Sets a port’s default ingress user priority
(0~7).
Sets the PVID (Port VLAN ID) (1~4094) assigned to untagged frames or priority frames (0 VID) received on this port(s).
show
Displays port settings.
speed <giga-port>
<speed>
Sets a port’s speed and duplex mode.
vlantrunk disable <gigaport>
Turns off VLAN trunking on a port to have it only accept frames with registered VIDs.
enable <giga-port>
Turns on VLAN trunking on a port to have it accept frames with any VID.
qschedule set queuemap
<giga-port> spq or
<giga-port> wrr
<wt0> <wt1> <wt2>
<wt3> <wt4> <wt5>
<wt6> <wt7>
Sets a port’s queuing method and/or priority weight.
spq = strict priority queuing algorithm wrr = weighted round robin queue algorithm
<wt0>~<wt7> = priority weight, 0~15
Displays the queuing settings.
show set <priority>
Sets a queue’s priority.
show
Displays the queues’ priorities.
P
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
L
M
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
341
Chapter 17 Commands
17.7.14 sys Commands
The sys
commands are for system management and maintenance.
Table 156 sys Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
sys baud
Sets the console port speed.
chsh client date info monitor set
9600|19200|3
8400|57600|1
15200 show
[engsh|stdsh
] disable enable set
<index>
<index>
<index> <start-ip>
<end-ip> [telnet]
[ftp] [web] [icmp]
[ssh] [snmp] show set <yyyy> <mm> <dd> show chassis <chassis> contact <contact> frame <frame> hostname <hostname> location <location> show set show
<slot>
<volt|temp|fan|cup
> <index> <highlimit> <low-limit>
<slot>
Displays the console port speed.
Changes to normal or privileged command shell.
Turns off a secured client set.
Turns on a secured client set.
Sets a group of trusted computers from which you can manage the switch.
P
M
Displays the secured client sets.
Sets the system date.
Displays the current system date.
L
Sets the system chassis number (1~64).
M
L
M
Sets contact person information.
Sets the system frame number.
Sets the system name.
Sets the geographic location of the system.
M
M
M
M
Displays general system and MSC1000G information.
Sets the hardware monitor threshold settings.
L
M
L
H
L multilogin disable enable show reboot
[show]
<sec>
[cancel]
Displays the hardware monitor threshold settings of a slot.
Turns off multiple concurrent logins.
Turns on multiple concurrent logins.
Displays the multiple login setting.
Restarts the system.
Displays the reboot schedule.
Sets the number of seconds
(1~2147483647) before the system reboots. If there is no time specified, the system reboots immediately.
Aborts the scheduled system rebooting.
L
H
M
M
H
H
M
M
M
H
342
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 156 sys Commands (continued)
COMMAND
server snmp enable telnet|ssh|ftp|web
|icmp|snmp disable telnet|ssh|ftp|web
|icmp|snmp port telnet|ftp|web|snm p|ssh <port> show getcommunity <community> setcommunity <community> show
<community> trapcommunit y trapdst <index>
<destination>
[<port>]
[v1|v2c|v3]
[<name>]
DESCRIPTION
Turns on service access to the switch.
Turns off service access to the switch.
Sets a port for a service.
M
M
Displays service access control settings.
L
Sets the SNMP GetRequest community.
M
Sets the SNMP SetRequest community.
Displays SNMP settings.
Sets the SNMP Trap community.
M
M
L syslog user <name> noauth|auth|priv md5|sha des|aes version disable enable time show set show timeserver set v2c|v3|v3v2c
Sets the IP addresses and listening ports for up to four SNMP trap server IP addresses and listening ports. Set 0.0.0.0 to not send any SNMP traps.
<name> = username to be included in trap packets. Only applicable for V3.
Sets SNMPv3 user name and security settings. noauth = disables user authentication and data encryption. auth = enables user authentication. pri = enables user authentication and data encryption. md5|sha = authentication method. des|aes = encryption method.
Sets the system to use the specified
SNMP version and access. v2c = SNMPv2 read/write v3 = SNMPv3 read/write v3v2c = SNMPv3 read/write and
SNMPv2 read-only.
Turns off syslog logging.
Turns on syslog logging.
Sets the log facility (local1~local7) to log the syslog messages to a specific file in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details. Sets the syslog server IP address.
Displays the syslog settings.
<hh> [<mm> [<ss>]] Sets the system time.
Displays the current system time.
none
Clears the time server settings.
M
M
M
P
M
M
M
M
L
M
L
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
343
Chapter 17 Commands
Table 156 sys Commands (continued)
COMMAND
user version daytime <ip>
[sync] or time|ntp <ip>
<utc[<+|-
>0100~1200]>
[sync]
DESCRIPTION
Sets the time service protocol and IP address of a time server.
[sync] = Gets the time and date.
show sync auth <mode> delete <name> disable <name> enable <name> online show
Displays the time server settings.
Gets the time and date from a predefined time server.
Select which database the switch uses to authenticate a user. 1
3 = local then radius 4 = TACACS+, 5 = local then TACACS+.
= local, 2 = radius,
Removes a user account.
Stops a user from logging in.
Allows a user to log in.
Displays information about online users that are logged into the switch. * denotes your session.
<secret>
[high|middle|low|d eny]
Sets a RADIUS server’s IP address and port number and the password to access the server.
low = assigns the login accounts a low privilege level if the received service type is “login”. medium = assigns the login accounts a medium privilege level if the received service type is “nas-prompt”. high = assign the login accounts a high privilege level if the received service type is “admin”. deny = block access from this login account if no service type is received.
<password>
Sets a user account and its level of access privileges.
high|middle|low
Displays authentication settings and user accounts.
Displays the MSC1000G’s general information such as the model name and firmware version.
L
M
P
M
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
L
17.7.15 vlan Commands
Use the
VLAN
commands for static VLAN management.
344
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Table 157 vlan Commands
COMMAND
vlan delete <vid> disable <vid> enable <vid> show fix|forbid|normal tag|untag
[<vid>]|[<startvid> <end-vid>]
Chapter 17 Commands
DESCRIPTION P
Removes a static VLAN.
Turns off a VLAN.
Turns on a VLAN.
Sets the name of a VLAN.
Adds a static VLAN.
<giga-port> = sub1|sub2
|up1|up2|all if trunking is not enabled; sub|up|all if trunking is enabled.
Displays all VLANs’ settings, a specified
VLAN’s settings or a range of static
VLANs’ settings.
M
M
M
M
M
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
345
Chapter 17 Commands
346
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
18
acl Commands
This chapter describes the Access Control List management commands.
18.1 acl Commands Summary
The following table lists the acl
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 158 acl Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
acl dhcprelay82 clearinfo delete disable enable
<vid>
<vid>
<vid>
<vid> <mode> relaymode <vid>
[auto|both]
Removes option 82 information for the specified VLAN.
Deletes the option 82 information entry for the specified VLAN.
Deactivates option 82 for the specified VLAN.
Enables option 82 information for the specified VLAN.
<mode> = 1 or 2
1 : Enable DHCP relay and option82.
2 : Disable DHCP relay but enable option82.
Sets information for the option 82
Circuit ID field.
Sets which DHCP relay mode the system uses for the specified
VLAN. auto = send the requests to the active DHCP server first. If the active DHCP server does not respond, the switch sends the
DHCP request to the backup
DHCP server. both = send the requests to both the active and backup DHCP servers.
M
M
M
M
M
M
347
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
Table 158 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
dhcpsnoop dot1x server set show suboption2 disable enable flush show disable enable active <vid>
<1|2> set <vid>
<serverip1>
[serverip2]
DESCRIPTION
Sets the active DHCP server to which the DHCP requests are sent first.
<vid> = a VLAN ID to be served with DHCP relay.
1 = Sets the first DHCP server as the active server.
2 = Sets the second DHCP server as the active server.
The default is 1 .
Sets an entry for forwarding
DHCP requests to the DHCP servers at the specified IP addresses.
<vid>
= a VLAN ID to be served with DHCP relay.
M delete <vid>
[serverip]
<vid>
Removes an entry for forwarding
DHCP requests to the DHCP server at the specified IP address.
Creates an option 82 entry for the
VLAN.
Displays DHCP relay and option
82 settings.
M
M
L enable <vid>
Turns on option 82 sub-option 2.
M disable <vid>
Turns off option 82 sub-option 2.
set <vid> <info>
Adds the specified information for sub-option 2.
M
M
DHCP snooping allows the system to identify and block packets from devices using unknown/static IP addresses.
<slot-port>
M
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
Deactivates DHCP snooping on the specified subscriber port(s).
Activates DHCP snooping on the specified subscriber port(s).
Clears the DHCP snooping table on the specified port(s).
Removes the static IP address from the DHCP snooping table.
M
M
M port> <ip> set <slot-port>
<ip>
<slot>|<slotport>
Adds a static IP address to the
DHCP snooping table. You can add up to 3 static IP addresses per port.
Displays the DHCP snooping table on the specified port.
M
L
IEEE 802.1x authentication.
Turns off IEEE 802.1x.
Turns on IEEE 802.1x.
M
M
P
M
348
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
Table 158 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
port dsbcast show enable disable show maccount disable enable
MSC1000G User’s Guide radius control <slotport> auto|auth|unauth
DESCRIPTION
Sets the IEEE 802.1x port authentication option for specific subscriber ports.
auto = authentication required auth = forced authentication unauth = forced no authentication disable <slotport> enable <slotport> period <slotport> <secs>
Turns off IEEE 802.1x for specific subscriber ports.
Turns on IEEE 802.1x for specific subscriber ports.
reauth <slotport> on|off show <slot> ip <index> <ip> port <index>
<port> secret <index>
<secret_key>
<slot-port>
<vid>
<slot-port>
<vid>
Sets the IEEE 802.1x reauthentication period (60~65535) for specific subscriber ports.
Sets the IEEE 802.1x reauthentication option for specific subscriber ports.
Displays IEEE 802.1x settings.
Sets the IP address of the specified external RADIUS server
(1 or 2).
Sets the external RADIUS server port number of the specified
RADIUS server.
Sets the authentication and encryption key of the specified
RADIUS server.
Displays the external RADIUS server settings.
Turns on the blocking of downstream broadcast packets from going to the specified VLAN on the specified port.
Turns off the blocking of downstream broadcast packets to go to the specified VLAN on the specified port.
<slot>|<slotport>
Displays the settings for blocking downstream broadcast packets for the specified slot or port.
MAC count limits the number of
MAC addresses that can connect to a subscriber port.
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
Turns off MAC count limiting on the specified subscriber ports.
Turns on MAC count limiting on the specified subscriber ports.
<count>
Sets the MAC count limit number
(1-128) on the specified subscriber ports.
P
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
349
Chapter 18 acl Commands
Table 158 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
macfilter ouifilter show <slot>
DESCRIPTION
Displays MAC count limiting settings.
MAC filter allows only traffic from specified source MAC addresses on the specified subscriber ports.
Removes a MAC filter MAC address entry.
delete <slot-port>
<mac>
<slot-port> disable enable <slot-port> mode set show
Turns off the MAC filter on the specified subscriber ports.
Turns on the MAC filter on the specified subscriber ports.
Sets the MAC filter actions.
<slot-port>
<accept|deny>
<slot-port>
<mac>
<slot>|<slotport>
Adds a MAC filter MAC address entry.
Displays MAC filter settings.
MAC OUI (Organization Unit
Identifier) filter allows or drops packets with MAC addresses from specific vendors.
<mac>
Removes the static MAC OUI filter.
<mac> = first three octets of the
MAC address. disable enable mode
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
Deactivates MAC OUI filtering on this port.
Activates MAC OUI filtering on this port.
Sets the filter action. set show
<slot-port>
<accept|deny>
<slot-port>
<mac>
<slot>|<slotport>
Creates a MAC OUI filter.
<mac> = first three octets of the
MAC address.
Displays MAC OUI filter settings for the specified port or slot. pktfilter set show pppoeagent clearinfo
<slot-port>
<type>
<slot>
<vid>
Packet type filter allows or drops specified packet types on the specified subscriber ports.
Sets the packet type filter for the specified subscriber ports.
<type> = accept-all, pppoe-only, or any combination of ip, arp, dhcp, eapol, pppoe, netbios, igmp separated by a space.
Displays packet type filter settings.
Resets PPPoE line description for the VLAN.
P
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
L
M
350
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
Table 158 acl Commands (continued)
COMMAND
rule enable <vid> delete <vid> disable <vid> info set show delete set show
<vid>
<description>
<vid>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci>
DESCRIPTION
Enables PPPoE line information for the VLAN. The switch adds the line information to PPPoE packets for identification and security.
Deletes PPPoE line information settings.
Deactivate PPPoE line information insertion.
Sets PPPoE line information.
Enter a description (up to 24 characters).
Creates a PPPoE agent entry for the VLAN.
Displays PPPoE line information settings.
Upstream access control rules allows you to apply profiles on the subscriber line PVC.
Removes the ACL profile.
P
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
Applies the ACL profile. You can apply up to 8 profiles to a PVC.
Displays ACL profile settings for a
PVC.
M
L
18.2 acl dhcp relay82 Commands
Use these commands to configure the DHCP relay feature.
18.2.1 acl dhcprelay82 clearinfo Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 clearinfo <vid>
This command deletes the relay agent information settings.
18.2.2 acl dhcprelay82 enable Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 enable <vid> <mode>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
351
Chapter 18 acl Commands where
<vid>
<mode>
= ID of the VLAN to which this setting applies.
= Sets the relay mode.
1
activates DHCP relay service and include option 82 information in the client DHCP requests for this VLAN.
2
disables DHCP relay service but include option 82 information in the client DHCP requests. Before broadcasting, the switch adds option82 information to DHCP requests.
This command enables DHCP relay on a VLAN and sets the relay mode.
The following example creates a configuration entry and enables DHCP relay mode 1 on
VLAN 10. ras> acl dhcprelay82 set 10 ras> acl dhcprelay82 enable 10 2
18.2.3 acl dhcprelay82 info Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 info <vid> <string> where
<vid>
<string>
= ID of the VLAN to which this setting applies.
= Up to 23 English keyboard characters of additional information to add to the DHCP client TCP/IP configuration requests that are relayed to a
DHCP server.
Examples of information you could add would be the name of the system or the ISP.
This command sets the relay agent information to be included in client DHCP requests before forwarding. A DHCP server implements network information (such as IP address) policies based on the relay agent information.
The following example sets the system to add a string ( test
) to client DHCP request packets before forwarding them to the DHCP server. ras> acl dhcprelay82 info test
18.2.4 acl dhcprelay82 relaymode Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 relaymode <mode>
352
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands where
<mode>
= auto
The system sends the requests to the active DHCP server first. If the active DHCP server does not respond, the switch sends the DHCP request to the backup DHCP server. both
The system sends the requests to both the active and backup
DHCP servers.
This command sets the DHCP relay mode on the system.
18.2.5 acl dhcprelay82 server active Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 server active <vid> <active-server> where
<active-server>
=
1
Sets the first DHCP server as the active DHCP server. The system sends DHCP requests in the specified VLAN to the first
DHCP server first.
2
Sets the second DHCP server as the active DHCP server. The system sends DHCP requests in the specified VLAN to the second DHCP server first.
This command specifies the DHCP server to which client DHCP requests are sent first. If you have also configured a second DHCP server, the non-active DHCP server will be the backup
DHCP server. This function is applicable when you have configured two DHCP server settings for the VLAN.
The following example sets the system to forward client DHCP requests in VLAN 3 to the second DHCP server first. ras> acl dhcprelay82 server active 3 2
18.2.6 acl dhcprelay82 server delete Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 server delete <vid> [serverip] where
<vid>
<serverip>
= A VLAN ID to be served with DHCP relay.
= The IP address of a DHCP server.
This command removes a DHCP server setting to which DHCP client requests are forwarded in the specific VLAN.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
353
Chapter 18 acl Commands
18.2.7 acl dhcprelay82 server set Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 server set <vid> <primary-server> [secondary-server] where
<vid>
= A VLAN ID to be served with DHCP relay.
<primary-server>
Note: The DHCP server(s) must be in the same VLAN.
= The IP address of the primary DHCP server.
<secondary-server>
= The IP address of the secondary DHCP server.
This command sets an entry for forwarding client DHCP requests received on a specific
VLAN to the DHCP server(s) at the specified IP address(es).
The following example sets 192.168.1.10 and 192.168.1.11 as the primary and secondary
DHCP servers respectively in VLAN 3. ras> acl dhcprelay82 server set 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11
18.2.8 acl dhcprelay82 set Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 set <vid>
This command creates a DHCP relay entry for the specified VLAN. After you have created an entry, you can configure DHCP relay and relay option82 settings.
The following figure creates an entry for VLAN 10. ras> acl dhcprelay82 set 10
18.2.9 acl dhcprelay82 show Command
Syntax: acl dhcprelay82 show
This command displays whether or not the DHCP relay feature is activated, the DHCP server’s IP address, the status of the DHCP relay agent info option 82 feature and the information configured for it. It also lists the DHCP relay server entries.
354
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
The following figure shows an example. The asterisk (*) in front of a DHCP server address indicates that it is the active DHCP server in the VLAN. ras> acl dhcprelay82 show dhcp relay status: disable dhcp relay mode: both dhcp relay option82 info: [NULL] server list: server set: 1 index vid primary-server secondary-server
----- ----- ------------------ ------------------
1 3 192.168.1.10 (*)192.168.1.11
ras>
18.3 DHCP Relay Option 82 (Agent Information) Sub-option 2
(Remote ID)
Use the following commands to configure the DHCP relay Option 82 (agent information) feature, sub-option 2. This feature applies regardless of whether or not the DHCP relay is on.
18.3.1 Option 82 Sub-option 2 Enable Command
Syntax: ras> acl dhcprelay82 suboption2 enable <vid> where
<vid> =
The ID of the VLAN to which to apply the setting.
This command turns on the DHCP relay agent information (Option 82, Sub-option 2) for the specified VLAN.
18.3.2 Option 82 Sub-option 2 Disable Command
Syntax: ras> acl dhcprelay82 suboption2 disable <vid> where
<vid> =
The ID of the VLAN to which to apply the setting.
This command turns off the DHCP relay agent information (Option 82, Sub-option 2) for the specified VLAN.
18.3.3 Option 82 Sub-option 2 Set Command
Syntax: ras> acl dhcprelay82 suboption2 set <vid> <info>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
355
Chapter 18 acl Commands where
<vid>
<info>
=
=
The ID of the VLAN to which to apply the setting.
Up to 23 English keyboard characters of additional information for the MSC1000G to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Examples of information you could add would be the name of the MSC1000G or the ISP. To clear this field, type a pair of double quotation marks with no space between them (““).
This command adds the specified information for the relay agent (Option 82, Sub-option 2) for the specified VLAN.
18.4 acl dhcpsnoop Commands
Use these commands to configure or show DHCP snooping settings on the subscriber ports.
The switch gets the client MAC-IP address information (in the reply from a DHCP server) and stores it in the DHCP snooping table. The system only forwards packets from the clients whose MAC-IP address is in the DHCP snooping table. Packets from unknown IP address(es) are not forwarded (dropped). This feature prevents subscribers from assigning their own static
IP addresses.
18.4.1 acl dhcpsnoop disable Command
Syntax: acl dhcpsnoop disable <slot-port>
This command disables the DHCP snooping feature on the specified port(s) on the line card.
18.4.2 acl dhcpsnoop enable Command
Syntax: acl dhcpsnoop disable <slot-port>
This command activates the DHCP snooping feature on the specified port(s) on the line card.
The following example enables DHCP snooping on port 1 of the line card in slot 3. ras> acl dhcpsnoop enable 3-1
18.4.3 acl dhcpsnoop flush Command
Syntax: acl dhcpsnoop flush <slot-port>
This command clears the DHCP snooping binding table. The system automatically clears the binding table when you disable DHCP snooping on a port.
356
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
18.4.4 acl dhcpsnoop pool set Command
Syntax: acl dhcpsnoop pool set <slot-port> <ip>
This command adds a static IP address to the DHCP snooping table on a port.
The following example adds two static IP addresses (
192.168.1.10
and
192.168.1.11
) to the DHCP snooping table on port 10 of the line card in slot 2. ras> acl dhcpsnoop pool set 2-10 192.168.1.10
ras> acl dhcpsnoop pool set 2-10 192.168.1.11
ras> acl dhcpsnoop show 2-10
port enable static ip pool
----- ------ -----------------------------------------------
2-10 - 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11
ras>
18.4.5 acl dhcpsnoop pool delete Command
Syntax: acl dhcpsnoop pool delete <slot-port> <ip>
This command removes a static IP address from the DHCP snooping table of a port on the specified line card. The following example removes the static IP address of 192.168.1.11 from the port 10 on the line card in slot 2. ras> acl dhcpsnoop pool delete 2-10 192.168.1.11
ras> acl dhcpsnoop show 2-10
port enable static ip pool
----- ------ -----------------------------------------------
2-10 - 192.168.1.10
ras>
18.4.6 acl dhcpsnoop show Command
Syntax: acl dhcpsnoop show <slot>|<slot-port>
Use this command to display the current static DHCP snooping settings of the port(s) on the line card. The following example displays the settings of port 10 on the line card in slot 2. ras> acl dhcpsnoop show 2-10
port enable static ip pool
----- ------ -----------------------------------------------
2-10 - 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11
ras>
18.5 acl dot1x Commands
Use these commands to configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication feature.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
357
Chapter 18 acl Commands
18.5.1 acl dot1x disable Command
Syntax: acl dot1x disable
This command turns off the IEEE 802.1x authentication feature.
18.5.2 acl dot1x enable Command
Syntax: acl dot1x enable
This command turns on the IEEE 802.1x authentication feature.
18.5.3 acl dot1x port control Command
Syntax: acl dot1x port control <slot-port> auto|auth|unauth where auto auth unauth
= Authenticate all subscribers before they can access the network through this port.
= Allow all connected users to access the network through this port without authentication.
= Deny all subscribers access to the network through this port.
This command sets the IEEE 802.1x port authentication option for specific subscriber ports.
18.5.4 acl dot1x port disable Command
Syntax: acl dot1x port disable <slot-port>
This command turns off IEEE 802.1x for the specified subscriber ports.
18.5.5 acl dot1x port enable Command
Syntax: acl dot1x port enable <slot-port>
This command turns on IEEE 802.1x for the specified subscriber ports.
18.5.6 acl dot1x port period Command
Syntax: acl dot1x port period <slot-port> <secs>
358
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands where
<secs>
= Sets the IEEE 802.1x re-authentication period in seconds
(60~65535).
This command sets the IEEE 802.1x re-authentication period for the specified subscriber ports.
18.5.7 acl dot1x port reauth Command
Syntax: acl dot1x port reauth <slot-port> on|off
This command enables or disables the IEEE 802.1x re-authentication option for the specified subscriber ports.
18.5.8 acl dot1x port show Command
Syntax: acl dot1x port show <slot>
This command displays the IEEE 802.1x settings of the subscriber ports on the line card in the specified slot. ras> acl dot1x port show 5 port enable control reauth period
---- ------ ------- ------ ------
5- 1 - auto V 3600
5- 2 - auto V 3600
5- 3 - auto V 3600
5- 4 - auto V 3600
5- 5 - auto V 3600
-------------------------- [ snip ] --------------------------
5-45 - auto V 3600
5-46 - auto V 3600
5-47 - auto V 3600
5-48 - auto V 3600
18.5.9 acl dot1x radius ip Command
Syntax: acl dot1x radius ip <index> <ip> where
<index>
<ip>
= The index number of an external RADIUS server entry (1 or 2).
= This IP address of the external RADIUS server.
This command sets the IP address of the specified external RADIUS server.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
359
Chapter 18 acl Commands
18.5.10 acl dot1x radius port Command
Syntax: acl dot1x radius port <index> <port> where
<index>
<port>
= The index number of an external RADIUS server entry (1 or 2).
= The RADIUS server port number.
This command sets the external RADIUS server port number of the specified RADIUS server.
18.5.11 acl dot1x radius secret Command
Syntax: acl dot1x radius secret <index> <secret_key> where
<index>
<secret_key>
= The index number of an external RADIUS server entry (1 or 2).
= The authentication and encryption keys of the specified RADIUS server.
This command sets the authentication and encryption keys of the specified RADIUS server.
18.5.12 acl dot1x show Command
Syntax: acl dot1x show
This command displays the status of the IEEE 802.1x feature and the external RADIUS server settings. ras> acl dot1 show dot1x feature is disable radius servers: no ip port secret
-- --------------- ----- -------------------------------
1 0.0.0.0 1812 1234
2 0.0.0.0 1812 1234
18.6 acl maccount Commands
Use maccount commands to limit how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned or statically configured on a DSL port. MAC count commands are listed next.
360
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
"
You cannot enable both MAC count and MAC filtering on the same port at the same time.
18.6.1 acl maccount disable Command
Syntax: acl maccount disable <slot-port>
This command disables the MAC count limit on the specified DSL port(s).
The following example turns off the MAC count limit on DSL port 4 on a line card in slot 5. ras> acl maccount disable 5-4
18.6.2 acl maccount enable Command
Syntax: acl maccount enable <slot-port>
This command enables the MAC count limit on the specified DSL port(s). You can only enable the MAC count filter on DSL ports that do not have the MAC filter enabled.
The following example turns on the MAC count limit on DSL port 4 on a line card in slot 5. ras> acl maccount enable 5-4
18.6.3 acl maccount set Command
Syntax: acl maccount set <slot-port> <count> where
<count>
= Set the limit for how many MAC addresses that a port may dynamically learn. For example, if you are configuring port 2 and you set this field to
"5", then only five devices with dynamically learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out.
The valid range is from “1” to “128”.
This command sets the limit for how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned on the specified DSL port(s).
The following example sets the MAC count filter to allow up to 50 MAC addresses to be dynamically learned on DSL port 4 on the line card in slot 5. ras> acl maccount set 5-4 50
MSC1000G User’s Guide
361
362
Chapter 18 acl Commands
18.6.4 acl maccount show Command
Syntax: acl maccount show <slot>
This command displays the MAC count settings for the DSL port(s). The following example displays the MAC count settings for slot 5. ras> acl maccount show 5
[slot5] maccount
port enable count
----- ------ -----
5- 1 - 5
5- 2 - 5
5- 3 - 5
5- 4 - 5
-------------------------- [ snip ] --------------------------
5-44 - 5
5-45 - 5
5-46 - 5
5-47 - 5
5-48 - 5
18.7 acl macfilter Commands
Use the MAC filter commands to allow only incoming frames from MAC (Media Access
Control) address(es) that you specify. MAC filter commands are listed next. You may specify up to ten MAC addresses per port.
"
You cannot enable both MAC filtering and MAC count on the same port at the same time.
18.7.1 acl macfilter delete Command
Syntax: acl macfilter delete <slot-port> <mac> where
<mac>
= The source MAC address in "a0:c5:12:34:56:78" format.
This command removes a configured source MAC address from a line card’s specified DSL port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
The following example removes the source MAC address of a0:c5:12:34:56:78 from the MAC filter for ADSL port 5. ras> acl macfilter delete 5-4 a0:c5:12:34:56:78
18.7.2 acl macfilter disable Command
Syntax: acl macfilter disable <slot-port>
This command turns off the MAC filtering feature on a line card’s specified DSL port(s).
The following example turns off the MAC filtering feature on DSL port 4 of the line card in slot 5. ras> acl macfilter disable 5-4
18.7.3 acl macfilter enable Command
Syntax: acl macfilter enable <slot-port>
This command turns on the MAC filtering feature on a line card’s specified DSL port(s).
The following example turns on the MAC filtering feature on DSL port 4 of the line card in slot 5. ras> acl macfilter enable 5-4
18.7.4 acl macfilter mode Command
Syntax: acl macfilter mode <slot-port> accept|deny where accept|deny
= accept
Allows frames from MAC addresses that you specify and block frames from other MAC addresses.
deny
Blocks frames from MAC addresses that you specify and allow frames from other MAC addresses.
18.7.5 acl macfilter set Command
Syntax: acl macfilter set <slot-port> <mac> where
<mac>
= The source MAC address in "a0:c5:12:34:56:78" format.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
363
Chapter 18 acl Commands
This command adds an allowed source MAC address on a line card’s specified DSL port or on the DSL port in all of the line cards DSL ports if no slot is specified.
The following example adds source MAC address a0:c5:12:34:56:78 for DSL port 4 of the line card in slot 5. ras> acl macfilter set 5-4 a0:c5:12:34:56:78
18.7.6 acl macfilter show Command
Syntax: acl macfilter show <slot>|<slot-port>
This command displays the MAC filtering status (V for enabled, - for disabled) and the fixed source MAC addresses on a line card’s specified DSL port(s) or on all of the line card’s DSL ports if no port is specified.
The following example displays the MAC filtering status on all ports of the line card in slot 2. ras> acl macfilter show 2
port mode enable mac address
----- ------ ------ -----------------
2- 1 accept -
2- 2 accept -
2- 3 accept -
2- 4 accept -
---------------------- Snip ---------------------
2-45 accept -
2-46 accept -
2-47 accept -
2-48 accept ras>
18.8 acl ouifilter Commands
Use the following OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) filter commands to filter out packets from devices with the specified OUI in the MAC address field.
The OUI field is the first three octets in a MAC address. An OUI uniquely identifies the manufacturer of a network device and allows you to identify from which device brands the switch will accept traffic or send traffic to. The OUI value is assigned by the IANA.
18.8.1 acl ouifilter disable Command
Syntax: acl ouifilter disable <slot-port>
This command deactivates MAC OUI filtering on the port(s) of the specified line card.
364
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
18.8.2 acl ouifilter enable Command
Syntax: acl ouifilter enable <slot-port>
This command activates MAC OUI filtering on the port(s) of the specified line card.
18.8.3 acl ouifilter mode Command
Syntax: acl ouifilter mode <slot-port> accept|deny where accept|deny
= accept
Allows frames from MAC addresses with the OUI(s) that you specify and blocks frames with MAC addresses of other OUIs. deny
Blocks frames from MAC addresses with the OUI(s) that you specify and allows frames from other MAC addresses.
This command activates MAC OUI filtering on the port(s) of the specified line card. Use the acl ouifilter set command to set the OUI value(s).
The following example sets the system to drop packets with the specified OUI value on port 1 of the line card in slot 3. ras> acl ouifilter mode 3-1 deny
18.8.4 acl ouifilter set Command
Syntax: acl ouifilter set <slot-port> <mac> where
<mac>
= The first three octets of a MAC address in the format xx:xx:xx. For example, 00:0F:FE.
This command specifies a MAC OUI whose packets you want to filter. Use the acl ouifilter mode
command to set the action on the matched packets.
The following example sets the system to filter packets with an OUI value of 00-0F-FE on port
1 of the line card in slot 3. ras> acl ouifilter set 3-1 00:0f:fe
18.8.5 acl ouifilter show Command
Syntax: acl ouifilter show <slot>|<slot-port>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
365
Chapter 18 acl Commands
This command displays the OUI filtering status (V for enabled, - for disabled) and the OUI value(s) of the MAC address on a line card’s specified DSL port(s) or on all of the line card’s
DSL ports if no port is specified. The following example displays the OUI filter setting of port
1 on the line card in slot 3. ras> acl ouifilter show 1-1
port mode enable mac address
----- ------ ------ -----------------
1- 1 accept -
18.9 acl pktfilter Commands
Use the following packet filter commands to filter out specific types of packets on specific ports.
18.9.1 acl pktfilter set Command
Syntax: acl pktfilter set <slot-port> <type> where
<type> = accept-all
Accept all packet types.
pppoe-only
Accept only PPPoE packets and reject all other packet types. (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) relies on PPP and
Ethernet. PPPoE is a specification for connecting the users on an
Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless device or cable modem.
Alternatively, you can have the system reject any combination of the following packet types (separated by a space).
ip
Reject IP packets. Internet Protocol. The underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP/IP-based networks.
arp
Reject ARP packets. Address Resolution Protocol is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical computer address that is recognized in the local network.
dhcp
Reject DHCP packets. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log on. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the
DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment to other systems.
eapol
Reject EAPol packets. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol,
RFC 2486) over LAN. EAP is used with IEEE 802.1x to allow additional authentication methods (besides RADIUS) to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients.
pppoe
Reject PPPoE packets.
366
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands netbios
Reject NetBIOS packets. (Network Basic Input/Output
System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN.
igmp
Reject IGMP packets. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
This command sets the packet type filter for the specified ADSL port(s).
The following example sets DSL port 4 of the line card in slot 5 to reject ARP, PPPoE and
IGMP packets.
ras> acl pktfilter set 5-4 arp pppoe igmp
18.9.2 acl pktfilter show Command
Syntax: acl pktfilter show <slot>
This command displays the packet type filter settings on the specified line card’s DSL port(s).
The following example displays the packet type filter settings for the DSL ports of the line card in slot 5. ras> acl pktfilter show 5
port filter
----- -------------------------------------
5- 1 accept-all
5- 2 accept-all
5- 3 accept-all
-------------------------- [ snip ] --------------------------
5-45 accept-all
5-46 accept-all
5-47 accept-all
5-48 accept-all
18.10 PPPoE Agent Information
Similar to DHCP relay option82, you can set the switch to insert line information into client
PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization (PADI) packets. This allows a PPPoE termination server to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client based on the specified information (such as the ISP name or line card number).
18.10.1 acl pppoeagent clearinfo Command
Syntax: acl pppoeagent clearinfo <vid>
This command resets the PPPoE line description for subscribers in the specified VLAN.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
367
368
Chapter 18 acl Commands
18.10.2 acl pppoeagent enable Command
Syntax: acl pppoeagent enable <vid>
This command turns on PPPoE line information for subscribers in the specified VLAN. The switch adds line information to PPPoE discover packets for user authentication and identification.
The following example activates the PPPoE agent setting for VLAN 10. ras> acl pppoeagent enable 10
18.10.3 acl pppoeagent delete Command
Syntax: acl pppoeagent delete <vid>
This command removes PPPoE line information setting for the specified VLAN.
18.10.4 acl pppoeagent disable Command
Syntax: acl pppoeagent disable <vid>
This command sets the switch to not add line information in PPPoE discover packets.
18.10.5 acl pppoeagent info Command
Syntax: acl pppoeagent info <vid> <description>
This command specifies the PPPoE line information the switch is to add to PPPoE discover packets from the specified VLAN. Enter a description (up to 24 alphanumerical characters).
"
Before you can configure PPPoE agent information, you must first create a entry using the
acl pppoeagent set
command.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 18 acl Commands
The following example sets the switch to add “testing” as the line information to PPPoE discover packets on VLAN 10. ras> acl pppoeagent set 10 ras> acl pppoeagent enable 10 ras> acl pppoeagent info 10 testing ras> acl pppoeagent show vid en info
---- ----- ------------------------
10 V testing vlan set: 1 ras>
18.10.6 acl pppoeagent set Command
Syntax: acl pppoeagent set <vid>
This command creates a PPPoE agent information entry for the VLAN. After you have created an entry for a VLAN, you can configure the line information settings. The following example creates an entry for VLAN 10. ras> acl pppoeagent set 10
18.10.7 acl pppoeagent show Command
Syntax: acl pppoeagent show
This command displays PPPoE line information settings. The following figure shows the
PPPoE agent setting for VLAN 10. ras> acl pppoeagent show vid en info
---- ----- ------------------------
10 V testing vlan set: 1 ras>
18.11 acl rule Commands
Use the acl rule commands to apply ACL profiles (you created using the profile acl commands) on the PVCs.
18.11.1 acl rule delete Command
Syntax: acl rule delete <slot-port-vpi/vci> <profile>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
369
Chapter 18 acl Commands where
<profile> = Name of an access control profile.
This command allows you to remove an access control settings from the specified PVC.
18.11.2 acl rule set Command
Syntax: acl rule set <slot-port-vpi/vci> <profile> where
<profile> = Name of an access control profile.
This command allows you to apply an access control profile to the specified DSL link(s). You can apply up to eight profiles to a subscriber port.
The following example applies the “example” rule to PVC. ras> acl rule set 3-1-0/33 example
18.11.3 acl rule show Command
Syntax: acl rule show <slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command displays the current access control rule assignment settings. The following figure shows an example. ras> acl rule show 3-1-0/33 pvc profile
-------------- --------------------------------
3-1-0/33 example ras>
370
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
19
alarm Commands
This chapter describes the alarm management commands.
19.1 alarm Commands Summary
The following table lists the alarm
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 159 alarm Commands
COMMAND P
alarm clear cutoff edit xedit history
<alarm>|all
<fac>
<target>[,<targ et>]
<alarm> <cond>
<severity>
<fac>
<target>[,<targ et>]
<clearable> clear <alarm>|all
<condition>|all clear <severity>
DESCRIPTION
Alarm command general parameters:
<alarm> = alarm category (eqpt, dsl, enet, sys or all)
<severity> = alarm severity level
(critical, major, minor, info or all)
<condition> = Specify an alarm condition.
Erases historic alarm entries.
Cancels an alarm. This stops the sending of the alarm signal current.
Edits an alarm report entry.
<fac> = local1~local7
<target> = snmp|syslog
|all|none ‘none’ disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
Sets the severity level of an alarm(s) and where the system is to send the alarm(s).
<cond> = <condition>|<code>|all
<target> = snmp|syslog
|all|none ‘none’ disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
<clearable> = clearable|unclearable
Removes historic alarm entries by alarm category and alarm condition or by severity.
M
M
M
M
M
371
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 19 alarm Commands
Table 159 alarm Commands (continued)
COMMAND
port show show set show [<severity>|all
] [<alarm>|all]
[<condition>|al l]
[<sdate>|all]
[<edate>|all]
[for|rev]
[detail] tablelist [<alarm>|all]
[<severity>|all
] [<fac>|all]
[<target>[,<tar get>]]
[<condition>|al l]
[<severity>|all]
[<alarm>|all]
[<condition>|all
] [<sdate>|all]
[<edate>|all]
[for|rev]
[detail]
<slot> all|mgmt|<gigaport>|<slotport> <severity>
DESCRIPTION
Displays historic alarms by severity, alarm category and alarm condition.
You can also display detailed alarms.
Displays port alarm severity level thresholds.
Sets the severity of alarms to record for individual ports.
Displays current alarms by severity, alarm category or alarm condition. You can also display detailed alarms.
Displays the supported alarm list and report settings.
<fac> = local1~local7
<target> = snmp|syslog|all
P
L
L
M
L
L
19.2 General alarm Command Parameters
The following table describes commonly used alarm
command parameter notation.
Table 160 General alarm Command Parameters
NOTATION DESCRIPTION
<alarm>
<severity>
<condition>
<sdate>
<edate> for|rev
[detail]
Specify a category of alarms. eqpt
represents equipment alarms.
dsl
represents Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) alarms.
enet
represents Ethernet alarms.
sys
represents system alarms.
all
specifies every alarm category.
Specify an alarm severity level ( critical
, major
, minor
, info
or all
).
Specify an alarm condition.
Specify a start date in yyyy/mm/dd format.
Specify an end date in yyyy/mm/dd format.
Specify the displaying order. for = forward, rev = reverse
Display more comprehensive alarm condition descriptions.
372
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 19 alarm Commands
19.3 alarm Commands
Use these commands to view and clear alarms. You can also set the device to report alarms to an SNMP or syslog server that you specify.
19.3.1 alarm clear Command
Syntax: alarm clear
This command erases (clearable) historic alarm entries.
19.3.2 alarm cutoff Command
Syntax: alarm cutoff
This command cancels an alarm. This stops the sending of the alarm signal current. This is useful in stopping an alarm if you have the alarm output connector pins connected to a visible or audible alarm. The alarm entry remains in the system.
19.3.3 alarm edit Command
Syntax: alarm edit <alarm> <fac> <target>[,<target>] where
<fac>
<target>
= The log facility ( local1~local7
) that has the device log the syslog messages to different files in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details.
= snmp|syslog|all|none
The type of alarm messages that the device is to send (SNMP, syslog or all). none disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
This command creates or edits an alarm report entry.
The following example creates an alarm report entry that sends system alarms to an SNMP server at the local 3 log facility. ras> alarm edit sys local3 snmp
19.3.4 alarm history clear Command
Syntax: alarm history clear [<alarm>|all <condition>|all] <severity>
This command removes historic alarm entries by alarm category, alarm condition or severity.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
373
Chapter 19 alarm Commands
The following example removes the historic minor level alarms for all alarm categories, and all conditions. ras> alarm history clear minor
19.3.5 alarm history show Command
Syntax: alarm history show [<severity>|all] [<alarm>|all] [<condition>|all]
[<sdate>|all] [<edate>|all] [for|rev] [detail]
This command displays historic alarms by severity, alarm category or alarm condition.
The following example displays the historic major level alarms for all alarm categories, and all conditions. ras> alarm history show major
no alarm condition severity timestamp source
------ ------ ------------------------ -------- -------------- -------
1 eqpt +LT_INACTIVE major 09/09 09:38:54 slot 4
2 eqpt +LT_INACTIVE major 09/09 09:38:54 slot 9
3 eqpt -LT_INACTIVE major 09/09 09:39:25 slot 4
4 eqpt -LT_INACTIVE major 09/09 09:39:28 slot 9
19.3.6 alarm port set Command
Syntax: alarm port set all|mgmt|<giga-port>|<slot-port> <severity> where
<fac>
<target>
= The log facility ( local1
~ local7
) that has the device log the syslog messages to different files in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details.
= snmp|syslog|all|none
The type of alarm messages that the device is to send (SNMP, syslog or all). none disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
This command sets the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port(s).
The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port’s threshold.
The following example has the systems only record critical alarms on DSL port 7 on the line card in slot 4. ras> alarm port set 4-7 critical
374
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 19 alarm Commands
19.3.7 alarm port show Command
Syntax: alarm port show <slot> where
<fac>
<target>
= The log facility ( local1~local7
) that has the device log the syslog messages to different files in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details.
= snmp|syslog|all|none
The type of alarm messages that the device is to send (SNMP, syslog or all). none disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
This command displays port alarm severity level thresholds. The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port’s threshold.
The following example displays the port alarm thresholds for the ports on the line card in slot
4. “ifindex” identifies the interface. ras> alarm port show 4
ifindex severity
---------- -----------
4- 1 minor
4- 2 minor
4- 3 minor
-------------------------- [ snip ] --------------------------
4-44 minor
4-45 minor
4-46 minor
4-47 minor
4-48 minor
19.3.8 alarm show Command
Syntax: alarm show [<severity>|all] [<alarm>|all] [<condition>|all] [<sdate>|all]
[<edate>|all] [for|rev] [detail] where
[detail]
= Display in depth alarm information.
This command displays the current alarms by severity, alarm category or alarm condition.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
375
Chapter 19 alarm Commands
The following example displays the critical level alarms for all alarm categories and conditions.
ras> alarm show critical all
[current card alarm] id state card type heat vol mon down out
--- --------- --------------- ---------------------
1 standby MSC1000G - - - - -
2 active MSC1000G - - - - -
3 - - - - - -
4 - ALC1248G-53 - - - V V
5 active ALC1248G-53 - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - ALC1248G-51 - - - V V
8 - - - - - -
9 - ALC1248G-53 - - - V V
10 - ALC1248G-53 - - - V V
[current alarm list]
no alarm condition severity timestamp source
------ ------ ------------------------ -------- -------------- -----------
---
1 eqpt +FAN_ERROR critical 12/14 13:46:41 slot 2
2 eqpt +FAN_ERROR critical 12/14 13:46:41 slot 2
3 eqpt +FAN_ERROR critical 12/14 13:46:41 slot 2
4 eqpt +FAN_ERROR critical 12/14 13:46:41 slot 2
5 eqpt +FAN_ERROR critical 12/14 13:46:41 slot 2
6 eqpt +FAN_ERROR critical 12/14 13:46:41 slot 2
7 eqpt +DC_POWER_FAIL critical 12/14 13:46:21 slot 2
19.3.9 alarm tablelist Command
Syntax: alarm tablelist [<alarm>|all] [<severity>|all]
[<fac>|all][<target>[,<target>]] [<condition>|all] where
<fac>
= The log facility ( local1~local7
) that has the device log the syslog messages to different files in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details.
<target>
= snmp|syslog|all
The type of alarm messages that the device is to send (SNMP, syslog or all).
This command displays the supported alarm list and report settings.
376
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 19 alarm Commands
The following example displays the supported alarms for all alarm levels, all alarm categories, all facilities, all types of alarm messages and all conditions. ras> alarm tablelist
no alarm (code)condition facility snmp syslog severity clearable
--- ------ ------------------------- --------- ---- ------ -------- -------
1 dsl ( 5002)LINE_UP local1 V V info -
2 dsl ( 5003)LINE_DOWN local1 V V minor V
3 dsl ( 5006)LINE_LDM_START local1 V V info -
4 dsl ( 5007)LINE_LDM_END local1 V V info -
5 dsl ( 5008)LINE_PM_L2 local1 V V info -
6 dsl ( 5009)LINE_PM_L0 local1 V V info -
7 dsl ( 5010)LINE_FAIL local1 V V major -
8 dsl ( 5013)ADSL_TCA_LOL local1 V V info V
9 dsl ( 5016)ADSL_TCA_LOF local1 V V info V
10 dsl ( 5017)ADSL_TCA_LOS local1 V V info V
11 dsl ( 5018)ADSL_TCA_LPR local1 V V info V
12 dsl ( 5019)ADSL_TCA_ES local1 V V info V
13 dsl ( 5020)ADSL_RATE_CHANG local1 V V info V
14 dsl ( 5021)ADSL_TCA_SES local1 V V info V
15 dsl ( 5022)ADSL_TCA_UAS local1 V V info V
16 dsl ( 5023)SHDSL_TCA_ATTEN local1 V V info V
17 dsl ( 5024)SHDSL_TCA_SNRM local1 V V info V
18 dsl ( 5025)SHDSL_TCA_ES local1 V V info V
19 dsl ( 5026)SHDSL_TCA_SES local1 V V info V
Press any key to continue, 'e' to exit, 'n' for nopause
19.3.10 alarm xedit Command
Syntax: alarm xedit <alarm> <cond> <severity> <fac> <target>[,<target>] <clearable> where
<cond>
<fac>
<target>
<clearable>
=
<condition>|<code>|all
The condition is the text description for the condition under which the alarm applies. Use the alarm tablelist
command to find alarm conditions.
The condition code is the number of a specific alarm message. Use the alarm tablelist
command to find alarm condition codes.
= The log facility ( local1~local7
) that has the device log the syslog messages to different files in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details.
= snmp|syslog|all|none
The type of alarm messages that the device is to send (SNMP, syslog or all). none disables alarm reports on this alarm category.
= clearable|unclearable
This sets whether or not the alarm can be manually cleared from the system.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
377
Chapter 19 alarm Commands
This command sets the severity level of an alarm(s) and where the system is to send the alarm(s). You can also set whether or not the alarm can be manually cleared from the system.
Use the alarm tablelist command to display alarm setting details.
The following example creates an alarm report entry that sets all system alarms to the major severity level and sends them to a syslog server at the local 3 log facility. It also sets the system alarms to be manually clearable. ras> alarm xedit sys all major local3 syslog clearable
378
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
20
clear Commands
This chapter describes the clear commands that you use to reset the various system counters.
20.1 clear Commands Summary
The following table lists the clear commands you can use to reset the counters. Once you reset a counter, you can only display new counter information using the show
command.
Table 161 clear Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
clear atm
Resets ATM counters on the specified port or PVC.
M dhcp enet igmp
<slotport>|<slotport-vpi/vci> counter <slotport>
<gigaport>|<slot> info
Resets DHCP counters.
Resets counters on the Ethernet port.
M
M
M ip port info <slotport>
Resets IGMP counters and the number of learned IGMP groups.
Resets the counter of IGMP packets received and the number of learned groups on a port.
Resets management counters.
M
M lineperf inband|outband|b oth
<slot-port>
M packet <slotport>|<slotport-vpi/vci> paepvc counter
Resets subscriber line performance counters.
Resets the packet transmission counters on a subscriber port or PVC.
Resets the PAE PVC counters.
M
M
<slotport>|<s lotportvpi/vci> performance <slot-port> curr|15min|1day
Resets subscriber line performance counters.
M
379
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 20 clear Commands
20.2 clear Command Example
The following example resets the IGMP counters on the system. This clears the IGMP counters and the number of IGMP groups learned. ras> clear igmp info
380
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
21
cluster Commands
This chapter describes the cluster management commands.
21.1 cluster commands Summary
The following table lists the cluster
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 162 cluster Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
cluster disable enable login member manager <name> member
<password>
<id> candidate delete set show flush
<id>
<id>
<mac>
<passwor d>
Disable clustering, default is disabled
Enable device as cluster manager
Enable device as cluster member
Login into a client
List all available candidates
Flush current candidates
Removes a member from a cluster.
Adds a member to the cluster.
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M show vlan show
<vid>
Displays cluster member settings.
Displays the cluster member status.
Sets the cluster VLAN ID.
L
L
M
21.1.1 cluster disable Command
Syntax: cluster disable
This command sets this DSLAM to not function as part of the cluster.
381
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 21 cluster Commands
21.1.2 cluster enable manager Command
Syntax: cluster enable manager <name> where
<name>
= A name to identify the cluster. You may use up to 32 printable characters. Spaces are not allowed.
This command sets this DSLAM as the cluster manager DSLAM. A cluster can only have one manager. Other cluster managers do not display in the cluster candidate list.
The following example sets the DSLAM to be the cluster manager and use “Manager-A” as the cluster name. ras> cluster enable manager Manager-A
21.1.3 cluster enable member Command
Syntax: cluster enable member <password> where
<password>
= Type the cluster member’s management password. If the administrator changes the device’s management password afterwards, then it cannot be managed from the cluster manager.
This command sets this DSLAM to be a cluster member. The device will display in the cluster candidate list.
The following example sets the DSLAM to be a cluster member. The DSLAM’s management password is “1234”. ras> cluster enable member 1234
21.1.4 cluster login Command
Syntax: cluster login <id> where
<id>
= The member’s ID number (2~8).
This command lets you open the DSLAM’s CLI via the cluster manager DSLAM.
382
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 21 cluster Commands
The following is an example. After you log into a cluster member, the cluster name and the member’s ID number display in the command prompt. ras> cluster login 2
Copyright (c) 1994 - 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp.
IES6000:2>
21.1.5 cluster member candidate show Command
Syntax: cluster member candidate show
This command displays potential cluster member DSLAMs that were found by autodiscovery. The DSLAMs must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group. You must have also logged into that device and configured it as a cluster member.
A device can only be part of one cluster at a time. If a device is already in another cluster, it does not display here. Devices that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible.
21.1.6 cluster member candidate flush Command
Syntax: cluster member candidate flush
This command updates the list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery.
21.1.7 cluster member delete Command
Syntax: cluster member delete <id> where
<id>
= The member’s ID number (2~8).
This command removes the specified cluster member from the cluster.
The following example removes the cluster member DSLAM with ID 3 from the cluster. ras> cluster member delete 3
21.1.8 cluster member set Command
Syntax: cluster member set <id> <mac> <password> where
<id>
= An ID number (2~8) for the cluster member.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
383
Chapter 21 cluster Commands
<mac>
<password>
= The hardware MAC address of the device
= The cluster member’s management password. If the administrator changes the device’s management password afterwards, then it cannot be managed from the cluster manager.
This command adds the specified cluster member to the cluster.
The following example adds a DSLAM as cluster member 4. The DSLAM’s MAC address is
“00:13:49:d1:d0:cd” and its password is “1234”. ras> cluster member set 4 00:13:49:d1:d0:cd 1234
21.1.9 cluster member show Command
Syntax: cluster member show
This command displays a list of the cluster members. ID 1 is the cluster manager.
The following is an example. ras> cluster member show member list: id mac
-- -----------------
1 00:13:49:d1:d0:bc
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
21.1.10 cluster show Command
Syntax: cluster show
This command displays status information about the cluster.
384
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 21 cluster Commands
The following is an example. ras> cluster show mode :manager vlan :4094 name :Manager-A member list: id state hostname uptime model mac
-- -------- --------------- ------------- ---------------- -----------------
1 active 02:20:38 IES-5000 00:13:49:d1:d0:bc
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 where mode vlan name member list id state hostname uptime model mac
= Whether this device is the manager of the cluster or a member.
= This is the VLAN ID that the cluster uses and is only applicable if the manager DSLAM is set to use IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. All
DSLAMs must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster. This field is ignored if the clustering manager is using port-based VLAN.
= This is the name of the cluster.
= This table lists the DSLAMs that belong to the cluster.
= The DSLAM’s ID number in the cluster. 1 is the cluster manager.
= This column displays the status of this DSLAM within the cluster.
active: the member is fine.
inactive: the manager can not communicate the member.
waiting: the manager has sent a command to add the member and is waiting for a response.
error: the member reported that the password was wrong.
= This is the cluster DSLAM’s system name.
= This is how long the DSLAM has been turned on and in the cluster.
= This field displays the model name of the DSLAM.
= This is the DSLAM’s hardware MAC address.
21.1.11 cluster vlan Command
Syntax: cluster vlan <vid>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
385
Chapter 21 cluster Commands where
<vid>
= This is the cluster management VLAN ID. The cluster’s DSLAMs must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group. The cluster management VID must be different from the management
VID.
This command sets the VLAN ID for the cluster.
The following example sets the cluster VID to 79. ras> cluster vlan 79
21.2 Cluster Member Firmware and Configuration File
Management
You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member through the cluster manager. You can also upload or download configuration files. The following example shows uploading
MSC1000G firmware to cluster member 2. See Chapter 33 on page 585 for more on uploading
firmware and uploading or downloading configuration files.
Figure 190 FTP Upload to a Cluster Member Example
C:\>ftp 172.23.19.228
Connected to 172.23.19.228.
220 FTP version 1.0 ready at Fri Nov 10 10:53:52 2006
User (172.23.19.228:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in
226 File sent OK ftp> bin
200 Type I OK ftp> cd member-2
257 "/node-2" is current directory ftp> put 370AIN0b5.bin
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR ras
226 File received OK ftp: 3558910 bytes sent in 3.89Seconds 914.65Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
386
The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
Table 163 FTP Upload to a Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
User
Password bin
Enter “admin”.
The web configurator password default is 1234.
Changes the transfer mode to binary.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 21 cluster Commands
Table 163 FTP Upload to a Cluster Member Example (continued)
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
V3.70(ABF.0)b5 cd member-2
This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member.
Use “cd member-” and the index number of the cluster member to which you want to upload firmware. This index number matches the member’s number in the
MSC1000G User’s Guide
387
Chapter 21 cluster Commands
388
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
22
config Commands
This chapter describes the configuration file management commands.
22.1 config Commands Summary
The following table lists the config
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 164 config Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
config default save show sys|ip|switch|po rt|profile|acl|v lan|multicast|al l [nopause]
Resets factory default configuration.
Saves current configuration to nonvolatile memory.
Displays the current configuration.
H
M
L
22.1.1 config default Command
Syntax: ras> config default
This command resets the system to the factory default configuration. The system restarts with the factory default settings.
1
Do not turn off your device while returning to the default configuration.
22.1.2 config save Command
Syntax: ras> config save
389
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 22 config Commands
This command saves your configuration when you are done with a configuration session. This command saves all system configuration to nonvolatile memory. You must use this command to save any configuration changes that you make, otherwise the system returns to its previously saved settings when it is restarted. Save your changes after each configuration session.
Nonvolatile memory refers to the MSC1000G’s storage that remains even if the power is turned off. Configuration saved in the run time (volatile) memory is lost when the power is turned off.
1
Do NOT turn off your device while saving your configuration.
22.1.3 config show Command
Syntax: ras> config show sys|ip|switch|port|profile|acl|vlan|multicast|all [nopause]
This command shows the configuration of the specified category. nopause allows you to show all settings at one time so you do not need to press a key to continue.
An example is shown next. ras> config show ip nopause
================= ip ======================================
================= ip/show ==================== interface interface ip netmask vid
--------- --------------- --------------- ---inband 172.23.15.86 255.255.255.0 1 outband 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 gateway: 172.23.15.254
================= ip/arp ===================== ip address time ether address interface
--------------- ----- ----------------- ----------
172.23.14.10 240 00:0d:60:cb:cc:ae inband
172.23.14.12 270 00:0e:7f:a8:90:13 inband
172.23.14.16 260 00:0d:60:cb:22:4c inband
172.23.14.19 290 00:0e:7f:a9:80:70 inband
172.23.14.35 260 00:a0:c5:b2:6a:43 inband
172.23.14.91 240 00:0a:e4:0a:76:21 inband
172.23.14.99 270 00:0b:cd:fc:30:45 inband
172.23.14.250 270 00:a0:c5:8e:9d:16 inband
172.23.15.172 300 02:0e:a6:89:41:60 inband
172.23.15.254 300 00:04:80:9b:78:00 inband arp entry: 18
================= ip/route =================== dest interface gateway metric name
------------------ ---------- --------------- ------ ----------------
192.168.0.0/24 outband 192.168.0.1 1 -
172.23.15.0/24 inband 172.23.15.86 1 default inband 172.23.15.254 1 -
390
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
23
diagnostic Commands
This chapter describes the diagnostic
commands.
23.1
diagnostic
Commands Summary
The following table lists the diagnostic
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 165 diagnostic Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
diagnostic ldm show test
<slot-port> result|hlin|hlog|q ln|snr
<slot-port>
A Loop Diagnostic Mode test provides details about the condition of an ADSL line. This feature is applicable for ALC line cards only.
Displays the most recent loop diagnostic mode test results for the specified subscriber port.
M
M loopback f5 <slot-port-vpi/ vci> selt test <slot-port>
Sets the specified subscriber port to loop diagnostic mode and displays the results.
Performs an OAMF5 loopback test on the specified subscriber port or PVC.
M
M This feature is applicable for ALC line cards only.
Single End Loop Test (SELT) checks the distance to the subscriber’s location.
Note: The port must have an open loop. There cannot be a
DSL device, phone, fax machine or other device connected to the subscriber’s end of the telephone line.
show <slot-port>
Starts SELT on the port.
Displays the SELT result (such as line type and loop length).
M
391
MSC1000G User’s Guide
392
Chapter 23 diagnostic Commands
23.2 diagnostic Commands
Use these commands to execute a specified diagnostic or test function to an interface port or a subscriber port.
23.2.1 diagnostic ldm show Command
Syntax: diagnostic ldm show <slot-port> result|hlin|hlog|qln|snr where result hlin hlog qln snr
= Displays the basic loop diagnostic mode test results.
= Displays the channel characteristics function represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number. These are the maximum upstream and downstream scale factors used in producing the channel characteristics function.
= Displays channel characteristics. The format provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale. This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the ADSL line.
= Displays the Quiet Line Noise for a DMT tone is the rms (root mean square) level of the noise present on the line, when no ADSL signals are present. It is measured in dBm/Hz. The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk.
= Displays the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio (in dB). A
DMT tone’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation (such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture).
Use this command to display the most recent loop diagnostic mode test results for an ADSL port. Use the loop diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical ADSL line.
"
Wait at least one minute after using the
diagnostic ldm test
command before using the
diagnostic ldm show
command.
The following example performs loop diagnostics on DSL port 4 of the line card in slot 5.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 23 diagnostic Commands
The command then displays the results of the ADSL port loop diagnostics. ras> diagnostic ldm show 5-4 result port 5-4:
near end far end
------------ ------------
attainable bit rate(kpbs): 1420 26060
loop attenuation(dB) : 1.6 0.0
signal attenuation(dB) : 0.5 0.0
snr margin(dB) : out of range out of range
actual tx power fe(dBm) : 11.7 10.1
23.2.2 diagnostic ldm test Command
Syntax: diagnostic ldm test <slot-port>
This command has the system perform a Loop Diagnostic Mode test. This is a Dual End Loop
Test (DELT). It provides details about the condition of the specified ADSL port’s line. The
ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2+ ADSL operational mode and have a connection. Use the loop diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical ADSL line.
The subscriber device must also support DELT in order to perform this. This feature is applicable for ALC line cards only.
It takes about one minute for the loop diagnostics to finish.
The following example performs loop diagnostics on DSL port 4 of the line card in slot 5. The command then displays the results of the ADSL port loop diagnostics. ras> diagnostic ldm test 7-5
23.2.3 diagnostic loopback f5 Command
Syntax: diagnostic loopback f5 <slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command has the system perform an OAMF5 loopback test on the specified virtual circuit. An Operational, Administration and Maintenance Function 5 (OAMF5) test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices. First, the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit.
Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device (both
DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test).
The following example has the system perform a local loopback test on a virtual circuit on
DSL port 5 of the line card in slot 7. The virtual circuit is identified by VPI 0 and VCI 33. ras> diagnostic loopback f5 7-5-0/33 line 1 oam loopback success!
MSC1000G User’s Guide
393
Chapter 23 diagnostic Commands
23.2.4 diagnostic selt show Command
Syntax: diagnostic selt show <slot>|<slot-port>
This command displays the Single End Loop Test (SELT) result after you have performed a
SELT test on the specified port on the line card. The report tells you what gauge of telephone wire is connected to the port and the approximate length of the line measured both in meters
(m) and thousands of feet (Kft).
23.2.5 diagnostic selt test Command
Syntax: diagnostic selt test <slot-port>
This command starts the Single End Loop Test (SELT) on the specified port on the line card.
This test checks the distance to the subscriber’s location.
"
The port must have an open loop. There cannot be a DSL device, phone, fax machine or other device connected to the subscriber’s end of the telephone line.
394
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
24
ip Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the ip
commands to configure the IP (Internet Protocol) parameters.
24.1
ip
Commands Summary
The following table lists the ip
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 166 ip Commands
COMMAND
ip
DESCRIPTION P
arp gateway <ip> ping <ip>
[<count>] route flush show delete
Clears the device’s IP Address
Resolution Protocol table.
Displays the device’s IP Address
Resolution Protocol table.
Sets the default gateway IP address.
Pings a host (default 3 times)
<count> = number of pings.
Removes a routing table entry.
M
L
M set
<dst-ip>[/
<netmask>]
<gateway>
<dst-ip>[/
<netmask>]
<gateway-ip>
[<metric>]
[<name>]
Adds or modifies a route entry.
<gateway-ip>
= a gateway IP address of ‘0.0.0.0/0’ means a default gateway.
M
L
M show show Displays the routing table.
Displays the IP addresses of the inband and out-of-band management interfaces and the default gateway, as well as the in-band management VLAN
ID.
L
L
395
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 24 ip Commands
Table 166 ip Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set inband|outb and <ip>[/
<netmask>]
[<inbandvid>] tracert <ip>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the management IP address, subnet mask and in-band management
VLAN ID.
<ip> = ‘0.0.0.0’ disables a management interface.
P
M
Sends a traceroute packet to the IP address (in the field to the left) and uses the response to determine the path a packet takes to that IP address.
L
24.2 ip Commands
The following shows general IP commands that help with the management of the IP parameters.
24.2.1 ip arp flush Command
Syntax: ras> ip arp flush
This command clears the MSC1000G’s IP Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table.
24.2.2 ip arp show Command
Syntax: ras> ip arp show
This command displays the MSC1000G’s IP Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table. This is the list of IP addresses and matching MAC addresses that the device has resolved.
An example is shown next. ras> ip arp show ip address time ether address interface
--------------- ----- ----------------- ----------
172.23.14.65 300 00:00:86:47:11:91 outband
172.23.15.172 300 02:0e:a6:89:41:60 outband
172.23.15.254 300 00:04:80:9b:78:00 outband arp entry: 3
24.2.3 ip gateway Command
Syntax: ras> ip gateway <ip>
This command sets the system’s default gateway IP address.
396
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 24 ip Commands
The following example sets the system to use 172.23.15.254 as the default gateway. ras> ip gateway 172.23.15.254
24.2.4 ip ping Command
Syntax: ras> ip ping <ip> [<count>] where
<ip>
[<count>]
= The IP address of the target.
= The number of pings you want the MSC1000G to send.
This is an IP facility to check for network functionality by sending an echo request to another
IP host and waiting for the reply.
The following example has the MSC1000G send 4 pings to IP address 172.23.19.254. ras> ip ping 172.23.19.254 4 pinging 172.23.19.254 with 32 bytes of data: reply from 172.23.19.254: bytes=32 time<1ms reply from 172.23.19.254: bytes=32 time<1ms reply from 172.23.19.254: bytes=32 time<1ms reply from 172.23.19.254: bytes=32 time<1ms
24.2.5 ip route delete Command
Syntax: ras> ip route delete <dst-ip>[/<netmask>] <gateway> where
<dst ip>
[/netmask]
<gateway>
= The destination IP address of packets to which this static route applies.
= The destination subnet mask of packets to which this static route applies.
= The IP address of the gateway that you want to send the packets through.
This command removes a static, IP forwarding route.
The following example removes a static route for destination IP address 172.23.19.233 through a gateway at IP address 172.23.15.253. ras> ip route delete 172.23.19.233 172.23.15.253
MSC1000G User’s Guide
397
Chapter 24 ip Commands
24.2.6 ip route set Command
Syntax: ras> ip route set <dst-ip>[/<netmask>] <gateway-ip> [<metric>] [<name>] where
<dst ip>
= The destination IP address of packets that this static route is to route.
[/
<netmask>]
= The destination subnet mask of packets that this static route is to route.
<gatewayip>
= The IP address of the gateway that you want to send the packets through.
[<metric>]
= The metric (hop count) of this static route.
[<name>]
= A name to identify this static route. Up to 31 English keyboard characters. Spaces and tabs are not allowed.
This command defines a new, static IP forwarding route or edits an existing one.
The following example creates a static route named “Bob” to send traffic for destination IP address 172.23.19.233 through a gateway at IP address 172.23.15.253. ras> ip route set 172.23.19.233 172.23.15.253 5 Bob
24.2.7 ip route show Command
Syntax: ras> ip route show
This command displays the MSC1000G’s routing table. An example is shown next. ras> ip route show dest interface gateway metric name
------------------ ---------- --------------- ------ ----------------
172.23.15.0/24 outband 172.23.15.86 1 -
172.23.19.233 outband 172.23.15.253 5 Bob
192.168.1.0/24 inband 192.168.1.2 1 default outband 172.23.15.254 1 -
24.2.8 ip show Command
Syntax: ras> ip show
398
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 24 ip Commands
Use the command to display the current management IP settings. An example is shown next. ras> ip show interface interface ip netmask vid
--------- --------------- --------------- ---inband 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 1 outband 172.23.15.86 255.255.255.0 gateway: 172.23.15.254
24.2.9 ip set Command
Syntax: ras> ip set inband|outband <ip>[/<netmask>] [<inband-vid>] where inband outband
[<inbandvid>]
= Sets the in-band management IP address.
= Sets the out-of-band management IP address (for the MGMT port).
= Sets the VLAN ID (Identifier) of the management (CPU) VLAN. You must connect to the MSC1000G through a port that is a member of the management (CPU) VLAN in order to perform in-band management.
This command sets the system’s IP addresses and in-band management VLAN (CPU). You can only manage the MSC1000G through ports that are members of the management VLAN.
"
By default, you can access the management VLAN from all of the IES-5000’s in-band ports since they are all in the management VLAN. If you need more security, please see the following example.
24.2.9.1 Configuring Management VLAN Example
"
After the following example configuration, you must connect through the third
Ethernet port (uplink port 1) in order to perform inband management. You must connect through a VLAN aware device that is using the proper VLAN ID in order to perform management.
Another option would be to set the PVID of the third Ethernet port to 3, but this is not recommended since all Ethernet frames received on the port without a VLAN tag would be considered part of VLAN 3.
By default, the DSL ports are members of the management VLAN (VID 1). The following procedure shows you how to configure a tagged VLAN that limits management access to just one Ethernet port.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
399
400
Chapter 24 ip Commands
"
Use the out-of-band management port or console port to configure the
MSC1000G if you misconfigure the management VLAN and lock yourself out from performing in-band management.
1 Use the vlan set
command to configure a VLAN ID (VID 3 in this example) for managing the MSC1000G (the “management” or “CPU” VLAN). ras> vlan set 3 up1 fix tag ras> vlan enable 3
2 Use the ip set
command to set VID 3 as the management VLAN. ras> ip set inband 192.168.1.2 3
24.2.10 ip tracert Command
Syntax: ras> ip tracert <ip>
This command sends a traceroute packet to the IP address (in the field to the left) and uses the response to determine the path a packet takes to that IP address.
The following example displays route information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of
172.23.19.11. ras> ip tracert 172.23.19.11
Resolving 172.23.19.11... traceroute to 172.23.19.11 (172.23.19.11), 30 hops max
, 40 byte packet
1:172.23.14.254 (0 ms) (0 ms) (0 ms)
2:172.23.19.11 (0 ms) (0 ms) (0 ms) traceroute done:
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
25
lcman Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the lcman
commands to manage the line cards.
25.1
lcman
Commands Summary
The following table lists the lcman
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 167 lcman Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
lcman disable enable reset show
<slot>
<slot>
<slot>
[<slot>]
Turns off the specified line card.
Turns on the specified line card.
Performs a hardware reset on the specified line card.
Displays information about the installed cards.
H
H
H
L
25.2 lcman Commands
Use the lcman (line card manager) commands to manage the line cards.
25.2.1 lcman enable Command
Syntax:
ras> lcman enable <slot>
This command turns on the management of the specified line card. This also restarts the line card.
The following example turns on the line card in slot 7. ras> lcman enable 7
401
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 25 lcman Commands
25.2.2 lcman disable Command
Syntax:
ras> lcman disable <slot>
This command turns off the management of the specified line card. This command is for troubleshooting.
The MSC1000G can automatically restart a line card that it is managing. If a line card is unresponsive and the lcman reset
command does not help, you may need to use lcman disable before connecting to the line card’s console port and recovering the firmware. Do this to keep the MSC1000G from turning the line card off during your firmware recovery.
The following example turns off the line card in slot 7. ras> lcman disable 7
25.2.3 lcman reset Command
Syntax:
ras> lcman reset <slot>
This command performs a hardware reset on the specified line card. You can use this on an unresponsive line card.
The following example resets the line card in slot 7.
ras> lcman reset 7
25.2.4 lcman show Command
Syntax:
ras> lcman show [<slot>]
This command displays information about the line cards in the system. This information includes how many slots are under management, and the type of line card the MSC1000G is managing in each slot (if any), as well as the line card’s uptime, firmware version and any alarms.
402
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 25 lcman Commands
The following example shows an overview of all of the cards that are installed in the system’s slots. ras> lcman show id state card type uptime f/w version heat vol mon down out
-- -------- ----------- ------------- ------------------- ---------------------
1 standby MSC1000G 01:36:48 V3.70(LU.0) - - - - -
2 active MSC1000G 23:45:55 V3.70(LU.0) - - - - -
3 - - - - - -
4 - ALC1248G-53 V3.70(ABE.0) - - - V V
5 active ALC1248G-53 22:45:41 V3.53(ABE.0) - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - ALC1248G-51 V3.70(ABD.0) - - - V V
8 - - - - - -
9 - ALC1248G-53 V3.53(ABE.0) - - - V V
10 - ALC1248G-53 V3.53(ABE.0) - - - V V
The following table describes labels in the example.
Table 168 lcman show Command
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ID state card type uptime f/w version heat vol mon down out
This is the slot number.
This displays whether or not the installed card is turned on.
This identifies the model of card that is installed or was last installed in the slot.
This is how long the card has been active.
This is the release of firmware that the card is using.
The following columns display a “V” if an alarm has been detected. “-” displays if no related alarm has been detected.
This displays whether or not there is an alarm due to the card’s temperature being too high or too low.
This displays whether or not there is an alarm due to the card’s voltage being too high or too low.
This displays whether or not the hardware monitor sensor has failed.
This displays whether or not the installed card is down (inactive).
This displays whether the card is installed or has been removed.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
403
Chapter 25 lcman Commands
The following example shows information about the line card installed in slot 1. ras> lcman show 1 slot1 SLC1248G-22:
uptime: 01:33:24
status:
hardware sensor: ok
temperature : ok
voltage : ok
module exist : ok
module status : ok
inventory information:
hardware version: AA
hardware serial number: Z51854282
firmware version: V3.70(ABF.0)b5 | 11/07/2006
DSL driver version: 0.9.1.0
DSL modem version: 1.1-1.5.0__004
current voltage level: current temperature:
1.8V: 1.777 Temp1: 37.000
3.3V: 3.320 Temp2: 41.000
15.0V: 14.961 Temp3: 38.000
'*' indicates a current alarm
The following table describes labels in the example.
Table 169 lcman show Command: Detailed Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
slot uptime f/w version status hardware sensor temperature voltage
This is the slot number followed by the model of card that is installed or was last installed in the slot.
This is how long the card has been active.
This is the release of firmware that the card is using.
The following columns display a “V” if an alarm has been detected. “-” displays if no related alarm has been detected.
This displays the condition of the card’s hardware monitor sensor.
This displays whether or not the card’s measured temperature is within the configured operating thresholds.
This displays whether or not the card’s measured current is within the configured operating thresholds.
module exist
This displays whether or not the card is installed.
module status
This displays whether or not the installed card is up (active).
hardware version
This is the version of the card’s physical hardware.
This is the card’s individual identification number assigned at the factory.
hardware serial number firmware version This is the release of firmware that the card is using.
DSL driver version
DSL modem version
This is the driver version that a DSL line card’s DSL chip is using.
This is the release of modem code that a DSL line card is using.
404
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 25 lcman Commands
Table 169 lcman show Command: Detailed Information (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
current voltage level current temperature
These are the voltages (in volts) measured at the card’s sensors. An “*” indicates the voltage is outside of the configured thresholds.
These are the temperatures (in degrees Celsius) measured at the card’s sensors. An “*” indicates the temperature is outside of the configured thresholds.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
405
Chapter 25 lcman Commands
406
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
26
multicast Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the multicast
commands.
26.1
multicast
Commands Summary
The following table lists the multicast
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 170 multicast Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
multicast bandwidth default <bandwidth> delete port
<index>
Sets the default bandwidth (between
1 and 100 000 kbps) allowed for multicast channel(s) for which you have not set the bandwidth settings.
Removes the specified multicast bandwidth configuration.
Deactivates multicast bandwidth setting on a port.
M
M
M set disable <slotport> enable <slotport> set <slot-port>
<bandwidth> show
<slot>|<slotport>
<index> <startmcast-ip> <endmcast-ip>
<bandwidth>
Activates multicast bandwidth setting on a port.
Sets the maximum multicast bandwidth allowed on a port.
Displays multicast bandwidth settings on the specified line card or port.
Sets bandwidth allowed for the specified multicast channel(s).
M
M
L
M igmp show disable enable
Displays multicast bandwidth settings on the device.
Turns off IGMP proxy or snooping.
Turns on IGMP proxy or snooping using the specified version.
L
M
M qryvid proxy|snooping
[v2|v3] delete set <vid> show
Removes an IGMP query VLAN ID.
Adds an IGMP query VLAN ID.
Displays the IGMP query VLAN IDs.
L
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
407
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
Table 170 multicast Commands (continued)
COMMAND
igmpcount igmpfilter mvlan smcast show disable enable
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
DESCRIPTION
Displays the IGMP mode (proxy, snooping or disabled) and version (v2 or v3).
Turns off the IGMP count limit for a
DSL port(s).
Turns on the IGMP count limit for a
DSL port(s).
set <slot-port>
<count>
<slot>
Sets the IGMP count limit for a DSL port(s).
show
Displays the IGMP count limit setting status for the specified slot.
<igmpfilter>
Sets a DSL port(s) to use an IGMP filter profile.
show <slot>
Displays multicast group configuration and dynamic group member status. delete disable enable group
<vid>
<vid>
<vid> delete <vid>
<index>
Removes a multicast VLAN.
Deactivates a multicast VLAN.
Activates a multicast VLAN.
Removes a multicast VLAN group.
Sets a multicast VLAN group. name set <vid>
<index> <startmcast-ip> <endmcast-ip>
<name> set
Sets the name of the multicast VLAN setting.
Sets the port multicast group membership settings. show delete set
<vid> <slotport> fix|forbid
<vid>
<vid> <groupip>
<vid> <groupip> all|sub1|sub2|u p1|up2|<slotport> fix|forbid|norm al
Displays multicast VLAN settings.
Removes a static multicast group entry.
Configures a static multicast group entry.
show
Displays the static multicast group configuration.
P
M
M
M
M
L
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
L
26.2 multicast bandwidth Commands
Use these commands to configure bandwidth requirements for multicast channels.
408
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
26.2.1 multicast bandwidth default Command
Syntax: multicast bandwidth default <bandwidth> where
<bandwidth>
= Allowed bandwidth between 1 and 1000 000 kbps (kilo bits per second).
This command sets the default bandwidth for multicast channels for which you have not configured bandwidth requirements yet. Multicast bandwidth settings on channels (using the multicast bandwidth set
command) have higher priority over this default setting.
The following example sets the default multicast bandwidth to 1000 kbps. ras> multicast bandwidth default 1000
26.2.2 multicast bandwidth delete Command
Syntax: multicast bandwidth delete <index>
This command removes the specified multicast bandwidth configuration profile.
26.2.3 multicast bandwidth set Command
Syntax: multicast bandwidth set <index> <start-mcast-ip> <end-mcast-ip> <bandwidth> where
<index>
<startmcast-ip>
<end-mcastip>
<bandwidth>
= A unique number for this setting.
= The start of the multicast address range.
= The end of the multicast address range. For one multicast address, enter the start multicast address again.
= Allowed bandwidth between 1 and 1000 000 kbps (kilo bits per second).
This command configures bandwidth allocation for the multicast channel(s). For multicast channel(s) for which you have not configured bandwidth settings, the default multicast
bandwidth setting applies (refer to Section 26.2.1 on page 409 ).
The following example sets the bandwidth allowed for the specified multicast channels to
1000 Kbps. ras> multi band set 1 230.230.1.1 230.230.1.10 1000
MSC1000G User’s Guide
409
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
26.3 multicast bandwidth port Commands
Use these commands to configure multicast bandwidth limitation on specified ports.
26.3.1 multicast bandwidth port disable Command
Syntax: multicast bandwidth port disable <slot-port>
This command deactivates multicast bandwidth settings of the specified port.
26.3.2 multicast bandwidth port enable Command
Syntax: multicast bandwidth port enable <slot-port>
This command activates multicast bandwidth setting on the specified port.
26.3.3 multicast bandwidth port set Command
Syntax: multicast bandwidth port set <slot-port> <bandwidth>
This command sets the bandwidth allowed for multicast traffic on the specified port(s).
This following example sets the multicast bandwidth limit to 1000 kbps on port 1 on the line card in slot 3. ras> multicast bandwidth port set 3-1 1000
26.3.4 multicast bandwidth port show Command
Syntax: multicast bandwidth port show <slot-port>
This command displays the multicast bandwidth setting on the specified port. The following example shows the multicast bandwidth setting for port 1 on the line card in slot 3. ras> multicast bandwidth port show 3-1 card name: ALC1248G-53
port enable bandwidth
------ ------ -----------
3- 1 - 1000 ras>
26.4 multicast igmp Commands
Use these commands to enable or disable IGMP proxy or IGMP snooping.
410
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
26.4.1 multicast igmp disable Command
Syntax: multicast igmp disable
This command deactivates IGMP on the system. All IGMP packets will be ignored.
26.4.2 multicast igmp enable Command
Syntax: multicast igmp enable proxy|snooping [v2|v3]
This command turns on IGMP proxy or snooping using the specified version.
Use proxy to have the device use IGMP proxy. Use IGMP snooping to have the switch passively learn multicast groups.
If you use IGMPv2, the system discards IGMPv3 packets. This provides better security if none of the devices in the network use IGMPv3. If you select IGMPv3, the system recognizes both
IGMPv2 and IGMPv3.
The following example sets the device to use IGMP proxy with IGMPv2. ras> multicast igmp enable proxy v2
26.4.3 multicast igmp qryvid delete Command
Syntax: multicast igmp qryvid delete <vid>
This command removes an IGMP query VLAN ID. The following example removes IGMP query VLAN ID 6. ras> multicast igmp qryvid delete 6
26.4.4 multicast igmp qryvid set Command
Syntax: ras> multicast igmp qryvid set <vid>
This command adds an IGMP query VLAN ID. When using IGMP proxy, the device sends
IGMP queries to the members of the query VLANs. You must have already used the vlan commands to create the VLAN before you use this command.
The following example sets VLAN ID 6 as an IGMP query VLAN. ras> multicast igmp qryvid set 6
MSC1000G User’s Guide
411
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
26.4.5 multicast igmp qryvid show Command
Syntax: ras> multicast qryvid show
This command displays the IGMP query VLAN IDs. ras> multicast igmp qryvid show igmp proxy query vlan table vid static/dynamic
---- --------------
6 static
26.4.6 multicast igmp show Command
Syntax: ras> multicast igmp show
This command displays the IGMP mode and version. The following shows an example. ras> multicast igmp show
Igmp is disabled igmp version is v2
26.5 IGMP Count Limit
With the IGMP count feature, you can limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join. This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services (such as content information distribution) based on service plans and types of subscription.
IGMP count is useful for ensuring the service quality of high bandwidth services like video or
Internet Protocol television (IPTV). IGMP count can limit how many channels (IGMP groups) the subscriber connected to a DSL port can use at a time. If each channel requires 4~5 Mbps of download bandwidth, and the subscriber’s connection supports 11 Mbps, you can use IGMP count to limit the subscriber to using just 2 channels at a time. This also effectively limits the subscriber to using only two IPTVs with the DSL connection.
26.6 multicast igmpcount Commands
Use these commands to configure the IGMP count limit settings.
26.6.1 multicast igmpcount disable Command
Syntax: multicast igmpcount disable <slot-port>
This command turns off the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port(s).
412
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
The following command turns off the IGMP count limit for DSL port 4 on the line card in slot
3. ras> multicast igmpcount disable 3-4
26.6.2 multicast igmpcount enable Command
Syntax: multicast igmpcount enable <slot-port>
This command turns on the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port(s).
The following command turns on the IGMP count limit for DSL port 4 on the line card in slot
3. ras> multicast igmpcount enable 3-4
26.6.3 multicast igmpcount set Command
Syntax: multicast igmpcount set <slot-port> <count>
This command sets the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port(s).
The following command sets a IGMP count limit of 2 for DSL port 4 on the line card in slot 3. ras> multicast igmpcount set 3-4 2
26.6.4 multicast igmpcount show Command
Syntax: multicast igmpcount show <slot>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
413
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
This command displays the IGMP count limit setting status for the DSL ports on the line card in the specified slot. The following example displays the IGMP count limit settings for the ports on the line card in slot 3. ras> multicast igmpcount show 3
[slot9] igmpcount
port enable count
----- ------ -----
3- 1 - 5
3- 2 - 5
3- 3 - 5
3- 4 - 5
3- 5 - 5
3- 6 - 5
-------------------------- [ snip ] --------------------------
3-44 - 5
3-45 - 5
3-46 - 5
3-47 - 5
3-48 - 5
26.7 multicast igmpfilter Commands
Use the IGMP filter commands to define IGMP filter profiles and assign them to DSL ports.
IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups. You can have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group. You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service (like a SIP server for example). Then you can assign the IGMP filter profile to DSL ports that are allowed to use the service.
26.7.1 multicast igmpfilter set Command
Syntax: switch igmpfilter set <slot-port> <igmpfilter> where
<igmpfilter>
= The name of an IGMP filter profile.
This command sets an ADSL port(s) to use an IGMP filter profile.
The following example sets ADSL port 9 in slot 7 to use the
voice
IGMP filter profile. ras> multicast igmpfilter set 7-9 voice
26.7.2 multicast igmpfilter show Command
Syntax: multicast igmpfilter show <slot>
This command displays which IGMP filter profile DSL ports are using.
414
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
The following example displays which IGMP filter profiles the DSL ports in slot 3 are using. ras> multicast igmpfilter show 3
<<slot3 igmpfilter configuration>> port igmpfilter
---- -------------------------------
1 DEFVAL
2 DEFVAL
3 DEFVAL
4 DEFVAL
5 DEFVAL
6 DEFVAL
7 DEFVAL
8 DEFVAL
9 DEFVAL
------------------------- [ snip ] -------------------------
44 DEFVAL
45 DEFVAL
46 DEFVAL
47 DEFVAL
48 DEFVAL
26.8 multicast mvlan Commands
Use these commands to configure VLAN multicast settings and set multicast port members.
Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber
VLANs on the network. This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
26.8.1 multicast mvlan delete Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan delete <vid>
This command removes the specified multicast VLAN configuration.
26.8.2 multicast mvlan disable Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan disable <vid>
This command deactivates the specified multicast VLAN. The following example disables multicast VLAN 12. ras> multicast mvlan disable 12
26.8.3 multicast mvlan enable Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan enable <vid>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
415
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
This command activates the specified multicast VLAN.
26.8.4 multicast mvlan group delete Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan group delete <vid> <index>
This command removes the specified multicast VLAN group setting.
26.8.5 multicast mvlan group set Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan group set <vid> <index> <start-mcast-ip> <end-mcast-ip> where
<index>
<start-mcast-ip>
<end-mcast-ip>
= Multicast group number (1 -16).
= Start of the multicast IP address range.
= End of the multicast IP address range.
This command creates a multicast VLAN group. The following example creates a multicast
VLAN with VID 10 and group index 1. The multicast address range is 224.224.224.1 ~
224.224.224.10. ras> multicast mvlan group set 10 1 224.224.224.1 224.224.224.10
26.8.6 multicast mvlan group delete Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan group delete <vid> <index>
This command removes the specified multicast VLAN group configuration.
26.8.7 multicast mvlan name Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan name <vid> <name>
This command sets the name of the multicast VLAN. The following example sets the name of the multicast VLAN (VID =10) to “ example
”. ras> multicast mvlan name 10 example
26.8.8 multicast mvlan set Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan set <vid> <slot-port> fix|forbid
416
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 26 multicast Commands where fix|forbid
= fix
sets the port to be a permanent member of this multicast VLAN. forbid
blocks the port from joining this multicast VLAN. The port will not accept multicast traffic from this multicast VLAN.
This command sets a multicast VLAN and the allowed/blocked port member(s).
The following example creates a multicast VLAN (VID =10) and sets port 1 on the line card in slot 3 to be a member of this multicast VLAN. ras> multicast mvlan set 10 3-1 fix
26.8.9 multicast mvlan show Command
Syntax: multicast mvlan show [vid]
This command displays the current multicast VLAN settings. In the state column, “-” indicates the multicast VLAN is not active while “V” indicates the multicast VLAN is active. ras> multicast mvlan show idx vid state name
--- ---- ----- -------------------------------
1 10 V example
2 12 ras>
26.9 multicast smcast Commands
Use the following multicast commands to manage static multicast groups.
26.9.1 multicast smcast delete Command
Syntax: multicast smcast delete <vid> <group-ip> where
<group-ip>
= A multicast IP address.
This command removes a static multicast group entry.
The following example removes a static multicast group for VLAN 23 with static multicast address 239.255.255.255. ras> multicast smcast delete 23 239.255.255.255
MSC1000G User’s Guide
417
Chapter 26 multicast Commands
26.9.2 multicast smcast set Command
Syntax: multicast smcast set <vid> <group-ip> all|sub1|sub2|up1|up2|<slot-port> fix|forbid|normal where
<group-ip> all|sub1|sub2
|up1|up2|<slo t-port> fix|forbid|no rmal
= A multicast IP address.
= The port or ports to which this static multicast group is to apply.
= This controls the static multicast group membership status of the port
(or ports).
fix
sets the port to be a permanent member of the multicast group.
normal allows the port to join the multicast group when the device adds it through IGMP protocol. forbidden
prohibits the port from joining the multicast group.
This command configures a static multicast group entry.
The following example creates a static multicast group for VLAN 23. The static multicast address is 239.255.255.255 and DSL port 9 in slot 7 is a permanent member. ras> multicast smcast set 23 239.255.255.255 7-9 fix
26.9.3 multicast smcast show Command
Syntax:
multicast smcast show
This command displays the system’s static multicast group configuration.
An example is shown next. ras> multicast smcast show vid group slot port(F:fix, X:forbid, -:normal)
---- --------------- ---- ------------------------------------------------
1 224.0.0.0 1 2 3 4
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
1 XXXX
2 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
3 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
4 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
5 ------------------------------------------------
Press any key to continue, 'e' to exit ras>
418
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
27
port Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the port
commands.
27.1
port
Commands Summary
The following table lists the port
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 171 port Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
port adsl alarmprof annexl annexm annexi dscarrier0 dscarrier1 inpmin
<slot-port>
<alarmprofile>
ADSL port specific commands
Applies an ADSL alarm profile to the subscriber port.
disable <slotport> enable <slot-port>
[narrow]
Turns off the Annex L reach extended feature.
Turns on the Annex L reach extended feature. If the ‘narrow’ is not entered then
Annex L mode will be enabled as ‘wide’
PSD mode.
Turns off the Annex M double upstream feature.
disable <slotport> enable <slot-port> Turns on the Annex M double upstream feature (upstream tones from 6 to 63).
disable <slotport>
Turns off the Annex I all digital mode feature.
enable <slot-port> Turns on the Annex I all digital mode feature.
<slot-port> <m1>
<m2> <m3> <m4> <m5>
<m6> <m7>
<slot-port> <m1>
<m2> <m3> <m4> <m5>
<m6> <m7>
<slot-port>
<us_inp> <ds_inp>
Disables downstream carrier tones from 33 to 255.
<m1>~<m7> = carrier tones, 0~ffffffff,
'1' disables the corresponding tone.
Disables downstream carrier tones from
256 to 511.
<m1>~<m7> = carrier tones, 0~ffffffff,
'1' disables the corresponding tone.
Sets the upstream (us) and downstream
(ds) Impulse Noise Protection minimum setting (0~6).
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
419
Chapter 27 port Commands
Table 171 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
optionmask pmm
<slot-port>
<option_mask> disable <slotport> enable <slot-port>
[L2|L3]
DESCRIPTION
Sets the following attributes.
0x0001 = disable Trellis
0x0002 = disable Reed-Solomon
0x0004 = disable upstream bitswap
0x0008 = disable downstream bitswap
0x0010 = disable 1-bit constellation
0x0020 = disable transmit windowing
(ADSL2+ only)
0x0040 = disable s=0.5 support (G.dmt only)
0x0080 = disable G.lite rate limit (G.lite only)
Turns off power management mode.
power param <slot-port>
[l0time <l0time>]
[l2time <l2time>]
[l2pcb <l2atpr>
<l2atprt>] [l2rate
<l2minrate>
<l2maxrate>
<l2threshold>]
<slot-port> fix|power|rate
<max_us_tx>
<max_ds_tx>
<max_rx>
M
Turns on power management mode.
L2 = power management mode L2
L3 = power management mode L2 and L3
Sets the L0 (full power) and L2 (low power) power mode transition settings.
<l0time> = Time (10 ~ 65535 seconds) to stay in L0 mode.
<l2time> = Time (10 ~ 65535 seconds) to wait before performing another power trims in L2 mode.
<l2atpr> = Maximum aggregated power reduction (APTR) per trim in dB (0 ~ l2atprt ).
<l2atprt> = Maximum total aggregate power reduction in dB (0-15).
<l2minrate> = Minimum rate in L2 (32
~ 4096).
<l2maxrate> = Maximum rate in L2
(minimum L2 rate ~ maximum upstream rate in kbps).
<l2threshold> = Line rate threshold to stay in L2 mode. When the rate is not within the threshold, the port switches to L0 mode immediately.
Specifies the maximum allowed transmit power and maximum aggregate received power. fix|power|rate = PSD and power adaptivity fix = fixed mode power = priority to power rate = priority to rate
<max_us_tx> = maximum upstream transmit power, -130~200 in 0.1 dBm.
<max_ds_tx> = maximum downstream transmit power, -50~200 in 0.1 dBm.
<max_rx> = maximum aggregate receive power at atu-c, -255~255 in 0.1 dBm.
M
M
M
P
M
420
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
Table 171 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
psd maximum [<slotport> <us-psd> <dspsd>] copy set uscarrier
<source>
<destination>
<slot-port>
<profile> <mode>
<slot-port> <m0>
<m1>
DESCRIPTION
Sets/displays maximum upstream/ downstream nominal PSD values. This is for testing purposes.
<us-psd> = Upstream PSD (-400 ~ 40 in
0.1dBm/Hz).
<ds-psd> = Downstream PSD (-400 ~ 40 in
0.1dBm/Hz).
Sets ADSL port(s) to use a profile created by the profile adsl set command.
<mode> = for Annex A, gdmt, t1413, glite, auto, adsl2, adsl2+; for Annex B, gdmt, etsi, auto, adsl2, adsl2+
Disables upstream carrier tones from 0 to
63.
<m0>, <m1> = carrier tones, 0~ffffffff,
'1' disables the corresponding tone.
Copies port settings from a source port to destination ports on the same type of line card.
Turns off a subscriber port.
P
M
M
M
M
M disabl e
<slot-port> enable <slot-port> ipbpvc arpproxy delete domain edgerouter
Turns on a subscriber port.
Manually flush the learned MAC addresses from the ARP table.
M
M
|edgerouter [<ip>
<vid>] |interface
[<ip/mask> <vid>] age set <sec> show
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> delete <domainname> dhcpvlan disable
<domain name> dhcpvlan enable
<domain name> <vid> set <domain name>
Sets the valid time interval for learned MAC addresses in the ARP table. 10..10000 seconds
Displays the number of seconds a learned
MAC address remains valid in the ARP table.
Remove the specified IP aware Bridge
PVC.
Removes the specified domain. First delete all VLANs belonging to this domain.
Disable DHCP VLAN in a domain
Enable DHCP VLAN in a domain
M
M
M
M
M
M
Create domain, maximum 8 domains in the system.
Display domain setting
M
L show[<domain name>] vlan <domain name>
<vid>
<registration> delete <ip> <vid>
Set vlan to join or leave specified domain, maximum 8 VLANs in one domain.
Delete specified edge router setting
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
421
Chapter 27 port Commands
Table 171 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set <ip>/<mask>
<vid> show [<vid>] name set show vlan
<slot-port>
<name>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the edge router
Displays the edge router setting.
<vid> set <ip>/<mask>
<vid> [<slot-portvpi/vci>] show all|<ip/ mask>|<vid>|<ip/ mask> <vid>
Sets the interface.
Displays the interface setting by optional
<ip>/<mask> and vlan id parameter
M
L
Deletes route entry from specified domain M name> <ip/mask>
<nexthop> set <domain-name>
<ip/mask>
<nexthop> <metric>
[<priority>] show [<domain name>
| <ip/mask> |
<domain> <ip/ mask>]
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<vid> <priority>
<type>
<slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <vid>
<registration>
<tag>
Sets a new route to specified edgerouter for a given domain. Maximum 16 routes in a domain.
Displays current routing table for specific domain.
Sets IP aware Bridge PVC.
Displays IP aware Bridge PVC settings.
Sets VLAN attributes of a PVC.
M
L
M
L
M
Sets a name for a subscriber port.
M
L
M
P
M paepvc delete <slot-port-vpi/ vci>
Commands for configuring and displaying
PPPoA-to-PPPoE (PAE) PVC settings.
Removes a PAE PVC. M
422
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
Table 171 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<mux> <pvid>
<priority> [acname
<acname>]
[srvcname
<srvcname>]
[hellotime
<hellotime>]
DESCRIPTION
Configures a PVC for PAE translation.
<mux> = Encapsulation type ( llc or vcmux ).
<acname> = Host name of the access concentrator.
<srvcname> = Descriptive name for the service that uses this PVC.
<hellotime> = Timeout (0-600 seconds) for PPPoE session.
P
M ppvc pvc show delete member
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> delete <slot-portvpi/vci> <vpi/vci> set <slot-portvpi/vci> <vpi/vci>
<atmprofile>
<level> set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <mux> <pvid>
<priority> show
Priority PVC channel commands.
Removes a priority-based PVC.
Removes a PVC channel from a PVC group.
Adds a priority-PVC into the group.
Creates a priority-based PVC.
<mux> = encapsulation: llc , vcmux
<pvid> = default VLAN ID, 1~4094
<priority> = default priority, 0~7
Displays runtime configured virtual channels. vlan
<slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci> [detail]
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <vid>
<registration>
<tag>
Adds a PVC channel to a VLAN.
<registration> = join or leave
<tag> = TX tagging, tag or untag delete mvlan
<slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> disable <slotport-vpi/vci> enable <slot-portvpi/vci>
Note: Make sure the VID is not already used for MVLAN or
TLS PVC.
Displays the PAE PVC settings for the specified port and/or slot.
Permanent Virtual Circuit channel specific commands.
Removes a PVC setting.
L
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
Deactivates multicast VLAN on the PVC. M
Activates the multicast VLAN in the PVC. M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
423
Chapter 27 port Commands
Table 171 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
shdsl show tel tlspvc set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile>
<mux> <pvid>
<priority>
DESCRIPTION
Creates or modifies a PVC setting.
<profile> = ATM profile
<mux> = encapsulation: llc , vcmux
<pvid> = default VLAN ID, 1~4094
<priority> = default priority, 0~7
Displays runtime configured virtual channels. show <slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci> [detail] enable <pvc> usratelimit disable <pvc> set <pvc> <rate>
Activates upstream rate limiting on the
PVC.
Deactivates upstream rate limiting on the
PVC.
Sets the maximum upstream rate (in Kbps) the PVC is allowed to use.
Displays upstream rate limiting settings. vlan show <pvc>
<slot-port-vpi/ vci> <vid>
<registration>
<tag>
Adds a PVC channel to a VLAN.
<registration> = join or leave
<tag> = TX tagging, tag or untag
SHDSL specific commands.
alarmprof pbo
<slot-port> span|stuc|stur|*
<alarmprofile>
<slot-port> normal_epl|forced_ epl|forced_no_epl
<value>
Sets SHDSL ports or end point(s) to use an alarm profile.
span = set alarm profile for the whole span stuc = set alarm profile at stuc end point stur = set alarm profile at stur end point
* = set alarm profile at both stuc and stur
Sets power backoff for SHDSL port(s).
normal_epl = Power backoff with EPL
(Estimated Power Loss).
forced_epl = Forced power backoff with EPL. forced_no_epl = Forced power backoff without EPL.
<value> = 0~31 in dB
<mode>
Sets the negotiated noise margin mode of the SHDSL port(s).
<mode> = negotiated noise margin mode, normal|forced set <slot-port>
<profile_name>
Sets SHDSL port(s) to use a profile created by the profile shdsl set command.
Displays port settings.
<slot>|<slotport>
<slot-port>
<telephoneno>
Records a DSL port(s) subscriber’s telephone number.
Commands to configure Transparent LAN
Service (TLS) or VLAN stacking on the
PVCs.
P
M
L
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
424
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
Table 171 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND
delete <slot-port-vpi/ vci> set <slot-port-vpi/ vci> <profile> llc|vcmux <vid>
<priority> show <slot>|<slotport>|<slot-portvpi/vci> vdsl alarmprof <slot-port>
<profile> frametype <slot-port>
<all|tag> frequencyplan <slot-port>
<997|998> priority <slot-port>
<priority>
DESCRIPTION
Removes a TLS PVC.
Sets/changes TLS PVC settings.
Displays the settings for a TLS PVC.
Sets the VDSL port(s) to use the specified alarm profile.
Sets the acceptable frame type on the
VDSL port(s).
P
M
M
L
M
M
Sets the band plan the VDSL port(s) uses. M
Sets the VDSL port(s) VLAN priority (0 - 7). M rfiband <slot-port>
<disable|ansi|etsi
|custom> rficustom tls disable <index> enable <index> set <index>
<start_freq>
<stop_freq> show
Selects an RFI band or disables this feature.
M
M
Uses these commands to set custom RFI settings. The settings are applied to all
VDSL ports.
Displays the settings of a custom RFI entry. M
Activates the specified custom RFI entry. M
M Sets a custom RFI entry. index = 1 - 8 start_freq = start of the frequency range in kHz. bigger than start_freq stop_freq .
cannot be stop_freq = end of the frequency range in kHz.
Displays custom RFI settings. L
M
<profile>
<vdsl_profile> disable <slotport> profile = custom line profile. vdsl_profile =
8a|8b|8c|8d|12a|
Disables Transparent LAN Service (TLS).
The system does not insert additional
VLAN tags to packets. enable <slot-port>
Disables Transparent LAN Service (TLS) to insert additional VLAN tags to packets. set <slot-port>
<svid> <spriority>
Sets/changes TLS settings on the VDSL port(s).
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
425
Chapter 27 port Commands
Table 171 port Commands (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
<on|off>
Enables/disable Upstream Power Back Off
(UPBO).
P
M
<registration>
<tag>
27.2 port Commands
Use the port commands to configure the DSL ports.
27.3 port adsl Commands
Use the port adsl commands to configure the subscriber ADSL ports.
27.3.1 port adsl alarmprof Command
Syntax: port adsl alarmprof <slot-port> <alarmprofile> where
<alarmprofile>
= The name of an ADSL alarm profile.
This command applies (maps) an ADSL alarm profile to the subscriber port(s).
The following example sets ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to use the SESalarm alarm profile. ras> port adsl alarmprofile 7-5 SESalarm
27.3.2 port adsl annexl disable Command
Syntax: port adsl annexl disable <slot-port>
This command turns off the Annex L reach extended feature on the specified ADSL2 port(s).
The following example turns off the Annex L feature for port 5 on the line card in slot 75. ras> port adsl annexl disable 5-7
27.3.3 port adsl annexl enable Command
Syntax: port adsl annexl enable <slot-port> [narrow]
426
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands where
[narrow]
= The “narrow” PSD (Power Spectral Density) mode. The narrow mode supports longer loop lengths but has lower transmission speeds.
The “wide” PSD mode is used if you do not enter “narrow”. The wide mode supports higher transmission speeds but requires shorter loop lengths.
This command turns on the Annex L reach extended feature on the specified ADSL2 port(s).
Annex L can be used with Annex A (ADSL over POTS), not Annex B (ADSL over ISDN).
The following example turns on the Annex L feature for port 7 on the line card in slot 5. ras> port adsl annexl enable 5-7
27.3.4 port adsl annexm disable Command
Syntax: port adsl annexm disable <slot-port>
This command turns off the Annex M double upstream feature on the specified ADSL2/2+ port(s).
The following example turns off the Annex M feature for port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl annexm disable 7-5
27.3.5 port adsl annexm enable Command
Syntax: port adsl annexm enable <slot-port>
This command turns on the Annex M double upstream feature on the specified ADSL2/2+ port(s). This has the upstream connection use tones 6 to 63.
The following example turns on the Annex M feature for port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl annexm enable 7-5
27.3.6 port adsl annexi disable Command
Syntax: port adsl annexi disable <slot-port>
This command turns off the Annex I all digital mode feature on the specified ADSL2/2+ port(s).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
427
Chapter 27 port Commands
The following example turns off the Annex I feature for port 5 on the line card in slot 7.
ras> port adsl annexi disable 7-5
27.3.7 port adsl annexi enable Command
Syntax: port adsl annexi enable <slot-port>
This command turns on the Annex I all digital mode feature on the specified ADSL2/2+ port(s). With Annex I, the ADSL connection uses the full spectrum of the physical line and the user can not use POTS or ISDN service.
The following example turns on the Annex I feature for port 5 on the line card in slot 7.
ras> port adsl annexi enable 7-5
27.3.8 port adsl dscarrier0 Command
Syntax: port adsl dscarrier0 <slot-port> <m1> <m2> <m3> <m4> <m5> <m6> <m7> where
<m1>
~
<m7>
= The downstream carrier tones to be disabled. Each <mx> can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits (0~ffffffff). Each <mx> represents 32 carrier tones (each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones).
<m1>
= tones 32~63
<m2>
= tones 64~95
<m3>
= tones 96~127
<m4>
= tones 128~159
<m5>
= tones 160~191
<m6>
= tones 192~223
<m7>
= tones 224~255
The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a '1' disables the corresponding tone. Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it.
This command disables downstream carrier tones from 33 to 255 on the specified ADSL port(s). Use this command to have the system not use an ADSL line’s tones that are known to have a high noise level.
The following example disables downstream carrier tone 89 for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl dscarrier0 7-5 0 01000000 0 0 0 0 0
428
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
This example disables downstream carrier tones 89 and 90 for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl dscarrier0 7-5 0 03000000 0 0 0 0 0
27.3.9 port adsl dscarrier1 Command
Syntax: port adsl dscarrier1 <slot-port> <m0> <m1> <m2> <m3> <m4> <m5> <m6> <m7> where
<m0>
~
<m7>
= The downstream carrier tones to be disabled. Each <mx> can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits (0~ffffffff). Each <mx> represents 32 carrier tones (each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones).
<m0>
= tones 256~287
<m1>
= tones 288~319
<m2>
= tones 320~351
<m3>
= tones 352~383
<m4>
= tones 384~415
<m5>
= tones 416~447
<m6>
= tones 448~479
<m7>
= tones 480~511
The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a '1' disables the corresponding tone. Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it.
This command disables downstream carrier tones from 256 to 511 on the specified ADSL2+ port(s). Use this command to have the system not use an ADSL line’s tones that are known to have a high noise level.
The following example disables downstream carrier tone 301 for ADSL2+ port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl dscarrier1 7-5 0 00001000 0 0 0 0 0 0
The following example disables downstream carrier tones 301 to 304 for ADSL2+ port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl dscarrier1 7-5 0 0000f000 0 0 0 0 0 0
27.3.10 port adsl inpmin Command
Syntax: port adsl inpmin <slot-port> <us_inp> <ds_inp>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
429
Chapter 27 port Commands where
<us_inp>
<ds_inp>
= Sets the minimum upstream (us) impulse noise protection setting. Use
0~6 to define a number of DMT symbols. 0 = 0, 1 = 0.5, 2 = 1, 3 = 2,
4 = 4, 5 = 8, 6 = 16 DMT symbols
= Sets the minimum downstream (ds) impulse noise protection setting
(0~6).
This command sets the minimum upstream (us) and downstream (ds) impulse noise protection setting on the specified ADSL port(s). Sudden spikes in the line’s noise level (impulse noise) can cause errors and result in lost packets. Set the impulse noise protection minimum to have a buffer to protect the ADSL physical layer connection against impulse noise. This buffering causes a delay that reduces transfer speeds. It is recommended that you use a non-zero setting for real time traffic that has no error correction (like videoconferencing).
The following example sets the impulse noise protection minimum to 2 DMT symbols for upstream and 4 DMT symbols for downstream for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl inpmin 7-5 3 4
27.3.11 port adsl optionmask Command
Syntax: port adsl optionmask <slot-port> <option_mask>
430
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands where
<option_mask> =
0x0001
= disable Trellis
Trellis encoding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
0x0002
= disable Reed-Solomon
Reed-Solomon performs transmission error correction.
0x0004
= disable upstream bitswap
0x0008
= disable downstream bit swap
Bit swapping allows the system to respond to noise on a tone by sending it’s data on another tone. The subscriber (ATU-R) equipment must also support this in order for it to work.
0x0010
= disable 1-bit constellation
1-bit constellation allows the system to send individual bits over
DMT tones that can only support one bit. This allows the connection to use as many of the tones as possible.
0x0020
= disable transmit windowing (ADSL2+ only)
0x0040
= disable s=0.5 support option in G.dmt.
0.5 support maps two Reed-Solomon codewords into one data frame (instead of one) to increase the maximum G.dmt transmission rate.
0x0080
= disable G.lite rate limit (G.lite only).
Disabling the G.lite rate limit allows the G.lite upstream transmission rate to be greater than 512 Kbps.
This command masks (turns off) attributes for the specified port(s). It is for advanced troubleshooting. Use an entry with a “1” instead of “0” before the “x” in order to turn the attribute back on (remove the option mask).
The following example sets ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to not use Trellis encoding. ras> port adsl optionmask 7-5 0x0001
27.3.12 port adsl pmm disable Command
Syntax: port adsl pmm disable <slot-port>
This command turns off the Power ManageMent (PMM) feature on the specified ADSL2/2+ port(s).
The following example sets ADSL2+ port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to not use power management. ras> port adsl pmm disable 7-5
MSC1000G User’s Guide
431
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.3.13 port adsl pmm enable Command
Syntax: port adsl pmm enable <slot-port> [L2|L3] where
L2
L3
= Power management mode L2. This is a power saving mode that scales back the power usage to where there is just enough to support the transmission rate that the subscriber is using.
= Power management mode L2 and L3. Power management mode L3 is a power saving mode that puts the ADSL connection to sleep when there is no traffic. The connection comes back up within three seconds when there is traffic.
This command turns on the Power ManageMent (PMM) feature on the specified ADSL2/2+ port(s). This reduces the amount of power used overall and reduces the instances of the connection going down. PMM increases or decreases the transmission power based on line conditions.
The following example sets ADSL2+ port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to use power management. ras> port adsl pmm enable 7-5
27.3.14 port adsl power Command
Syntax: port adsl power <slot-port> fix|power|rate <max_us_txpwr> <max_ds_txpwr>
<max_rxpwr> where fix|power|rate
<max_us_txpwr>
= The PSD (Power Spectral Density) and power adaptivity mode.
fix
= fixed mode sets the maximum downstream transmit power to the number you specify (
<max_ds_txpwr>).
power
= power mode gives the saving of transmission power priority over the transmission rate. The line card attempts to reduce its transmit power as much as possible while still maintaining the configured minimum rate. This only applies to the downstream connection and the ADSL operational mode must be G.dmt, ANSI T1.413 or G.lite.
rate
= rate mode gives the transmission rate priority over the saving of transmission power. The line card attempts to achieve the maximum configured transmission rate before reducing the transmit power.
= Maximum upstream transmit power, -130~200 in 0.1 dBm.
432
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
<max_ds_txpwr>
<max_rxpwr>
= Maximum downstream transmit power, -50~200 in 0.1 dBm.
= Maximum aggregate receive power at atu-c, -255~255 in 0.1 dBm.This only applies to the ADSL2/2+ ADSL operational modes.
This command specifies the maximum allowed transmit power and maximum aggregate received power.
The following example sets ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to only use up to 10.0 dBm of power for upstream transmissions, 11.5 dBm of power for downstream transmissions and -
7.0 dBm of aggregated receive power. ras> port adsl power 7-5 fix 100 115 -70
27.3.15 port adsl psd maximum Command
Syntax: port adsl psd maximum <slot-port> <us-psd> <ds-psd> where
<us-psd>
<ds-psd>
= Maximum upstream PSD (Power Spectrum Density) mask
(between -400 to 40 in units of 0.1 dBm/Hz).
= Maximum upstream PSD mask (between -400 to 40 in units of
0.1 dBm/Hz).
This command sets the PSD masks for the upstream and downstream channels. PSD defines the distribution of a DSL line’s power in the frequency domain. A PSD mask is a template that specifies the maximum allowable PSD for a line.
The following example sets the maximum upstream and downstream PSD masks of port 1 on the line card in slot 2 to -200 (-20 dBm/Hz) and 10 (1 dBm/Hz) respectively. ras> port adsl psd maximum 2-1 -200 10
27.3.16 port adsl set Command
Syntax: port adsl set <slot-port> <profile> <mode>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
433
434
Chapter 27 port Commands where
<profile>
<mode>
= The ADSL profile that will define the settings of this port.
= The ADSL operational mode.
for Annex A: gdmt
, t1413
, glite
, auto
, adsl2
or adsl2+ for Annex B: gdmt
, etsi
, auto
, adsl2
or adsl2+
When set to auto, the port follows whatever mode is set on the other end of the line.
This command assigns a specific profile to an ADSL port(s) and sets the port’s ADSL mode
(or standard). The profile defines the maximum and minimum upstream/downstream rates, the target upstream/downstream signal noise margins, and the maximum and minimum upstream/ downstream acceptable noise margins of all the ADSL ports to which you assign the profile.
"
When the mode is set to
auto
, the connection rates are governed by the negotiated ADSL mode regardless of the rates configured in the profile. For example, if the profile is set to use a rate of 18000 Kbps, that speed is only supported if the negotiated ADSL mode is ADSL 2+. Any other ADSL mode will limit the rate to what is supported by the specific ADSL standard.
The following example sets ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to use the gold profile and adsl2+
mode. ras> port adsl set 7-5 gold adsl2+
27.3.17 port adsl uscarrier Command
Syntax: port adsl uscarrier <slot-port> <m0> <m1> where
<m0>
,
<m1>
= The upstream subcarriers to be disabled. Each <mx> can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits (0~ffffffff). Each <mx> represents 32 carrier tones (each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones).
<m0>
= tones 0~31
<m1>
= tones 32~63
The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a '1' disables the corresponding tone. Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
This command disables upstream carrier tones from 0 to 63 on the specified ADSL port(s).
Use this command to have the system not use an ADSL line’s tones that are known to have a high noise level.
The following example disables upstream carrier tone 8 for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port adsl uscarrier 7-5 00000080 0
This example disables upstream carrier tones 8 and 9 for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot
7. ras> port adsl uscarrier 7-5 00000180 0
27.4 port copy Command
Syntax: port copy <source> <destination> where
<source>
<destination>
= The slot and port number from which you want to copy settings.
= The slot and port number(s) to which you want to copy settings.
This command copies the port settings from a source port to destination ports on the same type of line card.
The following example copies the settings from DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to all of the DSL ports on the line card in slot 7. ras> port copy 7-5 7-*
27.5 port disable Command
Syntax: port disable <slot-port>
This command turns off the specified subscriber port(s).
The following example turns off DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port disable 7-5
MSC1000G User’s Guide
435
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.6 port enable Command
Syntax: port enable <slot-port>
This command turns on the specified subscriber port(s).
The following example turns on DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port enable 7-5
27.7 IP Bridge Commands
These sections explain how to set up the IP bridge function in the MSC1000G.
The IP bridge function is designed for large-scale, flat, access networks, and it is ideal when the network is based on Ethernet. When the IP bridge is enabled, the MSC1000G forwards frames based on the destination IP address, instead of the destination MAC address, and it replaces the source MAC address with its own MAC address.
You can follow these steps to set up a simple IP bridge.
1 Create a domain. (Each domain is an ISP.)
2 Create one or more VLANs in the domain. (For example, one VLAN is for high-speed
Internet, and another VLAN is for VoIP.)
3 Specify one or more edge routers for the domain.
4 Create routing table entries, so the MSC1000G forwards frames to the appropriate edge router.
5 Create downlink interfaces, so the MSC1000G forwards frames to the appropriate subscribers.
6 Create PVCs for the subscribers.
27.8 IP Bridge ARP Proxy Commands
Use these commands to look at and flush the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table for each domain. You can also configure how long the MSC1000G keeps entries in the ARP table.
The MSC1000G is an ARP proxy for edge routers and subscribers in an IP bridge. You can configure basic settings for this, and you can look at (and flush, in some cases) the (PVC,
MAC, IP, VID) information the MSC1000G has learned using DHCP snooping and ARP.
27.8.1 port ipbpvc arpproxy age Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc arpproxy age <sec>
436
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands where
<sec> =
The number of seconds (10~10000) the device is to keep the
Address Resolution Protocol table’s entries of IP addresses in IP bridges.
This command configures how long the device stores the IP addresses of CPE devices in IP bridges in the Address Resolution Protocol table.
27.8.2 port ipbpvc arpproxy flush Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc arpproxy flush <all | edgerouter [<ip> <vid>] | interface [<ip/ mask> <vid>]> where all
<ip>
<mask>
<vid>
=
=
=
=
All ARP table entries.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
Number of bits <1..32> in the subnet mask.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This command clears the specified entries in the Address Resolution Protocol table(s).
27.8.3 port ipbpvc arpproxy show Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc arpproxy show
This command displays how long the device stores the IP addresses of IP bridge devices in the
Address Resolution Protocol table.
The following is an example.
ras> port ipbpvc arpproxy show age=300 (sec)
27.9 IP Bridge PVC Commands
Use the port ipbpvc delete, set (see
) and show (see
Section 27.14.5 on page 447 ) commands to set up and maintain PVCs for subscribers in an IP
bridge.
IP bridge PVCs are similar to regular PVCs and are endpoints of the IP bridge. In addition, IP bridge PVCs are one of two types, IP over Ethernet or IP over ATM, depending on the underlying network.
The PVID is used to identify the domain the PVC is in, so the PVID must be in a domain.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
437
438
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.10 port ipbpvc delete Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc delete <slot-port-vpi/vci> where vpi/vci =
The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC.
This command deletes the specified PVC channel in an IP bridge.
The following example deletes the IP bridge PVC on ADSL port 10 with VPI 40, VCI 73.
ras> port ipbpvc show 1-10 pvc type pvid pri ipbpvctype profile
--------------- ------- ---- --- ---------- --------------------------------
--
1-10-40/73 ipb 402 2 llc DEFVAL ras> port ipbpvc delete 1-10-40/73 ras> port ipbpvc show 1-10 ras>
27.11 IP Bridge Domain Commands
Use these commands to set up and maintain domains in IP bridges.
A domain represents an ISP. Each domain is defined by (and dominates) the VLAN that are in it and has its own routing table and ARP table. As a result, two or more VLANs in different domains can use the same IP subnet, and one network can support multiple ISPs.
VLANs in IP bridges are exclusive. They can be in at most one domain. In addition, VLANs in
IP bridges share the same VLAN space as regular VLANs, so VLANs in IP bridges must have different VLAN IDs than regular VLANs.
27.11.1 port ipbpvc domain delete Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc domain delete <domain name> where
<domain name> =
The name of the domain.
This command deletes the specified domain.
"
You have to remove the VLANs that are in the domain first.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.11.2 port ipbpvc domain dhcpvlan enable Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc domain dhcpvlan enable <domain name> <vid> where
<domain name>
<vid>
=
=
The name of the domain.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This setting has no effect on DHCP packets that come from VLANs where the MSC1000G’s
DHCP relay settings are active. (See
. The DHCP relay settings take precedence over the IP bridge DHCP VLAN setting.)
This command specifies the VLAN where the domain’s DHCP server is located. The VLAN must already be in the domain. The MSC1000G forwards subscribers’ DHCP packets to the selected VLAN and changes the source MAC address to the MSC1000G’s MAC address.
The MSC1000G still adds whatever Option 82 information is specified for the VLAN in the
DHCP relay settings. (See Chapter 18 on page 347 .)
In the following example, domain “example3” has its DHCP server in VLAN 401.
ras> port ipbpvc domain dhcpvlan enable example3 401
27.11.3 port ipbpvc domain dhcpvlan disable Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc domain dhcpvlan disable <domain name> where
<domain name> =
The name of the domain.
This setting has no effect on DHCP packets that come from VLANs where the MSC1000G’s
DHCP relay settings are active. (See
. The DHCP relay settings take precedence over the IP bridge DHCP VLAN setting.)
This command specifies that there is no DHCP server for the domain, in which case the
MSC1000G does not change the source MAC address in DHCP packets.
The MSC1000G still adds whatever Option 82 information is specified for the VLAN in the
DHCP relay settings. (See Chapter 18 on page 347 .)
27.11.4 port ipbpvc domain set Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc domain set <domain name> where
<domain name> =
You can use 1-31 printable English keyboard characters. Spaces are not allowed.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
439
440
Chapter 27 port Commands
This command creates the domain with the specified name.
An example is shown next.
port ipbpvc domain set example
27.11.5 port ipbpvc domain show Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc domain show [<domain name>] where
<domain name> =
The name of the domain.
This command displays the settings for the specified domain and the VLAN that are in the domain.
An example is shown next.
ras> port ipbpvc domain show domain vid
------------------------------- ----------------------------------------
ISP1 *101 102 example
The output values correspond to the input values of other IP bridge domain commands.
27.11.6 port ipbpvc domain vlan Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc domain vlan <domain name> <vid> join|leave where
<domain name>
<vid> join|leave
=
=
=
The name of the domain.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
Specifies whether you want to add the specified VLAN to
(join) or remove the specified VLAN from (leave) the domain.
This command adds the specified VLAN to (join) or removes the specified VLAN (leave) from the specified domain. VLANs in IP bridges share the same VLAN space as regular
VLANs, so VLANs in IP bridges must have different VLAN IDs than regular VLANs. Use the port ipbpvc VLAN command to configure the VLAN (see
Section 27.18.10 on page 457 ).
"
You have to delete every IP bridge setting (including DHCP VLAN) that uses the selected VLAN before you can remove it from the domain.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
In the following example, VLAN 402 is added to domain “example”.
ras> port ipbpvc domain vlan example 402 join
27.12 IP Bridge Edge Router Commands
Use these commands to set up and maintain edge routers in an IP bridge.
Edge routers are usually the gateways that are provided to the subscribers. They can also be gateways that are specified in static routing table entries. Each edge router, in addition to its IP address, has an associated VLAN ID. When the MSC1000G forwards a frame to an edge router, it uses this VLAN ID to replace whatever VLAN ID the subscriber specified.
27.12.1 port ipbpvc edgerouter delete Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc edgerouter delete <ip> <vid> where
<ip>
<vid>
=
=
IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This command deletes the edge router with the specified IP address and VLAN ID.
The following example deletes edge router 192.168.1.244 with VID 402.
ras> port ipbpvc edgerouter delete 192.168.1.244 402
27.12.2 port ipbpvc edgerouter set Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc edgerouter set <ip/mask> <vid> where
<ip/mask>
<vid>
=
=
Edge router’s IP address, in dotted decimal notation and number of bits <1..32> in the subnet mask.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This command creates an edge router with the specified IP address, subnet mask, and VID.
The MSC1000G uses the VLAN ID when it forwards frames to the edge router. It also uses the
VLAN ID to identify the domain the edge router is in.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
441
Chapter 27 port Commands
The following example creates edge router 192.168.1.244 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and VID 402.
ras> port ipbpvc edgerouter set 192.168.1.244/24 402
27.12.3 port ipbpvc edgerouter show Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc edgerouter show <all | domain-name [<vid>]> where
<domain name>
<vid>
=
=
The name of the domain.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This command displays the edge routers for the specified VLAN or for all VLAN.
An example is shown next.
ras> port ipbpvc edgerouter show all domain ip/mask vid
------------------------------- ------------------ --------
ISP1 172.23.19.249/24 102
ISP1 172.23.19.254/24 101 example 192.168.1.200/24 402
The output values correspond to the input values of other IP bridge edge router commands.
27.13 IP Bridge Interface Commands
Use these commands to set up and maintain forwarding information for downstream traffic.
Downlink interfaces provide forwarding information for downstream traffic. The MSC1000G learns some of this information by snooping DHCP packets. For static IP addresses, you should provide this information manually. In this case, specify the VLAN ID and, optionally, the PVC for a range of IP addresses. The MSC1000G uses the VLAN ID to identify the domain the downlink interface is in. Downlink interfaces in the same domain cannot have overlapping IP addresses.
27.13.1 port ipbpvc interface delete Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc interface delete <ip/mask> <vid> where
<ip/mask>
<vid>
=
=
Downlink interface’s IP address, in dotted decimal notation and number of bits <1..32> in the subnet mask.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
442
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
This command deletes the specified downlink interface. You can only remove downlink interfaces that were added manually.
The following example removes the downlink interface for 192.168.1.200/24 in VLAN 402.
ras> port ipbpvc interface show 402 ip/mask vid slot port vpi vci
------------------ ---- ---- ---- --- ----
192.168.1.200/24 402 - - - ras> port interface delete 192.168.1.200/24 402 ras> port ipbpvc interface show 402 ras>
27.13.2 port ipbpvc interface set Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc interface set <ip/mask> <vid> [<slot-port-vpi/vci>] where
<ip/mask>
<vid> vpi/vci
=
=
=
Downlink interface’s IP address, in dotted decimal notation and number of bits <1..32> in the subnet mask.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC.
This command creates the specified downlink interface. The <ip>/<mask> specifies the IP address and subnet mask of the VLAN or subscriber. If the destination IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G forwards the frame to the specified VLAN and PVC, if any.
The MSC1000G uses the specified VLAN ID when it forwards frames to the VLAN or subscriber. It also uses the VLAN ID to identify the domain the downlink interface is in.
"
Make sure you specify a valid IP bridge PVC. Do not specify PVCs that are not set as the IPB PVCs (see
Section 27.14.4 on page 446 ).
The following example creates a downlink interface that forwards frames for IP addresses
192.168.3.0~192.168.3.255 to VLAN 402.
ras> port ipbpvc interface set 192.168.3.0/24 402
27.13.3 port ipbpvc interface show Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc interface show <all | ip/mask | vid | ip/mask vid>
443
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands where ip/mask vid
=
=
Downlink interface’s IP address, in dotted decimal notation and number of bits <0..32> in the subnet mask.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This command displays downlink interfaces created manually. It does not show forwarding information learned by snooping DHCP packets.
An example is shown next.
ras> port ipbpvc interface show 402 ip/mask vid slot port vpi vci
------------------ ---- ---- ---- --- ----
192.168.3.0/24 402 - - - -
The output values correspond to the input values of other IP bridge downlink interface commands.
27.14 IP Bridge Routing Table Commands
Use these commands to set up and maintain the routing table for each domain.
Each domain has its own routing table. Each routing table contains entries that, based on the destination IP address, control where the MSC1000G forwards packets (for upstream and downstream traffic). The MSC1000G automatically creates routing table entries for each downlink interface and for each edge router in the domain. You can create additional entries by specifying the edge router to which the MSC1000G should forward traffic for a particular destination IP address or IP subnet.
27.14.1 port ipbpvc route delete Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc route delete <domain-name> <ip/mask> <nexthop> where
<domain-name>
<ip/mask>
<nexthop>
=
=
=
The name of the domain.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation and number of bits
<0..32> in the subnet mask.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
This command deletes the specified entry from the routing table of the specified domain. You can only remove entries that were added manually.
444
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
The following example removes the entry for 172.32.37.0~172.32.37.255 for domain
“example2”.
ras> adsl ipbpvc route show example2 domain name ip/netmask gateway ip metric pri
-------------------- ------------------- --------------- ------ --example2 0.0.0.0/0 192.168.1.252 1 0 example2 172.23.37.0/24 192.168.1.250 1 0 example2 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.1.249 1 0 ras> adsl ipbpvc route delete example2 172.23.37.0/24 192.168.1.250
ras> adsl ipbpvc route show example2 domain name ip/netmask gateway ip metric pri
-------------------- ------------------- --------------- ------ --example2 0.0.0.0/0 192.168.1.252 1 0 example2 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.1.249 1 0
27.14.2 port ipbpvc route set Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc route set <domain-name> <ip/mask> <nexthop> <metric> [<priority>] where
<domain-name>
<ip/mask>
<nexthop>
<metric>
<priority>
=
=
=
=
=
The name of the domain.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation and number of bits
<0..32> in the subnet mask.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
The metric <1..15> represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly-connected networks.
Select the number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
If two entries have the same metric, the MSC1000G uses the one with the lower IP address.
The IEEE 802.1p priority value <0..7>.
This command creates the specified entry in the routing table of the specified domain.
The <ip>/<mask> specifies the range of IP addresses to which this entry applies. If the destination IP address of a packet is in this range, the MSC1000G forwards the frame to the specified IP address <nexthop>. If <nexthop> corresponds to an edge router configured using the edge router commands (see
Section 27.12 on page 441 ), the MSC1000G uses the
associated VLAN ID. In addition,
• If the edge router is in the same domain as the entry, the entry is used for upstream traffic.
• If the edge router is in a different domain than the entry, the entry is used for downstream traffic.
If <nexthop> is not set up in the edge router screen, the MSC1000G uses the entry for downstream traffic and does not change the VLAN ID.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
445
Chapter 27 port Commands
If the <priority> is not specified, the default value is zero. This is applied to incoming frames without a <priority> tag.
The following example creates an entry in the routing table for domain “example3”. This entry forwards traffic for IP addresses 192.168.4.0~192.168.4.255 to edge router 192.168.1.244.
ras> port ipbpvc route set example3 192.168.4.0/24 192.168.1.244 1
27.14.3 adsl ipbpvc route show Command
Syntax: adsl ipbpvc route show [all | <domain-name> | <ip/mask> | <domain-name> <ip>/
<mask>] where
<domain-name>
<ip/mask>
=
=
The name of the domain.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation and number of bits
<0..32> in the subnet mask.
This command displays routing table entries created manually for the specified domain and/or range of IP addresses. It does not show entries added automatically by the MSC1000G.
An example is shown next.
ras> port ipbpvc route show all domain ip/mask nexthop mtrc pr
------------------------------- ------------------ --------------- ---- --
ISP1 0.0.0.0/0 172.23.19.254 15 0
ISP1 192.169.1.0/24 172.23.19.249 5 0 example3 192.168.4.0/24 192.168.1.244 1 -
The output values correspond to the input values of other IP bridge routing table commands.
27.14.4 port ipbpvc set Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc set <slot-port-vpi/vci> <profile> <vid> <priority> <type> where
<vpi/vci> profile
=
=
The VPI setting can be 0 to 255. The VCI setting can be 32 to
65535 if the vpi is 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi is not 0.
Assign an ATM profile to use for this channel’s traffic shaping.
446
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
<vid>
<priority>
<type>
=
=
=
The default VID (1 to 4094). Each PVC must have a unique
VID since the MSC1000G forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID.
You must assign a default VID (1 to 4094) and IEEE 802.1p default priority (0 to 7) to normal channels. Each PVC must have a unique VID (since the MSC1000G forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID).
This is the priority value (0 to 7) to add to incoming frames without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
Specify the encapsulation type for the PVC. llc and vc are for a PVC running on Ethernet (IPoE).
llc_r and vc_r are for a PVC running on ATM (IPoA).
This command allows the configuration of a PVC (permanent virtual circuit) for one or a range of ADSL ports in an IP bridge.
The following example sets a PVC on slot 1, DSL port 10 with VPI 40, VCI 73, DEFVAL profile, default VID 402 and priority 2. It uses LLC encapsulation over Ethernet.
ras> port ipbpvc set 1-10-40/73 DEFVAL 402 2 llc ras> port ipbpvc show 1-10 pvc type pvid pri ipbpvctype profile
--------------- ------- ---- --- ---------- --------------------------------
--
1-10-40/73 ipb 402 2 llc DEFVAL
27.14.5 port ipbpvc show Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc show <slot>|<slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci> where vpi/vci =
The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC.
This command allows you to display the PVCs for subscribers in an IP bridge.
An example is shown next.
ras> port ipbpvc show 1-10 pvc type pvid pri ipbpvctype profile
--------------- ------- ---- --- ---------- --------------------------------
--
1-10-40/73 ipb 402 2 llc DEFVAL
The output values correspond to the input values of other IP bridge PVC commands.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
447
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.14.6 port ipbpvc vlan Command
Syntax: port ipbpvc vlan <slot-port-vpi/vci> <vid> <registration> <tag> where vpi/vci
<vid>
=
=
<registration> =
<tag> =
The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC.
The default VID (1 to 4094). Each PVC must have a unique
VID since the MSC1000G forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID.
You must assign a default VID (1 to 4094) and IEEE 802.1p default priority (0 to 7) to normal channels. Each PVC must have a unique VID (since the MSC1000G forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID).
Use join to have the port be a member of the specified VLAN.
Use leave to remove the port from the specified VLAN.
Use tag to tag all frames transmitted on this PVC with the port’s VID.
Use untag to not frames transmitted on this PVC with the port’s VID.
Use this command to configure a IPB PVC’s VLAN settings.
The following example sets the PVC on slot 1, DSL port 10 with VPI 40, VCI 73 to be a member of VLAN 402 and not tag the frames sent to this PVC.
ras> port ipbpvc vlan 1-10-40/73 402 join untag
27.15 port name Command
Syntax: port name <slot-port> <name> where
<name>
= A name to identify the subscriber port.
This command sets a name for the specified subscriber port(s).
The following example sets DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 to use the name Bob. ras> port name 7-5 bob
448
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.16 PPPoA to PPPoE (PAE) Translation
Before migrating to an Ethernet infrastructure, a broadband network might consist of PPPoA connections between the CPE devices and the DSLAM and PPPoE connections from the
DSLAM to the BRAS (Broadband Remote Access Server). The following figure shows a network example.
Figure 191 Mixed PPPoA-to-PPPoE Broadband Network Example
BRAS
PPPoA PPPoE
In order to allow communication between the end points (the CPE devices and the BRAS), you need to configure the DSLAM (the MSC1000G) to translate PPPoA frames to PPPoE packets and vise versa.
When PPPoA packets are received from the CPE, the ATM headers are removed and the
MSC1000G adds PPPoE and Ethernet headers before sending the packets to the BRAS. When the MSC1000G receives PPPoE packets from the BRAS, PPPoE and Ethernet headers are stripped and necessary PVC information (such as encapsulation type) is added before forwarding to the designated CPE.
You can use the port paepvc
command to create PVCs for PAE translation.
27.16.1 port paepvc delete Command
Syntax: port paepvc delete <slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command removes a PAE PVC.
27.16.2 port paepvc set Command
Syntax: port paepvc set <slot-port-vpi/vci> <profile> <mux> <pvid> <priority> [acname
<acname>] [srvcname <srvcname>] [hellotime <hellotime>] where
<profile>
<mux>
= Name of an ATM profile.
= Encapsulation method (llc or vcmux).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
449
Chapter 27 port Commands
<acname>
<srvname>
= This field is optional. Specify the hostname of a remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators (or BRAS) on the network or that you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator.
= This field is optional. Specify the name of the service that uses this
PVC. This must be a service name that you configure on the remote access concentrator.
This command creates a PPPoA-to-PPPoE PVC to allow communication between the ATM
(CPE) and Ethernet network (BRAS) segments. The PVC is mapped to a PPPoE session that connects to the specified BRAS.
The following example creates a PPPoA-to-PPPoE PVC (
1/33
) for port
1
on the line card in slot
3
. The PVC uses llc
encapsulation and the
DEFVAL
ATM profile with a priority of
1
.
This configuration is for the video
service on the vom
access concentrator. The switch waits until the hello time
timeout before terminating the PPPoE session. ras> port paepvc set 3-1-1/33 DEFVAL llc 2 1 acname vom srvcname video hellotime 10
27.16.3 port paepvc show Command
Syntax: port paepvc show <slot>|<slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command displays the PPPoA-to-PPPoE PVC settings for the specified port and/or slot.
The following example displays the settings on the line card in slot 3. ras> port paepvc show 3 pvc type mux pvid pri htime profile/acname/srvcname
-------------- ------- ----- ------ ---- ----- --------------------------
3-1-1/33 pae llc 2 1 10 DEFVAL/test/example ras>
27.17 port ppvc Commands
Use the port ppvc commands to configure PPVCs and add and remove member PVCs.
27.17.1 port ppvc delete Command
Syntax: port ppvc delete <slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command removes a PPVC. Removing a PPVC also deletes all of the member PVCs.
450
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
The following example removes a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port ppvc delete 7-5-8/35
27.17.2 port ppvc member delete Command
Syntax: port ppvc member delete <slot-port-vpi/vci> <vpi/vci> where
<slot-port-vpi/ vci>
<vpi/vci>
= The slot and port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PPVC.
= The VPI and VCI of the individual PVC that you are removing from the PPVC.
This command removes a PVC from a PPVC.
The following example removes a PVC that uses VPI 8 and VCI 36 from a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port ppvc member delete 7-5-8/35 8/36
27.17.3 port ppvc member set Command
Syntax: port ppvc member set <slot-port-vpi/vci> <vpi/vci> <atmprofile> <level> where
<slot-port-vpi/ vci>
<vpi/vci>
= The slot and port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PPVC.
<atmprofile>
<level>
= The VPI and VCI of the individual PVC that you are adding to the PPVC. The VPI setting can be 0 to 255. The
VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 with a VPI of 0 or 1 to
65535 if the VPI is not 0.
= The name of an ATM profile.
= The priority queue (0~3) to use for this PVC’s traffic. 3 is the highest priority.
This command adds a member PVC to a PPVC. You must create the PPVC before you use this command to add a member.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
451
Chapter 27 port Commands
The following example adds a PVC to a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 on the line card in slot 7. The PVC uses VPI 8 and VCI 36, the DEFVAL ATM profile and priority queue
2. ras> port ppvc member set 7-5-8/35 8/36 DEFVAL 2
27.17.4 port ppvc set Command
Syntax: port ppvc set <slot-port-vpi/vci> <mux> <pvid> <priority> where
= The slot, port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PPVC.
<slot-portvpi/vci>
<mux>
<pvid>
<priority>
= The type of encapsulation: llc
, vcmux
= Set a default VID (1 to 4094) for the channel. The channel can only forward frames with this VLAN ID. The system would drop any frames received from the subscriber that are tagged with another VLAN ID.
Each PVC must have a unique VID since the system forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID.
= Set an IEEE 802.1p default priority (0 to 7) to add to incoming frames without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
This command creates a PPVC.
The following example creates a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 on the line card in slot 7. The PPVC uses llc encapsulation and default VID 25. Any frames received without an
IEEE 802.1p priority tag will be assigned a priority of 3. ras> port ppvc set 7-5-8/35 llc 25 3
27.17.5 port ppvc show Command
Syntax: port ppvc show <slot>|<slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci> [detail] where
<slot-portvpi/vci>
= The slot and port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PPVC.
452
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
<vid>
[detail]
= The VLAN ID. Valid parameter range = [1 – 4094].
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The ports specified in this command must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
= Display the PPVC’s VLAN configuration in addition to the other PPVC settings.
This command displays the runtime configured PPVCs.
The following example displays the PPVCs configured on the DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. It also displays VLAN information. ras> port ppvc show 7-5-8/35 detail pvc type mux pvid pri profile
-------------- ------ ----- ------ ---- --------------------------------
7-5-8/35 prio llc 25 3 member: vpi/vci level profile
--------- ----- --------------------------------
8/36 2 DEFVAL vlans: idx vlanid adv untag
--- -------- -------- --------
1 25 fix untag
2 28 fix untag
27.17.6 port ppvc vlan Command
Syntax: port ppvc vlan <slot-port-vpi/vci> <vid> <registration> <tag> where
= The slot and port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PPVC.
<slot-portvpi/vci>
<vid>
= The VLAN ID. Valid parameter range = [1 – 4094].
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The ports specified in this command must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
453
Chapter 27 port Commands
<registratio n>
<tag>
= The VLAN membership setting.
join
= add the PVC to the VLAN.
leave
= remove the PVC from the VLAN.
= The VLAN tagging setting.
tag
= the specified port(s) accept only incoming Ethernet frames that have a VLAN tag. untag
= the specified port(s) accept only incoming Ethernet frames that do not have a VLAN tag.
This command adds a PPVC to a VLAN or removes a PPVC from a VLAN. It also sets whether the PPVC accepts incoming Ethernet frames with or without a VLAN tag.
The following example adds the PPVC on ADSL port 5 in line card 7 with VPI 8 and VCI 35 to VLAN 28. ras> port ppvc vlan 7-5-8/35 28 join untag
27.18 port pvc Commands
Use the following port pvc commands to configure PVCs (Permanent Virtual Circuits) on the DSL ports.
27.18.1 port pvc delete Command
Syntax: port pvc delete <slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command removes the specified PVC channel.
The following example removes the PVC on DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 with VPI 8 and VCI 35. ras> port pvc delete 7-5-8/35
27.18.2 port pvc mvlan disable Command
Syntax: port pvc mvlan disable <slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command deactivates multicast VLAN on the PVC. No multicast traffic will be sent to this PVC.
27.18.3 port pvc mvlan enable Command
Syntax: port pvc mvlan enable <slot-port-vpi/vci>
454
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
This command enables multicast VLAN on the PVC.
27.18.4 port pvc set Command
Syntax: port pvc set <slot-port-vpi/vci> <profile> <mux> <pvid> <priority> where
<slot-port-vpi/ vci>
<profile>
<mux>
<pvid>
<priority>
= The slot and port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PVC.
= The name of an ATM profile.
= The type of encapsulation: llc
, vcmux
= Set a default VID (1 to 4094) for the channel. The channel can only forward frames with this VLAN ID. The system would drop any frames received from the subscriber that are tagged with another VLAN ID.
Each PVC must have a unique VID since the system forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN
ID.
= Set an IEEE 802.1p default priority (0 to 7) to add to incoming frames without a (IEEE 802.1p) priority tag.
This command creates or modifies a PVC setting.
The following example sets a PVC on DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 with VPI 8, VCI
35, the DEFVAL profile, default VID 2 and priority 3. ras> port pvc set 7-5-8/35 DEFVAL vcmux 2 3
27.18.5 port pvc show Command
Syntax: port pvc show <slot>|<slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci> [detail] where
= The slot and port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PVC.
<slot-portvpi/vci>
[detail]
= Display in depth information about the runtime configured virtual channels.
This command displays the runtime configured virtual channels for the specified DSL port(s).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
455
Chapter 27 port Commands
The following example displays the virtual channels of DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port pvc show 7-5 pvc type mux pvid pri profile
-------------- ------ ----- ------ ---- --------------------------------
7-5-0/33 bridge llc 1 0 DEFVAL
27.18.6 port pvc usratelimit enable Command
Syntax: port pvc usratelimit enable <pvc>
This command activates upstream rate limiting on the PVC. The following example activates upstream rate settings on the PVC (0/33 of port 1 on the line card in slot 5). ras> port pvc usratelimit enable 5-1-0/33
27.18.7 port pvc usratelimit disable Command
Syntax: port pvc usratelimit disable <pvc>
This command deactivates upstream rate limiting on the PVC.
27.18.8 port pvc usratelimit set Command
Syntax: port pvc usratelimit set <pvc> <rate>
This command sets the maximum upstream rate (in Kbps) the PVC is allowed to use. The following example sets the maximum PVC upstream rate to 1000 Kbps on port 1 of the line card in slot 5. ras> port pvc usratelimit enable 5-1-0/33 ras> port pvc usratelimit set 5-1-0/33 1000 ras> port pvc usratelimit show 5-1 pvc en rate
-------------- ---- --------------
5-1-0/33 V 1000(kbps) ras>
27.18.9 port pvc usratelimit show Command
Syntax: port pvc usratelimit show <pvc>
456
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
This command displays upstream rate limiting settings on a PVC. The following example shows the PVC rate settings on port 1 of the line card in slot 5. ras> port pvc usratelimit show 5-1 pvc en rate
-------------- ---- --------------
5-1-0/33 - 1000(kbps) ras>
27.18.10 port pvc vlan Command
Syntax: port pvc vlan <slot-port-vpi/vci> <vid> <registration> <tag> where
= The slot and port(s) and VPI/VCI of the PVC.
<slot-portvpi/vci>
<vid>
<registration>
<tag>
= The VLAN ID. Valid parameter range = [1 – 4094].
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The ports specified in this command must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
= The VLAN membership setting.
join
= add the PVC to the VLAN.
leave
= remove the PVC from the VLAN.
= The VLAN tagging setting.
tag
= the specified port(s) accept only incoming Ethernet frames that have a VLAN tag. untag
= the specified port(s) accept only incoming Ethernet frames that do not have a VLAN tag.
This command adds a PVC to a VLAN or removes a PVC from a VLAN. It also sets whether the PVC sends frames with or without a VLAN tag.
The following example adds the PVC on DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7 with VPI 8 and
VCI 35 to VLAN 23. ras> port pvc vlan 7-5-8/35 23 join untag
27.19 port shdsl Commands
Use the port shdsl commands to configure the subscriber SHDSL ports.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
457
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.19.1 port shdsl alarmprof Command
Syntax: port shdsl alarmprof <slot-port> span|stuc|stur|* <alarmprofile> where span|stuc|stur
|*
= span
= set alarm profile for the whole span This is the entire connection including any SHDSL regenerators that might be located between the STU-C (SHDSL Termination Unit -
Central) and STU-R (SHDSL Termination Unit - Remote) end points. An SHDSL regenerator amplifies the SHDSL signal in order to increase the connection distance.
stuc
= set alarm profile at STU-C (SHDSL Termination
Unit - Central) end point stur
= set alarm profile at STU-R (SHDSL Termination
Unit - Remote) end point
*
= set alarm profile at both STU-C and STU-R
<alarmprofile> = The name of an SHDSL alarm profile.
This command sets the specified SHDSL port(s) or end point(s) to use an alarm profile.
The following example sets SHDSL port 8 on the line card in slot 6 to use the SESalarm alarm profile at both the STU-C and the STU-R. ras> port shdsl alarmprof 6-8 * SESalarm
27.19.2 port shdsl pbo Command
Syntax: port shdsl pbo <slot-port> normal_epl|forced_epl|forced_no_epl <value>
458
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands where normal_epl|for ced_epl|forced
_no_epl
<value>
= normal_epl
= Power backoff with EPL (Estimated Power
Loss). Each end calculates an EPL and uses it in determining a power backoff value for the other end to use. forced_epl
= Forced power backoff with EPL. The STU-
C calculates an EPL and uses it in determining the power backoff values for both ends. This can be used when the
STU-R device does not support EPL.
forced_no_epl
= Forced power backoff without EPL. The
STU-C uses the value you specify in determining the power backoff values for both ends. This can be used when you have prior knowledge about the physical line (loop).
= This sets the 0~31 in dB.
When using nornal_epl
or forced_epl
, this sets the maximum power backoff value.
When using forced_no_epl
, this sets the power backoff value.
This command sets the power backoff feature setting on the specified SHDSL port(s). Power backoff calculates how much power is needed for the connection. This allows the STU-C and
STU-R to use only enough power for the port’s maximum transmission rate (configured in the
SHDSL profile). You can normally just leave the default setting ( normal_epl
), you only need to use this command if the STU-R does not support EPL or you need to configure the port to use a specific power backoff setting.
This example sets SHDSL port 7 on the line card in slot 6 to use 13 dB of power backoff for both downstream and upstream. ras> port shdsl pbo 6-7 forced_no_epl 13
27.19.3 port shdsl pmms Command
Syntax: port shdsl pmms <slot-port> <mode>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
459
Chapter 27 port Commands where
<mode>
= The PMMS (Power Measurement Modulation Session) mode specifies how the target noise margin value is acquired.
normal
= Negotiated target noise margin mode. Each end of the connection determines the target noise margin to be used by the other end for the evaluation of the PMMS results.
forced =
Forced target noise margin mode. The upstream and downstream parameters are set according to the target noise margin value set in the SHDSL profile.
This command sets the PMMS (Power Measurement Modulation Session) mode of the specified SHDSL port(s).
The following example sets SHDSL port 8 on the line card in slot 6 to use the negotiated target noise margin mode. ras> port shdsl pmms 6-8 normal
27.19.4 port shdsl set Command
Syntax: port shdsl set <slot-port> <profile> where
<profile>
= The SHDSL profile that will define the settings of this port.
This command assigns a specific profile to an SHDSL port(s). The profile defines the maximum and minimum transmission rates, the regional setting, the number of wire pairs to be used, whether line-probing is enabled or disabled and the target and worst case noise margins.
The following example sets SHDSL port 8 on the line card in slot 6 to use the gold profile. ras> port shdsl set 6-8 gold
27.20 port show Command
Syntax: port show <slot>|<slot-port>
460
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
This command displays the settings of the specified port(s). An example is shown next. ras> port show 7-5 port 7-5
name :
tel. no :
profile : DEFVAL
alrm prof : DEFVAL
state : enable mode : auto
power mgmt : disable annexl : disable
annexm : disable annexi : disable
power adap. : fix max_us_txpwr: 10.0 dBm
max_ds_txpwr: 10.0 dBm max_rxpower : 10.0 dBm
us_inpmin : 3 ds_inpmin : 3
option_mask : 0x0000 uscarrier : 00000000 00000000
dscarrier (255~32) :
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
dscarrier (512~256) :
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
27.21 port tel Command
Syntax: port show <slot-port> <telephone-no> where
<telephone-no>
= The subscriber’s telephone number.
This command records a subscriber’s telephone number for the specified DSL port(s).
The following example records a telephone number of 123456789 for DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> port tel 7-5 123456789
27.22 Transparent LAN Service (TLS)
Transparent LAN Service (also known as VLAN stacking or Q-in-Q) allows a service provider to distinguish multiple customers VLANs, even those with the same (customer-assigned)
VLAN ID, within its network. Refer to Section 11.8.3 on page 166
for more information.
Use the port tlspvc
commands to configure VLAN stacking settings for the specified
PVC(s).
"
You can NOT configure PPPoA-to-PPPoE and TLS settings on the same PVC.
461
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.22.1 port tlspvc delete Command
Syntax: port tlspvc delete <slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command clears TLS settings for the PVC.
27.22.2 port tlspvc set Command
Syntax: port tlspvc set <slot-port-vpi/vci> <profile> llc|vcmux <vid> <priority> where
<profile> llc|vcmux
<vid>
= Name of an ATM profile.
= Encapsulation method (llc or vcmux).
= The VLAN ID the switch adds to the traffic on the PVC. This is the VLAN ID known in the service provider’s network.
Note: Make sure this VLAN ID is not already used for
MVLAN or PAE.
This command sets the second VLAN tag to add to the packets from the PVC.
The following example adds a VLAN tag (
100
) to the traffic using the
DEFVAL
ATM profile on PVC (
1/33
) on port
2
of the line card in slot
3
. ras> port tlspvc set 3-2-1/33 DEFVAL llc 100 12
27.22.3 port tlspvc show Command
Syntax: port tlspvc show <slot>|<slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command displays the TLS settings for the specified slot/port/PVC. ras> port tlspvc show 3-2 pvc type mux pvid pri profile
-------------- ------- ----- ------ ---- -------------------
3-2-1/33 tls llc 100 1 DEFVAL ras>
27.23 port vdsl Commands
Use the port vdsl commands to configure the subscriber VDSL ports.
462
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.23.1 port vdsl alarmprof Command
Syntax: port vdsl alarmprof <slot-port> <profile>
This command sets the VDSL port(s) to use the specified alarm profile.
27.23.2 port vdsl frametype Command
Syntax: port vdsl frametype <slot-port> <all|tag> where
<all|tag>
= Sets the selected VDSL port(s) to accept VLAN tagged and untagged Ethernet frames or only tagged.
This command sets the acceptable frame type on the VDSL port(s).
27.23.3 port vdsl frequencyplan Command
Syntax: port vdsl frequencyplan <slot-port> <997|998> where
<997|998>
= Selects a band plan to use. For symmetric connections, use
997
.
A
For asymmetric connections, enter
998
.
A. Band plan 997 is not supported at the time of writing.
This command sets the band plan the VDSL port(s) uses.
27.23.4 port vdsl priority Command
Syntax: port vdsl priority <slot-port> <priority>
This command sets the VDSL port(s) VLAN priority (0 - 7).
27.23.5 port vdsl pvid Command
Syntax: port vdsl pvid <slot-port> <vid>
This command sets the port VID on the VDSL port(s).
27.23.6 port vdsl rfiband Command
Syntax: port vdsl rfiband <slot-port> <disable|ansi|etsi|custom>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
463
Chapter 27 port Commands where
<disable|ansi|ets i|custom>
= Enter ansi
or etsi
to use the pre-defined RFI band.
Enter disable
to deactivate this feature.
Enter custom
to use the RFI band settings configured using the port vdsl rficustom command.
Use this command to specify an RFI mode or disable this feature.
27.23.7 port vdsl rficustom Commands
Syntax: port vdsl rficustom disable <index> port vdsl rficustom enable <index> port vdsl rficustom set <index> <start_freq> <stop_freq> port vdsl rficustom show where
<index>
<start_freq>
<stop_freq>
= This is index number (1-8) of the custom RFI entry.
= This is the start of the frequency range in kHz (0~2147483647).
Note:
<start_freq>
cannot be bigger than
<stop_freq>
.
= This is the end of the frequency range in kHz.
Use these commands to configure or display the settings of a custom RFI entry.
An example is show below:
• Creates a custom RFI entry with the frequency between 3500 and 3800 kHz.
• Activate the settings.
• Show the settings. ras> port vdsl rficustom set 1 3500 3800 ras> port vdsl rficustom enable 1 ras> port vdsl rficustom show
index state start_freq stop_freq
------- ------- ------------ -----------
1 V 3500 3800
2 - 0 0
3 - 0 0
4 - 0 0
5 - 0 0
6 - 0 0
7 - 0 0
8 - 0 0 ras>
464
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 27 port Commands
27.23.8 port vdsl set Command
Syntax: port vdsl set <slot-port> <profile> <vdsl_profile> where
<profile>
<vdsl_profile>
= Sets the custom line profile.
= Sets the standard band plan profile (
8a|8b|8c|8d|12a
).
Use this command to set the VDSL line and band plan profiles the port(s) use.
The following example sets port 5 on the VDSL card in slot 4 to use the
DEFVAL
line profile and the standard
8b
band plan profile. ras> port vdsl set 4-1 DEFVAL 8b
27.23.9 port vdsl tls Commands
Syntax: port vdsl tls disable <slot-port> port vdsl tls enable <slot-port> port vdsl tls set <slot-port> <svid> <spriority> where
<svid>
<spriority>
= Sets the service provider ID (from 1 to 4094) to add on frames received.
= Sets the priority level (from 0 to 7) for the service provider’s
VLAN ID.
Use these commands to configure Transparent LAN Service (TLS) settings on the VDSL port(s).
The following shows an example.
• Enables TLS on port 5 on the VDSL line card in slot 4.
• Configures the service provider’s VID to 10 and VLAN priority to 7 (highest priority). ras> port vdsl tls enable 4-5 ras> port vdsl tls set 4-5 10 7
27.23.10 port vdsl upbo Commands
Syntax: port vdsl upbo <slot-port> <on|off>
This command enables or disables Upstream Power Back Off (UPBO) on the VDSL port(s).
UPBO allows the switch to provide better service in a network environment with telephone wiring of varying lengths.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
465
Chapter 27 port Commands
The following example enables UPBO on all ports on VDSL line card in slot 4. ras> port vdsl upbo 4-* on
27.23.11 port vdsl vlan Commands
Syntax: port vdsl vlan <slot-port> <vid> <registration> <tag> where
<vid>
<registration>
<tag>
= Enter a VID (VLAN ID) to add this channel as a member.
This must be the VLAN ID of a VLAN that is already configured. The port that you are configuring must also be set to the fixed status in the VLAN.
= Enter join
to have the port be a member of the specified
VLAN.
Enter leave
to remove the port from the specified VLAN.
tag
to add a tag to all frames transmitted on this port.
Enter untag
to not add tags.
This command sets the port VALN settings on the VDSL port(s).
The following example sets the VDSL port 5 on the line card in slot 4 to join VLAN 5. The port also adds a tag to frames. ras> port vdsl vlan 4-5 5 join tag
466
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
28
profile Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the profile
commands.
28.1 Profiles Overview
Profiles are groups of settings that you can assign to a DSL port(s). This helps simplify and speed up DSL port configuration.
28.2
profile
Commands Summary
The following table lists the profile
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 172 profile Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
profile adsl delete map
<profile>
<profile>
ADSL profiles allow efficient configuration of ADSL port settings.
Removes an unreferenced ADSL port settings profile.
Displays which ADSL ports reference this profile.
M
M
L
467
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
Table 172 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set show
DESCRIPTION
<profile> <usmax-rate> <dsmax-rate>
[fast|delay <usdelay> <dsdelay>][minrate
<us-min-rate>
<ds-min-rate>]
[usmgn <us-maxmgn> <us-min-mgn>
<us-tgtmgn>][dsmgn <dsmax-mgn> <ds-minmgn> <ds-tgtmgn>] [usra fixed|startup|ru ntime <us-us-mgn>
<us-dsmgn>][dsra fixed|startup|ru ntime <ds-us-mgn>
<ds-ds-mgn>]
Creates a profile of ADSL port settings.
“us” is UpStream, “ds” is DownStream us maximum rate = 64~4096 in Kbps ds maximum rate = 64~32000 in Kbps us/ds delay = 1~255 in ms us minimum rate = 32~4096 in Kbps ds minimum rat e= 32~32000 in Kbps max noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB min. noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB target noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB fixed = no rate adaptation startup = rate adaptation at initialization runtime = rate adaptation any time up shift noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB us/ds down shift noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB
[<profile>]
Lists the ADSL configuration profiles or a specific profile’s detailed settings.
alarmadsl delete map
<profile>
<profile>
ADSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of ADSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced ADSL alarm profile.
Displays which ADSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
L
M
L
468
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
Table 172 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set
DESCRIPTION
<profile> atuc
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lols <lols>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [ffr
<ffr>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>]
[fru <fru>] [iru
<iru>] [frd
<frd>] [ird
<ird>] [ift
<ift>] or
<profile> atur
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>] [fru
<fru>][iru
<iru>][frd <frd>]
[ird <ird>]
Creates a profile of ADSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters atuc = near end atur = far end
<lofs> = number of loss of framing seconds, 0~900
<loss> = number of loss of signal seconds, 0~900
<lols> = number of loss of link seconds, 0~900
<lprs> = number of loss of power seconds, 0~900
<ess> = number of error seconds,
0~900
<ffr> = number of failed fast retrains seconds, 0~900
<sesl> = number of severely errored seconds-line, 0~900
<uasl> = number of unavailable seconds-line, 0~900
<fru> = fast rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<iru> = interleave rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<frd> = fast rate down in Kbps,
0~2147483
<ird> = interleave rate down in
Kbps, 0~2147483
<ift> = init failure trap enable, 1enable, 0-disable alarmshdsl show delete map
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the ADSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
SHDSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of SHDSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced SHDSL alarm profile.
Displays which SHDSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
L
M
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
469
Chapter 28 profile Commands
Table 172 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set
DESCRIPTION
<profile> [atten
<atten>] [snrmgn
<snrmgn>] [es
<es>] [ses
<ses>][crc <crc>]
[losws <losws>]
[uas <uas>]
Creates a profile of SHDSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters
<atten> = loop attenuation threshold, 0~127
<snrmgn> = snr margin threshold,
0~15
<es> = number of errored seconds,
0~900
<ses> = severely errored seconds,
0~900
<crc> = the number of CRC anomalies, >=0
<losws> = number of loss of sync word seconds, 0~900
<uas> = number of unavailable seconds, 0~900 alarmadsl show delete map
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the SHDSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
ADSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of ADSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced ADSL alarm profile.
Displays which ADSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
L
M
L
470
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
Table 172 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
set
DESCRIPTION
<profile> atuc
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lols <lols>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [ffr
<ffr>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>]
[fru <fru>] [iru
<iru>] [frd
<frd>] [ird
<ird>] [ift
<ift>] or
<profile> atur
[lofs <lofs>]
[loss <loss>]
[lprs <lprs>]
[ess <ess>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl
<uasl>] [fru
<fru>][iru
<iru>][frd <frd>]
[ird <ird>]
Creates a profile of ADSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters atuc = near end atur = far end
<lofs> = number of loss of framing seconds, 0~900
<loss> = number of loss of signal seconds, 0~900
<lols> = number of loss of link seconds, 0~900
<lprs> = number of loss of power seconds, 0~900
<ess> = number of error seconds,
0~900
<ffr> = number of failed fast retrains seconds, 0~900
<sesl> = number of severely errored seconds-line, 0~900
<uasl> = number of unavailable seconds-line, 0~900
<fru> = fast rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<iru> = interleave rate up in Kbps,
0~2147483
<frd> = fast rate down in Kbps,
0~2147483
<ird> = interleave rate down in
Kbps, 0~2147483
<ift> = init failure trap enable, 1enable, 0-disable alarmvdsl show delete map
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the ADSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
VDSL alarm profiles allow efficient configuration of VDSL alarm settings.
Removes an unreferenced VDSL alarm profile.
Displays which VDSL ports reference this alarm profile.
P
M
L
M
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
471
Chapter 28 profile Commands
Table 172 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
atm igmpfilter set show delete map set show delete
<profile> [lofs
<lofs>] [loss
<loss>] [lols
<lols>] [lprs
<lprs>]
[ess <ess>]
[sesl <sesl>]
[uasl <uasl>]
[ift <ift>]
[<profile>]
<igmpfilter>
DESCRIPTION
Creates a profile of VDSL alarm settings.
<profile> = profile name, up to 31 characters
<lofs> = number of loss of framing seconds, 0~900
<loss> = number of loss of signal seconds, 0~900
<lols> = number of loss of link seconds, 0~900
<lprs> = number of loss of power seconds, 0~900
<ess> = number of error seconds,
0~900
<sesl> = number of severely errored seconds-line, 0~900
<uasl> = number of unavailable seconds-line, 0~900
<ift> = init failure trap enable, 1enable, 0-disable
[<profile>]
<profile>
<profile>
Lists the VDSL alarm profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
ATM traffic profiles allow efficient configuration of ATM traffic settings.
Removes an unreferenced ATM traffic profile.
Displays which ports reference this
ATM profile.
<atmprofile> cbr|ubr <pcr>
<cdvt> or
<atmprofile> rtvbr|nrt-vbr <pcr>
<cdvt> <scr> <bt>
Creates a profile of ATM traffic settings.
cbr = constant cell rate ubr = unspecified cell rate rt-vbr = realtime variable bit rate nrt-vbr = non-realtime variable bit rate
<pcr> = peak cell rate, 150~300000
<scr> = sustainable cell rate,
150~300000
<cdvt> = cell delay variation tolerance, 0~255
<bt> = burst tolerance, 0~255
Note: <pcr>, <cdvt>, <scr> and <bt> can be inputted '*' as default value
Note: use “*” to set <pcr>, <cdvt>,
<scr> or <bt> to the default value.
Lists the ATM traffic profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups.
Removes an unreferenced IGMP filter profile.
P
M
L
M
L
M
L
M
472
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
Table 172 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
map set show
<igmpfilter>
DESCRIPTION
Displays which ports reference this
IGMP filter profile.
<igmpfilter>
<index> <startip>
<endip>
[igmpprofile]
Creates an IGMP filter profile of ATM traffic settings.
<igmpfilter> = profile name
<index> = index of address, 1~16
<startip> = start of address range
<endip> = end of address range
Lists the IGMP filter profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
profsvr shdsl show mode clientlist serverset sync delete map set show client|server set <ip> <type> delete <ip> show
<ip>
<profile>
<profile>
<profile> <minrate> <max-rate>
[annexa|annexb
2wire|4wire|mpai r4
[lp_off | lp_on_cur
[curr_margin] | lp_on_wc
[worst_margin]]]
[<profile>]
M
L
Displays the current profile server setting.
L
Sets the profile server operation mode. M
Adds an entry to the profile server client list.
M
M Removes an entry from the profile server client list.
Displays the profile server client list.
L
M Sets the target profile server IP address for synchronization.
Synchronize with the profile server.
M
SHDSL profiles allow efficient configuration of SHDSL port settings.
Removes an unreferenced SHDSL port settings profile.
Displays which SHDSL ports reference this profile.
M
L
M Creates a profile of SHDSL port settings.
<min-rate> = minimum rate,
192~4096 in Kbps
<max-rate> = maximum rate,
192~4096 in Kbps annexa|annexb = regional setting,
'annexb' by default
<wire-pair> = the number of wire pairs to be used, '2wire' by default lp_off = disable line probe, default line probe mode lp_on_cur = enable line probe with current target snr margin lp_on_wc = enable line probe with worst case target snr margin
<curr-margin> = current condition target snr margin, -10~21 in dB
<worst-margin> = worse case noise margin, -10~21 in dB
Lists the SHDSL port setting profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
L
P
L
MSC1000G User’s Guide
473
474
Chapter 28 profile Commands
Table 172 profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
vdsl
DESCRIPTION
VDSL profiles allow efficient configuration of VDSL port settings.
P
delete <profile> map <profile>
Removes a VDSL port settings profile.
M
Displays which VDSL ports reference this profile.
L max-rate> <ds-
Creates a VDSL line profile. “us” is
UpStream, “ds” is DownStream max-rate>
[fast|delay <usdelay> <dsdelay>] us maximum rate = 64~45440 in Kbps ds maximum rate = 64~100032 in
Kbps us/ds delay = 1~255 in ms
[minrate <us-minrate> <ds-minus minimum rate = 64~4096 in Kbps ds minimum rat e= 64~32000 in Kbps rate>]
[usmgn <us-maxmax noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB min. noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB mgn> <us-min-mgn>
<us-tgt-mgn>] target noise margin = 0~310 in 0.1 dB
[dsmgn <ds-maxmgn> <ds-min-mgn>
<ds-tgt-mgn>] show [<profile>]
Lists the VDSL port setting profiles or a specific profile’s settings.
M
L
28.3 profile acl Commands
An ACL (Access Control Logic) profile allows the system to classify and perform actions on the upstream traffic.
28.3.1 profile acl delete Command
Syntax: profile acl delete <profile>
This command removes the specified ACL profile.
"
You cannot remove the ACL profile(s) that is currently in use.
28.3.2 profile acl map Command
Syntax: profile acl map <profile>
This command displays the DSL port(s) to which the specified ACL profile is applied.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
The following example displays the port mapping table for the example
ACL profile. ras> profile acl map example
port pvc
----- ------------------------------------------------------
3- 1 0-33
28.3.3 profile acl set Command
Syntax: profile acl set <rule> <action>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
475
Chapter 28 profile Commands where
<rule> = The rule that classifies traffic flows. Ordering of the criteria is important. The system first compares the layer 2 fields first, the layer 3 fields and then the protocol type.
The following lists the set of criteria you can configure.
<action>
• ether <etype> vlan <vid>
• ether <etype> srcmac <mac>
• ether <etype> dstmac <mac>
• vlan < vid > srcmac <mac>
• vlan < vid > dstmac <mac>
• srcmac < mac > dstmac <mac>
• vlan < vid > pri <priority>
• ether <etype>
• vlan <vid>
• srcmac <mac>
• dstmac <mac>
• pri <priority>
• protocol <protocol>
• [srcip <ip>/<mask>[stip <ip>/<mask>[tos
<tos>[srcport <port>[dstport <port>]]]]] where
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• ethper <etype> = Ethernet type (0~65535 vlan <vid> = VLAN ID (1~4094). srmac <mac> = Source MAC address. drmac <mac> = Destination MAC address.
).
priority < priority > = Priority (0 ~ 7) protocol < protocol > = Protocol type: tcp , udp , ospf , igmp , ip , gre , icmp or user specified. dstip <ip>/<mask> = Destination IP address and subnet mask. srcip <ip>/<mask> = Source IP address and subnet mask. tos <stos> <etos> = Sets the ToS (Type of Service) range between 0 and 255. dstport <sport> <eport> = Destination port range. srcport <sport> <eport> = Source port range.
= The action(s) to perform on the classified packets. The following lists the actions you can set.
•
•
• rate <rate > = Sets the transmission rate (1~65535 in kbps) for the matched traffic. rvlan <rvlan> = Replaces the VLAN ID with this VLAN ID
(1~4094). rpri <rpri>|deny = Replaces the priority with this priority
(0 ~7) of the matched packets or drops ( deny ) the packets.
This command configures an ACL rule to classify the upstream traffic and perform action(s) on the classified traffic.
The following creates an ACL rule example named test
for traffic from VLAN 10 with a priority level of 2. This rule limits the rate on the classified traffic to 1000 kbps and changes the priority level to 7. ras> profile acl set test vlan 10 priority 2 rate 1000 rpri 7
476
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.3.3.1 Configuration Guidelines
• You can apply one classifier for a protocol on a port’s PVC.
• You cannot create a classifier that contains matching criteria for layer 2 and layer 3 fields.
For example profile acl set test protocol tcp vlan 15 deny is not allowed as protocol type and VLAN do not belong to the same network layer.
• Each type of criteria can only be used once in a classifier. For example, profile acl set test protocol tcp protocol udp deny is not allowed. For this example, you need to create a separate classifier for each protocol and apply them to the same
PVC(s).
28.3.4 profile acl show Command
Syntax: profile acl show [<profile>]
This command displays the name(s) of the profile(s) you have configured. ras> profile acl show acl profile(s):
--------------
1. example ras>
28.4 profile adsl Commands
Use the profile adsl
commands to configure ADSL profiles.
28.4.1 profile adsl set Command
Syntax: profile adsl set <profile> <us-max-rate> <ds-max-rate>
[fast|delay <us-delay> <ds-delay>]
[minrate <us-min-rate> <ds-min-rate>]
[usmgn <us-max-mgn> <us-min-mgn> <us-tgt-mgn>]
[dsmgn <ds-max-mgn> <ds-min-mgn> <ds-tgt-mgn>]
[usra fixed|startup|runtime <us-us-mgn> <us-ds-mgn>]
[dsra fixed|startup|runtime <ds-us-mgn> <ds-ds-mgn>] where
<profile> = The descriptive name for the profile.
<us-max-rate>
= The maximum ADSL upstream transmission rate
, 64~4096 in
Kbps.
The upstream rate must be less than or equal to the downstream rate.
<ds-max-rate>
= The maximum ADSL downstream transmission rate,
64~32000 in Kbps.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
477
Chapter 28 profile Commands
[fast|delay
<us-delay>
<ds-delay>]
[minrate <usmin-rate> <dsmin-rate>]
[usmgn <usmax-mgn> <usmin-mgn> <ustgt-mgn>]
[dsmgn <dsmax-mgn> <dsmin-mgn> <dstgt-mgn>] usra
= The latency mode. With interleave, you must also define the upstream and downstream delay (1-255 ms). It is recommended that you configure the same delay for both upstream and downstream.
= The minimum ADSL upstream transmission rate (
32~4096
Kbps
) and the minimum ADSL downstream transmission rate
(
32~32000 Kbps
).
= The maximum, minimum and target acceptable ADSL upstream signal to noise margins (
0~310 in 0.1 dB measurements).
= The maximum, minimum and target acceptable ADSL downstream signal to noise margins (
0~310 in 0.1 dB measurements).
dsra
<us-us-mgn>
<us-ds-mgn>
<ds-us-mgn>
<ds-ds-mgn>
= The upstream rate adaptation setting. fixed
= no rate adaptation startup
= rate adaptation at initialization runtime
= rate adaptation any time
= The downstream rate adaptation setting.
= The upstream up shift noise margin (0~310 in 0.1 dB).
= The upstream down shift noise margin (0~310 in 0.1 dB).
= The downstream up shift noise margin (0~310 in 0.1 dB).
= The downstream down shift noise margin (0~310 in 0.1 dB).
The profile is a list of ADSL line configuration settings. After you create an ADSL profile, you can assign it to any of the ADSL ports on any of the ADSL line cards.
Note that the default value will be used for any of the above fields that are omitted.
The ADSL up/down shift noise margins define the threshold that triggers rate adaptation. For example:
The target SNR is 6, and the up/down shift noise margins are 9/3
If the signal becomes better and the SNR is higher than 9, rate adaptation is triggered and the line rate becomes higher
If the signal becomes bad and the SNR is lower then 3, rate adaptation is triggered and the line rate becomes lower.
The following example creates a premium profile (named gold) for providing subscribers with very high connection speeds and no interleave delay. It uses the following settings.
• The maximum upstream rate is set to 2048 Kbps.
• The maximum downstream rate is set to 16000 Kbps.
• No interleave delay.
• The minimum upstream is set to 1024 Kbps.
478
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
• The minimum downstream is set to 3072 Kbps.
• The maximum, minimum and target acceptable ADSL upstream signal to noise margins are set to 12, 0 and 6 dB respectively.
• The maximum, minimum and target acceptable ADSL downstream signal to noise margins are also set to 12, 0 and 6 dB respectively.
• Upstream and downstream rate adaptation are both set to operate whenever the link is up.
• The upstream up/down shift noise margins are set to 9/3 dB.
• The downstream up/down shift noise margins are set to 9/3 dB. ras> profile adsl set gold 2048 16000 fast minrate 1024 3072 usmgn 120 0 60 dsmgn 120 0 60 usra runtime 90 30 dsra runtime 90 30
This next example creates a similar premium profile (named goldi), except it sets an interleave delay of 16 ms for both upstream and downstream traffic. ras> profile adsl set gold 2048 16000 delay 16 16 minrate 1024 3072 usmgn 120
0 60 dsmgn 120 0 60 usra runtime 90 30 dsra runtime 90 30
28.4.2 profile adsl map Command
Syntax: profile adsl map <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of the profile.
This command displays which ADSL ports reference a specific profile.
The following example displays which ADSL ports use the gold profile. ras> profile adsl map gold
28.4.3 profile adsl delete Command
Syntax: profile adsl delete <profile> where
<profile>
= A profile name.
This command allows you to delete an individual ADSL profile by its name. You cannot delete a profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports in the MSC1000G. Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that are using the profile that you want to delete, and then you can delete the profile.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
479
Chapter 28 profile Commands
The following example deletes the gold ADSL profile. ras> adsl profile delete gold
28.4.4 profile adsl show Command
Syntax: profile adsl show [<profile>] where
<profile>
= A profile name.
This command displays the details of the specified ADSL profile or lists all of the ADSL profiles if you do not specify one.
The following example displays the ADSL profile named gold. ras> profile adsl show gold adsl profile: gold
upstream downstream
-------- ----------
max rate (Kbps): 2048 16000
min rate (Kbps): 1024 3072
latency delay (ms): fast fast
max margin (dB): 12.0 12.0
min margin (dB): 0.0 0.0
target margin (dB): 6.0 6.0
sra mode : runtime runtime
up shift mgn (dB): 9.0 9.0
down shift mgn (dB): 3.0 3.0
28.5 profile alarmadsl Commands
Configure alarmadsl profiles to set alarm settings and thresholds for the ADSL ports.
28.5.1 profile alarmadsl show Command
Syntax: profile alarmadsl show [<profile>] where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command displays the details of the specified alarm ADSL profile or lists all of the alarm
ADSL profiles if you do not specify one.
480
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
The following example displays the default alarm ADSL profile (DEFVAL). ras> profile alarmadsl show DEFVAL adsl alarm profile : DEFVAL
atuc atur
---------- ----------
15MinLofs(lofs) (sec): 0 0
15MinLoss(loss) (sec): 0 0
15MinLols(lols) (sec): 0 -
15MinLprs(lprs) (sec): 0 0
15MinESs(ess) (sec): 0 0
15MinFailedFastR(ffr) (sec): 0 -
15MinSesL(sesl) (sec): 0 0
15MinUasL(uasl) (sec): 0 0
FastRateUp(fru) (kbps): 0 0
InterleaveRateUp(iru) (kbps): 0 0
FastRateDown(frd) (kbps): 0 0
InterleaveRateDown(ird) (kbps): 0 0
InitFailureTrap(ift) : - ras>
28.5.2 profile alarmadsl set Command
Syntax: profile alarmadsl set <profile> atuc [lofs <lofs>] [loss <loss>] [lols
<lols>][lprs <lprs>] [ess <ess>] [ffr <ffr>] [sesl <sesl>] [uasl <uasl>]
[fru <fru>] [iru <iru>] [frd <frd>] [ird <ird>] [ift <ift>] or <profile> atur [lofs <lofs>] [loss <loss>] [lprs <lprs>][ess <ess>] [sesl
<sesl>] [uasl <uasl>] [fru <fru>][iru <iru>][frd <frd>] [ird <ird>] where
<profile> atuc atur
<lofs>
<loss>
<lols>
<lprs>
<ess>
= A name for the alarm profile (up to 31 English keyboard characters).
= Downstream. These parameters are for the connection (or traffic) going from the IES-5000 to the subscriber’s device.
= Upstream. These parameters are for the connection (or traffic) coming from the subscriber’s device to the IES-5000.
= The number of Loss Of Frame Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of Loss Of Signal Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of Loss Of Link Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The Number of Loss of PoweR seconds (0~900) permitted to occur
(on the ATUR) within 15 minutes.
= The number of Errored SecondS (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
481
Chapter 28 profile Commands
<ffr>
<sesl>
<uasl>
<fru>
<iru>
<frd>
<ird>
<ift>
= The number of Failed Fast Retrain seco nds
(0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of Severely Errored Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of UnAvailable Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= A rate in kilobits per second (Kbps). If a fast mode connection’s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
= A rate in kilobits per second (Kbps). If an interleave mode connection’s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
= A rate in kilobits per second (Kbps). If a fast mode connection’s downstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
= A rate in kilobits per second (Kbps). If an interleave mode connection’s downstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
= “1” sets the profile to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap. “0” sets the profile to not trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap.
The alarmprofile set
command configures ADSL port alarm thresholds. The MSC1000G sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded.
Configure alarmadsl
profiles first and then use the port adsl alarmprof
command to use them with specific ADSL ports.
The following example sets an alarm profile named SESalarm that has the MSC1000G send an alarm trap and generate a syslog whenever the atuc connection (from the IES-5000 to the subscriber) has more than 3 severely errored seconds within a 15 minute period. ras> profile alarmadsl set SESalarm atuc ses 3
28.5.3 profile alarmadsl delete Command
Syntax: profile alarmadsl delete <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command allows you to delete an individual ADSL alarm profile by its name. You cannot delete the DEFVAL alarm profile.
482
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
The following example deletes the SESalarm alarm profile. ras> profile alarmadsl delete SESalarm
28.5.4 profile alarmadsl map Command
Syntax: profile alarmadsl map <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command displays which ADSL ports are set to use the specified alarmadsl profile.
The following example displays which ADSL ports use the SESalarm alarmadsl profile. ras> profile alarmadsl map SESalarm
28.6 profile alarmshdsl Commands
Configure alarmshdsl profiles to set alarm settings and thresholds for the SHDSL ports.
28.6.1 profile alarmshdsl show Command
Syntax: profile alarmshdsl show [<profile>] where
<profile>
= A profile name.
This command displays the details of the specified alarm SHDSL profile or lists all of the alarm SHDSL profiles if you do not specify one.
The following example displays the default alarm SHDSL profile (DEFVAL).
ras> profile alarmshdsl show DEFVAL shdsl alarm profile : DEFVAL
loop attenuation(atten) (dB): 0
snr margin(snrmgn) (dB): 0
es (sec): 0
ses (sec): 0
crc anomalies(crc) : 0
losws (sec): 0
uas (sec): 0 ras>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
483
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.6.2 profile alarmshdsl set Command
Syntax:
<profile> [atten <atten>] [snrmgn <snrmgn>] [es <es>] [ses <ses>][crc <crc>]
[losws <losws>] [uas <uas>] where
<profile>
<atten>
<snrmgn>
<ess>
<ses>
<crc>
<losws>
<uas>
= A name for the alarm profile (up to 31 English keyboard characters).
= The permitted loop attenuation of a port, 0~127
= The permitted signal to noise ratio margin, 0~15.
= The number of Errored SecondS (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of Severely Errored Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
The number of Cyclic Redundancy Checking anomalies that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
The number of Loss Of Sync Word Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of UnAvailable Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This command configures SHDSL port alarm thresholds. The MSC1000G sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded.
Configure alarmshdsl
profiles first and then use the port shdsl alarmprof
command to to use them with specific SHDSL ports.
The following example sets an alarm profile named SESalarm that has the MSC1000G send an alarm trap and generate a syslog whenever the connection’s number of severely errored seconds exceeds three within a 15 minute period. ras> profile alarmshdsl set SESalarm ses 3
28.6.3 profile alarmshdsl delete Command
Syntax: profile alarmshdsl delete <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command allows you to delete an individual SHDSL alarm profile by its name. You cannot delete the DEFVAL alarm profile.
484
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
The following example deletes the SESalarm alarm profile. ras> profile alarmshdsl delete SESalarm
28.6.4 profile alarmshdsl map Command
Syntax: profile alarmshdsl map <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command displays which SHDSL ports are set to use the specified alarmshdsl profile.
The following example displays which SHDSL ports use the SESalarm alarmshdsl profile. ras> profile alarmshdsl map SESalarm
28.7 profile alarmvdsl Commands
Configure alarmadsl profiles to set alarm settings and thresholds for the VDSL ports.
28.7.1 profile alarmvdsl show Command
Syntax: profile alarmvdsl show [<profile>] where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command displays the details of the specified alarm VDSL profile or lists all of the alarm
VDSL profiles if you do not specify one.
The following example displays the default alarm VDSL profile (DEFVAL). ras> profile alarmvdsl show DEFVAL vdsl alarm profile : DEFVAL
initFailure(ift) : -
15MinLofs(lofs) (sec): 0
15MinLoss(loss) (sec): 0
15MinLols(lols) (sec): 0
15MinLprs(lprs) (sec): 0
15MinESs(ess) (sec): 0
15MinSesL(sesl) (sec): 0
15MinUasL(uasl) (sec): 0 ras>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
485
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.7.2 profile alarmvdsl set Command
Syntax: profile alarmadsl set <profile> [lofs <lofs>] [loss <loss>] [lols <lols>]
[lprs <lprs>] [ess <ess>] [sesl <sesl>] [uasl <uasl>] [ift <ift>] where
<profile>
<lofs>
<loss>
<lols>
<lprs>
<ess>
<sesl>
<uasl>
<iru>
<ift>
= A name for the alarm profile (up to 31 English keyboard characters).
= The number of Loss Of Frame Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of Loss Of Signal Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of Loss Of Link Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The Number of Loss of PoweR seconds (0~900) permitted to occur (on the ATUR) within 15 minutes.
= The number of Errored SecondS (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of Severely Errored Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= The number of UnAvailable Seconds (0~900) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
= A rate in kilobits per second (Kbps). If an interleave mode connection’s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number, then a trap is sent.
= “1” sets the profile to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap. “0” sets the profile to not trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap.
The alarmprofile set
command configures VDSL port alarm thresholds. The MSC1000G sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded.
Configure alarmvdsl
profiles first and then use the port vdsl alarmprof
command to use them with specific VDSL ports.
The following example sets an alarm profile named SESalarm that has the MSC1000G send an alarm trap and generate a syslog whenever the connection (from the IES-5000 to the subscriber) has more than 3 severely errored seconds within a 15-minute period. ras> profile alarmvdsl set SESalarm sesl 3
486
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.7.3 profile alarmvdsl delete Command
Syntax: profile alarmvdsl delete <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command allows you to delete an individual VDSL alarm profile by its name. You cannot delete the DEFVAL alarm profile.
The following example deletes the SESalarm alarm profile. ras> profile alarmvdsl delete SESalarm
28.7.4 profile alarmvdsl map Command
Syntax: profile alarmvdsl map <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of an alarm profile.
This command displays which VDSL ports are set to use the specified alarmadsl profile.
The following example displays which VDSL ports use the SESalarm alarmadsl profile. ras> profile alarmvdsl map SESalarm slot side port
---- ---- ------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
2 - ------------------------------------------------
3 - ------------------------------------------------
4 - ------------------------------------------------
5 - -----------------------------------------------ras>
28.8 profile atm Commands
Use these commands to configure ATM traffic settings.
28.8.1 profile atm show Command
Syntax: profile atm show [<profile>]
MSC1000G User’s Guide
487
Chapter 28 profile Commands where
<profile>
= A profile name.
This command displays the details of the specified ATM profile or lists all of the ATM profiles if you do not specify one.
The following example displays the DEFVAL ATM profile.
ras> profile atm show DEFVAL atm profile: DEFVAL
traffic class: ubr
pcr : 300000
cdvt : 0 ras>
28.8.2 profile atm set Command
Syntax: profile atm set <atmprofile> cbr|ubr <pcr> <cdvt> or profile atm set <atmprofile> rt-vbr|nrt-vbr <pcr> <cdvt> <scr> <bt> where
<atmprofile>
<ubr|cbr>
<pcr>
[cdvt] rt-vbr)|nrtvbr
<scr>
<bt>
= The name of the ATM profile (up to 31 English keyboard characters). You cannot change the DEFVAL profile.
= The ubr (unspecified bit rate) or cbr (constant bit rate) ATM traffic class.
= Peak Cell Rate (
150~300000
), the maximum rate (cells per second) at which the sender can send cells. * sets the default value.
= Cell Delay Variation Tolerance is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell’s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay (number of cells). 0 to 255 cells or * for the default value.
= The Real-Time Variable Bit Rate (vbr) or Non Real-Time
Variable Bit Rate (nrt-vbr) Variable Bit Rate ATM traffic class.
= The Sustainable Cell Rate (150~300000) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted (cells per second). SCR applies with the vbr traffic class. * sets the default value.
= Burst Tolerance this is the maximum number of cells
(0~255) that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards. BT applies with the vbr traffic class. * sets the default value.
488
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
This command creates a profile of ATM traffic settings.
After you create an ATM profile, you can use it with the port ppvc set
or port pvc set command to assign it to a virtual circuit.
The following example creates an ATM profile named gold. It uses constant bit rate and has the maximum rate (peak cell rate) set to 300,000 cells per second. The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell’s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay (CDVT) is set to
5 cells.
ras> profile atm set gold cbr 300000 5
The following example creates an ATM profile named silver. It uses real-time variable bit rate and has the maximum rate (peak cell rate) set to 250,000 cells per second. The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell’s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay
(CDVT) is set to 5 cells. The average cell rate that can be transmitted (SCR) is set to 100,000 cells per second. The maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards (BT) is set to 200. ras> profile atm set silver rt-vbr 250000 5 100000 200
The following example creates an ATM profile named economy. It uses unspecified bit rate and has the maximum rate (peak cell rate) set to 10,000 cells per second. The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell’s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay
(CDVT) is set to 100 cells. ras> profile atm set economy ubr 10000 100
28.8.3 profile atm delete Command
Syntax: profile atm delete <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of a profile.
This command allows you to delete an individual ATM profile by its name. You cannot delete the DEFVAL profile.
You cannot delete an ATM profile that is assigned to any of the PVCs or PPVCs. Assign a different profile to any PVCs or PPVCs that are using the profile that you want to delete, and then you can delete the profile.
The following example deletes the silver ATM profile. ras> profile atm delete silver
MSC1000G User’s Guide
489
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.8.4 profile atm map Command
Syntax: profile atm map <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of a profile.
This command displays which PVCs or PPVCs are set to use the specified ATM profile.
The following example displays which PVCs or PPVCs use the silver profile. ras> profile atm map silver
28.9 Profile Server
The profile server feature manages profiles on multiple IES-5000’s. You can configure profiles on one IES-5000 that you set to server mode. When you want to configure another IES-5000, you can set it to client mode to get the profile settings from (synchronize with) the IES-5000 in server mode. If you change the profile settings on the IES-5000 in server mode, you can have it synchronize the profile settings on the clients to match.
28.10 profile profsvr Commands
Use these commands to configure the profile server feature settings.
28.10.1 profile profsvr show Command
Syntax: profile profsvr show
This command displays the current profile server setting. ras> profile profsvr show mode :server mode no Client Ip type
---- --------------- ------
01 1.2.3.4 0
28.10.2 profile profsvr mode Command
Syntax: profile profsvr mode client|server
This command sets the profile server operation mode. ras> profile profsvr mode server
490
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.10.3 profile profsvr clientlist set Command
Syntax: profile profsvr clientlist set <ip> <type> where
<type>
= A profile client IES-5000 may have unused profiles on it
(profiles that are not mapped to any ports).
Use
0
to leave these unused profiles on the client IES-5000 when synchronizing the profiles.
Use
1
to delete these unused profiles from the client IES-
5000 when synchronizing the profiles.
This command adds an entry to the profile server client list. When the IES-5000 is in server mode, use this command to add entries to the list of client IES-5000’s.
The following example sets a profile server client entry for an IES-5000 at IP address 1.2.3.4.
If there are any unused profiles on this client during the synchronization process, they will be left on the client. ras> profile profsvr clientlist set 1.2.3.4 0
28.10.4 profile profsvr clientlist delete Command
Syntax: profile profsvr clientlist delete <ip>
This command removes an entry from the profile server client list.
The following example removes a profile server client entry for an IES-5000 at IP address
1.2.3.4. ras> profile profsvr clientlist delete 1.2.3.4
28.10.5 profile profsvr clientlist show Command
Syntax: profile profsvr clientlist show <ip>
This command displays the profile server client list. ras> profile profsvr clientlist show no Client Ip type
---- --------------- ------
01 1.2.3.4 0
02 1.2.3.5 0
MSC1000G User’s Guide
491
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.10.6 profile profsvr serverset Command
Syntax: profile profsvr serverset <ip>
This command sets the target profile server IP address for synchronization. When the IES-
5000 is in client mode, use this command to specify the IP address of the IES-5000 in server mode.
The following example sets an IP address of 5.6.7.8 to use in synchronizing profile settings. ras> profile profsvr serverset 5.6.7.8
28.10.7 profile profsvr sync Command
Syntax: profile profsvr sync
This command has the IES-5000 synchronize it’s profile settings. If the IES-5000 is in client mode, it will attempt to get profile settings from the IES-5000 in server mode. If the IES-5000 is in server mode, it will send its profile settings to the IES-5000’s in the profile server client list.
28.11 profile shdsl Commands
Use the
profile shdsl
commands to configure SHDSL profiles.
28.11.1 profile shdsl set Command
Syntax: profile shdsl set <profile> <min-rate> <max-rate>
[annexa|annexb 2wire|4wire|mpair4
[lp_off | lp_on_cur [curr_margin] | lp_on_wc [worst_margin]]] where
<profile> = The descriptive name for the profile.
<min-rate>
= The minimum transmission rate in Kbps. (192~4096)
<max-rate>
= The maximum transmission rate in Kbps. (192~4096) annexa|annexb
= The region setting, annexb is the default.
annexa
= DSL over POTS.
annexb
= DSL over ISDN.
492
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
2wire|4wire|mp air4 lp_off lp_on_cur lp_on_wc
= The wire pair number.
2wire
= a normal connection using a single SHDSL port’s two wires, this is the default.
4wire
= a 4-wire n-wire group (two SHDSL ports grouped together).
mpair4
= an 8-wire n-wire group (four SHDSL ports grouped together).
= Disable line probe.
The SHDSL line card and subscriber modem use line probes to determine the best possible transmission rate. This is used in rate adaptation. This is the default line probe mode.
If you disable line probe, the system skips the rate adaptation phase to shorten connection set up time.
= Enable line probe with current target Signal to Noise Ratio margin.
= Enable line probe with worst case target Signal to Noise
Ratio margin.
<curr-margin> = The current condition target Signal to Noise Ratio margin, -
10 ~ 21 in dB. You only configure this if you enable line probing using the current target Signal to Noise Ratio margin.
<worst-margin> = The worst case Signal to Noise Ratio margin, -10 ~ 21 in dB.
You only configure this if you enable line probing using the worst case target Signal to Noise Ratio margin.
The profile is a table that contains information on SHDSL line configuration. Each entry in this table reflects a parameter defined by a manager, which can be used to configure the shdsl line. After you create an SHDSL profile, assign it to SHDSL ports on an SHDSL line card.
You must specify at least the profile’s name and minimum and maximum rates. The default value will be used for any of the other fields that you omit.
The minimum transmission rate must be less than or equal to the maximum transmission rate.
When using 4 or 8-wire groups, you must apply the profile to consecutive ports. A profile for a
4-wire group can be used with ports 1,2 or 3,4 or 5,6 and so forth (the first two ports, the second two ports, the third two ports and so on). You cannot use a 4-wire group with ports 2,3 or 4,5. A profile for an 8-wire group can be used with ports 1,2,3,4 or 5,6,7,8 or 9,10,11,12 and so forth (the first four ports, the second four ports, the third four ports and so on). You cannot use an 8-wire group with ports 2,3,4,5 or 4,5,6,7.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
493
Chapter 28 profile Commands
The following example creates a premium profile (named gold) for providing subscribers with very high connection speeds. The minimum transmission rate is 2112 Kbps and the maximum transmission rate is 4096. It sets two ports to function as a 4-wire group. It uses Annex A (DSL over POTS). It turns on line probes and has them use the current condition target signal to noise ratio margin which it sets to 5 db.
ras> profile shdsl set gold 2112 4096 annexa 4wire lp_on_cur 5
28.11.2 profile shdsl map Command
Syntax: profile shdsl map <profile> where
<profile>
= The name of the profile.
This command displays which SHDSL ports reference a specific profile.
The following example displays which SHDSL ports use the gold profile. ras> profile shdsl map gold
28.11.3 profile shdsl delete Command
Syntax: profile shdsl delete <profile> where
<profile>
= A profile name.
This command allows you to delete an individual shdsl profile by its name. You cannot delete a profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports in the MSC1000G. Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that are using the profile that you want to delete, and then you can delete the profile.
The following example deletes the gold SHDSL profile.
ras> profile shdsl delete gold
28.11.4 profile shdsl show Command
Syntax: profile shdsl show [<profile>] where
<profile>
= A profile name.
494
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
This command displays the details of the specified SHDSL profile or lists all of the SHDSL profiles if you do not specify one.
The following example displays the SHDSL profile named gold.
ras> profile shdsl show gold shdsl profile: gold
max rate (Kbps): 4096
min rate (Kbps): 2112
annex mode : annexa
wire pair : 4wire
line probe : enable with current target SNR margin
curr margin (dB): 5 ras>
28.12 profile vdsl commands
Use the
profile shdsl
commands to configure VDSL profiles.
28.12.1 profile vdsl delete command
Syntax: profile vdsl delete <profile> where
<profile>
= A profile name.
This command allows you to delete an individual shdsl profile by its name. You cannot delete a profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports in the MSC1000G. Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that are using the profile that you want to delete, and then you can delete the profile.
The following example deletes the standard
VDSL profile.
ras> profile vdsl delete standard
28.12.2 profile vdsl map command
Syntax: profile vdsl map <profile>
This command displays which VDSL ports reference a specific profile.
The following example displays which VDSL ports use the standard
profile. ras> profile shdsl map standard
MSC1000G User’s Guide
495
496
Chapter 28 profile Commands
28.12.3 profile vdsl set command
Syntax: profile vdsl set <profile> <us-max-rate> <ds-max-rate> [fast|delay <us-delay>
<ds-delay>] [minrate <us-min-rate> <ds-min-rate>] [usmgn <us-max-mgn> <usmin-mgn> <us-tgt-mgn>] [dsmgn <ds-max-mgn> <ds-min-mgn> <ds-tgt-mgn>] where
<profile> = The descriptive name for the profile.
<us-max-rate>
= The maximum VDSL upstream transmission rate
,
64~45440 in Kbps. The upstream rate must be less than or equal to the downstream rate.
<ds-max-rate>
= The maximum VDSL downstream transmission rate,
64~100032 in Kbps.
[fast|delay
<us-delay>
<ds-delay>]
= The latency mode. With interleave, you must also define the upstream and downstream delay (1-255 ms). It is recommended that you configure the same delay for both upstream and downstream.
[minrate <usmin-rate> <dsmin-rate>]
[usmgn <usmax-mgn> <usmin-mgn> <ustgt-mgn>]
[dsmgn <dsmax-mgn> <dsmin-mgn> <dstgt-mgn>]
= The minimum VDSL upstream transmission rate (32~45440
Kbps) and the minimum ADSL downstream transmission rate (32~100032 Kbps).
= The maximum, minimum and target acceptable VDSL upstream signal to noise margins (0~310 in 0.1 dB measurements).
= The maximum, minimum and target acceptable VDSL downstream signal to noise margins (0~310 in 0.1 dB measurements).
The profile is a list of VDSL line configuration settings. After you create a VDSL profile, you can assign it to any of the VDSL ports on any of the VDSL line cards.
"
The system rounds the signal to noise margin settings to the nearest multiple of 0.25 dB.
The following example creates a VDSL profile (named standard
) for providing subscribers with very high connection speeds and no interleave delay. It uses the following settings.
• The maximum upstream rate is set to 2048 Kbps.
• The maximum downstream rate is set to 16000 Kbps.
• No interleave delay.
• The minimum upstream is set to 1024 Kbps.
• The minimum downstream is set to 3072 Kbps.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 28 profile Commands
• The maximum, minimum and target acceptable VDSL upstream signal to noise margins are set to 12, 0 and 6 dB respectively.
• The maximum, minimum and target acceptable VDSL downstream signal to noise margins are also set to 12, 0 and 6 dB respectively. ras> profile vdsl set standard 2048 16000 fast minrate 1024 3072 usmgn 12 0
6 dsmgn 12 0 6
This next example creates a similar VDSL profile (named standardB
), except it sets an interleave delay of 16 ms for both upstream and downstream traffic. ras> profile vdsl set standardB 2048 16000 delay 16 16 minrate 1024 3072 us mgn 12 0 6 dsmgn 12 0 6
28.12.4 profile vdsl show Command
Syntax: profile vdsl show [<profile>] where
<profile> =
The descriptive name for the profile.
This command displays the VDSL profile list of the settings of a VDSL profile configured on the system.
The following example displays the profile list and the settings of the standard
profile. ras> profile vdsl show vdsl profile(s):
----------------------
1. DEFVAL
2. standard
3. standardB ras> profile vdsl show standard vdsl profile: standard
upstream downstream
-------- ----------
max rate (Kbps): 2048 16000
min rate (Kbps): 1024 3072
latency delay (ms): fast fast
max margin (dB): 1.2 1.2
min margin (dB): 0.0 0.0
target margin (dB): 0.6 0.6
ras>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
497
Chapter 28 profile Commands
498
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
29
show Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the show
commands.
29.1 show Commands Overview
The show
commands display runtime status information.
29.2
show
Commands Summary
The following table lists the show
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 173 show Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
show adsl linedata linegain linehlog lineqln
<slot-port>
Displays an ADSL port’s line bit allocation.
<slot-port>
Displays ADSL line channel characteristics. The format provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale.
Displays the Quiet Line Noise for a
DMT tone is the rms (root mean square) level of the noise present on the line, when no ADSL signals are present. It is measured in dBm/Hz.
The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk.
L
L
L
L linetssi arp atm <slotport>|<slotport-vpi/vci>
[reset] dhcp counter <slot>|<slo t-port>
Displays the ARP table.
Displays ATM traffic counters.
Displays port DHCP statistics.
L
L
L
L
499
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
Table 173 show Commands (continued)
COMMAND
dot3ad snoop
<mstid>
[<end_mstid>]
<slot-port>
DESCRIPTION
<slot-port>
Displays port DHCP snooping information.
Displays the (IEEE 802.3ad) link aggregation settings.
Displays Ethernet packet counters.
P
L
L enet igmp ip lineinfo lineperf linerate linestat mac monitor
<gigaport>|<slot> info group port ipbpvc arpproxy interface route
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
<slot-port>
[<gigaport>|<mac>|<slo t>|<slotport>|vid
<vid1>[-<vid2>]]
<slot>
L
[<vid>
<group_ip>] info <slotport>
Displays IGMP related statistics.
Displays the learned IGMP group settings and status.
Displays IGMP related information on the port. group
<slot-port>
Displays joint IGMP group information on the port.
Displays management IP settings.
[<domain>]|
Display whole ARP table.
Display learnt ARP table for a domain. edgerouter
[<ip>
Display learnt ARP table for all/an edge router.
<vid>]|inte rface [<ip/ mask>
<vid>]
Display learnt ARP table for all/an interface.
Age time information is included.
Display runtime interfaces.
[<ip/ mask>|<vid|
<ip/mask>
<vid>]
Display runtime routing table.
[<domain>]|
[<ip/ mask>]|[<do main> <ip/ mask>]]
Displays DSL line information.
Displays DSL line performance statistics.
Displays DSL line rate values.
Displays DSL link status.
Displays a port’s IEEE 802.1d MAC address forwarding table.
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L mstp packet
Displays a card’s hardware monitor statistics.
Displays MSTP information for the
Ethernet ports.
Displays a port’s packet counter.
L
L
500
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
Table 173 show Commands (continued)
COMMAND
paepvc counter <slotport>|<slot
-port-vpi/ vci> session <slotport>|<slot
-port-vpi/ vci> performance <slot-port> curr|15min|1day sys rmon user vlan stats|history
<giga-port>
[<vid>]|[
<start-vid>
<end-vid>]
DESCRIPTION P
Displays PAE PVC counter statistics. L
Displays PAE PVC session information.
L
Displays a DSL port’s performance counters.
Displays the CPU utilization and memory usage status.
Displays Gigabit Ethernet interface link
RMON information.
Displays information on logged in users. * denotes your session.
Displays current VLANs.
L
L
L
L
L
29.3 show Commands
Use these commands to display runtime status information.
29.3.1 show adsl Commands
Use the show adsl
commands to display the line information for an active ADSL line.
29.3.1.1 show adsl linedata Command
Syntax: show adsl linedata <slot-port>
This command displays a ADSL port's line bit allocation.
Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a line’s bandwidth into tones. This command displays the number of bits transmitted for each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the connection, whether a given sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support ADSL transmission rates, and possibly to determine whether certain specific types of interference or line attenuation exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1 recommendation for more information on DMT.
The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone. The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15.
“usBit table” displays the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits transmitted per DMT tone for the upstream channel (from the subscriber’s DSL modem or router to the DSL line card).
“dsBit table” displays the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits received per DMT tone for the downstream channel (from the DSL line card) to the subscriber’s DSL modem or router).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
501
Chapter 29 show Commands
“usSnr Table” displays the upstream (from the subscriber’s DSL modem or router to the DSL line card) Signal to Noise Ratio. The higher the number, the better the line quality for that tone.
The bit allocation contents are only valid when the link is up.
The following example displays the line bit allocation for DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7.
In the following example, the upstream channel is carried on tones 8 to 17 and the downstream channel is carried on tones 34 to 497 (space is left between the channels to avoid interference).
502
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands ras> show adsl linedata 7-5 slot-port=7-5, DSL line data link = link_up savedData=true
usBit Table
1:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 07 08 09 0a 0b 0b 0c 0c 0d
17:0d 0d 0d 0e 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0c 0b 0a 09 08
33:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
49:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
dsBit Table
1:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
17:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
33:00 09 0a 0a 0a 0b 0b 0b 0b 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0d 0d
49:0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
65:00 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
81:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
97:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
113:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
129:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
145:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
161:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
177:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
193:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
209:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
225:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
241:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
257:0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
273:0e 0e 0e 0e 0d 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0d 0d 0e
289:0e 0d 0d 0e 0d 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e 0d 0d 0e 0d 0e
305:0e 0e 0e 0d 0d 0e 0e 0d 0e 0d 0d 0e 0e 0e 0e 0e
321:0e 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0e 0d 0e 0e 0d 0d 0e 0d 0e 0d
337:0e 0d 0d 0d 0d 0e 0e 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d
353:0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0c 0c 0c 0c 0b 0a 09
369:08 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0c 0c 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d
385:0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d
401:0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d
417:0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d
433:0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d
449:0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0d 0c 0d
465:0d 0c 0d 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c
481:0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0c
497:0c 0c 0c 0c 0c 0b 0b 0b 0b 0b 0a 0a 09 08 08 05
usSnr Table(dB)
1~ 8: 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 40.96
9~16: 46.37 48.65 51.67 54.03 53.81 57.19 56.49 59.87
17~24: 59.91 59.85 59.22 61.98 59.94 59.87 59.23 58.33
25~32: 57.80 57.39 57.39 55.57 52.70 49.45 45.75 43.45
33~40: 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
41~48: 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
49~56: 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
57~64: 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MSC1000G User’s Guide
503
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.1.2 show adsl linegain Command
Syntax: show adsl linegain <slot-port>
This command displays the gain parameter of the active ADSL line.
29.3.1.3 show adsl linehlog Command
Syntax: show adsl linehlog <slot-port>
This command displays the HLOG parameter of the active ADSL line.
29.3.1.4 show adsl lineqln Command
Syntax: show adsl lineqln <slot-port>
This command displays the QLN parameter of the active ADSL line.
29.3.1.5 show adsl linetssi Command
Syntax: show adsl linetssi <slot-port>
This command displays the TSSI parameter of the active ADSL line.
29.3.2 show arp Command
Syntax: show arp
This command displays the MSC1000G’s IP Address Resolution Protocol table. This is the list of IP addresses and matching MAC addresses that the MSC1000G has resolved.
An example is shown next. ras> show arp ip address time ether address interface
--------------- ----- ----------------- ----------
172.23.14.26 290 00:0d:60:cc:14:e9 outband
172.23.14.76 290 00:00:e8:97:70:64 outband
172.23.14.91 290 00:0a:e4:0a:76:21 outband
172.23.14.98 290 00:50:70:ff:f3:89 outband
172.23.15.97 300 08:00:46:74:0e:a5 outband
172.23.15.172 300 02:0e:a6:89:41:60 outband
172.23.15.254 300 00:04:80:9b:78:00 outband arp entry: 7
29.3.3 show atm Command
Syntax: show atm <slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci> [reset]
504
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
This command displays ATM traffic counters. It can also reset the counters.
The following example displays the ATM traffic counters for DSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show atm 7-5 port 7-5
since pvc create since last reset
-------------------- -------------------rx cells : 0 0 tx cells : 0 0 rx rate (byte/s): 0 0 tx rate (byte/s): 0 0 crc errors : 0 0
The following table describes labels in this example.
Table 174 show atm Command Display
LABEL DESCRIPTION
rx cells tx cells rx rate tx rate crc errors since pvc create since last reset
This field shows the number of ATM cells received on this port.
This field shows the number of ATM cells transmitted on this port.
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
This field shows the number of Cyclic Redundancy Check errors on this port.
This column displays the ATM traffic statistics that have accumulated from when the PVC was created (either via command or the building of the DSL link).
This column displays the ATM traffic statistics that have accumulated from the most recent time that the counters were reset.
29.3.4 show dot3ad Command
Syntax: show dot3ad
This command displays the (IEEE 802.3ad) link aggregation settings.
The following is an example. ras> show dot3ad
[aggregator info]
tsub:
state : disable
members: sub1 sub2
links :
syncs :
tup:
state : disable
members: up1 up2
links :
syncs :
MSC1000G User’s Guide
505
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.5 show dhcp counter Command
Syntax: show dhcp counter <slot>|<slot-port>
This command displays the number of DHCP related packets received on the port. The following displays an example (refer to
for field descriptions). ras> show dhcp counter 2-2 card name: <NULL>
port discover offer request ack overflow
----- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------
2- 2 1 2 1 1 0 ras>
29.3.6 show dhcp snoop Command
Syntax: show dhcp snoop <slot-port>
This command displays the DHCP snooping table on port 2 of the line card in slot 2 (refer to
for field descriptions). ras> show dhcp snoop 2-2 port 2-2: overflow 0
idx ip mac vid
--- --------------- ----------------- ------
1 172.23.19.4 00:50:ba:2c:70:e1 1 ras>
29.3.7 show enet Command
Syntax: show enet <sub1|sub2|up1|up2>|<slot>
This command displays Ethernet packet counters for the specified Ethernet interface or DSL line card.
506
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
The following example displays the Ethernet packet counters for the Ethernet connection to the line card in slot 1. ras> show enet up1 slot 1:
link status: up rate: 1000Mbps up time: 6:08:07:50
data rate (Tx/Rx): 0/0 kbps utilization (Tx/Rx): 0/0
Rx Tx
-------------------- --------------------
Bytes : 357823090 115120466
Pkts : 969653 1480867
UcastPkts : 969652 975144
NUcastPkts : 1 505723
McastPkts : 0 0
BcastPkts : 1 505723
Pause : 0 0
Pkt64 : 0
Pkt65~127 : 2146102
Pkt128~255 : 68655
Pkt256~511 : 14110
Pkt512~1023 : 19605
Pkt1024~1518 : 202045
Press any key to continue, 'e' to exit
Rx Tx
-------------------- --------------------
OverSizPkt : 0
UndSizPkt : 0
FCSErr : 0
AlignErr : 0
Jabber : 0
Fragment : 0
Dropped : 0
Underrun : 0
ExCollisn : 0
The following table describes labels in this example.
Table 175 show enet Command Display
LABEL DESCRIPTION
link status rate up time data rate
(Tx/Rx) utilization
(Tx/Rx): 0/0
Bytes
This shows whether or not the port has an active connection.
This shows the connection speed for an active connection.
This shows how long the connection has been active.
This shows at what rate the port is currently sending or receiving data.
This shows what percent the port’s current data rate is out of the connection’s maximum rate.
Pkts
This is the number of octets of Ethernet frames received/transmitted that are from
0 to 1518 octets in size, counting the ones in bad packets, not counting framing bits but counting FCS (Frame Check Sequence) octets. An octet is an 8-bit binary digit (byte).
This is the number of packets received/transmitted on this port (including multicast, unicast, broadcast and bad packets).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
507
Chapter 29 show Commands
Table 175 show enet Command Display (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UcastPkts
NUcastPkts
MCastPkts
BCastPkts
Pause
Pkt64
Pkt65~127
Pkt128~255
Pkt256~511
Pkt512~1023
Pkt1024~1518
OverSizPkt
UndSizPkt
FCSErr
AlignErr
Jabber
Fragment
Dropped
Underrun
ExCollisn
This is the number of good unicast frames received/transmitted.
This is the number of good non-unicast frames received/transmitted.
This is the number of good multicast frames received/transmitted of 64 to 1518 octets in length (for non VLAN) or 1522 octets (for VLAN), not including Broadcast frames. Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account.
This is the number of good broadcast frames received/transmitted of 64 to 1518 octets in length (for non VLAN) or 1522 octets (for VLAN), not including multicast frames. Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account.
This is the number of valid IEEE 802.3x Pause frames received/transmitted on this port.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 64 octets or less in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 65 to 127 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received and transmitted (including bad frames) that were 128 to 255 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 256 to 511 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 512 to 1023 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted (including bad frames) that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length (this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits).
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were bigger than 1518 (non
VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) octets and contained a valid FCS.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted with an integral length of 64 to
1518 octets and containing a Frame Check Sequence error.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were 64 to 1518 (non
VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) octets long but contained an invalid FCS and a nonintegral number of octets.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets (non VLAN) or 1522 octets (VLAN) and contained an invalid FCS, including alignment errors.
This is the number of frames received/transmitted that were less than 64 octets long, and contained an invalid FCS, including non-integral and integral lengths.
This is the number of received/transmitted frames that were received by the
MSC1000G, but later dropped because of a lack of system resources.
This is the number of outgoing frames that were less than 64 octets long.
This is the number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions. Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset.
508
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.8 show igmp Commands
Use the show igmp commands to display current IGMP settings and statistics. Use multicast igmp enable
to enable IGMP first.
29.3.8.1 show igmp info Command
Syntax: show igmp info
This command displays the current IGMP settings and the number of IGMP-related packets received. The following figure shows an example. ras> show igmp info mode is igmpsnooping number of queries = 0 number of reports = 0 number of leaves = 0 number of unknowns = 0 number of groups = 0 ras>
29.3.8.2 show igmp group Command
Syntax: show igmp group [<vid> <mcast_ip>] where
<mcast_ip>
= The multicast IP address.
This command displays the IGMP group information that is learned on the system or from the specified VLAN. ras> show igmp group
[multicast group info] vid multicast group port slot timestamp
---- --------------- -------------------- ---------------- -------------ras>
29.3.8.3 show igmp port info Command
Syntax: show igmp port info <slot-port>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
509
Chapter 29 show Commands
This command displays the current IGMP settings and the number of IGMP-related packets received. The following figure shows the IGMP packet counters for port 1 on the line card in slot 3. ras> show igmp port info 3-1
port group_cnt query_cnt join_cnt leave_cnt
----- --------- --------- --------- ---------
3- 1 0 0 0 0 ras>
29.3.8.4 show igmp port group Command
Syntax: show igmp port group <slot-port>
This command displays the IGMP groups a port joins. The following figure shows an example for port 1 on the line card in slot 3. ras> show igmp port group 3-1
port vid mcast_ip client ip
----- ------ ---------------- ---------------ras>
29.3.9 show ip Command
Syntax: show ip
This command displays the management IP settings and statistics. An example is shown next. ras> show ip
outband[enif0] inband[swif0]
-------------- --------------- --------------inet : 192.168.0.1 172.23.19.206
netmask : 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
broadcast : 192.168.0.255 172.23.19.255
mtu : 1500 1500 vid : - 1 in octet : 0 11201874 in unicast : 0 26230 in multicast : 0 3676 in discard : 0 749 in error : 0 0 in unknown : 0 749 out octet : 0 265141 out unicast : 0 1646 out multicast : 0 0 out discard : 0 0 out error : 0 0 ras>
510
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.10 show ipbpvc arpproxy Command
Syntax: show ipbpvc arpproxy < all | domain [<domain-name>] | edgerouter [<ip> <vid>]
| interface [<ip/mask> <vid>] where
<domain-name>
<ip>
<mask>
<vid>
=
=
=
=
The name of the domain.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
Number of bits <1..32> in the subnet mask.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This command displays the specified learned ARP table entries.
An example is shown below.
ras> show ipbpvc arpproxy show
Domain Name: d01 ip mac port vpi vci interface vid type
--------------- ----------------- ---- --- ----- ------------------ ---- ---
192.168.2.2 00:05:5d:03:99:3a 22 0 33 192.168.2.0/24 3 D
192.168.2.254 00:13:49:95:03:07 50 - - 192.168.2.254 2 U
*: the ARP is learned from DHCP and can't be flushed.
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 176 IPB ARP Proxy Show Command Output
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Domain Name ip mac port vpi/vci interface vid type
This field displays the name of the domain which has this ARP table.
This field displays the IP address assigned to the specific device.
This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of the device.
This field displays the port number to which the device is connected.
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Circuit Identifier
(VCI) the device is using. The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port.
This field displays the name of the interface the device is using.
This field displays the VLAN ID the device is using.
This field indicates whether this entry is used for upstream traffic (U, or uplink interface) or downstream traffic (D, or downlink interface). By default, all entries are for downstream traffic, unless the edge router is configured using the edge
router commands (see Section 27.12 on page 441 ).
29.3.11 show ipbpvc interface Command
Syntax: show ipbpvc interface [<ip/mask>|<vid>|<ip/mask> <vid>]
MSC1000G User’s Guide
511
Chapter 29 show Commands where
<ip/mask>
<vid>
=
=
IP address, in dotted decimal notation. Number of bits <0..32> in the subnet mask.
The ID (<1..4094>) of the VLAN.
This command displays the (run-time) downlink interfaces for the selected range of IP addresses and/or VLAN. This table includes all the forwarding information for downstream traffic, whether learned by snooping DHCP packets or provided manually.
An example is shown next.
ras> show ipbpvc interface ip/mask vid slot port vpi vci
------------------ ---- ---- ---- --- ----
192.168.3.0/24 402 - - - -
29.3.12 show ipbpvc route Command
Syntax: show ipbpvc route [<domain-name>|<ip/mask>|<domain-name> <ip/mask>] where
<domain-name>
<ip/mask>
=
=
The name of the domain.
IP address, in dotted decimal notation. Number of bits <1..32> in the subnet mask.
This command displays the (run-time) routing table(s) for the selected domain or range of IP addresses. This table includes all the entries, whether added automatically by the MSC1000G or provided manually.
An example is shown next.
ras> show ipbpvc route domain ip/mask nexthop mtrc pr type
------------------------------- ------------------ --------------- ---- -- -
--
ISP1 0.0.0.0/0 172.23.19.254 15 0 U
ISP1 172.23.19.249/32 - - - U
ISP1 172.23.19.254/32 - - - U
ISP1 192.169.1.0/24 172.23.19.249 5 0 U example 192.168.1.200/32 - - - U
The type field indicates whether this entry is used for upstream traffic (U, or uplink interface) or downstream traffic (D, or downlink interface). By default, all entries are for downstream traffic, unless the Edge Router IP is configured in the edge router commands
(see Section 27.12 on page 441 ).
The other output values correspond to the input values of other IP bridge routing table commands.
512
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.13 show lineinfo Command
Syntax: show lineinfo <slot-port>
This command shows the line operating values of an ADSL port.
The following example displays the line operating values for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show lineinfo 1-1 slot-port=1-1, DSL line info link = link_up service type = adsl2plus_mode coding mode = Concatenated (trellis and RS) coding us interleave delay = 18 ms ds interleave delay = 6 ms us inp = 2.1 DMT symbol(s) ds inp = 0.5 DMT symbol(s) us output power = 9.6 dBm ds output power = 13.7 dBm country code = 0000 provider code = 5443544e("TCTN")
The following table describes labels in this example.
Table 177 show lineinfo Command Display
LABEL DESCRIPTION
link service type coding mode us interleave delay ds interleave delay us inp ds inp
This displays the connection status of the DSL link.
This is the ADSL standard that the port is using.
Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
“RS” coding stands for Reed-Solomon error correction.
This is the numbers of milliseconds of interleave delay for upstream transmissions.
This is the numbers of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream transmissions.
This is the number of impulse noise protection DMT symbols for upstream transmissions.
This is the number of impulse noise protection DMT symbols for downstream transmissions.
us output power ds output power
This is the power output of the subscriber’s DSL modem or router. The total output power of the transceiver varies with the line length and quality.
This is the DSP port’s output power. The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality. The farther away the subscriber’s ADSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line, the higher the power will be.
country code
This is the country code acquired from the subscriber’s ADSL device during negotiation/provisioning message interchanges. The country code is from the
Vendor ID (see ITU-T G.994.1).
provider code This is the provider code acquired from the subscriber’s ADSL device during negotiation/provisioning message interchanges. The provider code includes the
Vendor ID and Version Number obtained from the Vendor ID.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
513
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.14 show lineperf Command
Syntax: show lineperf <slot-port>
This command shows the line performance counters of an ADSL port.
The following example displays the line performance counters for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show lineperf 7-5 slot-port=7-5, DSL line perf
fast interleave
---------- ----------
FeCrc = 0 0
NeCrc = 0 7
FeFec = 0 3675
NeFec = 0 1
upstream downstream
---------- ----------
Es = 3 2
Ses = 2 1
Uas = 0 0
Lofs = 0 1
Loss = 1 1
Lprs = 0 0 ras>
These counters display line performance data that has been accumulated since the system started. The definitions of near end/far end are relative to the ATU-C (ADSL Termination
Unit-Central Office). Downstream refers to data from the ATU-C and upstream refers to data from the ATU-R. “interleave” stands for interleaved and “fast” stands for non-interleaved (fast mode).
A block is a set of consecutive bits associated with the path; each bit belongs to one and only one block. Consecutive bits may not be contiguous in time.
Table 178 Line Performance Counters
LABEL DESCRIPTION
FeCrc
NeCrc
FeFec
NeFec
Es
Ses
Uas
Lofs
Loss
Lprs
Far End Cyclic Redundancy Checks.
Near End Cyclic Redundancy Checks.
The Far End Corrected blocks.
The Near End Corrected blocks.
The number of Errored Seconds. This is how many seconds contained at least one errored block or at least one defect.
The number of Severely Errored Seconds. This is how many seconds contained
30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of Es.
The number of Unavailable Seconds.
The number of Loss Of Frame Seconds.
The number of Loss Of Signal Seconds.
The number of times a Loss of PoweR (on the ATUR) has occurred.
514
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.15 show linerate Command
Syntax: show linerate <slot-port>
This command displays an ADSL port's line rate information.
The following example displays the line operating values for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show linerate 7-5 slot-port=7-5, DSL line rate link = link_up
upstream downstream
---------- ---------payload rate (kbps)= 999 23995 actual rate (kbps)= 1008 24004 attainable rate(kbps)= 1013 24634 noise margin (dB)= 18.8 12.5
attenuation (dB)= 0.8 0.0
The following table describes labels in this example.
Table 179 Line Rate Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The rate fields display the transmission rates. “Line Down” indicates that the ADSL port is not connected to a subscriber.
up/down stream
Upstream refers to traffic coming into the DSL line card from the subscriber's
ADSL modem or router. Downstream refers to traffic going out from the DSL line card to the subscriber's ADSL modem or router. payload rate actual rate attainable rate noise margin attenuation
These are the data (the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic) transfer rates (in Kbps) at which the port is receiving and sending data.
These are the data transfer rates (in Kbps) at which the port is receiving and sending data.
These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates (in Kbps) at which the port could receive and send data.
These are the DSL line’s noise margins. Measured in decibels (dB).
These are the reductions in amplitude of the DSL signals. Measured in decibels
(dB).
29.3.16 show linestat Command
Syntax: show linestat <slot-port>
This command displays an ADSL port's link status.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
515
Chapter 29 show Commands
The following example displays the link status for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show linestat 7-5
usPayLoadRate dsPayLoadRate port link (kpbs) (kpbs) protocol up time
---- ----------- ------------- ------------- -------------- --------------
5 up 999 23995 adsl2plus 4h58m
29.3.17 show mac Command
Syntax: show mac [sub1|sub2|up1|up2|enet|<mac>|<slot>|<slot-port>|{vid <vid1>[-
<vid2>]
This command displays the IEEE 802.1d MAC address forwarding table. The following example displays the IEEE 802.1d MAC address forwarding table on uplink port 1. ras> show mac up1 total count: 41 vid mac port
---- ----------------- -----
1 00:00:04:a0:00:31 enet6
1 00:00:e2:82:7d:90 enet6
1 00:02:44:84:02:4d enet6
1 00:04:80:9b:78:00 enet6
1 00:05:5d:8d:e0:52 enet6
1 00:07:40:ca:35:a8 enet6
1 00:0d:68:72:20:06 enet6
1 00:0f:fe:25:a1:9e enet6
29.3.18 show monitor Command
Syntax: show monitor <slot>
This command displays a card’s hardware monitor statistics.
516
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
The following example displays the hardware monitor statistics for the line card in slot 7. ras> show monitor 7
'*' indicates a current alarm voltage: idx volt current nominal high_lmt low_lmt
--- ---------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
1 1.2V 1.187 1.200 1.284 1.116
2 * 1.8V 1.976 1.800 1.926 1.674
3 3.3V 3.263 3.300 3.531 3.069
4 20.5V 20.596 20.500 22.550 18.450
temperature: idx temperature current high_lmt low_lmt
--- ---------------- -------- -------- --------
1 Temp1 58.000 95.000 -50.000
2 Temp2 54.000 90.000 -50.000
3 Temp3 51.000 85.000 -50.000
ras>
This table describes labels in the example.
Table 180 show monitor Command Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
voltage current nominal high_lmt low_lmt temperature current high_lmt low_lmt
The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that can detect and report the voltage.
This is the present voltage reading.
This field displays the average voltage measured at this sensor.
This field displays the high voltage threshold for this sensor.
This field displays the low voltage threshold for this sensor.
This example displays the temperature measurements in degrees Celsius.
Each temperature sensor can detect and report the temperature. Temperature sensor 1 is near the ADSL line driver. Temperature sensor 2 is near the ADSL chipset. Temperature sensor 3 is near the central processing unit.
This shows the current temperature at this sensor.
This field displays the high temperature threshold for this sensor.
This field displays the low temperature threshold for this sensor.
29.3.19 show mstp Command
Syntax: show mstp <mstid> [<end_mstid>] where
<mstid>
<end_mstid>
= The first MST region ID.
= The last MST region ID.
This command displays information (such as bridge ID, topology change counter, etc.) of the specified MST region(s).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
517
Chapter 29 show Commands
The following example displays MST region information for MST IDs 1 and 2. ras> show mstp 1 2
[mstid 1]
BridgeID : 0x8001-00a0c5da46eb
TimeSinceTopoChange : 3:08:23:03
TopoChangeCount : 0
TopoIsChanging : false
IntRootPortID : 0x0000
IntRootID : 0x8001-00a0c5da46eb
IntRootPathCost : 0
[mstid 2]
BridgeID : 0x8002-00a0c5da46eb
TimeSinceTopoChange : 3:08:22:54
TopoChangeCount : 0
TopoIsChanging : false
IntRootPortID : 0x0000
IntRootID : 0x8002-00a0c5da46eb
IntRootPathCost : 0 ras>
29.3.20 show packet Command
Syntax: show packet <slot-port>
This command displays a port’s packet counter.
The following example displays the hardware monitor statistics for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show packet 7-5 ifInOctets = 66240 ifInUcastPkts = 1029 ifInMcastPkts = 149 ifInBcastPkts = 202 ifInNUcastPkts = 351 ifInDiscards = 86 ifInErrors = 0 ifInUnknownProtos = 0 ifOutOctets = 2706192 ifOutUcastPkts = 333 ifOutMcastPkts = 55844 ifOutBcastPkts = 111055 ifOutNUcastPkts = 166899 ifOutDiscards = 0 ifOutErrors = 0 ras>
518
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.21 show paepvc counter Command
Syntax: show paepvc counter <slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command displays the PAE PVC statistics. The following example displays all PAE PVC counters for port 1 on the line card in slot 2. ras> show paepvc counter 2-1 pvc 2-1-1/33
tx rx
---------------- ----------------
ppp lcp config-request : - 0
ppp lcp echo-request : - 0
ppp lcp echo-reply : - 0
pppoe padi : 0 -
pppoe pado : - 0
pppoe padr : 0 -
pppoe pads : - 0
pppoe padt : 0 0
pppoe srvcname error : - 0
pppoe acname error : - 0
pppoe generic error : 0 0
Press any key to continue, 'e' to exit ras>
The following table describes the counters.
Table 181 show paepvc counter Command Fields
FIELD DESCRIPTION
ppp lcp config-request ppp lcp echo-request ppp lcp echo-reply pppoe padi pppoe pado pppoe padr pppoe pads pppoe padt pppoe srvcname error pppoe acname error pppoe generic error
This field displays the number of PPP config-request packets received.
This field displays the number of PPP echo-request packets received.
This field displays the number of PPP echo-reply packets received.
This field displays the number of PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization
(PADI) packets transmitted.
This field displays the number of PPPoE Active Discovery Offer
(PADO) packets received.
This field displays the number of PPPoE Active Discovery Request
(PADR) packets transmitted.
This field displays the number of PPPoE Active Discovery Session-
Confirmation (PADS) packets received.
This field displays the number of PPPoE Active Discovery Termination
(PADT) packets received/transmitted.
This field displays the number of errors received for which the servicename request failed.
This field displays the number of errors received when the access concentrator experienced an error performing the host request.
This field displays the number of unrecoverable errors occurred.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
519
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.22 show paepvc session Command
Syntax: show paepvc session <slot-port>|<slot-port-vpi/vci>
This command displays the PAE PVC session status. The following example displays the session status of all PAE PVC(s) on port 1 of the line card in slot 2. ras> show paepvc session 2-1 pvc 2-1-1/33 session state : down session id : 0 session uptime: 0 secs acname : srvcname : ras>
29.3.23 show performance Command
Syntax: show performance <slot-port> curr|15min|1day
This command displays a DSL port’s performance counters.
The following example displays the current performance counters for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show perform 7-5 curr
PhysEntry
--------atuc/atur CurrSnrMgn = 12.5/5.5 dB atuc/atur CurrAtn = 1.9/0.0 dB atuc/atur CurrOutputPwr = 13.3/12.3 dBm atuc/atur CurrAttainableRate = 24989/1013 kbps
ChanEntry
--------atuc/atur ChanInterleaveDelay = 5/14 ms atuc/atur ChanCurrTxRate = 22912/999 kbps atuc/atur ChanPrevTxRate = 22912/999 kbps
PerfDataEntry
------------atuc/atur PerfLofs = 3/0 atuc/atur PerfLoss = 3/0 atuc PerfLols = 3 atur PerfLprs = 0 atuc/atur PerfESs = 0/1 seconds atuc PerfInits = 4 atuc/atur PerfStatSesL = 0/1 seconds atuc/atur PerfStatUasL = 0/131 seconds ras>
520
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
This table describes the fields.
“atuc” statistics are for the downstream connection (or traffic). This is the connection going from the IES-5000 to the subscriber’s device.
“atur” statistics are for the upstream connection (or traffic). This is the connection coming from the subscriber’s device to the IES-5000.
Table 182 show performance curr
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CurrSnrMgn
CurrAtn
These are the ADSL line’s current downstream and upstream signal to noise margins in decibels.
These are the ADSL line’s current downstream and upstream line attenuation in decibels.
CurrOutputPwr
These are the ADSL line’s current downstream and upstream output powers in decibels.
CurrAttainabl eRate
These are the ADSL line’s current downstream and upstream attainable rates in decibels.
ChanInterleav eDelay
These are the numbers of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream and upstream transmissions.
ChanCurrTxRat e
These are the ADSL line’s current downstream and upstream transmission rates in decibels.
ChanPrevTxRat e
These are the ADSL line’s previous downstream and upstream transmission rates in decibels.
PerfLofs
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of frame
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
PerfLoss
PerfLols
PerfLprs
PerfESs
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of signal
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of link
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of power
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Errored
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
PerfInits
PerfStatSesL
PerfStatUasL
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of initialization failure traps that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of Severely errored seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
These are the ADSL line’s downstream and upstream numbers of UnAvailable
Seconds that have occurred within the current 15 minute period.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
521
Chapter 29 show Commands
The following example displays the one day performance counters for ADSL port 5 on the line card in slot 7. ras> show performance 7-5 1day
PerfCurr1Day
------------atuc/atur TimeElapsed = 57163/57163 seconds atuc/atur Lofs = 0/0 seconds atuc/atur Loss = 0/0 seconds atuc Lols = 0 seconds atuc Lol = 0 atur Lprs = 0 seconds atur Lpr = 0 atuc/atur ESs = 0/0 seconds atuc Inits = 1 atuc/atur SesL = 0/0 seconds atuc/atur UasL = 0/0 seconds
ChanPerfCurr1Day
----------------atuc/atur TimeElapsed = 57163/57163 seconds
Press any key to continue, 'e' to exit
PerfPrev1Day
-----------atuc/atur MoniSecs = 0/0 seconds atuc/atur Lofs = 0/0 seconds atuc/atur Loss = 0/0 seconds atuc Lols = 0 seconds atuc Lol = 0 atur Lprs = 0 seconds atur Lpr = 0 atuc/atur ESs = 0/0 seconds atuc Inits = 0 atuc/atur SesL = 0/0 seconds atuc/atur UasL = 0/0 seconds
ChanPerfPrev1Day
---------------atuc/atur MoniSecs = 0/0 seconds ras>
This table describes the fields that have not already been addressed.
Table 183 show performance 1day
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TimeElapsed
MoniSecs
This is the number of seconds that the DSL line card has been active.
This is the number of seconds that the DSL line card was active during the measured period.
29.3.24 show rmon Command
Syntax: show rmon stats|history <giga-port>
522
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
This command displays subtending or uplink RMON MIB information. See RFC 1757 for information on the RMON MIBs.
The following example displays RMON history information for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink 1 interface. ras> show rmon history up1
historyControlInterval = 30 seconds
Index SampleIndex IntervalStart DropEvents Octets
Pkts BroadcastPkts MulticastPkts CRCAlignErrors UndersizePkts
OversizePkts Fragments Jabbers Collisions Utilization
-------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- --------------
1 227 6857 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
1 226 6827 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
1 225 6797 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
1 224 6767 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
1 223 6737 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
The following example displays RMON statistics for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink 1 interface. ras> show rmon stats up1
etherStatsDropEvents = 0
etherStatsOctets = 0
etherStatsPkts = 0
etherStatsBroadcastPkts = 0
etherStatsMulticastPkts = 0
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors = 0
etherStatsUndersizePkts = 0
etherStatsOversizePkts = 0
etherStatsFragments = 0
etherStatsJabbers = 0
etherStatsCollisions = 0
etherStatsPkts64Octets = 0
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets = 0
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets = 0
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets = 0
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets = 0
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets = 0
MSC1000G User’s Guide
523
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.25 show sys Command
Syntax: show sys
This command displays the system CPU utilization for the last 60 seconds and memory usage status. The following figure shows an example. ras> show sys
CPU usage status:
baseline 1456794 ticks
sec ticks util sec ticks util sec ticks util sec ticks util
0 1356594 6.87 1 1363056 6.43 2 1337785 8.16 3 1340022 8.01
4 1187472 18.48 5 1366325 6.21 6 1377483 5.44 7 1153896 20.79
8 1321237 9.30 9 1361335 6.55 10 1367923 6.10 11 1365289 6.28
12 1354417 7.02 13 1315779 9.68 14 1366581 6.19 15 1373105 5.74
16 1306692 10.30 17 1364969 6.30 18 1370533 5.92 19 1301424 10.66
20 1367778 6.11 21 1378912 5.34 22 1363950 6.37 23 1360289 6.62
24 1306006 10.35 25 1246119 14.46 26 1364775 6.31 27 1372262 5.80
28 1359724 6.66 29 1304459 10.45 30 1377936 5.41 31 1367812 6.10
32 1359435 6.68 33 1356803 6.86 34 1141058 21.67 35 1358068 6.77
36 1371992 5.82 37 1188738 18.40 38 1355139 6.97 39 1326071 8.97
40 1362797 6.45 41 1353548 7.08 42 1340872 7.95 43 1329488 8.73
44 1313818 9.81 45 1380668 5.22 46 1294721 11.12 47 1358091 6.77
48 1350648 7.28 49 1315303 9.71 50 1358785 6.72 51 1356484 6.88
52 1347292 7.51 53 1325328 9.02 54 1327612 8.86 55 1245649 14.49
56 1364073 6.36 57 1370602 5.91 58 1336428 8.26 59 1330460 8.67
60 1377002 5.47 61 1369616 5.98 62 1355618 6.94
Press any key to continue, 'e' to exit
Memory usage status:
------Heap status-----heap size: 42115743 bytes
Heap usage: 31954492 bytes
Heap max. available block size: 10128472 mem alloc count: 226, mem free count: 0
29.3.26 show user Command
Syntax: show user
This command displays information on logged in administrators. This information includes the type of session, user name, user’s IP address and what time the management session started.
The following example shows one logged in user. ras> show user
[session info ('*' denotes your session)] session user remote ip login time
---------- ---------------- --------------- -------------------
*telnet admin 172.23.19.11 13:04:46 2005/06/01
524
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 29 show Commands
29.3.27 show vlan Command
Syntax: show vlan [<vid>] or show vlan <start-vid> <end-vid>
This command displays the current VLANs.
The following example shows VLAN 1. It is set to send untagged Ethernet frames to the
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. ras> show vlan
vid sub1 sub2 up1 up2
---- ----- ----- ----- -----
1 U U U U
3 - - - -
5 - - - -
101 - - - -
4094 T T T T
MSC1000G User’s Guide
525
Chapter 29 show Commands
526
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
30
switch Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the switch
commands.
30.1 switch Commands Overview
The switch
commands configure switching functions and manage the Ethernet interfaces.
30.2
switch
Commands Summary
The following table lists the switch
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 184 switch Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
switch bandwidth disable enable set
<giga-port>
<giga-port>
<giga-port>
<ingress-rate>
<egress-rate>
Turns off bandwidth control on the specified port(s).
Turns on bandwidth control on the specified port(s).
Sets the incoming or outgoing bandwidth control for the specified port(s). 0~1000
(Mbps).
M
M
M show bcastctrl show dot3ad threshold <giga-port> <bclimit> <mc-limit>
<uu-limit> aggport
Displays the bandwidth control settings.
Displays broadcast and multicast storm control settings.
Sets the limitations of broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets, in packets per second for each trunk port (0~262143,
-1 means no limit).
<bc-limit> = broadcast packet limit
<mc-limit> = multicast packet limit
<uu-limit> = unknown unicast packet limit
Creates a link aggregation trunk groups.
L
L
M
M disable
<portlist> t1|t2|t3|t4|none
[t1|t2|t3|t4]
Turns off link aggregation on the specified trunk group.
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
527
Chapter 30 switch Commands
Table 184 switch Commands (continued)
COMMAND
enable [t1|t2|t3|t4]
[lacp]
DESCRIPTION
Turns on link aggregation on the specified trunk group. protocol.
lacp turns on LACP garptimer lacp show join leave leaveall set priority
<priority>
Sets the LACP system priority (0~65535).
show
Displays LACP settings. timeout short|long
Sets the time interval between exchanging
LACP packets.
M
L
M
<join-msec>
Displays the link aggregation state.
Sets the GARP timer’s Join Timer in milliseconds, 100~32766.
L
M
<leave-msec>
<leaveall-msec>
<join-msec>
<leave-msec>
<leaveall-msec>
Sets the GARP timer’s Leave Timer in milliseconds, 201~65534.
Sets the GARP timer’s Leave All Timer in milliseconds, 202~65535.
Sets GARP timers.
M
M
M isolation show disable enable vlan show delete <vid> set <vid>
Displays the GARP timer settings.
Turns off the subscriber isolation feature.
Turns on the subscriber isolation feature.
M
Deletes the specified isolation VLAN.
M
L
M
M
L mac flush mstp cfgname disable enable fwdelay enet|all
<fwdelay-sec>
Creates the specified isolation VLAN.
Displays the subscriber isolation feature’s current setting.
Clears the MAC table on the Ethernet ports or all ports (Ethernet and subscriber ports).
Sets a descriptive name for the MSTP configuration.
Deactivates MSTP on the system.
Activates MSTP on the system.
M
M hellotime <hellotime-sec> maxage maxhops
<maxage-sec>
<max-hops>
Sets the maximum time (between 4 and 30 seconds) a switch will wait before changing states
Sets the time interval (between 1 and 10 seconds) between BPDU (Bridge Protocol
Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch.
Sets the maximum time (between 6 and 40 seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure.
Sets the number of hops (between 1 and
255) in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged.
M
M
M
M
M
M
P
M
528
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
Table 184 switch Commands (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
priority <mstid> <priority>
Sets the priority of the switch for the instance ranges. The lower the number, the more likely the switch will be chosen as the root bridge.
Enter 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480,
24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960,
45056, 49152, 53248, 57344 or 61440 in this field. port revision <revision level>
Sets the configuration version number (0 -
65535).
Displays MSTP settings. show version rstp|mstp disable dscp
Sets the spanning tree protocol version the switch uses.
Sets the VLAN-MSTID mapping.
[<end_vid>]
<giga-port>
Turns off data transmission on a port.
disable <gigaport>
Deactivates DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port. enable <giga-port>
Activates DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port. set <giga-port>
<srccp> <mapcp>
<mappri>
Sets DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port.
<srccp> : source code point, 0~63, example: 1,3~5,10~15
<mapcp> : code point, 0~63
<mappri> : priority, 0~7 show [<giga-port>]
Displays DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mappings on this port. enable <giga-port>
Turns on data transmission on a port.
flowctrl disable <gigaport>
Turns off flow control on a port.
enable <giga-port>
Turns on flow control on a port.
frametype <giga-port> all|tag
Sets the port(s) to accept VLAN tagged and untagged Ethernet frames or only tagged. gvrp mode disable <gigaport> port> <mstid>
Turns on GVRP for a port(s).
enable <giga-port>
Turns off GVRP for a port(s).
<giga-port> uplink|subtend
Sets a port to operate as uplink or subtending.
Deactivates MSTP on the port in the spanning tree instance. enable <giga-port>
<mstid>
Activates MSTP on the port in the spanning tree instance. pathcost <gigaport> <mstid>
<pathcost>
Sets the path cost (between 0 and
200000000). Enter 0 to have the system automatically set the path cost based on the link speed.
P
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
MSC1000G User’s Guide
529
Chapter 30 switch Commands
Table 184 switch Commands (continued)
COMMAND
p2plink <gigaport> auto|enable|disabl e
DESCRIPTION
Enables point-to-point connection. port> <mstid>
<priority>
Specify the priority (0 - 255) of the Ethernet port in the MST region. The system automatically rounds the number to the nearest multiple of 16. pvid show <mstid>
[<end_mstid>]
<giga-port> <vid>
Displays MSTP settings. name priority
<giga-port> <name>
Sets the name of a port.
<giga-port>
<priority>
Sets a port’s default ingress user priority
(0~7).
Sets the PVID (Port VLAN ID) (1~4094) assigned to untagged frames or priority frames (0 VID) received on this port(s).
show
Displays port settings.
speed <giga-port>
<speed>
Sets a port’s speed and duplex mode.
vlantrunk disable <gigaport>
Turns off VLAN trunking on a port to have it only accept frames with registered VIDs.
enable <giga-port>
Turns on VLAN trunking on a port to have it accept frames with any VID.
qschedule set queuemap
<giga-port> spq or
<giga-port> wrr
<wt0> <wt1> <wt2>
<wt3> <wt4> <wt5>
<wt6> <wt7>
Sets a port’s queuing method and/or priority weight.
spq = strict priority queuing algorithm wrr = weighted round robin queue algorithm
<wt0>~<wt7> = priority weight, 0~15
Displays the queuing settings.
show set <priority>
Sets a queue’s priority.
show
Displays the queues’ priorities.
P
M
M
L
M
M
M
L
M
M
M
M
L
M
L
30.3 switch bandwidth Commands
Use the switch bandwidth
commands to configure bandwidth control.
30.3.1 switch bandwidth disable Command
Syntax: switch bandwidth enable <giga-port>
530
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands where
<giga-port>
= This represents Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, subtending ports or all ports. Use sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use sub|up|all
if trunking is enabled.
This command turns on bandwidth control on the specified Gigabit Ethernet interface (or all of them).
This example turns off bandwidth control for the uplink 1 port. ras> switch bandwidth disable up1
30.3.2 switch bandwidth enable Command
Syntax: switch bandwidth enable <giga-port> where
<giga-port>
= This represents Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, subtending ports or all ports. Use sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use t sub|tup|all
if trunking is enabled.
This command turns on bandwidth control on the specified port(s).
This example turns on bandwidth control for the subtending 2 port. ras> switch bandwidth enable sub2
30.3.3 switch bandwidth set Command
Syntax: switch bandwidth set <giga-port> <ingress-rate> <egress-rate> where
<giga-port>
<ingress-rate>
<egress-rate>
= This represents Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, subtending ports or all ports. Use sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use sub|up|all
if trunking is enabled.
= The maximum bandwidth allowed in megabits per second (Mbps) for the incoming traffic flow on a port. Use a number between 1 and
1000.
= The maximum bandwidth allowed in megabits per second (Mbps) for the out-going traffic flow on a port. Use a number between 1 and 1000.
This command sets the incoming or outgoing bandwidth control for the specified port(s).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
531
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This example sets the subtending 2 port to only allow 128 Mbps for incoming traffic and 512
Mbps for outgoing traffic. ras> switch bandwidth set sub2 128 512
30.3.4 switch bandwidth show Command
Syntax: switch bandwidth show
This command displays the bandwidth control settings on the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
This example displays the bandwidth control settings on the Ethernet ports. ras> switch bandwidth show port enable ingress(Mbps) egress(Mbps)
----- ------ ------------- -------------
sub1 - 0 0
sub2 - 0 0
up1 - 0 0
up2 - 0 0
'0' = disable
“V” displays for ports that have bandwidth control enabled “-” displays for ports that do not.
30.4 switch bcasctrl Commands
Use the switch bcasctrl
commands to configure broadcast storm control.
30.4.1 switch bcastctrl threshold Command
Syntax: switch bcasctrl threshold <giga-port> <bc-limit> <mc-limit> <uu-limit> where
<giga-port>
= This represents Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, subtending ports or all ports. Use sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use sub|up|all
if trunking is enabled.
<bc-limit>
= Sets how many broadcast packets the interface is allowed to receive per second. 0~262143, use -1 to disable.
<mc-limit>
<uu-limit>
= Sets how many multicast packets the interface is allowed to receive per second. 0~262143, use -1 to disable.
= Sets how many unknown unicast packets the interface is allowed to receive per second. 0~262143, use -1 to disable.
This command sets the limitations of broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets, in packets per second for each Gigabit Ethernet port.
532
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This example sets the subtending 1 interface to accept up to 80,000 broadcast packets, 100,000 multicast packets and 60,000 unknown unicast packets per second. ras> switch bcastctrl threshold sub1 80000 100000 60000
30.4.2 switch bcastctrl show Command
Syntax: switch bcasctrl show
This command displays the broadcast storm control settings. The following shows an example. ras> switch bcastctrl show port broadcast(pkt/s) multicast(pkt/s) uucast(pkt/s)
---- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------sub1 80000 100000 60000 sub2 - - -
up1 - - -
up2 - - ras>
30.5 switch dot3ad Commands
Use the switch dot31d
commands to configure static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
30.5.1 switch dot3ad lacp priority Command
Syntax: switch dot3ad lacp priority <priority> where
<priority>
= LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest system priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the LACP “server”. The
LACP “server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate
Control Protocol (LACP). The smaller the number, the higher the priority level.
This command sets the LACP system priority.
This example sets the MSC1000G’s priority to 1000. ras> switch dot3ad lacp priority 1000
MSC1000G User’s Guide
533
Chapter 30 switch Commands
30.5.2 switch dot3ad lacp timeout Command
Syntax: switch dot3ad lacp priority timeout short|long where timeout short|long
= Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three tries, then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short timeout (one second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible. Select either short (1 second) or long (30 seconds).
This command sets the time interval between exchanging LACP packets.
This example sets the MSC1000G’s to exchange LACP packets with the peer every second ras> switch dot3ad lacp timeout short
30.5.3 switch dot3ad lacp show Command
Syntax: switch dot3ad lacp show
This command displays the MSC1000G’s LACP settings. The following shows an example. ras> switch dot3ad lacp show priority : 1000 time out : short (1 sec) ras>
30.5.4 switch dot3ad enable Command
Syntax: switch dot3ad enable sub|up [lacp] where sub up
[lacp}
= The subtending ports
= The uplink ports.
= Turns on LACP protocol.
This command turns on link aggregation on subtending or uplink ports.
534
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This example sets the MSC to use link aggregation on the subtending ports. This also copies the configuration of subtending port one to subtending port two. The system asks you to confirm if this is what you want to do. ras> switch dot3ad enable sub
Enabling sub trunking will copy configurations of port sub1 to port sub2
Configurations of port sub2 will be lost!
Do you wish to continue? ('y' to continue)
30.5.5 switch dot3ad disable Command
Syntax: switch dot3ad disable sub|up where sub up
= The subtending ports
= The uplink ports.
This command turns off link aggregation on subtending or uplink ports.
This example sets the MSC to not use link aggregation on the uplink ports. ras> switch dot3ad disable up
30.5.6 switch dot3ad show Command
Syntax: switch dot3ad show
This command displays the link aggregation state of the trunk groups.
This command displays the link aggregation state of the subtending and uplink ports.
Here is an example. ras> switch dot3ad show agg enable type port
---- ------ ------ ----------------------------------------------tsub - static sub1 sub2 tup - static up1 up2
“V” displays for trunking groups that have link aggregation enabled “-” displays for ports that do not.
30.6 switch garptimer Commands
Use the switch garptimer
commands to configure GARP timeout periods.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
535
Chapter 30 switch Commands
30.6.1 switch garptimer show Command
Syntax: switch garptimer show
This command displays the MSC1000G’s GARP timer settings, including the join, leave and leave-all timers. An example is shown next.
ras> switch garptimer show join time (ms): 200 leave time (ms): 600 leaveall time (ms): 10000 ras>
30.6.2 switch garptimer join Command
Syntax: switch garptimer join <join msec> where
<join msec>
= This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join
Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds; the default is
200 milliseconds.
This command sets the MSC1000G’s join period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds. ras> switch garptimer join 300
30.6.3 switch garptimer leave Command
Syntax: switch garptimer leave <leave msec> where
<leave msec>
= This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave
Time must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is 600 milliseconds. The allowed Leave Time range is between 201 and
65534 milliseconds; the default is 600 milliseconds.
This command sets the MSC1000G’s leave period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
536
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
The following example sets the Leave Timer to 800 milliseconds. ras> switch garptimer leave 800
30.6.4 switch garptimer leaveall Command
Syntax: switch garptimer leaveall <leaveall msec> where
<leaveall msec>
= This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer.
Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer. The allowed
Leave Time range is between 201 and 65535 milliseconds; the default is 10000 milliseconds.
This command sets the MSC1000G’s leave all period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
The following example sets the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds. ras> switch garptimer leaveall 11000
30.6.5 switch garptimer set Command
Syntax: switch garptimer set <join-msec> <leave-msec> <leaveall-msec> where
<join msec>
<leave msec>
<leaveall msec>
= This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed
Join Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds; the default is 200 milliseconds.
= This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave
Time must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is
600 milliseconds. The allowed Leave Time range is between
201 and 65534 milliseconds; the default is 600 milliseconds.
= This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer.
Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer. The allowed
Leave Time range is between 201 and 65535 milliseconds; the default is 10000 milliseconds.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
537
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This command sets the MSC1000G’s Join, Leave and Leave All timers.
The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds, the Leave Timer to 900 milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 12000 milliseconds. ras> switch garptimer join 300 900 12000
30.7 switch isolation Commands
Use the switch isolation
commands to configure the subscriber isolation feature. Use subscriber isolation to block communications between subscriber ports. When you enable subscriber isolation you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers.
Turn on VLAN isolation to block communications between subscribers in different VLANs if you do not block communications between subscriber ports. For example, you might want to isolate some VLANs (for example, high-speed Internet) and not isolate other VLANs (for example, VoIP).
30.7.1 switch isolation show Command
Syntax: switch isolation show
This command displays the MSC1000G’s subscriber isolation and VLAN isolation settings.
An example is shown next. ras> switch isolation show port isolation :disabled isolated vlan list:
----
5
938
30.7.2 switch isolation enable Command
Syntax: switch isolation enable
This command turns on the MSC1000G’s subscriber isolation setting. An example is shown next. ras> switch isolation enable port isolation :enabled ras>
30.7.3 switch isolation disable Command
Syntax: switch isolation disable
538
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This command turns off the MSC1000G’s subscriber isolation setting. An example is shown next. ras> switch isolation disable port isolation :enabled ras>
30.7.4 switch isolation vlan delete Command
Syntax: switch isolation vlan delete <vid> where
<vid> =
The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
This command turns off per-VLAN isolation for the specified VLAN.
"
Per-VLAN isolation only works when the regular switch isolation feature is disabled (see
Section 30.7.3 on page 538 ).
The following example turns off per-VLAN isolation for VLAN 5.
ras> switch isolation vlan delete 5 ras> switch isolation show port isolation :disabled isolated vlan list:
----
938
30.7.5 switch isolation vlan set Command
Syntax: switch isolation vlan set <vid> where
<vid> =
The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
This command turns on per-VLAN isolation for the specified VLAN.
"
Per-VLAN isolation only works when the regular switch isolation feature is disabled (see
Section 30.7.3 on page 538 ).
539
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
The following example turns on per-VLAN isolation for VLAN 5.
ras> switch isolation vlan set 5 ras> switch isolation show port isolation :disabled isolated vlan list:
----
5
938
30.8 switch mstp Commands
Use the switch mstp
commands to configure multiple spanning tree settings on the system.
30.8.1 switch mstp cfgname Command
Syntax: switch mstp cfgname <config name> where
<config name> =
A unique name (up to 31 characters) that identifies an MST region.
This command sets the switch to belong to the specified MST region.
The following example sets the switch to be a member of the test
MST region. ras> switch mstp cfgname test
30.8.2 switch mstp disable Command
Syntax: switch mstp disable
This command deactivates the MSTP feature on the switch.
30.8.3 switch mstp enable Command
Syntax: switch mstp enable
This command activates the MSTP feature on the system.
30.8.4 switch mstp fwdelay Command
Syntax: switch mstp fwdelay <fwdelay-sec>
540
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This command sets the forward delay period (between 4 and 30 seconds) the switch waits before changing states.
The following example sets the forward delay time to 15 seconds. ras> switch mstp fwdelay 15
30.8.5 switch mstp hellotime Command
Syntax: switch mstp hellotime <hellotime-sec>
This command sets the time interval (between 1 and 10 seconds) between BPDU (Bridge
Protocol Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch.
The following example sets the hello time to 5 seconds. ras> switch mstp hellotime 5
30.8.6 switch mstp maxage Command
Syntax: switch mstp maxage <maxage-sec>
This command sets the maximum time (between 6 and 40 seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure.
The following example sets the maximum age to 20 seconds. ras> switch mstp maxage 20
30.8.7 switch mstp maxhops Command
Syntax: switch mstp maxhops <max-hops>
This command sets the number of hops (between 1 and 255) in an MSTP region before the
BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged.
The following example sets the maximum hop count to 20. After 20 hops (or passing through
20 devices), a BPDU is dropped. ras> switch mstp maxhops 20
30.8.8 switch mstp priority Command
Syntax: switch mstp priority <mstid> <priority>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
541
Chapter 30 switch Commands where
<mstid> =
<priority> =
Index number (between 0-16) to identify a spanning tree instance. For
CIST, enter 0. To identify an MSTI, enter a number between 1 and 16.
Priority level (0 ~ 61440) in increments of 4096. The system automatically rounds the number to the nearest multiples of 4096.
This command sets the priority of the switch for the specific spanning tree instance. The lower the number, the more likely the switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance.
The following example sets the priority of the switch to 24576 in the spanning tree instance
10. ras> switch mstp priority 10 24576
30.8.9 switch mstp revision Command
Syntax: switch mstp revision <revision>
This command sets a number to identify a region’s configuration. Devices must have the same revision level to belong to the same region.
The following example sets the revision number of the switch to 1. ras> switch mstp revision 1
30.8.10 switch mstp show Command
Syntax: switch mstp show
542
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This command displays the general MSTP settings on the switch. The following figure shows an example. ras> switch mstp show config name : test revision level : 1 status : disabled priority : 32768 hello time (s): 5 max age (s): 20 forward delay (s): 15 force version : mstp max hops : 20 msti priority
----- -----------------------------------------------
1- 8 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768
9-16 32768 24576 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 mstid vid
----- -----------------------------------------------
0 1,11-4094
1 2
2 3-10 vid mstid
--------- -----
1 0
2 1
3- 10 2
11-4094 0 ras>
30.8.11 switch mstp version Command
Syntax: switch mstp version <rstp|mstp>
This command sets the system to use and send BPDUs for the specified spanning tree protocol.
The following example sets the spanning tree protocol to RSTP. ras> switch mstp version rstp
30.8.12 switch mstp vlanmap Command
Syntax: switch mstp vlanmap <mstid> <start_vid> <end_vid>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
543
544
Chapter 30 switch Commands where
<mstid> =
<start_vid> =
<end_vid> =
Index number (between 0-16) to identify a spanning tree instance.
For CIST, enter 0. To identify an MSTI, enter a number between 1 and 16.
Start of the VLAN range.
End of the VLAN range.
This command creates a mapping of the specified VLAN range and spanning tree instance.
You can map multiple VLANs to the same spanning tree instance. You cannot map a VLAN to multiple spanning tree instances. Devices in the same MST region must have the same VLANto-MST instance mapping(s).
"
Make sure the VLAN(s) is not already configured for multicasting or VLAN stacking.
The following example maps VLAN 2 to instance 1 and the VLAN range (3~10) to instance 2. ras> switch mstp vlanmap 1 2 2 ras> switch mstp vlanmap 2 3 10
30.9 switch port Commands
Use these commands to manage the MSC1000G’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
30.9.1 switch port disable Command
Syntax: switch port disable <giga-port>
This command turns off data transmission on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example turns off the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface. ras> switch port disable sub1
30.9.2 DSCP Overview
DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) is a field used for packet classification on DiffServ networks.
The higher the value, the higher the priority. Lower-priority packets may be dropped if the total traffic exceeds the capacity of the network.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
30.9.3 switch port dscp Commands
Use the switch port DSCP
commands to show and configure the DSCP mapping and
DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
30.9.3.1 switch port dscp disable Command
Syntax: switch port dscp disable <giga-port>
This command turns off DSCP to DSCP mapping and DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping on a
Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example turns off DSCP to DSCP mapping and DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping on the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface. ras> switch port dscp disable sub1
30.9.3.2 switch port dscp enable Command
Syntax: switch port dscp enable <giga-port>
This command turns on DSCP to DSCP mapping and DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping on a
Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example turns on DSCP to DSCP mapping and DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping on the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface. ras> switch port dscp enable sub1
30.9.3.3 switch port dscp set Command
Syntax: switch port dscp set <giga-port> <srccp> <mapcp> <mappri> where
<srccp>
<mapcp>
<mappri>
Specify a source DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) or points, 0~63. For example: 1,3~5,10~15
Specify the DSCP (0~63) to which you want to map the source
DSCP (or DSCPs).
Specify the IEEE 802.1p priority (0~7) to which you would like to map the source DSCP (or DSCPs).
This command configures DSCP to DSCP mapping and DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping on a
Gigabit Ethernet interface. You can change the DSCP of received (IEEE 802.1p tagged) packets to a different DSCP. You can also map it to a specific IEEE 802.1p priority.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
545
Chapter 30 switch Commands
The following example sets subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface to map packets with a source DSCP of 7 to a DSCP of 5 and a IEEE 802.1p priority of 1. ras> switch port dscp set sub1 7 5 1
30.9.3.4 switch port dscp show Command
Syntax: switch port dscp show [<giga-port>]
This command displays the DSCP to DSCP mapping and DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping settings on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example displays the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface’s DSCP to DSCP mapping and DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping settings. ras> switch port dscp show sub1 sub1 dscp mapping(codepoint/priority): disabled
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
00 0/0 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 5/0 6/0 5/1 8/1 9/1
10 10/1 11/1 12/1 13/1 14/1 15/1 16/2 17/2 18/2 19/2
20 20/2 21/2 22/2 23/2 24/3 25/3 26/3 27/3 28/3 29/3
30 30/3 31/3 32/4 33/4 34/4 35/4 36/4 37/4 38/4 39/4
40 40/5 41/5 42/5 43/5 44/5 45/5 46/5 47/5 48/6 49/6
50 50/6 51/6 52/6 53/6 54/6 55/6 56/7 57/7 58/7 59/7
60 60/7 61/7 62/7 63/7
The top row and first column identify the source DSCP. The other rows identify the DSCP to which the source DSCP is mapped followed by the IEEE 802.1p priority to which it is mapped. The bolded section in this example shows that packets received with a DSCP of 7 get their code point changed to 5 and are given an IEEE 802.1p priority of 1.
30.9.4 switch port enable Command
Syntax: switch port enable <giga-port>
This command turns on data transmission on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example turns on the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface. ras> switch port enable sub1
30.9.5 switch port flowctrl disable Command
Syntax: switch port flowctrl disable <giga-port>
This command turns off flow control on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
546
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
The following example turns off the flow control on the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface. ras> switch port flowctrl disable sub1
30.9.6 switch port flowctrl enable Command
Syntax: switch port flowctrl enable <giga-port>
This command turns on flow control on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example turns on the flow control on the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface. .
Figure 192 switch port flowctrl enable Command Example ras> switch port flowctrl enable sub1
30.9.7 switch port frametype Command
Syntax: switch port frametype <giga-port> all|tag where all|tag =
Specifies all Ethernet frames (tagged and untagged) or only tagged
Ethernet frames.
This command sets the specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE
802.1Q VLAN tag.
The following example sets ports the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface to accept only tagged frames. ras switch port frametype sub1 tag
30.9.8 switch port gvrp Commands
Use the switch port gvrp
commands to configure GVRP settings for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
30.9.8.1 switch port gvrp disable Command
Syntax: switch port gvrp disable <giga-port>
This command turns off GVRP on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
547
Chapter 30 switch Commands
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Disable GVRP to have the MSC1000G not propagate VLAN information to other devices.
The following example turns off GVRP on the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface.
ras> switch port gvrp disable sub1
30.9.8.2 switch port gvrp enable Command
Syntax: switch port gvrp enable <giga-port>
This command turns on GVRP on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. The MSC1000G propagates VLAN information to other devices when you enable GVRP.
The following example turns on GVRP on the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface.
ras> switch port gvrp enable sub1
30.9.9 switch port mode Command
Syntax: switch port mode sub1|sub2|up1|up2 <uplink|subtend>
This command sets a Gigabit Ethernet interface to function as uplink or subtending.
The following example sets the subtending 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface to uplink mode. ras> switch port mode sub1 uplink
30.9.10 switch port mstp Commands
Use the switch port mstp
commands to configure multiple spanning tree settings for the
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
30.9.10.1 switch port mstp disable Command
Syntax: switch port mstp disable sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all <mstid> where
<mstid>
= A unique number to identify an MST region. Enter 0 to for
CIST. For MSTI, enter a number between 1 and 16.
This command disables MSTP on the specified Gigabit Ethernet interface port (or all of them) in the specified spanning tree instance. All MSTP packets to/from the specified spanning tree instance will be dropped on the port.
548
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
The following example disables MSTP on unlink port 1 in spanning tree instance 2. ras> switch port mstp disable up1 2
30.9.10.2 switch port mstp edgeport Command
Syntax: switch port mstp edgeport <giga-port> <mstid> <enable|disable>
This command enables or disables the specified Gigabit Ethernet interface as an edge port that connects to a non-SPT device (such as a computer or hub).
The following example sets subtending port 2 as an edge port. ras> switch port mstp edgeport sub2 enable
30.9.10.3 switch port mstp enable Command
Syntax: switch port mstp enable sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all <mstid>
This command sets the specified Gigabit Ethernet interface to participate in the spanning tree instance.
The following example activates MSTP on all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in the spanning tree instance 3. ras> switch port mstp enable all 3
30.9.10.4 switch port mstp p2plink Command
Syntax: switch port mstp p2plink <giga-port> auto|enable|disable where auto enable disable
= The switch automatically determines if the link is point-to-point based on the port’s duplex mode setting.
= Activates this feature on a full-duplex port that is connected directly to another switch port.
= Deactivates this feature on the port that is in half-duplex mode.
Enable a point-to-point link between Gigabit Ethernet interfaces to increase the speed of convergence by allowing the network to determine the designated port faster. The port must be connected directly to another switch port.
The following example activates point-to-point link on uplink port 2. ras> switch port mstp p2plink up2 enable
MSC1000G User’s Guide
549
Chapter 30 switch Commands
30.9.10.5 switch port mstp pathcost Command
Syntax: switch port mstp pathcost <giga-port> <mstid> <cost>
This command sets the path cost of the specified Gigabit Ethernet interface in the spanning tree. The path cost can be between 0 and 200000000. A smaller number means a lower path cost. For paths with the same priority, the switch will select the one on lower interface number first. 0 sets the system automatically determines the path cost based on the line speed.
The following example sets the path cost of uplink interface 1 to 200 in spanning tree 10. ras> switch port mstp pathcost up1 10 200
30.9.10.6 switch port mstp priority Command
Syntax: switch port mstp priority <giga-port> |all <mstid> <priority>
This command sets the priority (between 0 and 255 in multiples of 16) of the Gigabit Ethernet interface in the specified spanning tree. When a loop occurs and two root ports have the same cost, the port with higher priority (lower numerical value) becomes the root port and the other port becomes an alternate port. For ports with the same priority, the switch will select the one on lower interface number first.
The following example sets the port priority of uplink interface 1 to 16 in spanning tree 10. ras> switch port mstp priority up1 10 16
30.9.10.7 switch port mstp show Command
Syntax: switch port mstp show <mstid> [<end_mstid>]
This command displays the specified MSTP’s settings on each Gigabit Ethernet interface. The following example displays the port MSTP setting for spanning tree 10. ras> switch port mstp show 10
[msti 10] port en prio pathcost
---- ---- ---- --------sub1 - 128 0 sub2 - 128 0
up1 V 128 16
up2 - 128 0
30.9.11 switch port name Command
Syntax: switch port name <giga-port> <name>
550
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands where
<name>
= A name to identify the port.
This command sets the name of a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example sets the name of uplink interface 1 to xyz
.
ras> switch port name up1 xyz
30.9.12 switch port priority Command
Syntax: switch port priority <giga-port> <priority> where
<priority>
= The default ingress priority (0~7).
This command sets the default ingress user priority of a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The following example sets the default priority of uplink interface 1 to 3.
ras> switch port priority up1 3
30.9.13 switch port pvid Command
Syntax: switch port pvid <giga-port> <vid> where
<pvid>
= The default Port VLAN ID (PVID) assigned to untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port. 1~4094.
This command sets the Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames (0 VID) received on this port(s).
The following example sets the PVID of uplink interface 1 to 76. ras> switch port pvid up1 76
30.9.14 switch port show Command
Syntax: switch port show
MSC1000G User’s Guide
551
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This command displays the settings for the MSC1000G’s Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. An example is shown next. ras> switch port show port name en mode speed fc pvid prio gvrp ftype vt dscp
----- --------------- ---- ---- ------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ----- ---- ----
sub1 Subtend1 V up auto - 1 0 - all - -
sub2 Subtend2 V up auto - 1 0 - all - -
up1 Uplink1 V up auto - 1 0 - all - -
up2 Uplink2 V up auto - 1 0 - all - -
30.9.15 switch port speed Command
Syntax: switch port speed <giga-port> <speed> where
<giga-port>
<speed>
= This represents 1000BaseT uplink ports. The port speed is fixed for subtending ports and/or SFP slots that use a fiber-optic interface. Use up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use tup|all if trunking is enabled.
= The port’s speed and duplex mode.
Use auto|1000F|100F|100H
.
Auto or 1000 (Mbps) or 100 (Mbps) is to match the port speed of the WAN switch to which this port is to connect.
F is for full duplex communications or H for half duplex communications.
This command sets the port speed and duplex of a 1000BaseT uplink port(s).
The following example sets the speed of the uplink 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface to 1000 Mbps and the duplex to full.
ras> switch port speed up1 1000F
30.10 switch port vlantrunk Commands
Use these commands to turn VLAN trunking on or off for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
30.10.1 switch port vlantrunk enable Command
Syntax: switch port vlantrunk enable <giga-port>
552
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands where
<giga-port>
= This represents Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, subtending ports or all ports. Use sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use tsub|tup|all if trunking is enabled.
This command sets a Gigabit Ethernet interface(s) to use VLAN trunking in order to accept frames with any VID.
The following example sets the subtending 1Gigabit Ethernet interface to use VLAN trunking.
ras> switch port vlantrunk enable sub1
30.10.2 switch port vlantrunk disable Command
Syntax: switch port vlantrunk disable <giga-port> where
<giga-port>
= This represents Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, subtending ports or all ports. Use sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use tsub|tup|all if trunking is enabled.
This command sets a Gigabit Ethernet interface(s) to not use VLAN trunking so the port only accepts frames with registered VIDs.
The following example sets the subtending 1Gigabit Ethernet interface to not use VLAN trunking.
ras> switch port vlantrunk disable sub1
30.11 switch qschedule Commands
Use these commands to set a port’s queuing method and/or priority weight.
30.11.1 switch qschedule set Command
Syntax: switch qschedule set <giga-port> spq or
<giga-port> wrr <wt0> <wt1> <wt2> <wt3> <wt4> <wt5> <wt6> <wt7>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
553
Chapter 30 switch Commands where spq wrr
= Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue begins.
= Weighted Round Robin services queues based on their priority and queue weight. WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle.
= The priority weight for each queue, 0~15.
<wt0> <wt1>
<wt2> <wt3>
<wt4> <wt5>
<wt6> <wt7>
This command sets a Gigabit Ethernet interface’s queuing method and/or priority weight.
The following example sets the subtending interface 1 to use strict priority queuing.
ras> switch qschedule set sub1 spq
30.11.2 switch qschedule show Command
Syntax: switch qschedule show
This command shows the queuing methods and/or priority weights of the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. This is an example. ras> switch qschedule show port algo_type wt0 wt1 wt2 wt3 wt4 wt5 wt6 wt7
----- --------- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
sub1 spq - - - - - - - -
sub2 spq - - - - - - - -
up1 spq - - - - - - - -
up2 spq - - - - - - - -
30.12 switch queuemap Commands
Use these commands to set the priorities of the individual queues.
30.12.1 switch queuemap set Command
Syntax: switch queuemap set <priority> <queue> where
<priority>
<queue>
= The IEEE 802.1p priority for each queue, 0~7.
= A physical queue in the MSC1000G, 0~7.
554
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 30 switch Commands
This command sets the MSC1000G to use a particular queue for traffic of a specific IEEE
802.1p priority.
The following example sets the MSC1000G to use queue 3 for traffic with priority 3. ras> switch queuemap set 3 3
30.12.2 switch queuemap show Command
Syntax: switch queuemap show
This command shows which queue the MSC1000G uses for traffic of each priority. The following is an example.
ras> switch queuemap show priority queue
-------- -----
0 2
1 0
2 1
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7 ras>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
555
Chapter 30 switch Commands
556
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
31
sys Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the sys
commands.
31.1 sys Commands Overview
The sys
commands are for system management and maintenance.
31.2
sys
Commands Summary
The following table lists the sys
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 185 sys Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
sys baud
Sets the console port speed.
M chsh client date info set
9600|19200|3
8400|57600|1
15200 show
[engsh|stdsh
] disable enable set
<index>
<index>
<index> <start-ip>
<end-ip> [telnet]
[ftp] [web] [icmp]
[ssh] [snmp] show set <yyyy> <mm> <dd> show chassis <chassis> contact <contact> frame <frame> hostname <hostname>
Displays the console port speed.
Changes to normal or privileged command shell.
Turns off a secured client set.
Turns on a secured client set.
Sets a group of trusted computers from which you can manage the switch.
Displays the secured client sets.
Sets the system date.
Displays the current system date.
L
Sets the system chassis number (1~64).
M
L
M
Sets contact person information.
Sets the system frame number.
Sets the system name.
M
M
M
M
M
M
L
H
MSC1000G User’s Guide
557
Chapter 31 sys Commands
Table 185 sys Commands (continued)
COMMAND
monitor location <location> show set show multilogin disable enable reboot server snmp show
[show]
<sec>
[cancel] enable telnet|ssh|ftp|web
|icmp|snmp disable telnet|ssh|ftp|web
|icmp|snmp port telnet|ftp|web|snm p|ssh <port> show getcommunity <community> setcommunity <community> show
<community> trapcommunit y trapdst <index>
<destination>
[<port>]
[v1|v2c|v3]
[<name>] user <name> noauth|auth|priv md5|sha des|aes
DESCRIPTION
Sets the geographic location of the system.
Displays general system and MSC1000G information.
Sets the hardware monitor threshold settings.
P
M
L
M
<slot>
<volt|temp|fan|cup
> <index> <highlimit> <low-limit>
<slot>
Displays the hardware monitor threshold settings of a slot.
Turns off multiple concurrent logins.
Turns on multiple concurrent logins.
Displays the multiple login setting.
Restarts the system.
Displays the reboot schedule.
Sets the number of seconds
(1~2147483647) before the system reboots. If there is no time specified, the system reboots immediately.
Aborts the scheduled system rebooting.
Turns on service access to the switch.
Turns off service access to the switch.
Sets a port for a service.
Displays service access control settings.
Sets the SNMP GetRequest community.
Sets the SNMP SetRequest community.
Displays SNMP settings.
Sets the SNMP Trap community.
Sets the IP addresses and listening ports for up to four SNMP trap server IP addresses and listening ports. Set 0.0.0.0 to not send any SNMP traps.
<name> = username to be included in trap packets. Only applicable for V3.
Sets SNMPv3 user name and security settings. noauth = disables user authentication and data encryption. auth = enables user authentication. pri = enables user authentication and data encryption. md5|sha = authentication method. des|aes = encryption method.
L
L
H
M
M
H
H
H
M
M
M
L
M
M
L
M
M
M
558
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
Table 185 sys Commands (continued)
COMMAND
version v2c|v3|v3v2c
DESCRIPTION
Sets the system to use the specified
SNMP version and access. v2c = SNMPv2 read/write v3 = SNMPv3 read/write v3v2c = SNMPv3 read/write and
SNMPv2 read-only. syslog disable enable
Turns off syslog logging.
Turns on syslog logging.
Sets the log facility (local1~local7) to log the syslog messages to a specific file in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details. Sets the syslog server IP address.
Displays the syslog settings.
time show set show timeserver set user show sync
<hh> [<mm> [<ss>]] Sets the system time.
Displays the current system time.
Clears the time server settings.
none daytime <ip>
[sync] or time|ntp <ip>
<utc[<+|-
>0100~1200]>
[sync]
Sets the time service protocol and IP address of a time server.
[sync] = Gets the time and date.
Displays the time server settings.
Gets the time and date from a predefined time server.
auth <mode>
Select which database the switch uses to authenticate a user.
3 = local then radius.
1 = local, 2 = radius,
Removes a user account.
delete <name> disable <name> enable <name> online
Stops a user from logging in.
Allows a user to log in.
Displays information about online users that are logged into the switch. * denotes your session.
L
M
P
M
M
M
M
L
M
L
M
M
H
H
L
H
H
MSC1000G User’s Guide
559
Chapter 31 sys Commands
Table 185 sys Commands (continued)
COMMAND
version show
<secret>
[high|middle|low|d eny]
DESCRIPTION
Sets a RADIUS server’s IP address and port number and the password to access the server.
low = assigns the login accounts a low privilege level if the received service type is “login”. medium = assigns the login accounts a medium privilege level if the received service type is “nas-prompt”. high = assign the login accounts a high privilege level if the received service type is “admin”. deny = block access from this login account if no service type is received.
<password>
Sets a user account and its level of access privileges.
high|middle|low
Displays authentication settings and user accounts.
Displays the MSC1000G’s general information such as the model name and firmware version.
P
H
H
L
L
31.3 sys Commands
Use these commands for system management and maintenance.
31.3.1 sys version Command
Syntax: sys version
This command displays general information about the MSC1000G such as the model name and firmware version. This is an example. ras> sys version
[master card version info] product model : MSC1000G system up time : 1:00:13:39 f/w version : V3.70(LU.0) | 11/29/2006 bootbase version: VLU1.02 | 04/01/2005 database version : 09:16:57 2006/12/14
31.3.2 sys baud set Command
Syntax: sys baud set 9600|19200|38400|57600|115200
This command sets the console port speed in bps.
560
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
The following example sets the console port speed to 115200 bps. ras> sys baud set 115200
31.3.3 sys baud show Command
Syntax: sys baud show
This command displays the console port speed. This is an example. ras> sys baud show current baud rate is: 115200 ras>
31.3.4 sys client set Command
Syntax: sys client set <index> <start-ip> <end-ip> [telnet] [ftp] [web] [icmp] [ssh]
[snmp]
This command configures a secured client entry consisting of an IP address range of trusted computers that may manage the IES-5000 and the services that they can use.
4
The following example creates a client set for IP addresses 192.138.1.7 to 192.168.1.35 to use
FTP to manage the MSC1000G. ras> sys client set 1 192.168.1.7 192.168.1.35 ftp
31.3.5 sys client enable Command
Syntax: sys client enable <index>
This command turns on a secured client set.
The following example turns on secured client set 1. ras> sys client enable 1
31.3.6 sys client disable Command
Syntax: sys client disable <index>
This command turns off a secured client set.
4.
Web-based management was not available at the time of writing.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
561
Chapter 31 sys Commands
The following example turns off secured client set 1. ras> sys client disable 1
31.3.7 sys client show Command
Syntax: sys client show
This command displays the secured client settings. These are the IP addresses of trusted computers that can manage the MSC1000G and the services that they can use.
An example is shown next. A “V” in a column means that the secured client set is activated or the services can be used for managing the MSC1000G.
ras> sys client show secured client: idx enable start ip end ip telnet ftp web icmp ssh snmp
--- ------ --------------- --------------- ------ --- --- ---- --- ----
1 yes 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 V V V V V V
2 no 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 - - - - - -
3 no 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 - - - - - -
4 no 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 - - - - - ras>
31.3.8 sys time show Command
Syntax: sys time show
This command displays the system’s current time. An example is shown next. ras> sys time show current time is 17:57:01 ras>
31.3.9 sys time set Command
Syntax: sys time set <hh> [<mm> [<ss>]]
This command sets the system’s time. An example is shown next. ras> sys time set 10 01 45
31.3.10 sys date show Command
Syntax: sys date show
562
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
This command displays the system’s current date. An example is shown next.
ras> sys date show current date is Wed 2006/01/25 ras>
31.3.11 sys date set Command
Syntax: sys date set <yyyy> <mm> <dd>
This command sets the system’s date. An example is shown next.
ras> sys date set 2006 01 27
31.3.12 sys timeserver show Command
Syntax: sys timeserver show
This command displays the system’s time server settings. An example is shown next. ras> sys timeserver show protocol: none server : 0.0.0.0
timezone: utc ras>
31.3.13 sys timeserver set Command
Syntax: sys timeserver none sys timeserver daytime <ip> [sync] sys timeserver time|ntp <ip> <utc[<+|->0100~1200]> [sync] where none daytime
= Sets the system to not use a time server.
= The Daytime time service protocol (RFC 867). When you select this format, the switch displays the day, month, year and time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
563
Chapter 31 sys Commands time|ntp
<ip>
<utc[<+|->
0100~1200]>
[sync]
= The time service protocol.
<time>
Time (RFC 868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
<ntp>
NTP Network Time Protocol (RFC 1305) is similar to
Time (RFC 868).
= The IP address of the time server.
= The time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly known as GMT, Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone.
= This sets the system to synchronize with the time server.
This command sets the MSC1000G to use a time server.
The following example sets the MSC1000G to use NTP protocol to access a time server at IP address 140.112.2.189 and sets the MSC1000G’s time zone to eight hours ahead of UTC. It also has the system synchronize the time with the time server. ras> sys timeserver set ntp 140.112.2.189 utc +0800 sync sync with time server...success ras>
31.3.14 sys timeserver sync Command
Syntax: sys timeserver sync
This command has the MSC1000G get the time and date from the time server. An example is shown next. ras> sys timeserver sync sync with time server...success
ras>
31.3.15 sys info chassis Command
Syntax: sys info chassis <chassis> where
<chassis>
= The chassis number (an integer from 1 to 64). The chassis number helps to keep track of this individual unit in a multiple unit application.
This command sets the system chassis number.
564
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
The following example sets the system’s chassis number to 3. ras> sys info chassis 3
31.3.16 sys info contact Command
Syntax: sys info contact <contact> where
<contact>
= The name (up to 31 characters) and contact information of the person in charge of this device.
This command sets the system contact person information.
The following example sets Bob_ext1234 as the system’s contact person information. ras> sys info contact Bob_ext1234
31.3.17 sys info frame Command
Syntax: sys info frame <frame> where
<frame>
= Number (an integer from 1 to 65535) of the frame (rack) where the system is installed.
This command sets the system’s frame number.
The following example sets 12345 as the system’s frame number. ras> sys info frame 12345
31.3.18 sys info hostname Command
Syntax: sys info hostname <hostname> where
<hostname>
= A descriptive name for identification purposes. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long.
This command sets the system name.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
565
Chapter 31 sys Commands
The following example sets “OurSystem” as the system’s name.
ras> sys info hostname OurSystem
31.3.19 sys info location Command
Syntax: sys info location <location> where
<location>
= The geographic location (up to 31 characters) of your device.
This command sets the geographic location of the system.
The following example sets Taiwan as the system’s geographic location. ras> sys info location Taiwan
31.3.20 sys info show Command
Syntax: sys info show
This command shows general system information, such as the RAS code, firmware version, system uptime and bootbase version. An example is shown next.
ras> sys info show
[system info] hostname : location : contact : frame : chassis :
[master card version info] product model : MSC1000G system up time : 01:28:29 f/w version : V3.70(AIN.0)b6 | 11/16/2006 bootbase version: VAIN(1.02) | 07/25/2006 database version : 18:28:38 2006/11/13ras>
31.3.21 sys monitor set Command
Syntax: sys monitor set <slot> volt|temp|fan|cpu <index> <high-limit> <low-limit>
566
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands where
<slot> volt|temp| fan|cpu
<index>
= The main chassis slot where the card is located. Use the slot number of the MSC1000G when you configure the fan limits.
= voltage
= Set the voltage tolerance range.
temp
= Set the temperature tolerance range.
fan
= Set the rotations per minute (RPM) tolerance range for a fan.
cpu
= Set the threshold for CPU usage.
= The index number of the sensor.
The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range. The card voltage sensors are as follows.
MSC1000G: 1 = 2.5 V, 2 = 1.25 V, 3 = 3.3 V, 4 = 1.3 V, 5 = 15 V
ADSL line card: 1 = 1.2 V, 2 = 1.8 V, 3 = 3.3 V, 4 = 20.5 V
SHDSL line card: 1 = 1.8 V, 2 = 3.3 V, 3 = 15.0 V
The management switch card has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold.
Each card has three temperature sensors (1~3).
Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold of 2000 RPM.
The system has six fans (1~6).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
567
Chapter 31 sys Commands
<highlimit>
<low-limit>
= A sensor’s maximum voltage, temperature or fan RPM limit.
The maximum voltage for each voltage sensor must be within the following ranges. Measured in millivolts (mV).
MSC1000G: 1 = 2575~2750, 2 = 1287~1375, 3 = 3399~3630, 4 =
1339~1430, 5 = 15450~16500
ADSL line card: 1 = 1236~1320, 2 = 1854~1980, 3 = 3399~3630,
4 = 21115~22550
SHDSL line card 1 = 1854~1980, 2 = 3399~3630, 3 =
15450~16500
The maximum temperature for each temperature sensor must be within 50~100 (degrees centigrade).
The maximum RPM for each fan must be within 1000~8000.
= A sensor’s minimum voltage, temperature or fan RPM limit.
The minimum voltage for each voltage sensor must be within the following ranges. Measured in millivolts (mV).
MSC1000G:1= 2250~2425, 2 = 1125~1212, 3 = 2970~3201, 4 =
1170~1261, 5 = 13500~14550.
ADSL line card: 1= 1080~1164, 2 = 1620~1746, 3 = 2970~3201, 4
= 18450~19885
SHDSL line card: 1 = 1620~1746, 2 = 2970~3201, 3 =
13500~14550
The minimum temperature for each temperature sensor must be within -50~10 (degrees centigrade).
The minimum RPM for each fan must be within 1000~8000.
This commands sets the hardware monitor high and low thresholds.
The following example sets fan 1’s maximum RPM threshold to 7500 and minimum RPM threshold to 5000. The MSC1000G is in slot 2. ras> sys monitor set 2 fan 1 7500 5000
31.3.22 sys monitor show command
Syntax: sys monitor show <slot> where
<slot>
= The main chassis slot where the card is located. The fan statistics are included with the MSC1000G statistics.
This command displays the hardware monitor’s statistics.
568
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
The following example shows the MSC1000G statistics. ras> sys monitor show 2
'*' indicates a current alarm voltage: idx volt current nominal high_lmt low_lmt
--- ---------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
1 2.5V 2.582 2.500 2.700 2.300
2 1.25V 1.236 1.250 1.350 1.150
3 3.3V 3.338 3.300 3.564 3.036
4 1.3V 1.341 1.300 1.404 1.196
5 15V 15.159 15.000 16.200 13.800
temperature: idx temperature current high_lmt low_lmt
--- ---------------- -------- -------- --------
1 Temp1 43.000 65.000 -10.000
2 Temp2 48.750 65.000 -10.000
3 Temp3 53.000 65.000 -10.000
fan: idx fan speed current high_lmt low_lmt
--- ---------------- -------- -------- --------
1 *FAN1 0 6500 2000
2 *FAN2 0 6500 2000
3 *FAN3 0 6500 2000
4 *FAN4 0 6500 2000
5 *FAN5 0 6500 2000
6 *FAN6 0 6500 2000 ras>
31.3.23 sys multilogin enable Command
Syntax: sys multilogin enable
This command turns on multiple login. Multiple login allows multiple administrators to be logged into the system at the same time. The following table describes how many sessions can be used at the same time.
Table 186 Multiple Login Overview
Console Port SSH Telnet Web (HTTP) FTP/SFTP SNMP ICMP
One session.
SSH and Telnet share four sessions. SSH has priority.
Multiple users can login using the same user name and password.
Three sessions
(one session per user account)
One session
No limit No limit
The following is an example.
ras> sys multilogin enable
31.3.24 sys multilogin disable Command
Syntax: sys multilogin disable
MSC1000G User’s Guide
569
Chapter 31 sys Commands
This command turns off multiple login. The following is an example.
ras> sys multilogin disable
31.3.25 sys multilogin show Command
Syntax: sys multilogin show
This command displays the multiple login setting. The following is an example. ras> sys multilogin show multilogin is enabled ras>
31.3.26 sys reboot Command
Syntax: sys reboot [show] <sec> [cancel] where
[show]
<sec>
[cancel]
= Displays the reboot schedule.
= The number of seconds (1~2147483647) before the system reboots. If there is no time specified, the system reboots immediately.
= Aborts the scheduled system rebooting.
This command restarts the system.
The following example shows the administrator at IP address 172.23.19.11 ordering a reboot to occur after 1200 seconds, displaying the reboot
schedule and then canceling the reboot
. ras> sys reboot 1200 telnet-1(172.23.19.11) has initiated reboot, system reboot in 1200 seconds!
ras> sys reboot show issued by remaining time issue time
-------------------------- -------------- -----------------------telnet-1(172.23.19.11) 1196 Wed Jun 8 15:26:54 2005 ras> sys reboot cancel telnet-1(172.23.19.11) has cancelled system reboot!
570
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
31.3.27 sys server port Command
Syntax: sys server port telnet|ftp|web|snmp|ssh <port>
This command changes the port for a service on the MSC1000G.
The following example sets the MSC1000G to use port 24 for Telnet sessions.
ras> sys server port telnet 24
31.3.28 sys server disable Command
Syntax: sys server enable telnet|ftp|web|snmp|ssh
This command turns off access for a service on the MSC1000G.
The following example sets the MSC1000G to block Telnet sessions.
ras> sys server disable telnet
31.3.29 sys server enable Command
Syntax: sys server enable telnet|ftp|web|snmp|ssh
This command turns on access for a service on the MSC1000G.
The following example sets the MSC1000G to allow Telnet sessions.
ras> sys server enable telnet
31.3.30 sys server show Command
Syntax: sys server show
This command displays the MSC1000G’s service access control settings. The following is an example. ras> sys server show server status port
------ ------ ----telnet V 23 ftp V 21 web V 80 icmp V snmp V 161 ssh V 22 ras>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
571
Chapter 31 sys Commands
31.4 sys snmp Commands
Use these commands to configure the MSC1000G’s SNMP settings.
31.4.1 sys snmp getcommunity Command
Syntax: sys snmp getcommunity <community> where
<community>
= The password for the incoming Get- and GetNext- requests from the management station.
Enter this command with the community to set the password.
The following example sets the password for incoming Get- and GetNext requests to
“Get123”.
ras> sys snmp getcommunity Get123
31.4.2 sys snmp setcommunity Command
Syntax: sys snmp setcommunity <community> where
<community>
= The password for the incoming Set- requests from the management station.
Enter this command with the community to set the password.
The following example sets the password for incoming Set- requests to “Set123”.
ras> sys snmp setcommunity Set123
31.4.3 sys snmp trapcommunity Command
Syntax: sys snmp trapcommunity <community> where
<community>
= The password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager.
Enter this command with the community to set the password.
572
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
The following example sets the MSC1000G to send a password of “public” with the traps it sends to the SNMP manager. ras> sys snmp trapcommunity public
31.4.4 sys snmp trapdst Command
Syntax: sys snmp trapdst <index> <ip> [<port>] [v1|v2|v3] [<name>] where
<index>
<ip>
[<port>]
[v1|v2c|v3]
[<name>]
= The number of the trap server (1~4).
= The IP address of the trap server.
= The port number upon which the trap server listens for SNMP traps.
The MSC1000G uses the default of 162 if you do not specify a trap port.
= Format of the SNMP trap PDU (Protocol Data Unit) to be sent. The default is v2c
.
= The username to be included in the trap PDUs. This is only applicable for SNMPv3.
Use this command to specify the IP address (and port number) of a trap server to which the
MSC1000G sends SNMP traps. If you leave the trap destination set to 0.0.0.0 (default), the
MSC1000G will not send any SNMP traps.
The following example sets the MSC1000G to send traps to a server at IP address
192.168.1.36. The traps are sent using SNMP v3 and include the user name example
. ras> sys snmp trapdst 1 192.168.1.36 v3 example
31.4.5 sys snmp show Command
Syntax: sys snmp show
MSC1000G User’s Guide
573
Chapter 31 sys Commands
This command displays the current SNMP get community, set community, trap community and trap destination settings. The following is an example. ras> sys snmp show
[community] get community : Get123 set community : Set123 trap community: public
[trap destination]
1: 192.168.1.36:162
2: 0.0.0.0:0
3: 0.0.0.0:0
4: 0.0.0.0:0 ras>
31.4.6 sys snmp user Command
Syntax: sys snmp user <name> noauth|auth|priv md5|sha des|aes where
<name> noauth auth priv md5|sha des|aes
= Disables ( noauth
) SNMPv3 user authentication and encryption for
SNMP communication.
= Enables SNMPv3 user authentication.
= Enables SNMPv3 user authentication and encryption for SNMP communication using a private key generated from the password.
= Authentication method. MD5 (Message Digest 5) produces a 128-bit digest to authenticate packet data. SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) produces a 160-bit digest to authenticate packet data.
Use md5
for minimal security and sha
for maximum security.
= Encryption method. Data Encryption Standard (DES) is a widely used method of data encryption using a secret key. DES applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data.
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is a newer method of data encryption that also uses a secret key. AES is more secure than DES.
This command sets the user authentication and data encryption settings for SNMPv3. The following example enables SNMPv3 SHA user authentication with AES data encryption. ras> sys snmp user example auth sha aes
574
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands
31.4.7 sys snmp version Command
Syntax: sys snmp version v2c|v3|v3v2c where v2c|v3|v3v2c
= Sets the SNMP version and access mode. v2c
= SNMPv2 read/write v3
= SNMPv3 read/write with additional user authentication and data encryption options. v3v2c
= SNMPv3 read/write and SNMPv2 read-only.
This command sets the system to use the specified SNMP version and access mode.
The following example configures the system to use SNMPv3 with read-only access for
SNMPv2. ras> sys snmp version v3v2c
31.5 sys syslog Commands
Use these commands to configure the MSC1000G’s syslog settings.
31.5.1 sys syslog server Command
Syntax: sys syslog server <fac> <ip> where
<fac>
<ip>
= Sets the log facility (local1~local7) to log the syslog messages to a specific file in the syslog server. See your syslog program’s documentation for details. Sets the syslog server IP address.
= The IP address of the syslog server.
This command sets the syslog server’s IP address and log facility.
The following example sets a syslog server log facility of 3 and IP address of 192.168.1.43. ras> sys syslog server local3 192.168.1.43
31.5.2 sys syslog enable Command
Syntax: sys syslog enable
MSC1000G User’s Guide
575
Chapter 31 sys Commands
This command sets the MSC1000G to send logs to an external syslog server. An example is shown next. ras> sys syslog enable
31.5.3 sys syslog disable Command
Syntax: sys syslog disable
This command sets the MSC1000G to not send logs to an external syslog server. An example is shown next. ras> sys syslog disable
31.5.4 sys syslog show Command
Syntax: sys syslog show
This command displays the syslog settings. An example is shown next. ras> sys syslog show status : disabled facility server ip
-------- --------------local1 0.0.0.0
local2 0.0.0.0
local3 192.168.1.43
local4 0.0.0.0
local5 0.0.0.0
local6 0.0.0.0
local7 0.0.0.0
ras>
31.6 sys user Commands
Use these commands to configure the MSC1000G’s administrator account and authentication settings.
31.6.1 sys user auth Command
Syntax: sys user auth <mode>
576
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 31 sys Commands where
<mode>
= Sets which database the switch uses to authenticate a user.
4:tacacs+, 5:local then tacacs+
1
= local
2
= radius
3
= local first and then radius
4 =
TACACS+
5 = local first then
TACACS+
This command sets which database the MSC1000G uses to authenticate a user.
The following example sets the MSC1000G to check a user’s username and password against the local database.
ras> sys user auth 1
31.6.2 sys user server Command
Syntax: sys user server <ip> <port> <secret> [high|middle|low|deny] where
<ip>
<port>
<secret>
[high|middle| low|deny]
= The IP address of the RADIUS server.
= The RADIUS server’s listening port number.
The MSC1000G uses the default of 1812 if you do not specify a port.
= The password for the RADIUS server.
= The default account privilege assignment if the RADIUS server does not send the service type information after user authentication is successful. low
= assigns the login accounts a low privilege level. medium
= assigns the login accounts a medium privilege level. high
= assign the login accounts a high privilege level. deny = block access from this login account.
This command sets a RADIUS server’s IP address, port number and the password to access the server. This command also sets the default account privilege assignment if the RADIUS server does not send the service type information after user authentication is successful.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
577
578
Chapter 31 sys Commands
"
You will be blocked access to the system for remote management if you enter
deny
and the system uses only RADIUS authentication with no system type information. In this case, you can only access and manage the device through the console port.
The following example sets a RADIUS server IP address of 192.168.1.77, port number of
1813 and password of “pwd1234”. The account is assigned a medium
privilege if no service type information is received from the RADIUS server. ras> sys user server 192.168.1.77 1813 pwd1234 medium
31.6.3 sys user set Command
Syntax: sys user set <username> <password> high|middle|low where
<username>
= The user name for the account
<password>
= The password for the account.
high|middle| low
= The user account’s level of access privileges.
high
= Can use all commands. middle
= Can use middle or low privilege commands. Middle privilege commands include things like general feature configuration.
low
= Can only use low privilege commands. Low privilege commands are read only and consist of displaying feature settings or configuration.
This command sets a local user administrator account and its level of access privileges.
The following example sets an administrator account with a user name of “bob” password of
“smith” and middle level access privileges. ras> sys user set bob smith middle
31.6.4 sys user delete Command
Syntax: sys user delete <name> where
<name>
= The user name for the account
MSC1000G User’s Guide
This command removes a local user administrator account.
The following example removes the “fred” administrator account. ras> sys user delete fred
31.6.5 sys user enable Command
Syntax: sys user enable <name> where
<name>
= The user name for the account
This command turns on an administrator account.
The following example turns on the “bob” administrator account. ras> sys user enable bob
Chapter 31 sys Commands
31.6.6 sys user disable Command
Syntax: sys user disable <name> where
<name>
= The user name for the account
This command turns off an administrator account.
The following example turns off the “bob” administrator account. ras> sys user disable bob
31.6.7 sys user show Command
Syntax: sys user show
MSC1000G User’s Guide
579
Chapter 31 sys Commands
This command displays authentication settings and user accounts. The following is an example. ras> sys user show auth mode: local then radius radius server ip: 0.0.0.0 port: 1812 secret: 1234 index en name privilege
----- -- ---------------- ---------
1 V admin high ras>
31.6.8 sys user online Command
Syntax: sys user online
This command displays information administrators that are logged into the switch.
The following is an example. * denotes your session. ras> sys user online
[session info ('*' denotes your session)] session user remote ip login time
---------- ---------------- --------------- -------------------
*telnet admin 172.23.19.11 13:08:27 2005/06/09 ras>
580
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
32
vlan Commands
This chapter shows you how to use the vlan
commands.
32.1 vlan Commands Overview
The vlan
commands are for static VLAN management.
32.2
vlan
Commands Summary
The following table lists the vlan
commands. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command (H for high, M for middle or L for low).
Table 187 vlan Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION P
vlan delete <vid> disable <vid> enable <vid>
Removes a static VLAN.
Turns off a VLAN.
Turns on a VLAN.
Sets the name of a VLAN.
Adds a static VLAN.
M
M
M
M
M show fix|forbid|normal tag|untag
[<vid>]|[<startvid> <end-vid>]
Displays all VLANs’ settings, a specified
VLAN’s settings or a range of static
VLANs’ settings.
L
32.3 vlan Commands
Use the vlan
commands to configure static VLANs (SVLANs).
32.3.1 vlan delete Command
Syntax: vlan delete <vid>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
581
Chapter 32 vlan Commands
This command removes a static VLAN.
The following example removes static VLAN entry 27. ras> vlan delete 27
32.3.2 vlan disable Command
Syntax: vlan disable <vid>
This command turns off the static VLAN.
The following example turns off static VLAN entry 27. ras> vlan disable 27
32.3.3 vlan enable Command
Syntax: vlan enable <vid>
This command turns on the static VLAN.
The following example turns on static VLAN entry 27. ras> vlan enable 27
32.3.4 vlan name Command
Syntax: vlan name <vid> <name> where
<vid>
<name>
= The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
= A name to identify the SVLAN entry.
This command sets the name for an entry in the static VLAN table.
The following example names static VLAN entry 27 “sub1”. ras> vlan name 27 sub1
32.3.5 vlan set Command
Syntax: vlan set <vid> <giga-port> <fix|forbid|normal> <tag|untag>
582
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 32 vlan Commands where
<vid>
<giga-port> fix|forbid|normal tag|untag
= The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
= This represents Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, subtending ports or all ports. Use sub1|sub2|up1|up2|all i f trunking is not enabled. Use sub|up|all if trunking is enabled.
= fix
= Makes the port a permanent member of this VLAN group. forbid
= Prohibits the port from joining this VLAN group. normal
= The port can dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP. This is available for the Ethernet ports.
You cannot change a port from the fixed state to another state if the port’s PVID is set to this VLAN.
The VLAN must have at least one port set to the fixed status if the VLAN is the CPU (management) VLAN.
= tag
= Add an IEEE 802.1Q tag to frames going out through this port(s).
untag
= Send frames out through this port(s) without an IEEE
802.1Q tag.
This command adds or modifies an entry in the static VLAN table.
The following example creates a static VLAN entry for VLAN 27 with the subtending 1 port as a fixed member and it tags all frames going out through the port. ras> vlan set 27 sub1 fix tag
32.3.6 vlan show Command
Syntax:
vlan show [<vid>]|[<start-vid> <end-vid>] where
[<vid>]|[<start
-vid> <endvid>]
= You can specify a single VID: <1>, or a range of VIDs: <6>
<10>.
This command shows information about the specified VLAN’s settings. It displays the settings of all of the VLANs if you do not specify a VLAN.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
583
Chapter 32 vlan Commands
The following example shows the settings for all VIDs. ras> vlan show
1 2 3 4 idx name vid en slot
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
---- ---------- ---- --- ---- ----------------------------------------------
--
1 1 1 V 2 FFFF
UUUU
3 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
4 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
5 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
6 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
8 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
9 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
10 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Press any key to continue, 'e' to exit
584
MSC1000G User’s Guide
C
H A P T E R
33
Firmware and Configuration File
Maintenance
This chapter tells you how to upload a new firmware file and how to upload and download configuration files.
33.1 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Overview
The MSC1000G’s built-in FTP (and SFTP) servers allow you to use any FTP (or SFTP) client
(for example, ftp.exe in Windows) to upgrade MSC1000G or MSC1000G firmware or configuration files. The firmware or configuration file upgrade is done during operation (runtime).
1
Do not interrupt the file transfer process, as it may permanently damage your
MSC1000G.
"
When you upload the MSC1000G’s firmware, the MSC1000G automatically restarts when the upgrade process is complete.
33.2 Filename Conventions
The configuration file contains the whole system settings in the menus such as password, IP address, VLANs and so on. The configuration file is called “config.dat” when you obtain it from ZyXEL and “config-0” in the system.
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is the system firmware. It has a “bin” filename extension when you get it from ZyXEL and is called “ras” in the system. With many FTP and
SFTP clients, the filenames are similar to those shown next. ftp> put firmware.bin ras
585
MSC1000G User’s Guide
586
Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance
This is a sample from a FTP session to transfer the computer file firmware.bin
to the
MSC1000G.
ftp> get config-0 config.dat
This is a sample from a FTP session to transfer the MSC1000G’s current configuration file
(including the configuration files of all the line cards) to the computer file config.dat
.
If your FTP or SFTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will need to rename them as the MSC1000G only recognizes “config-0” and “ras”.
Be sure you keep unaltered copies of the files for later use.
The following table is a summary. Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the MSC1000G and the external filename refers to the filename not on the MSC1000G, that is, on your computer, local network or FTP site and so the name (but not the extension) may vary. After uploading new firmware, use the sys version
command to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version.
Table 188 File Name Conventions
FILE TYPE
INTERNAL
NAME
EXTERNAL
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Configuration File config-0 *.dat
Firmware ras *.bin
This is the configuration filename for the
MSC1000G.
This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the MSC1000G.
33.3 Editable Configuration File
The configuration file can be downloaded as a plain-text (English keyboard characters) file.
Edits to the configuration can be made to this file before it is uploaded again to the IES-5000.
"
You can change the “.dat” file to a “.txt” file and still upload it to the IES-5000 as long as you rename it to “config-0” when you upload it to the IES-5000.
33.3.1 Editable Configuration File Backup
Configure your system, and then use FTP or SFTP to backup the plain-text configuration file onto your computer. Do the following to backup the configuration file:
Use an FTP or SFTP client to connect to the IES-5000.
C:\> ftp <IES-5000 IP address>
Type your user name and press [ENTER].
User (172.23.15.86:(none)): admin
Enter the management password (1234 by default).
Password: 1234
230 Logged in
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance
Use get
to transfer the configuration file to the computer. The configuration file on the system
(that you want to backup to the computer) is named config-0
. ftp> get config-0 config.dat
Quit FTP.
ftp> quit
33.3.2 Edit Configuration File
Open the config.dat
file via a text editor (see the following example) and edit to the desired configuration.
"
Ensure that any changes you make to the commands in the configuration file correspond to the commands documented in this User’s Guide. The system user password is encrypted and you cannot edit it in a text editor.
$$ system configuration file
[version]
1.00
$$ msc configuration
[confuser] sys user auth 3 sys user set admin d4:88:dd:79:63:7c:78:11:87:92:cb:3b:c5:41:0c:21 high sys user enable admin sys user server 0.0.0.0 1812 1234
[confsyslog] sys syslog disable sys syslog server local1 0.0.0.0
sys syslog server local2 0.0.0.0
sys syslog server local3 0.0.0.0
sys syslog server local4 0.0.0.0
sys syslog server local5 0.0.0.0
sys syslog server local6 0.0.0.0
sys syslog server local7 0.0.0.0
[msc] sys info hostname TGE1 sys snmp getcommunity public sys snmp setcommunity public sys snmp trapcommunity public sys server port telnet 23
33.3.3 Editable Configuration File Upload
You can upload the configuration file by following the steps below.
Use an FTP or SFTP client to connect to the IES-5000.
C:\> ftp <IES-5000 IP address>
MSC1000G User’s Guide
587
Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance
Type your user name and press [ENTER].
User (172.23.15.86:(none)): admin
Enter the management password (1234 by default).
Password: 1234
230 Logged in ftp> put xxx.dat config-0
Quit FTP.
ftp> quit
Wait for the update to finish. The system restarts automatically.
33.4 Firmware File Upgrade
Use the following procedure to upload firmware to the management switch card, DSL line card or DSL line cards.
Use an FTP or SFTP client to connect to the management switch card.
C:\> ftp <IES-5000 IP address>
Type your user name and press [ENTER].
User (172.23.15.86:(none)): admin
Enter the management password (1234 by default).
Password: 1234
230 Logged in
Use the ls
FTP command to list the files that you can work with on the IES-5000. The following is an example. Use entries from the list to transfer the firmware file to the management switch card, DSL line card or all of DSL line cards of a certain model. ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 3570592 Jul 01 12:00 ras
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 16106 Jul 01 12:00 config-0
-r--r--r-- 1 owner group 47813 Jul 01 12:00 almhis
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-ALC1248G-51
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-ALC1248G-53
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-SLC1248G-22
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-VLC1224G-41
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-ALC1272G-51
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-3
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-4
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-5
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-6
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-7
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-8
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-9
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-10
226 File sent OK ftp: 1096 bytes received in 0.19Seconds 5.86Kbytes/sec.
588
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance
In this example, the firmware file on your computer (that you want to put onto a card or cards) is named firmware.bin
.
• Use this command to transfer the firmware file to the management switch card that you are using (the internal firmware file is named ras)
.
ftp> put firmware.bin ras
• Use this command to transfer the firmware file to a DSL line card or the management switch card that you are not currently using. Use “fw-” followed by the number of the slot.
ftp> put firmware.bin fw-3
• Use this command to transfer the firmware file to all of the IES-5000 DSL line cards of the same type. Use “fw-” followed by ALC1248G-51, ALC1248G-53, ALC1272G-51,
SLC1248G-22, or VLC1224G-41. The following example uploads firmware to all of the
ALC1248G-51 line cards in the IES-5000.
ftp> put firmware.bin fw-ALC1248G-51
33.5 Configuration File Upgrade
Use an FTP or SFTP client to connect to the IES-5000.
C:\> ftp <IES-5000 IP address>
Type your user name and press [ENTER].
User (172.23.15.86:(none)): admin
Enter the management password (1234 by default).
Password: 1234
230 Logged in
Transfer the configuration file to the management switch card. The configuration file on your computer (that you want to put onto the management switch card) is named config.dat
. The internal configuration file on the management switch card is named config-0
.
ftp> put config.dat config-0
Quit FTP.
ftp> quit
Wait for the update to finish. The system restarts automatically.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
589
Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance
590
MSC1000G User’s Guide
P
ART
IV
Troubleshooting
591
592
C
H A P T E R
34
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. See
for default settings.
34.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
V
The MSC1000G does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
Make sure the MSC1000G is properly installed in the slot and the system power is properly connected and turned on.
1
Refer to the IES-5000 Series User’s Guide for directions and safety warnings on installing the management switch card and power connections for the IES-
5000.
V
The ALM LED is on.
An alarm has been detected on the MSC1000G, the Integrated Ethernet Switch fan or the
INPUT ALARM terminals. Examples of an alarm on the MSC1000G are when the
MSC1000G’s voltage or temperature is outside of the normal range.
Check the logs to see the cause of the alarm. Take appropriate measures to remove the cause of the alarm. For example, you may need to change the fan module if the fans are not operating normally (see the IES-5000 Series User’s Guide for directions).
V
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
593
MSC1000G User’s Guide
594
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See
.
2 Check the hardware connections. See Section 2.3 on page 58 .
3 Inspect your cables for damage. Replace any damaged cables.
4 Turn the power off and on.
5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
V
A Gigabit Ethernet interface’s LEDs are not on.
1 Make sure the interface is enabled.
2 Make sure that the interface’s connection speed is set to match that of the port on the peer Ethernet device.
3 Check the copper or fiber optic Ethernet cable and connections between the interface and the Ethernet switch or router.
4 If the interface is an SFP slot, check the transceiver.
5 Make sure that the peer Ethernet device is functioning properly.
6 If the Ethernet cable and peer Ethernet device are both OK and the LEDs stay off, there may be a problem with the interface. Contact the distributor.
V
A SFP slot’s LNK LED turns on and off intermittently.
1 Check the copper or fiber optic Ethernet cable and connections between the uplink or subtending interface and the Ethernet switch or router.
2 Make sure that the peer Ethernet device is functioning properly.
3 If the Ethernet cable and peer Ethernet device are both OK and the LNK LED keeps turning off and on, there may be a problem with the port. Contact the distributor.
34.2 MSC1000G Access and Login
V
I forgot the IP address for the MSC1000G.
1 If you forgot the IP address of the in-band management port, try to log into the out-ofband management port. If you were using the out-of-band management port, try the inband management port.
1 The default in-band IP address is 192.168.1.1. The default out-of-band IP address is
192.168.0.1
2 Use the console port to log in to the MSC1000G.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
V
I forgot the password.
1 The default password is 1234.
2 Contact customer support for how to reset your device to the factory defaults if you have forgotten the password.
V
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default in-band IP address is 192.168.1.1. The default out-of-band IP address is
192.168.0.1
• If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for
I forgot the IP address for the MSC1000G.
2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See
IES-5000 Series User’s Guide and
3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled.
4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the MSC1000G. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the MSC1000G, skip this step.)
5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the MSC1000G with the default
IP address. See
.
6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the following.
• Try to access the MSC1000G using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the
MSC1000G, use the sys client show, sys user show, and sys server show commands to find out why the MSC1000G does not respond to HTTP.
• If you are using in-band management, try connecting to the out-of-band management port or the console port.
V
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the MSC1000G.
1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is admin, and the default password is 1234. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2 Turn the system off and on.
3 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
595
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
V
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use
FTP to upload new firmware.
596
Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
V
The SNMP manager server cannot get information from the MSC1000G.
1 Ping the MSC1000G from the SNMP server. If you cannot, check the cable, connections and IP configuration.
2 Check to see that the community (or trusted host) in the MSC1000G matches the SNMP server’s community.
3 Make sure that your computer’s IP address matches a configured trusted host IP address
(if configured).
V
I cannot telnet into the MSC1000G.
1 Make sure that a telnet session(s) is not already operating. The MSC1000G only accepts one telnet session at a time (or a total of four Telnet and SSH sessions with multiple login enabled).
2 Make sure that your computer’s IP address matches a configured secured client IP address (if configured). The MSC1000G immediately disconnects the telnet session if secured host IP addresses are configured and your computer’s IP address does not match one of them.
3 Make sure that you have not disabled the Telnet service or changed the server port number that the MSC1000G uses for Telnet.
4 Ping the MSC1000G from your computer.
5 If you are able to ping the MSC1000G but are still unable to telnet, contact the distributor.
6 If you cannot ping the MSC1000G, check the cable, connections and IP configuration.
7 See the troubleshooting suggestions for
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
V
I cannot use the console port to access the MSC1000G.
Make sure you use terminal emulation software with the correct settings (default VT100 terminal emulation, 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no flow control).
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
34.3 Data Transmission
V
The Gigabit Ethernet interface’s LED is on, but data cannot be transmitted.
1 Make sure that the port has the appropriate uplink or subtending mode setting.
2 Make sure that the IP settings are properly configured.
3 Check the VLAN configuration.
4 Ping the MSC1000G from a computer behind the peer Ethernet device.
5 If you cannot ping, check the Ethernet cable and connections between the uplink or subtending port and the Ethernet switch or router.
34.4 Redundant Management Switch Cards
V
I cannot get a redundant (second) management switch card to work as a standby.
1 Make sure that the management switch cards are in slots 1 and 2 of the IES-5000 main chassis. The two management switch cards must have the same types of uplink and subtending connections.
2 Make sure that the management switch cards both have firmware version V3.50(LU.1) or later. Earlier firmware versions do not support the use of a redundant management switch card.
34.5 Management Lockout
You could lock yourself (and all others) out from the MSC1000G by:
1 Misconfiguring the text configuration file.
2 Forgetting the password.
"
Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the MSC1000G.
597
MSC1000G User’s Guide
598
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
34.6 A Line Card Does Not Become Active
V
A line card is stuck in the inactive state.
It is normal for a line card to be in the inactive state when it is starting up or the firmware is being upgraded. If neither of these is the case, the line card may be malfunctioning. Try the following.
1 The MSC1000G can automatically restart a line card that it is managing. If the line card is unresponsive, use the lcman reset command to perform a hardware reset on the line card.
2 Try removing the line card from the slot and re-installing it.
3 If neither of these steps work, use the lcman disable
command. Then connect to the line card’s console port and recover the firmware. The procedure to recover the line card firmware is similar to the procedure for recovering the MSC1000G firmware (see
4 After you have recovered the line card’s firmware, use the lcman enable command to turn the MSC1000G’s management of the line card back on.
34.7 Resetting the Defaults
You can upload the factory-default configuration file to reset the MSC1000G to the default settings. This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bit, no parity, one stop bit and flow control set to none. The user name and password will also be reset to “admin” and “1234”. The default in-band IP address is 192.168.1.1. The default out-of-band IP address is 192.168.0.1.
If you forget your password or cannot access the MSC1000G, contact customer support for how to reset your device to the factory defaults.
34.7.1 Resetting the Defaults Via CLI Command
If you know the password, you can reload the factory-default configuration file via Command
Line Interface (CLI) command. Use the following procedure.
1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software. See the chapter on hardware connections for details.
2 Enter your password.
3 Type config default.
4 Type y
at the question “ reset configuration to factory default needs system restart! proceed(y/n)? >)?
”
5 After restarting, the MSC1000G is re-initialized with a default configuration file the default user name of “admin” and password of “1234”.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
34.7.2 Recovering the Firmware
Usually you should use FTP or the console port to upload the MSC1000G’s firmware. If the
MSC1000G will not start up, the firmware may be lost or corrupted. Use the following procedure to upload firmware to the MSC1000G only when you are unable to use another method to upload firmware.
"
This procedure is for emergency situations only.
1 Obtain the firmware file, unzip it and save it in a folder on your computer.
2 Connect your computer to the console port and use terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• 9600 bps
• No flow control
3 Turn off the IES-5000 and turn it back on to restart it and begin a session.
4 When you see the
Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds message
,
press a key to enter debug mode.
5 Type atba5
after the
Enter Debug Mode
message (this changes the console port speed to 115200 bps).
6 Change the configuration of your terminal emulation software to use 115200 bps and reconnect to the MSC1000G.
7 Type atur
after the
Enter Debug Mode
message.
8 Wait for the
Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal.
9 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal. Click
Transfer, then Send File to display the following screen.
Figure 193 Example Xmodem Upload
Type the firmware file's location, or click Browse to search for it.
Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol.
Then click Send.
10 After a successful firmware upload, type atgo
to restart the MSC1000G. The console port speed automatically changes back to 9600 bps when the MSC1000G restarts.
599
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
600
MSC1000G User’s Guide
P
ART
V
Appendices and
Index
Virtual Circuit Topology (613)
601
602
A
P P E N D I X
A
Product Specifications
This appendix gives details about the IES-5000 default settings and MSC1000G hardware and features.
IES-5000 Default Settings
This table lists major default settings.
Table 189 Default Settings
Default In-band IP Address 192.168.1.1
Default In-band Subnet Mask
Default Out-of-band IP Address
255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
192.168.0.1
Default Out-of-band Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Default User Name admin
Default Password
Default Console Port Settings
1234
VT100 terminal emulation, 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no flow control
VLAN Default Settings
One VLAN is created (this is also the management VLAN).
VID
Registration
1
Fixed for the Ethernet and ADSL ports
Tagging
STP Default Settings
Enable/Disable State
STP Version
Untagged for all ports
Disabled
MSTP auto Operational Mode:
ADSL Profile Default Settings
Name: DEFVAL
Latency Mode Interleave
Maximum Rate
Minimum Rate
Interleave Delay
Maximum Signal to Noise Ratio
Minimum Signal to Noise Ratio
Upstream ADSL Settings:
1000 Kbps
32 Kbps
20 ms
31 db
6 db
Downstream ADSL Settings:
24000 Kbps
64 Kbps
20 ms
31 db
6 db
MSC1000G User’s Guide
603
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 189 Default Settings
Target Signal to Noise Ratio
Rate Adaptation Mode
Up Shift Margin
Down Shift Margin
SHDSL Profile Default Settings
Name:
Maximum Rate
Minimum Rate
Annex Mode
12 db
Startup
15 db
9 db
DEFVAL
2304 Kbps
192 Kbps annex b
12 db
Startup
15 db
9 db
Wire Pair
Line Probe
VDSL General Settings
State
Upstream Power Back-off
Frequency Plan
VDSL Profile Plan
RFI Band
RFI Custom
VDSL Profile Default Settings
Name:
Latency Mode
2wire disable
Disable
Off
998
12a
Disable
Disable, all customized entries are 0~0
DEFVAL
Interleave
Upstream Settings:
45440 kbps Maximum Rate
Minimum Rate
Interleave Delay
Maximum Signal to Noise Ratio
64 Kbps
8 ms
31 db
0 db Minimum Signal to Noise Ratio
Target Signal to Noise Ratio
Rate Adaptation Mode
Up Shift Margin
9 db
Startup
15 db
9 db Down Shift Margin
Default ATM Profile Settings
Name: DEFVAL
Traffic Class: UBR
Downstream Settings:
100032 kbps
64 Kbps
8 ms
31 db
0 db
9 db
Startup
15 db
9 db
CDVT: 0
Virtual Channel Default Settings
A
VPI:
VCI:
0
33
604
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 189 Default Settings
Multiplexing: LLC-based
PVID:
Priority
1
0
ATM Profile: DEFVAL
Default IGMP Filter Profile Settings
The DEFVAL IGMP filter profile is assigned to all of the ADSL ports by default. It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses (224.0.0.0~239.255.255.255).
A. The ADSL ports' PVCs use ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) 5. They also use RFC 1483 encapsulation.
Specifications
Table 190 MSC1000G Specifications
Dimensions 267.4mm(w) x 231.0mm(D) x 37.55mm(H)
Device Weight 1 Kg
Management Interfaces In-band Ethernet management
One 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet RJ-45 port for out of band management
One RS-232 (DB-9 type) console port for local management
Power Specification Power Rating: 1A MAX
Power Consumption: 30W
Switching Switching fabric capability: 24Gbps, non-blocking full duplex
Forwards IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1Q, Ethernet II frames
Prevents the forwarding of corrupted packets
Operates at L2 switch mode
Supports 16K MAC entries
Supports 4K VLAN entries
Standards Compliance IEEE 802.1p, 802.1Q
IEEE 802.3u/3z/3x/3ab
SFF committee INF-8074i Specification SFP (Small Form factor Pluggable) transceiver rev.1.0
Operation Temperature 0 ~ 50 degrees C
Storage Temperature -40 ~ 70 degrees C
Operation Humidity 20% ~ 95% RH (non-condensing)
MSC1000G User’s Guide
605
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 190 MSC1000G Specifications
Storage Humidity 5% ~ 95% RH (non-condensing)
Certifications CE Conformity
FCC
ITU-T K.20
Safety
EMC
IEC 60950-1
EN 60950-1
CSA 60950-1
UL 60950-1
EN 300386
EN 55022
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3
EN 55024
Features
This section introduces the IES-5000 features.
Table 191 IES-5000 Features
Basic Function Power-On System Test (POST)
LED display (SYS/ST/ALM)
Uplink Interface
Gigabit Ethernet
Thermal cutoff protection
Temperature and voltage monitoring and threshold setting
Management Interfaces In-band Ethernet management
External alarm inputs interface
One 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet RJ-45 port for out of band management
One RS-232 (DB-9 type) console port for local management
606
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 191 IES-5000 Features (continued)
Management Features Command Line Interface (CLI)
DSL profile function for managing DSL line card connections
Firmware upgrade through FTP or SFTP and serial console port
Telnet or SSH management (up to 4 concurrent sessions)
IEEE 802.1X port-based authentication
RADIUS client support for user’s name and password
Text-based configuration file via FTP or SFTP
UNIX syslog
SSH version 2
SFTP (secure FTP)
NTP
IP ping and traceroute functions
SNMP
Firmware download
Database backup/restore
Fault and alarm management
Programmable alarm filters (threshold)
Configuration management
Performance counters
Performance statistics (15m/24h)
Access control
Event log
Internal trace and debug
Security Features
SNMP Management
MIBs
VLAN
Detection of DOS attacks
*
SNMPv1/v2
SNMPv3 with optional SNMPv2c read-only
SNMP Trap v1/v2/v3
SNMP agent
RFC1213 MIBII (system, interface, …)
ADSL line MIB
ADSL extension line MIB
SHDSL line MIB
Bridge MIB
Bridge MIB Extension
RMON MIB
VLAN cross-connect
VLAN cross-connect: map DSL line (VPI/VCI) to one VLAN (maximum 4K
VLAN)
Residential bridging: user to user traffic can be blocked
VLAN Tag-based
Transparent LAN Service (TLS) or Q-in-Q/VLAN stacking
Number of VLAN IDs: 4096
MAX number of VLAN + MAC per ADSL port: 256
UI Isolation
ADSL2/2+, SHDSL: accept untagged frame from CPE
MSC1000G User’s Guide
607
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 191 IES-5000 Features (continued)
Quality of Service IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1p for QoS function at VLAN level
Minimum of priority queues
SPQ and WRR support for the queues
Mapping of priority to a queue by a configurable table
PVC default priority
DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping
Priority queuing
Layer 2 Bridging
Multicast Features
ACL/Filtering
The priority queues are configurable based on the PVC: ATM QoS to IEEE
802.1p
priority mapping
The priority queues shall be configurable based on the PVC ATM service types
(UBR/ CBR /rt-VBR/nrt-VBR) to 802.1p priority mapping
LLC and VC MUX bridging (RFC2684)
MAC address table: Up to 16K entries
MAC addresses per port: Up to 128
IEEE 802.1d transparent bridging
IEEE 802.1w rapid spanning tree protocol for network interface ports
Auto MAC address learning
MAC aging-out time
IEEE 802.1p priority queue mapping (static mapping)
Limiting number of MAC per port
Static MAC address filtering
Port Isolation (per system)
DHCP relay option 82 (globally, per VLAN)
Port-based VLAN tagging on subtending network interface port
Broadcast storm control
IP multicast forwarding
IGMP Proxy
IGMP snooping v1&v2 (port based)
VLAN-aware IGMP snooping
IGMP multicast channel limiting by group count or bandwidth usage
Static multicast addresses 128
Broadcast methodology
IGMP membership reports
All video group address are configured in the system
Tracking MAC address with IGMP
Multicast VLAN (16 VLANs)
L2 frame filtering, such as based on source MAC address, port etc.
PPPoE filtering
Layer 3 filtering based on IP header: source addresses, destination addresses, protocol ID, UDP/TCP port number
ARP broadcast filtering
NetBIOS filtering
DHCP broadcast filtering
IGMP filtering
Rate limiting
Rate limiting per XDSL port
Rate limiting per XDSL VC
Rate limiting per Ethernet port (MSC1000G ports in subtending mode)
608
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 191 IES-5000 Features (continued)
Per DSL Port
Provisioning
Per port limitations:
Number of ACL Profile: 8
Number of DHCP snooping table entries: 32
Number of static DHCP snooping table entries: 3
Number of MAC filters: 10
Number of MVLAN: 4
Number of OUI Filter: 10
Number of PVCs (PVC, PPVC member, TLS PVC, PAEPVC): 8
Number of PPVCs: 2
Number of VLANs: 16
System-wide
Provisioning
Number of VLANs: 4094
ADSL profiles: 128
SHDSL profiles: 128
ATM profiles: 128
IGMP filter profiles: 128
ALARMADSL profiles: 128
ALARMSHDSL profiles: 128
DHCP relay servers: 32
IP routes: 16
Static multicast addresses: 128
MAC filters: 512
MVLAN: 16
Multicast groups per MVLAN: 16
Multicast bandwidth control groups: 96
IGMP groups: 16 VLANs, 256 groups per linecard
User (administrator) accounts: 16
Table 192 Supported Standards
STANDARD DESCRIPTION
RFC 867
RFC 868
RFC 1305
RFC 1112
RFC 2236
RFC 3376
RFC 1213
RFC 1573
RFC 1757
RFC 2662
RFC 2665
RFC 2674
RFC 2863
RFC 3440
RFC 3635
RFC 3636
RFC 1483
RFC 2131
RFC 2132
RFC 3046
Daytime protocol
Time protocol
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP)
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
MSC1000G User’s Guide
609
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 192 Supported Standards (continued)
STANDARD DESCRIPTION
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) RFC 2138
RFC 2139
RFC 2486
RFC 2684
IEEE 802.1D
IEEE 802.1w
IEEE 802.1s
IEEE 802.1d
IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1Q
IEEE 802.1x
IEEE 802.3ab
IEEE 802.3ad
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3x
IEEE 802.3z
ANSI T1.413 issue 2
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
LLC and VC MUX Bridging
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
Transparent Bridging
Layer 2 Traffic Prioritization
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)
Network Authentication
1000Base-T
Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP)
100Base-T
Flow Control, Fast Ethernet
1000Base-X
ADSL Operational Mode
Firmware Naming Conventions
A firmware version includes the model code and release number as shown in the following example.
Firmware Version: V3.70(LU.0)
"LU" is the model code.
"0" is this firmware's release number. This varies as new firmware is released. Your firmware's release number may not match what is displayed in this User's Guide.
Console Port Pin Assignments
In a serial communications connection, generally a computer is DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment) and a modem is DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment). The MSC1000G is
DCE when you connect a computer to the console port.
610
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix A Product Specifications
Figure 194 Console Port Pin Layout
Table 193 Console Port Pin Assignments
CONSOLE PORT RS – 232 (FEMALE) DB-9F
Pin 1 = NON
Pin 2 = DCE-TXD
Pin 3 = DCE –RXD
Pin 4 = DCE –DSR
Pin 5 = GND
Pin 6 = DCE –DTR
Pin 7 = DCE –CTS
Pin 8 = DCE –RTS
PIN 9 = NON
The CON/AUX port also has these pin assignments. The CON/AUX switch changes the setting in the firmware only and does not change the CON/AUX port’s pin assignments.
ALARM Connector Pin Assignments
The ALARM connector is a DB15F connector.
Figure 195 ALARM Connector Pin Layout
Table 194 ALARM Connector Pin Assignments
PIN DESCRIPTION
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
Common pin for alarm input 1
Common pin for alarm input 2
Common pin for alarm input 3
Normal close for minor alarm output
Normal open for minor alarm output
Common pin for major alarm output
Normal close for critical alarm output
MSC1000G User’s Guide
611
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 194 ALARM Connector Pin Assignments
PIN DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
Normal open for critical alarm output
Normal close for alarm input 1
Normal close for alarm input 2
Normal close for alarm input 3
Common pin for minor alarm output
Normal close for major alarm output
Normal open for major alarm output
Common contact for critical alarm output
612
MSC1000G User’s Guide
A
P P E N D I X
B
Virtual Circuit Topology
ATM is a connection-oriented technology, meaning that it sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:
• Virtual Channel Logical connections between ATM switches
• Virtual Path A bundle of virtual channels
• Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end point
Figure 196 Virtual Circuit Topology
Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an
ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a
VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path.
The VPI and VCI identify a virtual path, that is, termination points between ATM switches. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit.
613
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix B Virtual Circuit Topology
614
MSC1000G User’s Guide
A
P P E N D I X
C
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL
Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
615
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix C Legal Information
FCC Warning
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Mark Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Taiwanese BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection) A Warning:
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1
PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11.
PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11.
Viewing Certifications
1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com
.
2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating
616
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix C Legal Information condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return
Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of
ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
617
Appendix C Legal Information
618
MSC1000G User’s Guide
A
P P E N D I X
D
Customer Support
Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +886-3-578-3942
• Fax: +886-3-578-2439
• Web Site: www.zyxel.com, www.europe.zyxel.com
• FTP Site: ftp.zyxel.com, ftp.europe.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science Park,
Hsinchu 300, Taiwan
Costa Rica
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +506-2017878
• Fax: +506-2015098
• Web Site: www.zyxel.co.cr
• FTP Site: ftp.zyxel.co.cr
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Costa Rica, Plaza Roble Escazú, Etapa El Patio, Tercer Piso, San
José, Costa Rica
Czech Republic
• E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +420-241-091-350
• Fax: +420-241-091-359
• Web Site: www.zyxel.cz
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Czech s.r.o., Modranská 621, 143 01 Praha 4 -
Modrany, Ceská Republika
MSC1000G User’s Guide
619
Appendix D Customer Support
Denmark
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +45-39-55-07-00
• Fax: +45-39-55-07-07
• Web Site: www.zyxel.dk
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Columbusvej, 2860 Soeborg, Denmark
Finland
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +358-9-4780-8411
• Fax: +358-9-4780 8448
• Web Site: www.zyxel.fi
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Oy, Malminkaari 10, 00700 Helsinki, Finland
France
• E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +33-4-72-52-97-97
• Fax: +33-4-72-52-19-20
• Web Site: www.zyxel.fr
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL France, 1 rue des Vergers, Bat. 1 / C, 69760 Limonest, France
Germany
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +49-2405-6909-0
• Fax: +49-2405-6909-99
• Web Site: www.zyxel.de
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH., Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146, Wuerselen,
Germany
Hungary
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +36-1-3361649
• Fax: +36-1-3259100
• Web Site: www.zyxel.hu
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Hungary, 48, Zoldlomb Str., H-1025, Budapest, Hungary
Kazakhstan
• Support: http://zyxel.kz/support
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
620
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Appendix D Customer Support
• Telephone: +7-3272-590-698
• Fax: +7-3272-590-689
• Web Site: www.zyxel.kz
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Kazakhstan, 43, Dostyk ave.,Office 414, Dostyk Business Centre,
050010, Almaty, Republic of Kazakhstan
North America
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +1-800-255-4101, +1-714-632-0882
• Fax: +1-714-632-0858
• Web Site: www.us.zyxel.com
• FTP Site: ftp.us.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Inc., 1130 N. Miller St., Anaheim, CA 92806-
2001, U.S.A.
Norway
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +47-22-80-61-80
• Fax: +47-22-80-61-81
• Web Site: www.zyxel.no
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Nils Hansens vei 13, 0667 Oslo, Norway
Poland
• E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +48 (22) 333 8250
• Fax: +48 (22) 333 8251
• Web Site: www.pl.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, ul. Okrzei 1A, 03-715 Warszawa, Poland
Russia
• Support: http://zyxel.ru/support
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +7-095-542-89-29
• Fax: +7-095-542-89-25
• Web Site: www.zyxel.ru
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Russia, Ostrovityanova 37a Str., Moscow, 117279, Russia
Spain
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +34-902-195-420
• Fax: +34-913-005-345
MSC1000G User’s Guide
621
Appendix D Customer Support
• Web Site: www.zyxel.es
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Arte, 21 5ª planta, 28033 Madrid, Spain
Sweden
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +46-31-744-7700
• Fax: +46-31-744-7701
• Web Site: www.zyxel.se
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg, Sweden
Ukraine
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +380-44-247-69-78
• Fax: +380-44-494-49-32
• Web Site: www.ua.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Ukraine, 13, Pimonenko Str., Kiev, 04050, Ukraine
United Kingdom
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +44-1344 303044, 08707 555779 (UK only)
• Fax: +44-1344 303034
• Web Site: www.zyxel.co.uk
• FTP Site: ftp.zyxel.co.uk
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications UK, Ltd.,11 The Courtyard, Eastern Road,
Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 2XB, United Kingdom (UK)
“+” is the (prefix) number you dial to make an international telephone call.
622
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Index
Index
Numerics
1000/100 Ethernet ports
1000Base-T
100Base-Tx 2
1-bit constellation
802.1X PNAC
8-wire
A
abbreviating commands
acceptable frame type
access control
Access Control List
commands
ACL
acl commands
acl dhcprelay82 commands
acl macfilter commands
acl ouifilter commands
acl rule commands
ACO
ACT LED
Address Resolution Protocol, See ARP
administrator account
ADSL advanced port setup
alarm profile
disable features
downstream rate
Extension Line MIB (RFC 3440)
Line MIB (RFC 2662)
loopback
operational mode
port setup
profile
rate
rates
upstream rate
adsl commands
ADSL standards
ADSL2/2+ features
age
ALARM
alarm
ADSL profile
command parameters
commands
descriptions
history
input
management
port
profile
screens
severity assignment
SHDSL profile
VDSL profile
alarm connections
Alarm Cut Off button
alarm profile
span
Stuc
Stur
all digital mode
annex A
annex B
Annex I
Annex L
Annex M
annex mode
anti-IP address spoofing
applications
ARP
filter
Asynchronous Transfer Mode, See ATM.
ATM
profile
QoS
traffic classes
traffic counters
traffic settings
authentication mode
settings
available commands
MSC1000G User’s Guide
623
Index
B
back pressure flow control
band plan
bandwidth control
bit number
bitswap
BPDUs
BRIDGE Extension MIB (RFC 2674)
BRIDGE MIB (RFC 1573)
Bridge Protocol Data Units, See BPDUs.
broadcast storm control
BT
Burst Tolerance, See BT.
624
C
cable dust covers
Canonical Format Indicator, See CFI.
carrier setup
carrier tones
CBR
CDVT
cell counter
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance, See CDVT.
certifications
notices
viewing
chassis
number
slot
CI commands
CIST
Class of Service (CoS)
classifier
clear
alarm
commands
CLI
cluster commands
disable command
enable manager command
enable member command
login command
management disable
manager
member
member candidate flush command
member candidate show command
member delete command
member set command
member show command
show command
vlan command
cluster management
and switch passwords
cluster manager
cluster member
cluster member firmware upgrade
member candidate flush
member candidate show
member delete
member set
member show
network example
setup
show
specification
status
switch models
VID
vlan
web configurator
command abbreviation
acl
bit number parameter
common notation
config save
conventions
details
help
high privilege
IP address parameter
list
low privilege
MAC address parameter
middle privilege
notation
parameters
port parameter
privilege levels
slot parameter
subnet mask parameter
summary
UDP or TCP port number
VCI parameter
VLAN ID parameter
VPI parameter
Command Line Interface, See CLI.
commands acl dhcosnoop pool delete
acl dhcprelay82
acl dhcprelay82 clearinfo
acl dhcprelay82 enable
acl dhcprelay82 info
acl dhcprelay82 relaymode
MSC1000G User’s Guide
acl dhcprelay82 server active
acl dhcprelay82 server delete
acl dhcprelay82 server set
acl dhcprelay82 set
acl dhcprelay82 show
acl dhcpsnoop disable
acl dhcpsnoop enable
acl dhcpsnoop flush
acl dhcpsnoop pool set
acl dhcpsnoop show
acl dot1x disable
acl dot1x enable
acl dot1x port control
acl dot1x port disable
acl dot1x port enable
acl dot1x port period
acl dot1x port reauth
acl dot1x port show
acl dot1x radius ip
acl dot1x radius port
acl dot1x radius secret
acl dot1x show
acl maccount disable
acl maccount enable
acl maccount set
acl maccount show
acl macfilter delete
acl macfilter disable
acl macfilter enable
acl macfilter mode
acl macfilter set
acl macfilter show
acl ouifilter disable
acl ouifilter enable
acl ouifilter mode
acl ouifilter set
acl ouifilter show
acl pktfilter set
acl pktfilter show
acl pppoeagent clearinfo
acl pppoeagent delete
acl pppoeagent disable
acl pppoeagent enable
acl pppoeagent info
acl pppoeagent set
acl pppoeagent show
acl rule delete
acl rule set
acl rule show
adsl ipbpvc route show
alarm clear
alarm cutoff
alarm edit
alarm history clear
alarm history show
alarm port set
alarm port show
alarm show
alarm tablelist
MSC1000G User’s Guide alarm xedit
cluster disable
cluster enable manager
cluster enable member
cluster login
cluster member candidate flush
cluster member candidate show
cluster member delete
cluster member set
cluster member show
cluster show
cluster vlan
config default
config save
config show
diagnostic ldm show
diagnostic ldm test
diagnostic loopback f5
diagnostic selt show
diagnostic selt test
ip arp flush
ip arp show
ip gateway
ip ping
ip route delete
ip route set
ip route show
ip set
ip show
ip tracert
lcman disable
lcman enable
lcman reset
lcman show
multicast bandwidth default
multicast bandwidth delete
multicast bandwidth port disable
multicast bandwidth port enable
multicast bandwidth port set
multicast bandwidth port show
multicast bandwidth set
multicast igmp disable
multicast igmp enable
multicast igmp qryvid delete
multicast igmp qryvid set
multicast igmp qryvid show
multicast igmp show
multicast igmpcount disable
multicast igmpcount enable
multicast igmpcount set
multicast igmpcount show
multicast igmpfilter set
multicast igmpfilter show
multicast mvlan delete
multicast mvlan disable
multicast mvlan enable
multicast mvlan group delete
multicast mvlan group set
multicast mvlan name
Index
625
Index multicast mvlan set
multicast mvlan show
multicast smcast delete
multicast smcast set
multicast smcast show
port adsl alarmprof
port adsl annexi disable
port adsl annexi enable
port adsl annexl disable
port adsl annexl enable
port adsl annexm disable
port adsl annexm enable
port adsl dscarrier0
port adsl dscarrier1
port adsl inpmin
port adsl optionmask
port adsl pmm disable
port adsl pmm enable
port adsl power
port adsl psd maximum
port adsl set
port adsl uscarrier
port copy
port disable
port enable
port ipbpvc arpproxy age
port ipbpvc arpproxy flush
port ipbpvc arpproxy show
port ipbpvc delete
port ipbpvc domain delete
port ipbpvc domain dhcpvlan disable
port ipbpvc domain dhcpvlan enable
port ipbpvc domain set
port ipbpvc domain show
port ipbpvc domain vlan
port ipbpvc route delete
port ipbpvc route set
port ipbpvc set
port ipbpvc show
port ipbpvc vlan
port name
port paepvc delete
port paepvc set
port paepvc show
port ppvc delete
port ppvc member delete
port ppvc member set
port ppvc set
port ppvc show
port ppvc vlan
port pvc delete
port pvc mvlan disable
port pvc mvlan enable
port pvc set
port pvc show
port pvc usratelimit disable
port pvc usratelimit enable
port pvc usratelimit set
port pvc usratelimit show
626
port pvc vlan
port shdsl alarmprof
port shdsl pbo
port shdsl pmms
port shdsl set
port show
port tel
port tlspvc delete
port tlspvc show
profile acl delete
profile acl set
profile acl show
profile adsl delete
profile adsl map
profile adsl set
profile adsl show
profile alarmadsl delete
profile alarmadsl map
profile alarmadsl set
profile alarmadsl show
profile alarmshdsl delete
profile alarmshdsl map
profile alarmshdsl set
profile alarmshdsl show
profile alarmvdsl delete
profile alarmvdsl map
profile alarmvdsl set
profile alarmvdsl show
profile atm delete
profile atm map
profile atm set
profile atm show
profile profsvr clientlist delete
profile profsvr clientlist set
profile profsvr clientlist show
profile profsvr mode
profile profsvr serverset
profile profsvr show
profile profsvr sync
profile shdsl delete
profile shdsl map
profile shdsl set
profile shdsl show
show adsl
show adsl linedata
show adsl linegain
show adsl linehlog
show adsl lineqln
show adsl linetssi
show arp
show atm
show dhcp counter
show dhcp snoop
show dot3ad
show enet
show igmp
show igmp group
show igmp info
show igmp port group
MSC1000G User’s Guide
show igmp port info
show ip
show lineinfo
show lineperf
show linerate
show linestat
show mac
show monitor
show mstp
show packet
show paepvc counter
show paepvc session
show performance
show rmon
show sys
show user
show vlan
switch bandwidth disable
switch bandwidth enable
switch bandwidth set
switch bandwidth show
switch bcastctrl show
switch bcastctrl threshold
switch dot3ad disable
switch dot3ad enable
switch dot3ad lacp priority
switch dot3ad lacp show
switch dot3ad lacp timeout
switch dot3ad show
switch garptimer join
switch garptimer leave
switch garptimer leaveall
switch garptimer set
switch garptimer show
switch isolation disable
switch isolation enable
switch isolation show
switch isolation vlan delete
switch isolation vlan set
switch mstp cfgname
switch mstp disable
switch mstp fwdelay
switch mstp hellotime
switch mstp maxage
switch mstp maxhops
switch mstp priority
switch mstp revision
switch mstp show
switch mstp version
switch mstp vlanmap
switch port disable
switch port dscp
switch port dscp disable
switch port dscp enable
switch port dscp set
switch port dscp show
switch port enable
switch port flowctrl disable
switch port flowctrl enable
MSC1000G User’s Guide switch port frametype
switch port gvrp
switch port gvrp disable
switch port gvrp enable
switch port mode
switch port mstp disable
switch port mstp edgeport
switch port mstp enable
switch port mstp p2plink
switch port mstp pathcost
switch port mstp priority
switch port mstp show
switch port name
switch port priority
switch port pvid
switch port show
switch port speed
switch port vlantrunk disable
switch port vlantrunk enable
switch qschedule set
switch qschedule show
switch queuemap set
switch queuemap show
sys baud set
sys baud show
sys client disable
sys client enable
sys client set
sys client show
sys date set
sys date show
sys info chassis
sys info contact
sys info frame
sys info hostname
sys info location
sys info show
sys monitor set
sys monitor show
sys multilogin disable
sys multilogin enable
sys multilogin show
sys reboot
sys server disable
sys server enable
sys server port
sys server show
sys snmp getcommunity
sys snmp setcommunity
sys snmp show
sys snmp trapcommunity
sys snmp trapdst
sys snmp user
sys snmp version
sys syslog disable
sys syslog enable
sys syslog server
sys syslog show
sys time set
Index
627
Index sys time show
sys timeserver set
sys timeserver show
sys timeserver sync
sys user auth
sys user delete
sys user disable
sys user enable
sys user online
sys user server
sys user set
sys user show
sys version
vlan delete
vlan disable
vlan enable
vlan name
vlan set
vlan show
Common and Internal Spanning Tree, See CIST.
config commands
Config Save
config save command
configurable alarms
configuration backup
configuration digest
configuration file
backup
edit
reset
restore
connection rates
CONSOLE
console port
pin assignments
Constant Bit Rate, See CBR.
contact information
contact person
contact person’s name
copy port settings
copyright
CRC
critical alarm
customer support
Cyclic Redundancy Checking, See CRC
D
damage
database version
date
default configuration
default settings
DELT
detailed command information
DHCP
filter
relay commands
statistics
DHCP relay
DHCP relay agent information
DHCP relay agent82
DHCP snooping
anti-IP address spoofing
diagnostic
commands
port test
DiffServ
DSCP
DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p mapping
disable
ADSL features
carrier tones
disclaimer
Discrete Multi-Tone, See DMT
DMT
dot1x commands
Dot3 MIB (RFC 2665)
Dot3ad
dot3ad commands
double upstream
double upstream mode
double-tagged frames
down-shift noise margin
downstream
carrier tones
rates
transmit power
DSCP
DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p mapping
dscp Commands
DSL profile
Dual End Loop Test, See DELT
duplex
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, See DHCP
dynamic link aggregation
dynamic query VID
dynamic VLAN
628
MSC1000G User’s Guide
E
EAP
EAPoL
filter
edge
electrical Ethernet interface
EPL
error log
errored seconds
ES
Estimated Power Loss, See EPL
Ethernet port statistics
trunking
Ethernet port setup
bandwidth
broadcast
IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1Q
Ethernet ports
explicit tagging
Extensible Authentication Protocol, See EAP.
F
F5
F5 loopback
facility
factory defaults
failed fast retrain
fan
fast mode
fast rate
FCC interference statement
features
file upload
filename conventions
filter
ARP
DHCP
EAPoL
IGMP
MAC
NetBIOS
PPPoE
filtering
VLAN ingress
firmware recovery
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Index upgrade
upload to line card
fix
fixed mode
fixed registration
flow control
back pressure
IEEE 802.3x
forbid
forbidden registration
force version
forwarding delay
tagged frames
untagged frames
frame number
frequency band plan
front panel
FTP
to cluster member
G
G.991.2
G.992.1
G.992.3
G.lite rate limit
GARP
GARP timer
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol, See GVRP.
garptimer commands
general IP commands
general system setup
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol, See GARP.
Get
GetNext
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet interface
management
Gigabit Ethernet port setup
bandwidth
broadcast
IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1Q
Gigabit interface interface 3
interface 4
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time, See GMT
629
Index
GVRP
gvrp commands
H
hello time
help facility
high privilege
hops
host name
HTTP
Internet Protocol
introduction
IP
IP address
IP address spoofing
IP bridge
ARP proxy commands
domain commands
PVC commands
ip commands
IP multicast addresses
IP setup
IP statistics
ISDN
isolation
commands
I
ICMP
IEEE 802.1p priority
IEEE 802.1Q
terminology
IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN
IEEE 802.1x
IEEE 802.3
IEEE 802.3ad
IEEE 802.3x
ies5000 MIB
ifXTable MIB (RFC 2863)
IGMP
count
filter
filter profile
filter setup
proxy
query VLAN ID
setup
snooping
status
v2
v3
igmpcount commands
implicit tagging
impulse noise protection
in-band management
info show command
ingress filtering
initial setup example
initialization failure
interleave delay
interleave rate
Internet Group Multicast Protocol, See IGMP.
J
join timer
L
LACP
aggregation ID
system priority
latch
latency mode
lcman commands
LDM
test
leave all timer
leave timer
LEDs
level of access privileges
limit MAC addresses
line diagnostics
performance
performance counters
probing
line card
firmware upload
statistics
status
line detail
Link Aggregate Control Protocol, See LACP.
link aggregation
630
MSC1000G User’s Guide
dynamic
ID
ID information
LLC
LNK LED
lockout
LOF
log
log facility
login
logout
LOL
Loop Diagnostic Mode, See LDM
loop diagnostics
loopback
LOS
Loss Of Frame, See LOF
Loss Of Link, See LOL.
Loss of Power, See LPR.
Loss Of Signal, See LOS.
loss of sync word seconds
low privilege
LPR
M
MAC
address
count
count filter
filter
table
MAC count
maccount command
machine address
maintenance
major alarm
Management Information Base, See MIB.
management VLAN
managing the device good habits
using Telnet. See command interface.
using the command interface. See command interface.
mask carrier tones
max age
hops
Maximum Burst Size, See MBS.
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Index
MBS
Media Access Control, See MAC.
memory
MGMT
MGMT LEDs
MIB
middle privilege
mini GBIC ports
connection speed
connector type
minimum impulse noise protection
minor alarm
mpair4
MSA (MultiSource Agreement)
MST ID
MST Instance, See MSTI.
MST region
MSTI
MSTP
bridge setup
CIST statistics
MSTI statistics
path cost
port setup
setup
statistics
MTU
multicast
bandwidth commands
bandwidth port commands
commands
igmp commands
igmpcount commands
igmpfilter commands
IP address
mvlan commands
smcast commands
Multicast VLAN, See MVLAN
multiple login
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, See MSTP.
Multiple STP, See MSTP
Multi-Tenant Unit, See MTU.
MVLAN
N
navigation panel
negotiated noise margin mode
NetBIOS
filter
631
Index
Network Basic Input/Output System, See NetBIOS
Network Time Protocol, See NTP
noise
159, 176, 207, 208, 210, 213, 430, 478, 499
non real-time Variable Bit Rate
nonvolatile memory
normal registration
nrt-VBR
NTP
n-wire mode
O
OAMF5
OAMF5 loopback
online users
operational mode
Operational, Administration and Maintenance
Function 5 test, See OAMF5.
option 82 enable command
option mask
Organizationally Unique Identifier, See OUI
OSPF
OUI
filter
out-of-band management
P
P2P
packet counter
filter
PAE
path cost
PCR
Peak Cell Rate, See PCR.
Permanent Virtual Circuit, See PVC.
permanent VLAN
physical machine address
physical queues
ping
pktfilter commands
PMM
PMMS
PNAC
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, See PPPoE.
policy
port
adsl commands
ADSL setup
alarm setup
commands
copy
ID
number
ppvc commands
pvc commands
redundancy
shdsl commands
states
statistics
trunking
VID
VLAN trunking
port-based authentication
Port-based Network Access Control, See PNAC.
POTS
power
power backoff
power management mode
Power Management, See PMM
Power Measurement Modulation Session, See PMMS
power mode
Power Spectral Density, See PSD
PPPoA-to-PPPoE PVC
PPPoE
agent information
filter
intermediate agent information
PPVC
setup
ppvc commands
priority
Priority-based PVC, See PPVC
private MIB
privilege levels
product model
product registration
profile
acl commands
ADSL
ADSL alarm
adsl commands
alarm
alarm ADSL
alarm SHDSL
632
MSC1000G User’s Guide
alarm VDSL
alarmadsl commands
alarmshdsl commands
alarmvdsl commands
ATM
atm commands
commands
DSL
profsvr commands
server
SHDSL
SHDSL alarm
shdsl commands
span alarm
Stuc alarm
Stur alarm
VDSL alarm
proxy
PSD
PVC
setup
pvc commands
Q
Q-in-Q
QoS
qschedule commands
Quality of Service, See QoS
query
VID
VLAN ID
queue physical
priority
weight
queuemap commands
queuing
algorithm
quiet line noise
R
Radio Frequency Interference, See RFI.
RADIUS
server
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, See RSTP.
Rapid STP, See RSTP.
rate
rate adaptation
MSC1000G User’s Guide
Index rate mode
rates
configured versus actual
reach extended ADSL2
real-time Variable Bit Rate
reboot
receive power
recovering firmware
redundancy
Reed Solomon
region setting
registration fixed
forbidden
normal
product
related documentation
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, See
RADIUS.
removing a transceiver
reset
resetting the defaults
revision level
RFC 1213
RFC 1305
RFC 1573
RFC 1757
RFC 2131
RFC 2132
RFC 2138
RFC 2139
RFC 2486
RFC 2662
RFC 2665
RFC 2674
RFC 2863
RFC 3046
RFC 3440
RFC 3635
RFC 3636
RFC 867
RFC 868
RFI
RIP
RMON history details
history statistics
MIB (RFC 1757)
MIBs
statistics
Rotations Per Minute, See RPM
633
Index
round robin scheduling
routing protocols
RPM
RSTP
path cost
port states
rt-VBR
run time memory
S
S=0.5 support
safety warnings
saving configuration
SCR
screen summary
secured client
security
SELT
sensor
Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier, See SP TPID.
Service Provider’s Network, See SPN
Set
severely errored seconds
severity assignment
SFP Slot 1
SFP slot 2
SFP slots
SFTP
shared secret
SHDSL advanced port setup
alarm profile
line probing
port setup
profile
rate
rates
shielded Ethernet cable
shift noise margin
show commands
signal to noise margin
Signal to Noise Ratio, See SNR.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio Margin
Simple Network Management Protocol, See SNMP
Single End Loop Test, See SELT
slot
ID
SNMP
MIB II (RFC 1213)
snmp commands
SNR
SP TPID
span alarm profile
Spanning Tree Protocol, See STP.
specifications
speed
SPN
spoof
SPQ
SRA mode
SSH
standby ports
static multicast
group
Static Multicast Group
static query VID
statistics
15Min line performance
1day line performance
ARP table
cell counter
detailed Ethernet port
DHCP
Dot3ad
Ethernet port
IGMP port statistics
IGMP status
IP
line card
line detail
line performance
MAC table
MSTP
MSTP CIST
MSTP CIST port details
MSTP MSTI
online users
packet counter
port
RMON
RMON history
RMON history details
VLAN
VLAN port
status line card
STP
designated ports
force version
forwarding delay
hello time
634
MSC1000G User’s Guide
max age
max hops
path cost
port states
root ports
Strict Priority Queuing, See SPQ.
Stuc alarm profile
Stur alarm profile
subnet mask
subtending mode
subtending port 1
subtending port 2
subtending ports
summary of commands
Sustained Cell Rate, See SCR.
switch bandwidth commands
switch bcasctrl commands
switch commands
switch dot3ad commands
switch garptimer commands
switch isolation commands
switch lockout
switch mstp commands
switch port commands
switch port mstp commands
switch port setup
bandwidth
broadcast
IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1Q
switch port vlantrunk commands
switch qschedule commands
switch queuemap commands
switch setup
Dot3ad
general
isolation
queuing
syntax conventions
sys commands
sys snmp commands
sys syslog commands
sys user commands
syslog
server
setup
syslog commands
system date
error log
location
name
reboot
MSC1000G User’s Guide time
system information
T
tag
control
Tag Control Information. See TCI.
Tag Protocol Identifier, See TPID.
tagged
frames
VLAN
tagged VLAN terminology
TAT
TCI
TCP port number
Telnet
temperature
terminal emulation
Theoretical Arrival Time, See TAT.
time
server
TLS
tones
TPID
traceroute
trademarks
traffic classes
parameters
shaping
transceiver installation
transceiver removal
transmit power
windowing
Transparent LAN Service, See TLS.
Trap
trap server
Trellis
trunking
U
UBR
UDP port number
unavailable seconds
Index
635
Index
Universal Time Coordinated, See UTC
Unspecified Bit Rate, See UBR.
untag
untagged
frames
untagged frames
UPBO
upgrading firmware
uplink mode
uplink port 1
uplink port 2
up-shift noise margin
upstream
carrier tones
rates
transmit power
Upstream Power Back Off, See UPBO.
user account
authentication
user commands
user priority
VLAN
UTC
636
V
Variable Bit Rate, See VBR.
VBR
nrt
rt
VC Mux
VCI
VDSL alarm profile
interleave delay
latency mode
rate
upstream rate
VDSL port setup
advanced
frequency band plan
VID
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
Virtual Channel Indicator, See VCI.
Virtual Local Area Network, See VLAN.
Virtual Path Indicator, See VPI.
VLAN
acceptable frame type
administrative control
automatic registration
CFI
dynamic
explicit tagging
fixed registration
forbidden registration
forwarding tagged frames
forwarding untagged frames
GARP
GVRP
ID
IEEE 802.1Q terminology
IGMP
implicit tagging
ingress filtering
normal registration
number of possible VIDs
permanent
port
port statistics
priority frame
registration fixed
registration forbidden
registration normal
setup
stacking
statistics
tag control
tagged
tagged frames
TCI
TPID
trunking
untagged
untagged frames
vlan commands
vlantrunk commands
volatile memory
voltage
VPI
VT100
W
warranty
note
web configurator login
logout
navigation panel
save configuration
screen summary
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling, See WRR.
WRR
MSC1000G User’s Guide
X
XMODEM upload
Z
ZyNOS
ZyXEL Network Operating System, See ZyNOS
Index
MSC1000G User’s Guide
637
Index
638
MSC1000G User’s Guide
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement